Instruction Manual 369man

g
GE Power Management
369 Motor Management Relay

Instruction Manual
369 Revision: 53CMB18x.000

Manual P/N: 1601-0077-BC (GEK-106288)
Copyright © 2001 GE Power Management
GE Power Management
215 Anderson Avenue, Markham, Ontario,
EG
R
IS T E RE
Canada L6E 1B3
Tel: (905) 294-6222, 1-800-547-8629 (North America) Manufactured under an
ISO9001 Registered system.
Fax: (905) 201-2098
Internet: http://www.GEindustrial.com/pm
TABLE OF CONTENTS
1. INTRODUCTION 1.1 ORDERING

1.1.1 GENERAL OVERVIEW...................................................................................... 1-1
1.1.2 ORDERING........................................................................................................ 1-1
1.1.3 ACCESSORIES ................................................................................................. 1-2
1.1.4 FIRMWARE HISTORY....................................................................................... 1-2
1.1.5 PC PROGRAM (SOFTWARE) HISTORY .......................................................... 1-2
1.1.6 369 FUNCTIONAL SUMMARY .......................................................................... 1-3
1.1.7 RELAY LABEL DEFINITION .............................................................................. 1-4
2. PRODUCT DESCRIPTION 2.1 OVERVIEW

2.1.1 GUIDEFORM SPECIFICATIONS ...................................................................... 2-1
2.1.2 METERED QUANTITIES ................................................................................... 2-1
2.1.3 PROTECTION FEATURES ............................................................................... 2-2
2.1.4 ADDITIONAL FEATURES ................................................................................. 2-3
2.2 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
2.2.1 INPUTS .............................................................................................................. 2-4
2.2.2 OUTPUTS .......................................................................................................... 2-5
2.2.3 METERING ........................................................................................................ 2-5
2.2.4 COMMUNICATIONS.......................................................................................... 2-5
2.2.5 PROTECTION ELEMENTS ............................................................................... 2-5
2.2.6 MONITORING ELEMENTS ............................................................................... 2-7
2.2.7 CONTROL ELEMENTS ..................................................................................... 2-7
2.2.8 ENVIRONMENTAL SPECIFICATIONS ............................................................. 2-8
2.2.9 APPROVALS / CERTIFICATION ....................................................................... 2-8
2.2.10 TYPE TEST STANDARDS ................................................................................ 2-8
2.2.11 PRODUCTION TESTS ...................................................................................... 2-8
3. INSTALLATION 3.1 MECHANICAL INSTALLATION

3.1.1 MECHANICAL INSTALLATION ......................................................................... 3-1
3.2 TERMINAL IDENTIFICATION
3.2.1 369 TERMINAL LIST ......................................................................................... 3-2
3.2.2 269 TO 369 CONVERSION TERMINAL LIST ................................................... 3-3
3.2.3 MTM-369 CONVERSION TERMINAL LIST ....................................................... 3-4
3.2.4 MPM-369 CONVERSION TERMINAL LIST....................................................... 3-4
3.2.5 TERMINAL LAYOUT.......................................................................................... 3-5
3.3 ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION
3.3.1 TYPICAL WIRING DIAGRAM ............................................................................ 3-6
3.3.2 TYPICAL WIRING .............................................................................................. 3-7
3.3.3 CONTROL POWER ........................................................................................... 3-7
3.3.4 PHASE CURRENT (CT) INPUTS ...................................................................... 3-7
3.3.5 GROUND CURRENT INPUTS .......................................................................... 3-8
3.3.6 ZERO SEQUENCE GROUND CT PLACEMENT .............................................. 3-8
3.3.7 PHASE VOLTAGE (VT/PT) INPUTS ................................................................. 3-9
3.3.8 BACKSPIN VOLTAGE INPUTS......................................................................... 3-9
3.3.9 RTD INPUTS.................................................................................................... 3-10
3.3.10 DIGITAL INPUTS ............................................................................................. 3-10
3.3.11 ANALOG OUTPUTS ........................................................................................ 3-11
3.3.12 REMOTE DISPLAY.......................................................................................... 3-11
3.3.13 OUTPUT RELAYS ........................................................................................... 3-12
3.3.14 RS485 COMMUNICATIONS............................................................................ 3-13
3.4 REMOTE RTD MODULE (RRTD)
3.4.1 MECHANICAL INSTALLATION ....................................................................... 3-14
3.4.2 ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION ........................................................................ 3-15
3.5 CT INSTALLATION
3.5.1 PHASE CT INSTALLATION............................................................................. 3-16
3.5.2 5 AMP GROUND CT INSTALLATION ............................................................. 3-17
3.5.3 HGF (50:0.025) GROUND CT INSTALLATION ............................................... 3-18
GE Power Management 369 Motor Management Relay i

TABLE OF CONTENTS
4. USER INTERFACES 4.1 FACEPLATE INTERFACE

4.1.1 DISPLAY.............................................................................................................4-1
4.1.2 LED INDICATORS..............................................................................................4-1
4.1.3 RS232 PROGRAM PORT ..................................................................................4-1
4.1.4 KEYPAD .............................................................................................................4-2
4.1.5 SETPOINT ENTRY.............................................................................................4-2
4.2 369PC INTERFACE
4.2.1 HARDWARE & SOFTWARE REQUIREMENTS ................................................4-3
4.2.2 INSTALLING 369PC ...........................................................................................4-3
4.2.3 UPGRADING 369PC ..........................................................................................4-3
4.2.4 CONFIGURATION..............................................................................................4-4
4.2.5 UPGRADING RELAY FIRMWARE.....................................................................4-4
4.2.6 CREATING A NEW SETPOINT FILE .................................................................4-5
4.2.7 EDITING A SETPOINT FILE ..............................................................................4-6
4.2.8 DOWNLOADING A SETPOINT FILE TO THE 369 ............................................4-6
4.2.9 UPGRADING SETPOINT FILE TO NEW REVISION .........................................4-7
4.2.10 CONVERTING 269 SETPOINT FILES TO 369 ..................................................4-8
4.2.11 PRINTING...........................................................................................................4-8
4.2.12 TRENDING .........................................................................................................4-9
4.2.13 WAVEFORM CAPTURE ..................................................................................4-10
4.2.14 PHASORS ........................................................................................................4-11
4.2.15 EVENT RECORDING .......................................................................................4-12
4.2.16 TROUBLESHOOTING......................................................................................4-12
5. SETPOINTS 5.1 OVERVIEW

5.1.1 SETPOINTS MAIN MENU ..................................................................................5-1
5.2 S1 369 SETUP
5.2.1 SETPOINTS PAGE 1 MENU ..............................................................................5-4
5.2.2 SETPOINT ACCESS ..........................................................................................5-4
5.2.3 DISPLAY PREFERENCES.................................................................................5-5
5.2.4 369 COMMUNICATIONS ...................................................................................5-6
5.2.5 REAL TIME CLOCK ...........................................................................................5-8
5.2.6 WAVEFORM CAPTURE ....................................................................................5-8
5.2.7 MESSAGE SCRATCHPAD ................................................................................5-9
5.2.8 DEFAULT MESSAGES ......................................................................................5-9
5.2.9 CLEAR/PRESET DATA ....................................................................................5-10
5.2.10 FACTORY SERVICE ........................................................................................5-10
5.3 S2 SYSTEM SETUP
5.3.1 SETPOINTS PAGE 2 MENU ............................................................................5-11
5.3.2 CT/VT SETUP ..................................................................................................5-11
5.3.3 MONITORING SETUP .....................................................................................5-12
a TRIP COUNTER ...................................................................................... 5-12
b STARTER FAILURE ................................................................................ 5-13
c DEMAND: ................................................................................................ 5-13
d SELF-TEST RELAY ASSIGNMENT: ....................................................... 5-15
5.3.4 OUTPUT RELAY SETUP .................................................................................5-16
5.3.5 CONTROL FUNCTIONS ..................................................................................5-17
5.3.6 REDUCED VOLTAGE START TIMER .............................................................5-17
5.3.7 AUTORESTART ...............................................................................................5-19
5.4 S3 OVERLOAD PROTECTION
5.4.1 SETPOINTS PAGE 3 MENU ............................................................................5-21
5.4.2 THERMAL MODEL ...........................................................................................5-22
5.4.3 OVERLOAD CURVES ......................................................................................5-23
a STANDARD OVERLOAD CURVE:.......................................................... 5-24
b CUSTOM OVERLOAD CURVE: .............................................................. 5-27
5.4.4 UNBALANCE BIAS...........................................................................................5-28
5.4.5 MOTOR COOLING ...........................................................................................5-29
5.4.6 HOT/COLD CURVE RATIO..............................................................................5-29
5.4.7 RTD BIAS .........................................................................................................5-30
5.4.8 OVERLOAD ALARM ........................................................................................5-31
ii 369 Motor Management Relay GE Power Management

TABLE OF CONTENTS
5.5 S4 CURRENT ELEMENTS

5.5.1 SETPOINTS PAGE 4 MENU ........................................................................... 5-32
5.5.2 SHORT CIRCUIT ............................................................................................. 5-32
5.5.3 MECHANICAL JAM ......................................................................................... 5-33
5.5.4 UNDERCURRENT........................................................................................... 5-34
5.5.5 CURRENT UNBALANCE................................................................................. 5-35
5.5.6 GROUND FAULT ............................................................................................. 5-36
5.6 S5 MOTOR START / INHIBITS
5.6.2 ACCELERATION TRIP .................................................................................... 5-38
5.6.3 START INHIBITS ............................................................................................. 5-39
5.6.4 BACKSPIN DETECTION ................................................................................. 5-40
5.7 S6 RTD TEMPERATURE
5.7.2 LOCAL RTD PROTECTION ............................................................................ 5-41
5.7.3 REMOTE RTD PROTECTION ......................................................................... 5-42
5.7.4 OPEN RTD ALARM ......................................................................................... 5-44
5.7.5 SHORT/LOW TEMP RTD ALARM................................................................... 5-45
5.7.6 LOSS OF RRTD COMMS ALARM .................................................................. 5-45
5.8 S7 VOLTAGE ELEMENTS
5.8.2 UNDERVOLTAGE ........................................................................................... 5-46
5.8.3 OVERVOLTAGE .............................................................................................. 5-47
5.8.4 PHASE REVERSAL ......................................................................................... 5-48
5.8.5 UNDERFREQUENCY ...................................................................................... 5-48
5.8.6 OVERFREQUENCY ........................................................................................ 5-49
5.9 S8 POWER ELEMENTS
5.9.2 LEAD POWER FACTOR ................................................................................. 5-51
5.9.3 LAG POWER FACTOR.................................................................................... 5-51
5.9.4 POSITIVE REACTIVE POWER ....................................................................... 5-52
5.9.5 NEGATIVE REACTIVE POWER ..................................................................... 5-53
5.9.6 UNDERPOWER ............................................................................................... 5-53
5.9.7 REVERSE POWER ......................................................................................... 5-54
5.10 S9 DIGITAL INPUTS
5.10.2 SPARE SWITCH .............................................................................................. 5-55
5.10.3 EMERGENCY RESTART ................................................................................ 5-55
5.10.4 DIFFERENTIAL SWITCH ................................................................................ 5-56
5.10.5 SPEED SWITCH .............................................................................................. 5-56
5.10.6 REMOTE RESET ............................................................................................. 5-56
5.10.7 DIGITAL INPUT FUNCTIONS ......................................................................... 5-57
a GENERAL................................................................................................ 5-57
b DIGITAL COUNTER ................................................................................ 5-57
c WAVEFORM CAPTURE.......................................................................... 5-58
d SIMULATE PRE-FAULT .......................................................................... 5-58
e SIMULATE FAULT................................................................................... 5-58
f SIMULATE PRE-FAULT to FAULT.......................................................... 5-58
5.11 S10 ANALOG OUTPUTS
5.11.1 SETPOINTS PAGE 10 MENU ......................................................................... 5-59
5.11.2 ANALOG OUTPUTS ........................................................................................ 5-59
5.11.3 ANALOG OUTPUT PARAMETER SELECTION.............................................. 5-60
5.12 S11 369 TESTING
5.12.1 SETPOINTS PAGE 11 MENU ......................................................................... 5-61
5.12.2 SIMULATION MODE ....................................................................................... 5-61
5.12.3 PRE-FAULT SETUP ........................................................................................ 5-62
5.12.4 FAULT SETUP ................................................................................................. 5-63
5.12.5 POST- FAULT SETUP..................................................................................... 5-64
5.12.6 TEST OUTPUT RELAYS ................................................................................. 5-65
5.12.7 TEST ANALOG OUTPUTS .............................................................................. 5-65
GE Power Management 369 Motor Management Relay iii

TABLE OF CONTENTS
6. ACTUAL VALUES 6.1 OVERVIEW

6.1.1 ACTUAL VALUES MAIN MENU .........................................................................6-1
6.2 A1 STATUS
6.2.1 ACTUAL VALUES PAGE 1 MENU .....................................................................6-3
6.2.2 MOTOR STATUS ...............................................................................................6-3
6.2.3 LAST TRIP DATA ...............................................................................................6-4
6.2.4 ALARM STATUS ................................................................................................6-4
6.2.5 START INHIBIT STATUS ...................................................................................6-5
6.2.6 DIGITAL INPUT STATUS ...................................................................................6-5
6.2.7 OUTPUT RELAY STATUS .................................................................................6-6
6.2.8 REAL TIME CLOCK ...........................................................................................6-6
6.3 A2 METERING DATA
6.3.1 ACTUAL VALUES PAGE 2 MENU .....................................................................6-7
6.3.2 CURRENT METERING ......................................................................................6-7
6.3.3 VOLTAGE METERING .......................................................................................6-8
6.3.4 POWER METERING ..........................................................................................6-8
6.3.5 BACKSPIN METERING......................................................................................6-9
6.3.6 LOCAL RTD........................................................................................................6-9
6.3.7 REMOTE RTD ..................................................................................................6-10
6.3.8 DEMAND METERING ......................................................................................6-11
6.3.9 PHASORS ........................................................................................................6-11
6.4 A3 LEARNED DATA
6.4.1 ACTUAL VALUES PAGE 3 MENU ...................................................................6-13
6.4.2 MOTOR DATA ..................................................................................................6-13
6.4.3 LOCAL RTD MAXIMUMS .................................................................................6-14
6.4.4 REMOTE RTD MAXIMUMS .............................................................................6-15
6.5 A4 STATISTICAL DATA
6.5.2 TRIP COUNTERS ............................................................................................6-16
6.5.3 MOTOR STATISTICS.......................................................................................6-17
6.6 A5 EVENT RECORD
6.6.2 EVENT 01 .........................................................................................................6-18
6.7 A6 RELAY INFORMATION
6.7.2 MODEL INFORMATION ...................................................................................6-19
6.7.3 FIRMWARE VERSION .....................................................................................6-19
7. APPLICATIONS 7.1 269-369 COMPARISON

7.1.1 369 AND 269PLUS COMPARISON ...................................................................7-1
7.2 369 FAQs
7.2.1 FREQUENTLY ASKED QUESTIONS (FAQs)....................................................7-2
7.3 369 DOs and DON’Ts
7.3.1 DOs and DON’Ts ................................................................................................7-5
a DOs............................................................................................................ 7-5
b DON'Ts ...................................................................................................... 7-6
7.4 CT SPECIFICATION AND SELECTION
7.4.1 CT SPECIFICATION ..........................................................................................7-7
a 369 CT WITHSTAND ................................................................................. 7-7
b CT SIZE AND SATURATION .................................................................... 7-7
7.4.2 CT SELECTION..................................................................................................7-7
7.5 PROGRAMMING EXAMPLE
7.5.1 PROGRAMMING EXAMPLE ..............................................................................7-9
7.6 APPLICATIONS
7.6.1 MOTOR STATUS DETECTION........................................................................7-13
7.6.2 SELECTION OF COOL TIME CONSTANTS....................................................7-14
7.6.3 THERMAL MODEL ...........................................................................................7-15
iv 369 Motor Management Relay GE Power Management

TABLE OF CONTENTS
7.6.4 RTD BIAS FEATURE ....................................................................................... 7-16

7.6.5 THERMAL CAPACITY USED CALCULATION ................................................ 7-17
7.6.6 START INHIBIT................................................................................................ 7-18
7.6.7 2φ CT CONFIGURATION ................................................................................ 7-20
7.6.8 GROUND FAULT DETECTION ON UNGROUNDED SYSTEMS ................... 7-21
7.6.9 RTD CIRCUITRY ............................................................................................. 7-22
7.6.10 REDUCED RTD LEAD NUMBER APPLICATION ........................................... 7-23
7.6.11 TWO WIRE RTD LEAD COMPENSATION ..................................................... 7-24
7.6.12 AUTO TRANSFORMER STARTER WIRING .................................................. 7-24
8. TESTING 8.1 TEST SETUP

8.1.1 INTRODUCTION................................................................................................ 8-1
8.1.2 SECONDARY INJECTION TEST SETUP ......................................................... 8-1
8.2 HARDWARE FUNCTIONAL TESTING
8.2.1 PHASE CURRENT ACCURACY TEST ............................................................. 8-2
8.2.2 VOLTAGE INPUT ACCURACY TEST ............................................................... 8-2
8.2.3 GROUND (1A/5A) ACCURACY TEST............................................................... 8-3
8.2.4 50:0.025 GROUND ACCURACY TEST ............................................................. 8-3
8.2.5 RTD ACCURACY TEST .................................................................................... 8-4
8.2.6 DIGITAL INPUTS AND TRIP COIL SUPERVISION .......................................... 8-5
8.2.7 ANALOG INPUTS AND OUTPUTS ................................................................... 8-5
8.2.8 OUTPUT RELAYS ............................................................................................. 8-6
8.3 ADDITIONAL FUNCTIONAL TESTING
8.3.1 OVERLOAD CURVE TEST ............................................................................... 8-7
8.3.2 POWER MEASUREMENT TEST ...................................................................... 8-7
8.3.3 VOLTAGE PHASE REVERSAL TEST............................................................... 8-8
8.3.4 SHORT CIRCUIT TEST..................................................................................... 8-8
9. COMMISSIONING 9.1 COMMISSIONING SETPOINTS

9.1.1 SETPOINTS TABLE .......................................................................................... 9-1
10. COMMUNICATIONS 10.1 OVERVIEW

10.1.1 ELECTRICAL INTERFACE.............................................................................. 10-1
10.1.2 PROFIBUS COMMUNICATIONS .................................................................... 10-1
10.1.3 MODBUS COMMUNICATIONS ....................................................................... 10-1
10.2 PROFIBUS PROTOCOL
10.2.1 369MMR-DP PARAMETERIZATOIN ............................................................... 10-2
10.2.2 369MMR-DP CONFIGURATION ..................................................................... 10-2
10.2.3 369MMR-DP DIAGNOSTICS........................................................................... 10-5
10.3 MODBUS RTU PROTOCOL
10.3.1 DATA FRAME FORMAT AND DATA RATE .................................................... 10-8
10.3.2 DATA PACKET FORMAT ................................................................................ 10-8
10.3.3 ERROR CHECKING ........................................................................................ 10-8
10.3.4 CRC-16 ALGORITHM ...................................................................................... 10-9
10.3.5 TIMING............................................................................................................. 10-9
10.3.6 SUPPORTED MODBUS FUNCTIONS ............................................................ 10-9
10.3.7 ERROR RESPONSES................................................................................... 10-10
10.4 MEMORY MAP
10.4.1 MEMORY MAP INFORMATION .................................................................... 10-11
10.4.2 USER DEFINABLE MEMORY MAP AREA ................................................... 10-11
10.4.3 EVENT RECORDER...................................................................................... 10-11
10.4.4 WAVEFORM CAPTURE................................................................................ 10-11
10.4.5 MODBUS MEMORY MAP ............................................................................. 10-12
10.4.6 FORMAT CODES .......................................................................................... 10-64
GE Power Management 369 Motor Management Relay v

TABLE OF CONTENTS
A. REVISIONS A.1 CHANGE NOTES

A.1.1 REVISION HISTORY ............................................................. A-1
A.1.2 MAJOR UPDATES FOR 369-BC ...........................................A-1
A.1.3 MAJOR UPDATES FOR 369-BB ...........................................A-1
A.1.4 MAJOR UPDATES FOR 369-BA ...........................................A-1
A.1.5 MAJOR UPDATES FOR 369-B9............................................ A-2
A.2 WARRANTY
A.2.1 WARRANTY INFORMATION................................................. A-3
INDEX
vi 369 Motor Management Relay GE Power Management

1 INTRODUCTION 1.1 ORDERING
1 INTRODUCTION 1.1 ORDERING 1.1.1 GENERAL OVERVIEW
The 369 Motor Management Relay is a digital relay that provides protection and monitoring for three phase motors and
1
their associated mechanical systems. A unique feature of the 369 is its ability to ‘learn’ individual motor parameters and to
adapt itself to each application. Values such as motor inrush current, cooling rates and acceleration time may be used to
improve the 369’s protective capabilities.
The 369 offers optimum motor protection where other relays cannot, by using the FlexCurve™ custom overload curve, or
one of the fifteen standard curves.
The 369 has one RS232 front panel port and three RS485 rear ports. The Modbus RTU protocol is standard to all ports.
Setpoints can be entered via the front keypad or by using the 369PC software and a computer. Status, actual values and
troubleshooting information are also available via the front panel display or via communications. A simulation mode and
pickup indicator allow testing and verification of correct operation without requiring a relay test set.
As an option, the 369 can individually monitor up to 12 RTDs. These can be from the stator, bearings, ambient or driven
equipment. The type of RTD used is software selectable. Optionally available as an accessory is the remote RTD module
which can be linked to the 369 via a fibre optic or RS485 connection.
The optional metering package provides VT inputs for voltage and power elements. It also provides metering of V, kW, kvar,
kVA, PF, Hz, and MWhrs. Three additional user configurable analog outputs are included with this option along with one
analog output included as part of the base unit.
The Back-Spin Detection (B) option enables the 369 to detect the flow reversal of a pump motor and enable timely and safe
motor restarting. 369 options are available when ordering the relay or as upgrades to the relay in the field. Field upgrades
are via an option enabling passcode available from GE Power Management, which is unique to each relay and option.
1.1.2 ORDERING
Select the basic model and the desired features from the selection guide below:
369 S S S S S
369 | | | | | Base unit (no RTD)
HI | | | | 50-300 VDC / 40-265 VAC control power
LO | | | | 20-60 VDC / 20-48 VAC control power
R | | | Optional 12 RTD inputs (built-in)
0 | | | No optional RTD inputs
M | | Optional metering package
B | | Optional backspin detection (incl. metering)
0 | | No optional metering or backspin detection
F | Optional Fiber Optic Port
0 | No optional Fiber Optic Port
E Optional Modbus/TCP protocol interface
P Optional Profibus protocol interface
0 No optional Profibus protocol interface
Notes: One Analog Output is now available with the 369 base model. The other three Analog Outputs can
be obtained by purchasing the metering or backspin options.
The control power (HI or LO) must be specified with all orders. If a feature is not required, a 0 must be
placed in the order code. All order codes have 9 digits. The 369 is available in a non-drawout version only.
Examples: 369-HI-R-0-0-0 369 with HI voltage control power and 12 RTD inputs
369-LO-0-M-0-0 369 relay with LO voltage control power and metering option
Location: GE Power Management
215 Anderson Avenue
Markham, Ontario
Canada L6E 1B3
Tel: (905) 294-6222, 1-800-547-8629 (North America)
Fax: (905) 201-2098
Web Page: http://www.GEindustrial.com/pm; e-mail: info.pm@indsys.ge.com
GE Power Management 369 Motor Management Relay 1-1

1.1 ORDERING 1 INTRODUCTION
1.1.3 ACCESSORIES
1 369PC software: Setup and monitoring software provided free with each relay.
RRTD: Remote RTD Module. Connects to the 369 via a fibre optic or RS485 connection. Allows remote meter-
ing and programming for up to 12 RTDs. Complete with connecting fiber optic cable.
F485: Converts communications between RS232 and RS485 / fibre optic. Used to interface a computer to
the relay.
CT: 50, 75, 100, 150, 200, 300, 350, 400, 500, 600, 750, 1000 (1A or 5A secondaries)
HGF: Ground CTs (50:0.025) used for sensitive earth fault detection on high resistance grounded systems.
515: Blocking and test module. Provides effective trip blocking and relay isolation.
DEMO: Metal carry case in which 369 is mounted.
FPC15: Remote faceplate cable, 15'.
1.1.4 FIRMWARE HISTORY
FIRMWARE REVISION BRIEF DESCRIPTION OF CHANGE RELEASE DATE

53CMB110.000 Production Release June 14, 1999
53CMB111.000 Changes to Backspin Detection algorithm June 24, 1999
53CMB112.000 Changes to Backspin Detection algorithm July 2, 1999
53CMB120.000 Capability to work with the Remote RTD module October 15, 1999
53CMB130.000 Improvements to the Remote RTD communications January 3, 2000
53CMB140.000 Changes to Backspin Detection algorithm and improved RS232 communications March 27, 2000
53CMB145.000 Minor firmware changes June 9, 2000
53CMB160.000 Profibus protocol, waveform capture, phasor display, single analog output, October 12, 2000
demand power and current, power consumption
53CMB161.000 Minor firmware changes October 19, 2000
53CMB162.000 Minor firmware changes November 30, 2000
53CMB170.000 Autorestart feature added February 9, 2001
53CMB180.000 Modbus/TCP feature added June 15, 2001
1.1.5 PC PROGRAM (SOFTWARE) HISTORY
PC PROGRAM BRIEF DESCRIPTION OF CHANGES RELEASE DATE

REVISION
1.10 Production Release June 14, 1999
1.20 Capability to work with the Remote RTD module October 15, 1999
1.30 Capability to communicate effectively with version 1.30 firmware January 3, 2000
1.40 Changes made for new firmware release March 27, 2000
1.45 Changes made for new firmware release June 9, 2000
1.60 Profibus protocol, waveform capture, phasor display, single analog output, October 23, 2000
demand power and current, power consumption
1.70 Changes made for new firmware release February 9, 2001
1.80 Changes made for new firmware release June 7, 2001
1-2 369 Motor Management Relay GE Power Management

1 INTRODUCTION 1.1 ORDERING
1.1.6 369 FUNCTIONAL SUMMARY
1
DISPLAY
40 Character alpha-numeric
LCD display for viewing
actual values, causes
of alarms and trips, and
programming setpoints
STATUS INDICATORS STATUS INDICATORS

4 LEDs indicate when an
output is activated. When LEDs indicate if motor is
an LED is lit, the cause of backspinning, RRTD is
the output relay operation connected, metering is
will be shown on the display. enabled and com. status
SERVICE LED indicates that a
self-diagnostic test failed.
Rugged, corrosion and

flame retardent case.
HELP KEY
Help key can be pressed at
any time to provide additional
information
KEYPAD
Used to select the display
of actual values, causes of
alarms, causes of trips, fault
diagnosis, and to program
setpoints
COMPUTER INTERFACE
RS232 comm port for con-
necting to a PC. Use for
downloading setpoints,
monitoring, data collection &
printing reports.
4 OUTPUT RELAYS CONTROL POWER

Programmable alarm and trip HI: 50-300 VDC/40-265 VAC
conditions activated by LO: 20-60 VDC / 20-48 VAC
programmable setpoints,
switch input, remote
communication control
Customer Accessible
Fuse
DIGITAL INPUTS
12 RTD INPUTS ( R )
Field selectable type
PROFIBUS PORT (P)
MODBUS/TCP PORT ( E )
3 x RS485 Ports
3 Independent modbus
channels
1 ANALOG OUTPUT ( Base Unit )

3 ANALOG OUTPUTS (M, B)
FIBER OPTIC DATA LINK ( F )

BACKSPIN DETECTION ( B ) For harsh enviroments and or
0-480V RMS hook up to RRTD
CURRENT INPUTS
3 Phase and ground CT inputs
5A, 1A, taps
VOLTAGE INPUTS ( M )
GROUND CT INPUTS 0-240V wye or delta VT
5A, 1A and 50:0.25 taps connections.
840702BF.CDR
Figure 1–1: FRONT AND REAR VIEW

1.1 ORDERING 1 INTRODUCTION
1.1.7 RELAY LABEL DEFINITION
1
1 2 3 4 5 6
g
MAXIMUM CONTACT RATING
CE
250 VAC 8A RESISTIVE
1/4 HP 125 VAC 1/2 HP 250 VAC
UL
MODEL: 369-HI-R-B-F-P OPTIONS

SERIAL No: M53B01001056 12 RTDs:
FIRMWARE: 53CMB180.000 BACKSPIN
INPUT POWER: FIBER OPTIC PORT
50-300 VDC
40-265 VAC PROFIBUS
485mA MAX.
50/60Hz or DC
MOD:
POLLUTION DEGREE: 2 IP CODE: 50X INSULATIVE VOLTAGE: 2
OVERVOLTAGE CATAGORY: II NONE
7 8 9 10 11 12
840350A7.CDR
1. The 369 order code at the time of leaving the factory.

2. The serial number of the 369.
3. The firmware installed in the 369 at the factory. Note that this may no longer be the currently installed firmware as it
may upgraded in the field. The current firmware revision may be checked in the Actual Values section of the 369.
4. Specifications for the output relay contacts.
5. Certifications the 369 conforms with or has been approved to.
6. Factory installed options. These are based on the order code. Note that the 369 may have had options upgraded in the
field. The Actual Values section of the 369 may be checked to verify this.
7. Control power ratings for the 369 as ordered. Based on the HI/LO rating from the order code.
8. Pollution degree.
9. Overvoltage Category.
10. IP code.
11. Modification number for any factory ordered mods. Note that the 369 may have had modifications added in the field.
The Actual Values section of the 369 may be checked to verify this.
12. Insulative voltage rating.

2 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION 2.1 OVERVIEW
2 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION 2.1 OVERVIEW 2.1.1 GUIDEFORM SPECIFICATIONS
Motor protection and management shall be provided by a digital relay. Protective functions shall include:
• phase overload standard curves (51) • starts per hour and time between starts
• overload by custom programmable curve (51) • short circuit (50)
• I2t modeling (49) • ground fault (50G/50N 51G/51N)
• current unbalance / single phase detection (46) • mechanical jam / stall 2
Optional functions shall include:
• under / overvoltage (27/59) • power factor (55)
• phase reversal (47) • stator / bearing overtemperature with twelve (12) inde-
pendent RTD inputs (49/38)
• underpower (37)
• backspin detection
Management functions shall include:
• statistical data • a keypad with 40 character display
• pre-trip data (last 40 events) • flash memory
• ability to learn, display and integrate critical parame-
ters to maximize motor protection
The relay shall be capable of displaying important metering functions, including phase voltages, kilowatts, kvars, power fac-
tor, frequency and MWhr. In addition, undervoltage and low power factor alarm and trip levels shall be field programmable.
The communications interface shall include one front RS232 port and three independent rear RS485 ports with supporting
PC software, thus allowing easy setpoint programming, local retrieval of information and flexibility in communication with
SCADA and engineering workstations.
2.1.2 METERED QUANTITIES
METERED QUANTITY UNITS OPTION

Phase Currents and Current Demand Amps
Motor Load × FLA
Unbalance Current %
Ground Current Amps
Input Switch Status Open / Closed
Relay Output Status (De) Energized
RTD Temperature °C or °F R
Backspin Frequency Hz B
Phase/Line Voltages Volts M
Frequency Hz M
Power Factor lead / lag M
Real Power and Real Power Demand Watts M
Reactive Power and Reactive Power Demand Vars M
Apparent Power and Apparent Power Demand VA M
Real Power Consumption kWhrs M
Reactive Power Consumption/Generation ±kvarhrs M

2.1 OVERVIEW 2 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION
2.1.3 PROTECTION FEATURES
ANSI/IEEE PROTECTION FEATURES OPTION TRIP ALARM BLOCK

DEVICE START
14 Speed Switch •
27 Undervoltage M • • •
• •
2 37
38
Undercurrent / Underpower
Bearing RTD
/M
R or RRTD • •
46 Current Unbalance • •
47 Voltage Phase Reversal M •
49 Stator RTD R or RRTD • •
50 Short Circuit & Backup •
50G/51G Ground Fault & Ground Fault Backup • •
51 Overload • • •
55 Power Factor M • •
59 Overvoltage M • •
66 Starts per Hour/Time Between Starts •
74 Alarm •
81 Over/Under Frequency M • •
86 Lockout •
87 Differential Switch •
General Switch • •
Reactive Power M • •
Thermal Capacity •
Start Inhibit (thermal capacity available) •
Restart Block (Backspin Timer) •
Mechanical Jam • •
Acceleration Timer •
Ambient RTD R or RRTD • •
Short/Low temp RTD R or RRTD •
Broken/Open RTD R or RRTD •
Loss of RRTD Communications RRTD •
Trip Counter •
Self Test/Service •
Backspin Detection B •
Current Demand •
kW Demand M •
kvar Demand M •
kVA Demand M •
Starter Failure •
Reverse Power M •

2 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION 2.1 OVERVIEW
2.1.4 ADDITIONAL FEATURES
FEATURE OPTION FEATURE OPTION

Modbus RTU Communications Protocol Modbus RTU Communications Protocol
Profibus DP rear communication port P Profibus DP rear communication port P
User Definable Baud Rate (1200-19200) User Definable Baud Rate (1200-19200)
Flash Memory for easy firmware updates Flash Memory for easy firmware updates 2
Front RS232 communication port Front RS232 communication port
Rear RS485 communication port Rear RS485 communication port
Rear fiber optic port F Rear fiber optic port F
RTD type is user definable R or RRTD RTD type is user definable R or RRTD
4 User Definable Analog Outputs M 4 User Definable Analog Outputs (0 to 1 M
(0 to 1 mA, 0 to 20 mA, 4 to 20 mA) mA, 0 to 20 mA, 4 to 20 mA)
Windows based PC program for setting up Windows based PC program for setting up
and monitoring and monitoring
BACKUP
52 50 50G
OPTIONAL METERING (M)
BUS METERING
V, W, Var, VA, PF, Hz 55 4 ISOLATED
V V ANALOG
OUTPUTS
27 47 59
BREAKER
OR FUSED
CONTACTOR
74
METERING
3 50 51 37 66 46 A, Celsius
AMBIENT AIR START
51G 50G
SPEED DEVICE
14 14
INPUTS 86
RTDs
RS232
DIFFERENTIAL
87 87 RS485
RELAY CONTACTS
RS485
RS485
BEARING
STATOR 49 38
AMBIENT
STATOR
BEARING
AMBIENT
840701B1.CDR
Figure 2–1: SINGLE LINE DIAGRAM

2.2 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS 2 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION
2.2 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONSSpecifications are subject to change without notice.
2.2.1 INPUTS
CONTROL POWER GROUND CT BURDEN

LO range: DC: 20 to 60 V DC GROUND CT INPUT (A) BURDEN
AC: 20 to 48 V AC at 50/60 Hz
VA (Ω)
2 HI range: DC: 50 to 300 V DC
AC: 40 to 265 V AC at 50/60 Hz
1A 1 0.04 0.036
Power: nominal: 20 VA; maximum: 65 VA 5 0.78 0.031
Holdup: non-failsafe trip: 200 ms; failsafe trip: 100 ms 20 6.79 0.017
5A 5 0.07 0.003
FUSE
T 3.15 A H 250 V (5 × 20 mm) 25 1.72 0.003
Timelag high breaking capacity 100 25 0.003
50:0.025 0.025 0.24 384
PHASE CURRENT INPUTS (CT)
CT input (rated): 1 A and 5 A secondary 0.1 2.61 261
CT primary: 1 to 5000 A 0.5 37.5 150
Range: 0.05 to 20 x CT primary Amps GROUND CT CURRENT WITHSTAND
Full Scale: 20 x CT primary Amps or 65535 A maximum
GROUND CT WITHSTAND TIME
Frequency: 50/60 Hz
1s 2s continuous
Conversion: True RMS, 1.04 ms/sample
1A 100 × CT 40 × CT 3 × CT
Accuracy: at ≤ 2 x CT: ±0.5% of 2 x CT
at > 2 x CT: ±1.0% of 20 x CT 5A 100 × CT 40 × CT 3 × CT
50:0.025 10 A 5A 150 mA
PHASE CT BURDEN
PHASE CT INPUT (A) BURDEN PHASE/LINE VOLTAGE INPUT (VT) (Option M)
VA (Ω) VT ratio: 1.00 to 240.00:1 in steps of 0.01
1A 1 0.03 0.03 VT Secondary: 240 V AC (full scale)
Range: 0.05 to 1.00 × full scale
5 0.64 0.03
Frequency: 50/60 Hz
20 11.7 0.03
Conversion: True RMS 1.04 ms/sample
5A 5 0.07 0.003
Accuracy: ±1.0% of full scale
25 1.71 0.003
Burden: >200 kΩ
100 31 0.003
Max. Continuous: 280 V AC
PHASE CT CURRENT WITHSTAND BSD INPUTS (Option B)
PHASE CT WITHSTAND TIME Frequency: 1 to 120 Hz
1s 2s continuous Dynamic BSD range: 20 mV to 480 V RMS
1A 100 × CT 40 × CT 3 × CT Accuracy: ±0.02 Hz
5A 100 × CT 40 × CT 3 × CT Burden: >200 kΩ
RTD INPUTS (Option R)
DIGITAL / SWITCH INPUTS
Wire Type: 3 wire
Inputs: 6 optically isolated
Sensor Type: 100 Ω platinum (DIN 43760), 100 Ω nickel,
Input type: Dry Contact (< 800 Ω)
120 Ω nickel, 10 Ω copper
Function: Programmable
RTD sensing current: 3 mA
GROUND CURRENT INPUT (GF CT) Range: –40 to 200°C or –40 to 392°F
CT Input (rated): 1 A/5 A secondary and 50:0.025 Accuracy: ±2°C or ±4°F
CT Primary: 1 to 5000 A (1 A/5 A) Lead Resistance: 25 Ω max. for Pt and Ni type;
Range: 0.1 to 1.0 × CT primary (1 A/5 A) 3 Ω max. for Cu type
0.05 to 16.0 A (50:0.025) Isolation: 36 Vpk
Full Scale: 1.0 × CT primary (1 A/5 A)
25 A (50:0.025)
Frequency: 50/60 Hz
Conversion: True RMS 1.04ms/sample
Accuracy: ±1.0% of full scale (1 A/5 A)
±0.07 A at <1 A (50:0.025)
±0.20 A at <16 A (50:0.025)

2 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION 2.2 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
2.2.2 OUTPUTS
ANALOG OUTPUTS (Option M) OUTPUT RELAYS

PROGRAMMABLE RESISTIVE LOAD INDUCTIVE LOAD
(pf = 1) (pf = 0.4)(L/R - 7ms)
OUTPUT 0 to 1 mA 0 to 20 mA 4 to 20 mA
RATED LOAD 8 A @ 250 V AC 3.5 A @ 250 V AC
MAX LOAD 2400 Ω 600 Ω 600 Ω 8 A @ 30 V DC 3.5 A @ 30 V DC
MAX OUTPUT 1.01 mA 20.2 mA 20.2 mA CARRY CURRENT 8A 2
Accuracy: ±1% of full scale MAX SWITCHING 2000 VA 875 VA
CAPACITY 240 W 170 W
Isolation: 50 V isolated active source
MAX SWITCHING V 380 V AC 125 V DC
MAX SWITCHING I 8A 3.5 A
OPERATE TIME <10 ms (5 ms typical)
CONTACT MATERIAL silver alloy
2.2.3 METERING
POWER METERING (OPTION M) EVENT RECORD

Capacity: last 40 events
PARAMETER ACCURACY RESOLUTION RANGE
(FULL SCALE) Triggers: trip, inhibit, power fail, alarms, self test,
waveform capture
kW ±2% 1 kW 0 to 65535
kvar ±2% 1 kvar ±32000 WAVEFORM CAPTURE
kVA ±2% 1 kVA 0 to 65535 Length: 3 buffers containing 16 cycles of all current
and voltage channels
kWh ±2% 0.001 MWh 0 to 65535
Trigger Position: 1 to 100% pre-trip to post-trip
±kvarh ±2% 0.001 Mvarh ±32000
Trigger: trip, manually via communications or digital
Power Factor ±1% 0.01 ±0.00 to 1.00 input
Frequency ±0.02 Hz 0.01 Hz 20.00 to 300.00
kW Demand ±2% 1 kW 0 to 65535
kvar Demand ±2% 1 kvar ±32000
kVA Demand ±2% 1 kVA 0 to 65535
Amp Demand ±2% 1A 0 to 65535
2.2.4 COMMUNICATIONS
FRONT PORT FIBER OPTIC PORT (Option F)

Type: RS232, non-isolated Optional Use: RTD remote module hookup
Baud Rate: 1200 to 19200 Baud Rate: 1200 to 19200
Protocol: Modbus® RTU Protocol: Modbus® RTU
BACK PORTS (3) Fiber Sizes: 50/125, 62.5/125, 100/140, and 200 µm
Type: RS485 PROFIBUS PORT (Option P)
Baud Rate: 1200 to 19200 Type: RS485
Protocol: Modbus® RTU Baud Rate: 1200 baud to 12 Mbaud
36V Isolation (together) Protocol: Profibus DP
2.2.5 PROTECTION ELEMENTS
51 OVERLOAD/STALL/THERMAL MODEL THERMAL CAPACITY ALARM

Curve Shape: 1 to 15 standard, custom Pickup Level: 1 to 100% TC in steps of 1
Curve Biasing: unbalance, temperature, hot/cold ratio, Pickup Accuracy: ±2%
cool time constants Dropout Level: 96 to 98% of pickup
Pickup Level: 1.01 to 1.25 × FLA Timing Accuracy: ±100 ms
Pickup Accuracy: as per phase current inputs
Dropout Level: 96 to 98% of pickup
Timing Accuracy: ±100 ms or ±2% of total trip time

OVERLOAD ALARM OPEN RTD ALARM

Pickup Level: 1.01 to 1.50 × FLA in steps of 0.01 Pickup Level: detection of an open RTD
Pickup Accuracy: as per phase current inputs Pickup Accuracy: >1000 Ω
Dropout Level: 96 to 98% of pickup Dropout Level: 96 to 98% of pickup
Time Delay: 0.1 to 60.0 s in steps of 0.1 Time Delay: <5 s
Timing Accuracy: ±100 ms or ±2% of total trip time SHORT/LOW TEMP RTD ALARM
50 SHORT CIRCUIT Pickup Level: <–40°C or –40°F
2 Pickup Level:
Pickup Accuracy:
2.0 to 20.0 × CT in steps of 0.1
as per phase current inputs
Pickup Accuracy:
Dropout Level:
±2°C or ±4°F
96 to 98% of pickup
Dropout Level: 96 to 98% of pickup Time Delay: <5 s
Time Delay: 0 to 255.00 s in steps of 0.01 s LOSS OF RRTD COMMS ALARM
Backup Delay: 0.10 to 255.00 s in steps of 0.01 s Pickup Level: no communication
Timing Accuracy: +50 ms for delays <50 ms Time Delay: 2 to 5 s
±100 ms or ±0.5% of total trip time
27 UNDERVOLTAGE
MECHANICAL JAM Pickup Level: 0.50 to 0.99 × rated in steps of 0.01
Pickup Level: 1.01 to 6.00 × FLA in steps of 0.01
Pickup Accuracy: as per phase voltage inputs
Pickup Accuracy: as per phase current inputs
Time Delay: 0.0 to 255.0 s in steps of 0.1
Start Delay: separate level for start conditions
Timing Accuracy: ±250 ms or ±0.5% of total trip time
Timing Accuracy: +75 ms for delays <50 ms
37 UNDERCURRENT ±100 ms or ±0.5% of total trip time
Pickup Level: 0.10 to 0.99 × FLA in steps of 0.01 59 OVERVOLTAGE
Pickup Accuracy: as per phase current inputs Pickup Level: 1.01 to 1.25 × rated in steps of 0.01
Dropout Level: 102 to 104% of pickup Pickup Accuracy: as per phase voltage inputs
Time Delay: 1 to 255 s in steps of 1 Dropout Level: 96 to 98% of pickup
Start Delay: 0 to 15000 s in steps of 1 Time Delay: 0.0 to 255.0 s in steps of 0.1
Timing Accuracy: ±500 ms or ±0.5% of total time Timing Accuracy: ±100 ms or ±0.5% of total trip time
46 UNBALANCE 47 VOLTAGE PHASE REVERSAL
Pickup Level: 4 to 30% in steps of 1 Pickup Level: phase reversal detected
Pickup Accuracy: ±2% Time Delay: 500 to 700 ms
Dropout Level: 1 to 2% below pickup
81 UNDERFREQUENCY
Time Delay: 1 to 255 s in steps of 1
Pickup Level: 20.00 to 70.00 Hz in steps of 0.01
Start Delay: 0 to 5000 s in steps of 1
Pickup Accuracy: ±0.02 Hz
Timing Accuracy: ±500 ms or ±0.5% of total time
Dropout Level: 0.05 Hz
50G/51G 50N/51N GROUND FAULT Time Delay: 0.0 to 255.0 s in steps of 0.1
Pickup Level: 0.10 to 1.00 × CT for 1 A/5 A CT Start Delay: 0 to 5000 s in steps of 1
0.25 to 25.00 A for 50:0.025 CT
Pickup Accuracy: as per ground current inputs
Dropout Level: 96 to 98% of pickup 81 OVERFREQUENCY
Pickup Level: 20.00 to 70.00 Hz in steps of 0.01
Time Delay: 0 to 255.00 s in steps of 0.01 s
Pickup Accuracy: ±0.02 Hz
Backup Delay: 0.01 to 255.00 s in steps of 0.01 s
Dropout Level: 0.05 Hz
Timing Accuracy: +50 ms for delays <50 ms
±100 ms or ±0.5% of total trip time Time Delay: 0.0-255.0 s in steps of 0.1
Start Delay: 0-5000 s in steps of 1
ACCELERATION TRIP
Pickup Level: motor start condition
Dropout Level: motor run, trip or stop condition 55 LEAD POWER FACTOR
Time Delay: 1.0 to 250.0 s in steps of 0.1 Pickup Level: 0.99 to 0.05 in steps of 0.01
Timing Accuracy: ±100 ms or ±0.5% of total time Pickup Accuracy: ±0.02
Dropout Level: 0.01 of pickup
38/49 RTD and RRTD PROTECTION
Pickup Level: 1 to 200°C or 34 to 392°F
Pickup Accuracy: ±2°C or ±4°F
Dropout Level: 96 to 98% of pickup above 80°C
Time Delay: <5 s

2 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION 2.2 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
55 LAG POWER FACTOR REVERSE POWER

Pickup Level: 0.99 to 0.05 in steps of 0.01 Pickup Level: 1 to 25000 kW in steps of 1
Pickup Accuracy: ±0.02 Pickup Accuracy: ±2%
Dropout Level: 0.01 of pickup Dropout Level: 102 to 104% of pickup
Time Delay: 0.1 to 255.0 s in steps of 0.1 Time Delay: 0.2 to 30.0 s in steps of 0.1
Start Delay: 0 to 5000 s in steps of 1 Start Delay: 0 to 50000 s in steps of 1
Timing Accuracy: ±300 ms or ±0.5% of total trip time Timing Accuracy: ±300 ms or ±0.5% of total trip time
POSITIVE REACTIVE POWER 87 DIFFERENTIAL SWITCH 2
Pickup Level: 1 to 25000 in steps of 1 Time Delay: <200 ms
Pickup Accuracy: ±2% 14 SPEED SWITCH
Dropout Level: 96 to 98% of pickup Time Delay: 0.5 to 100.0 s in steps of 0.5
Time Delay: 0.1 to 255.0 s in steps of 0.1 Timing Accuracy: ±200 ms or ±0.5% of total trip time
GENERAL SWITCH
NEGATIVE REACTIVE POWER Start Delay: 0 to 5000 s in steps of 1
Pickup Level: 1 to 25000 kvar in steps of 1 Timing Accuracy: ±200 ms or ±0.5% of total trip time
Pickup Accuracy: ±2%
DIGITAL COUNTER
Pickup: on count equaling level
Time Delay: <200 ms
Timing Accuracy: ±300 ms or ±0.5% of total trip time BACKSPIN DETECTION
Dynamic BSD: 20 mV to 480 V RMS
37 UNDERPOWER Pickup Level: 3 to 300 Hz in steps of 1
Pickup Level: 1 to 25000 kW in steps of 1
Dropout Level: 2 to 30 Hz in steps or 1
Pickup Accuracy: ±2%
Level Accuracy: ±0.02 Hz
2.2.6 MONITORING ELEMENTS
STARTER FAILURE kvar DEMAND ALARM

Pickup Level: motor run condition when tripped Demand Period: 5 to 90 min. in steps of 1
Dropout Level: motor stopped condition Pickup Level: 1 to 50000 kvar in steps of 1
Time Delay: 10 to 1000 ms in steps of 10 Pickup Accuracy: ±2%
Timing Accuracy: ±100 ms or ±0.5% of total trip time Dropout Level: 96 to 98% of pickup
CURRENT DEMAND ALARM Time Delay: <2 min.
Demand Period: 5 to 90 min. in steps of 1 kVA DEMAND ALARM
Pickup Level: 10 to 100000 A in steps of 1 Demand Period: 5 to 90 min in steps of 1
Pickup Accuracy: as per phase current inputs Pickup Level: 1 to 50000 kVA in steps of 1
Dropout Level: 96 to 98% of pickup Pickup Accuracy: ±2%
Time Delay: <2 min. Dropout Level: 96 to 98% of pickup
kW DEMAND ALARM Time Delay: <2 min.
Demand Period: 5 to 90 min. in steps of 1 TRIP COUNTER
Pickup Level: 1 to 50000 kW in steps of 1 Pickup: on count equaling level
Pickup Accuracy: ±2% Time Delay: <200 ms
Time Delay: <2 min.
2.2.7 CONTROL ELEMENTS
REDUCED VOLTAGE START

Transition Level: 25 to 300% FLA in steps of 1
Transition Time: 1 to 250 sec. in steps of 1
Transition Control: Current, Timer, Current and Timer

2.2.8 ENVIRONMENTAL SPECIFICATIONS
AMBIENT TEMPERATURE DUST/MOISTURE

Operating Range: –40°C to +60°C IP50
Storage Range: –40°C to +80°C VENTILATION
NOTE: For 369 units with the Profibus option, the Operating and
No special ventilation required as long as ambient temperature
Storage ranges are as follows:
remains within specifications. Ventilation may be required in enclo-
2 Operating Range: +5°C to +60°C sures exposed to direct sunlight.
Storage Range: +5°C to +80°C
OVERVOLTAGE CATEGORY II
HUMIDITY CLEANING
Up to 95% non condensing
May be cleaned with a damp cloth.
The 369 must be powered up at least once per year to prevent deterioration of electrolytic capacitors.
NOTE
2.2.9 APPROVALS / CERTIFICATION
ISO: Designed and manufactured to an ISO9001 UL: UL recognized

registered process. CE: Conforms to EN 55011/CISPR 11, EN50082-
CSA: CSA approved 2, IEC 947-1, 1010-1
2.2.10 TYPE TEST STANDARDS
SURGE WITHSTAND CAPABILITY RFI

ANSI/IEEE C37.90.1 Oscillatory (2.5 kV/1 MHz) ANSI/IEEE C37.90.2, 35 V/m
ANSI/IEEE C37.90.1 Fast Rise (5 kV/10 ns) EN61000-4-3
IEC EN61000-4-4, Level 4 EN50082-2 @ 10 V
INSULATION RESISTANCE CONDUCTED/RADIATED EMISSIONS
IEC255-5 EN 55011 (CISPR 11)
IMPULSE TEST TEMPERATURE/HUMIDITY WITH ACCURACY
Per IEC 255-5 Section 8 ANSI/IEEE C37.90
DIELECTRIC STRENGTH: IEC 255-6
ANSI/IEEE C37.90 IEC 68-2-38 Part 2
IEC 255-6 VIBRATION
CSA C22.2 IEC 255-21-1 Class 1
ELECTROSTATIC DISCHARGE IEC 255-21-2 Class 1
EN61000-4-2, Level 3 VOLTAGE DEVIATION
IEC 801-2 EN61000-4-11
SURGE IMMUNITY MAGNETIC FIELD IMMUNITY
EN61000-4-5 EN61000-4-8
CURRENT WITHSTAND
ANSI/IEEE C37.90
IEC 255-6
2.2.11 PRODUCTION TESTS
DIELECTRIC STRENGTH CALIBRATION AND FUNCTIONALITY

All high voltage inputs at 2 kV AC for 1 minute 100% hardware functionality tested
BURN IN 100% calibration of all metered quantities
8 hours @ 60°C sampling plan

3 INSTALLATION 3.1 MECHANICAL INSTALLATION
3 INSTALLATION 3.1 MECHANICAL INSTALLATION 3.1.1 MECHANICAL INSTALLATION
The 369 is contained in a compact plastic housing with the keypad, display, communication port, and indicators/targets on
the front panel. The unit should be positioned so the display and keypad are accessible. To mount the relay, make cutout
and drill mounting holes as shown below. Mounting hardware (bolts and washers) is provided with the relay. Although the
relay is internally shielded to minimize noise pickup and interference, it should be mounted away from high current conduc-
tors or sources of strong magnetic fields.
Figure 3–1: PHYSICAL DIMENSIONS
Figure 3–2: SPLIT MOUNTING DIMENSIONS

3.2 TERMINAL IDENTIFICATION 3 INSTALLATION
3.2 TERMINAL IDENTIFICATION 3.2.1 369 TERMINAL LIST
TERMINAL WIRING CONNECTION TERMINAL WIRING CONNECTION

1 RTD1 + 59 EMERGENCY RESTART SW
2 RTD1 – 60 EMERGENCY RESTART SW COMMON
3 RTD1 COMPENSATION 61 EXTERNAL RESET SW
4 RTD1 SHIELD 62 EXTERNAL RESET SW COMMON
5 RTD2 + 71 COMM1 RS485 +
6 RTD2 – 72 COMM1 RS485 –
7 RTD2 COMPENSATION 73 COMM1 SHIELD
8 RTD2 SHIELD 74 COMM2 RS485 +
9 RTD3 + 75 COMM2 RS485 –
10 RTD3 – 76 COMM2 SHIELD
3 11
12
RTD3 COMPENSATION
RTD3 SHIELD
77
78
COMM3 RS485 +
COMM3 RS485 –
13 RTD4 + 79 COMM3 SHIELD
14 RTD4 – 80 ANALOG OUT 1
15 RTD4 COMPENSATION 81 ANALOG OUT 2
16 RTD4 SHIELD 82 ANALOG OUT 3
17 RTD5 + 83 ANALOG OUT 4
18 RTD5 – 84 ANALOG COM
19 RTD5 COMPENSATION 85 ANALOG SHIELD
20 RTD5 SHIELD 90 BACKSPIN VOLTAGE
21 RTD6 + 91 BACKSPIN NEUTRAL
22 RTD6 – 92 PHASE A CURRENT 5A
23 RTD6 COMPENSATION 93 PHASE A CURRENT 1A
24 RTD6 SHIELD 94 PHASE A COMMON
25 RTD7 + 95 PHASE B CURRENT 5A
26 RTD7 – 96 PHASE B CURRENT 1A
27 RTD7 COMPENSATION 97 PHASE B COMMON
28 RTD7 SHIELD 98 PHASE C CURRENT 5A
29 RTD8 + 99 PHASE C CURRENT 1A
30 RTD8 – 100 PHASE C COMMON
31 RTD8 COMPENSATION 101 NEUT/GND CURRENT 50:0.025A
32 RTD8 SHIELD 102 NEUT/GND CURRENT 1A
33 RTD9 + 103 NEUT/GND CURRENT 5A
34 RTD9 – 104 NEUT/GND COMMON
35 RTD9 COMPENSATION 105 PHASE A VOLTAGE
36 RTD9 SHIELD 106 PHASE A NEUTRAL
37 RTD10 + 107 PHASE B VOLTAGE
38 RTD10 – 108 PHASE B NEUTRAL
39 RTD10 COMPENSATION 109 PHASE C VOLTAGE
40 RTD10 SHIELD 110 PHASE C NEUTRAL
41 RTD11 + 111 TRIP NC
42 RTD11 – 112 TRIP COMMON
43 RTD11 COMPENSATION 113 TRIP NO
44 RTD11 SHIELD 114 ALARM NC
45 RTD12 + 115 ALARM COMMON
46 RTD12 – 116 ALARM NO
47 RTD12 COMPENSATION 117 AUX1 NC
48 RTD12 SHIELD 118 AUX1 COMMON
51 SPARE SW 119 AUX1 NO
52 SPARE SW COMMON 120 AUX2 NC
53 DIFFERENTIAL INPUT SW 121 AUX2 COMMON
54 DIFFERENTIAL INPUT SW COMMON 122 AUX2 NO
55 SPEED SW 123 POWER FILTER GROUND
56 SPEED SW COMMON 124 POWER LINE
57 ACCESS SW 125 POWER NEUTRAL
58 ACCESS SW COMMON 126 POWER SAFETY

3 INSTALLATION 3.2 TERMINAL IDENTIFICATION
3.2.2 269 TO 369 CONVERSION TERMINAL LIST
269 WIRING CONNECTION 369 269 WIRING CONNECTION 369

1 RTD1 + 1 50 SPEED SW 55
2 RTD1 COMPENSATION 3 51 SPEED SW COMMON 56
3 RTD1 – 2 52 ACCESS SW 57
4 RTD1 SHIELD 4 53 ACCESS SW COMMON 58
5 RTD2 + 5 54 EMERGENCY RESTART SW 59
6 RTD2 COMPENSATION 7 55 EMERGENCY RESTART SW COM 60
7 RTD2 – 6 56 EXTERNAL RESET SW 61
8 RTD2 SHIELD 8 57 EXTERNAL RESET SW COMMON 62
9 RTD3 + 9 47 COMM1 RS485 + 71
10 RTD3 COMPENSATION 11 46 COMM1 RS485 – 72
11 RTD3 – 10 88 COMM1 SHIELD 73
12 RTD3 SHIELD 12 59 ANALOG OUT 1 80 3
71 RTD4 + 13 58 ANALOG COMMON 84
70 RTD4 COMPENSATION 15 83 PHASE A CURRENT 1A 93
69 RTD4 – 14 82 PHASE A COMMON 94
68 RTD4 SHIELD 16 81 PHASE A CURRENT 5A 92
67 RTD5 + 17 80 PHASE B CURRENT 1A 96
66 RTD5 COMPENSATION 19 79 PHASE B COMMON 97
65 RTD5 – 18 78 PHASE B CURRENT 5A 95
64 RTD5 SHIELD 20 77 PHASE C CURRENT 1A 99
63 RTD6 + 21 76 PHASE C COMMON 100
62 RTD6 COMPENSATION 23 75 PHASE C CURRENT 5A 98
61 RTD6 – 22 73 NEUTRAL/GROUND COMMON 104
60 RTD6 SHIELD 24 72 NEUTRAL/GROUND CURRENT 5A 103
13 RTD7 + 25 74 NEUT/GND CURRENT 50:0.025A 101
14 RTD7 COMPENSATION 27 29 TRIP NC 111
15 RTD7 – 26 30 TRIP COMMON 112
16 RTD7 SHIELD 28 31 TRIP NO 113
17 RTD8 + 29 32 ALARM NC 114
18 RTD8 COMPENSATION 31 33 ALARM COMMON 115
19 RTD8 – 30 34 ALARM NO 116
20 RTD8 SHIELD 32 35 AUX1 NC 117
21 RTD9 + 33 36 AUX1 COMMON 118
22 RTD9 COMPENSATION 35 37 AUX1 NO 119
23 RTD9 – 34 38 AUX2 NC 120
24 RTD9 SHIELD 36 39 AUX2 COMMON 121
25 RTD10 + 37 40 AUX2 NO 122
26 RTD10 COMPENSATION 39 42 POWER FILTER GROUND 123
27 RTD10 – 38 41 POWER LINE 124
28 RTD10 SHIELD 40 43 POWER NEUTRAL 125
44 SPARE SW 51 Terminals not available on the 369
45 SPARE SW COMMON 52 84 MTM B+ N/A
48 DIFFERENTIAL INPUT SW 53 85 MTM A– N/A
49 DIFFERENTIAL INPUT SW COMMON 54

3.2 TERMINAL IDENTIFICATION 3 INSTALLATION
3.2.3 MTM-369 CONVERSION TERMINAL LIST
MTM WIRING CONNECTION 369 MTM WIRING CONNECTION 369

1 POWER FILTER GROUND 123 19 ANALOG OUT1 COM 84
2 PHASE A VOLTAGE 105 20 ANALOG OUT 2 81
3 PHASE B VOLTAGE 107 21 ANALOG OUT 2 COM 84
4 PHASE B VOLTAGE 107 22 ANALOG OUT 3 82
5 PHASE C VOLTAGE 109 23 ANALOG OUT 3 COM 84
6 PHASE A COM 94 24 ANALOG OUT 4 83
7 PHASE A CURRENT 5A 92 25 ANALOG OUT 4 COM 84
8 PHASE A CURRENT 1A 93 26 ANALOG SHIELD 85
9 PHASE B COM 97 27 ALARM NC 114
10 PHASE B CURRENT 5A 95 28 ALARM COM 115
3 11 PHASE B CURRENT 1A 96 29 ALARM NO 116
12 PHASE C COM 100 31 SPARE SW 51
13 PHASE C CURRENT 5A 98 32 SPARE SW COM 52
14 PHASE C CURRENT 1A 99 34 POWER LINE 124
15 COMM1 RS485 + 71 35 POWER NEUTRAL 125
16 COMM1 RS485 – 72 Terminals not available on the 369:
17 COMM1 SHIELD 73 30 PULSE OUTPUT (P/O) N/A
18 ANALOG OUT 1 80 33 SW.B N/A
3.2.4 MPM-369 CONVERSION TERMINAL LIST
MPM WIRING CONNECTION 369 MPM WIRING CONNECTION 369

1 PHASE A VOLTAGE 105 17 PHASE C COM 100
2 PHASE B VOLTAGE 107 28 ANALOG OUT 1 80
3 PHASE C VOLTAGE 109 27 ANALOG OUT 2 81
4 PHASE NEUTRAL 108 26 ANALOG OUT 3 82
5 POWER FILTER GROUND 123 25 ANALOG OUT 4 83
6 POWER SAFETY 126 24 ANALOG COM 84
7 POWER NEUTRAL 125 21 ANALOG SHIELD 85
8 POWER LINE 124 43 ALARM NC 114
9 PHASE A CURRENT 5A 92 44 ALARM COM 115
10 PHASE A CURRENT 1A 93 45 ALARM NO 116
11 PHASE A COM 94 46 COMM1 SHIELD 73
12 PHASE B CURRENT 5A 95 47 COMM1 RS485 – 72
13 PHASE B CURRENT 1A 96 48 COMM1 RS485 + 71
14 PHASE B COM 97 Terminals not available on the 369
15 PHASE C CURRENT 5A 98 31 SWITCH INPUT 1 N/A
16 PHASE C CURRENT 1A 99 32 SWITCH INPUT 2 N/A
33 SWITCH COM N/A

3 INSTALLATION 3.2 TERMINAL IDENTIFICATION
3.2.5 TERMINAL LAYOUT
111 112 113 114 115 116 117 118 119 120 121 122 123 124 125 126 3
48
36 47
35 51
46 52
34 45 53
33 44 54
32 43 55
31 42 56
30 41 57
29 40 58
28 39 59
27 38 60
26 37 61
25 62
RTD Digital Inputs
71
24 72
12 23
11 73
22 74
10 21 Comm
75
9 20 76
8 19
7 77
18 78
6 17
5 79
16 80
4 15
3 81 Analog
14 82
2 13 Output
1 83
84
91 93 95 97 99 85
86 Spare
90 92 94 96 98 100
RTD
101 103 105 106 108 110

102 104 107 109
840720B3.CDR
Figure 3–3: TERMINAL LAYOUT

3.3 ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION 3 INSTALLATION
3.3 ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION 3.3.1 TYPICAL WIRING DIAGRAM
HGF-CT
(5 Amp CT)
C(B) A
A B MOTOR
B(C) C
Twisted
Pair
OPTIONAL
105 106 107 108 109 110 92 93 94 95 96 97 98 99 100 102 104 103 101 91 90
50:
VA VN VB VN VC VN 5A 1A COM 5A 1A COM 5A 1A COM 1A COM 5A 0.025A N V
VOLTAGE INPUTS Phase A Phase B Phase C Neut/Gnd Back Spin
3 WITH METERING OPTION (M) CURRENT INPUTS Option (B) GROUND

BUS
FILTER GROUND 123
CONTROL
L
POWER
1 LINE + 124 CONTROL
STATOR
WINDING 1 2 NEUTRAL - 125 POWER
RTD1 N
3 Com SAFTY GROUND 126
GE Power Management
4 shld. 380VAC/125VDC
STATOR 5
111
WINDING 2 6
RTD2
369 TRIP 112 CR
7 Com Motor Management 113
8 shld. Relay R
OUTPUT RELAYS
114
9 ALARM 115
STATOR
WINDING 3 10 116 ALARM
RTD3 NOTE
11 Com 117 RELAY CONTACTS SHOWN
12 shld. AUX. 1 118
RTD WITH
13 119 ALARM CONTROL POWER REMOVED
STATOR
WINDING 4 14 120
RTD4 AUX. 2 121
15 Com SELF TEST
16 shld. 122 ALARM
STATOR 17
WINDING 5 18 51
RTD5 SPARE
19 Com 52
20 shld. DIFFERENTIAL 53 DIFFERENTIAL
87 RELAY
RELAY
DIGITAL INPUTS
STATOR 21 54
WINDING 6 22 SPEED 55 14 SPEED SWITCH
RTD6
OPTION ( R )
23 Com SWITCH 56
24 shld. ACCESS 57 KEYSWITCH
SWITCH 58 OR JUMPER
MOTOR 25
26 EMERGENCY 59
BEARING 1
RTD7 RESTART 60
27 Com
EXTERNAL 61
28 shld.
RESET 62
MOTOR 29
BEARING 2 30
RTD8 1 80 load
31 Com RS485
2 81 PF
OUTPUTS
32 shld. +
ANALOG
OPTION
(M,B)
3 82 Watts
PUMP 33
34 4 83 -
BEARING 1
RTD9 Com- 84 cpm-
35 Com METER Shield
36 shld. shld. 85 Shield
PUMP 37 PLC
BEARING 2 38
RTD10
39 Com
Profibus ST
40 shld.
Option (P)
41 CONNECTION
PUMP
CASE 42
RTD11
SCADA
43 Com
CHANNEL 1 CHANNEL 2 CHANNEL 3
44 shld.
DB-9 OPTION (F)
45 (front)
RS485 RS485 RS485
FIBER
50/125 uM FIBER
AMBIENT SHLD SHLD SHLD Tx Rx
62.5/125 uM FIBER
46
RTD12 100/140 uM FIBER
47 Com
71 72 73 74 75 76 77 78 79
48 shld.
369 COMPUTER
RTD1
1 1 8 REMOTE
5 4 3 2 1
RTD
TXD 2 2 3 RXD
9 8 7 6 MODULE
RXD 3 3 2 TXD
4 4 20 RTD12
369 PC
SGND 5 5 7 SGND PROGRAM
6 6 6
7 7 4
8 8 5
9 9 22
9 PIN PC 840700BC.CDR
CONNECTOR
25 PIN
CONNECTOR
Figure 3–4: TYPICAL WIRING

3 INSTALLATION 3.3 ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION
3.3.2 TYPICAL WIRING
The 369 can be connected to cover a broad range of applications and wiring will vary depending upon the user’s protection
scheme. This section will cover most of the typical 369 interconnections.
In this section, the terminals have been logically grouped together for explanatory purposes. A typical wiring diagram for
the 369 is shown above in Figure 3–4: TYPICAL WIRING on page 3–6 and the terminal arrangement has been detailed in
Figure 3–3: TERMINAL LAYOUT on page 3–5. For further information on applications not covered here, refer to Chapter 7:
APPLICATIONS or contact the factory for further information.
Hazard may result if the product is not used for intended purposes. This equipment can only be serviced
by trained personnel.
WARNING
3.3.3 CONTROL POWER
3
VERIFY THAT THE CONTROL POWER SUPPLIED TO THE RELAY IS WITHIN THE RANGE COVERED BY
THE ORDERED 369 RELAY’S CONTROL POWER.
CAUTION
Table 3–1: 369 POWER SUPPLY RANGES

369 POWER SUPPLY AC RANGE DC RANGE
HI 40 to 265 V 50 to 300 V
LO 20 to 48 V 20 to 60 V
The 369 has a built-in switchmode supply. It can operate with either AC or DC voltage applied to it.
Extensive filtering and transient protection has been incorporated into the 369 to ensure reliable operation in harsh indus-
trial environments. Transient energy is removed from the relay and conducted to ground via the ground terminal. This termi-
nal must be connected to the cubicle ground bus using a 10 AWG wire or a ground braid. Do not daisy-chain grounds with
other relays or devices. Each should have its own connection to the ground bus.
The internal supply is protected via a 3.15 A slo-blo fuse that is accessible for replacement. If it must be replaced ensure
that it is replaced with a fuse of equal size (see FUSE on page 2–4).
3.3.4 PHASE CURRENT (CT) INPUTS
The 369 requires one CT for each of the three motor phase currents to be input into the relay. There are no internal ground
connections for the CT inputs. Refer to Chapter 7: APPLICATIONS for a information on two CT connections.
The phase CTs should be chosen such that the FLA of the motor being protected is no less than 50% of the rated CT pri-
mary. Ideally, to ensure maximum accuracy and resolution, the CTs should be chosen such that the FLA is 100% of CT pri-
mary or slightly less. The maximum CT primary is 5000 A.
The 369 will measure 0.05 to 20 × CT primary rated current. The CTs chosen must be capable of driving the 369 burden
(see specifications) during normal and fault conditions to ensure correct operation. See Section 7.4: CT SPECIFICATION
AND SELECTION on page 7–7 for information on calculating total burden and CT rating.
For the correct operation of many protective elements, the phase sequence and CT polarity is critical. Ensure that the con-
vention illustrated in Figure 3–4: TYPICAL WIRING on page 3–6 is followed.

3.3.5 GROUND CURRENT INPUTS
The 369 has an isolating transformer with separate 1 A, 5 A, and sensitive HGF (50:0.025) ground terminals. Only one
ground terminal type can be used at a time. There are no internal ground connections on the ground current inputs.
The maximum ground CT primary for the 1 A and 5 A taps is 5000 A. Alternatively the sensitive ground input, 50:0.025, can
be used to detect ground current on high resistance grounded systems.
The ground CT connection can either be a zero sequence (core balance) installation or a residual connection. Note that
only 1 A and 5 A secondary CTs may be used for the residual connection. A typical residual connection is illustrated in
below. The zero-sequence connection is shown in the typical wiring diagram. The zero-sequence connection is recom-
mended. Unequal saturation of CTs, CT mismatch, size and location of motor, resistance of the power system, motor core
saturation density, etc. may cause false readings in the residually connected ground fault circuit.
RESIDUAL CURRENT
3 A
CONNECTION
B
93 94 92 96 97 95 99 100 98 102 104 103 101

50:
1A COM 5A 1A COM 5A 1A COM 5A 1A COM 5A 0.025A
Phase A Phase B Phase C Neut/Gnd

CURRENT INPUTS
840710B1.CDR
Figure 3–5: TYPICAL RESIDUAL CONNECTION
3.3.6 ZERO SEQUENCE GROUND CT PLACEMENT
The exact placement of a zero sequence CT to properly detect ground fault current is shown below. If the CT is placed over
a shielded cable, capacitive coupling of phase current into the cable shield during motor starts may be detected as ground
current unless the shield wire is also passed through the CT window. Twisted pair cabling on the zero sequence CT is rec-
ommended.
Figure 3–6: ZERO SEQUENCE CT

3.3.7 PHASE VOLTAGE (VT/PT) INPUTS
The 369 has three channels for AC voltage inputs each with an internal isolating transformer. There are no internal fuses or
ground connections on these inputs. The maximum VT ratio is 240:1. These inputs are only enabled when the metering
option (M) is ordered.
The 369 accepts either open delta or wye connected VTs (see Figure 3–7: WYE/DELTA CONNECTION below). The volt-
age channels are connected wye internally, which means that the jumper shown on the delta connection between the
phase B input and the VT neutral terminals must be installed.
Polarity and phase sequence for the VTs is critical for correct power and rotation measurement and should be verified
before starting the motor. As long as the polarity markings on the primary and secondary windings of the VT are aligned,
there is no phase shift. The markings can be aligned on either side of the VT. VTs are typically mounted upstream of the
motor breaker or contactor. Typically, a 1 A fuse is used to protect the voltage inputs.
WYE VT CONNECTION DELTA VT CONNECTION 3
A A
B B
C C
105 106 107 108 109 110 105 106 107 108 109 110
VA VN VB VN VC VN VA VN VB VN VC VN
VOLTAGE INPUTS VOLTAGE INPUTS
WITH METERING OPTION (M) WITH METERING OPTION (M)
840713A4.CDR
Figure 3–7: WYE/DELTA CONNECTION
3.3.8 BACKSPIN VOLTAGE INPUTS
The Backspin voltage input is only operational if the optional backspin detection (B) feature has been purchased for the
relay. This input allows the 369 to sense whether the motor is spinning after the primary power has been removed (breaker
or contactor opened).
These inputs must be supplied by a separate VT mounted downstream (motor side) of the breaker or contactor. The correct
wiring is illustrated below.
A
B Tx M
C
VOLTAGE ON MOTOR SIDE
OF BREAKER MAY BE - OR -N
91 90
N V
BACKSPIN
840731A2.CDR
Figure 3–8: BACKSPIN VOLTAGE WIRING

3.3.9 RTD INPUTS
The 369 can monitor up to 12 RTD inputs for Stator, Bearing, Ambient, or Other temperature applications. The type of each
RTD is field programmable as: 100 Ω Platinum (DIN 43760), 100 Ω Nickel, 120 Ω Nickel, or 10 Ω Copper. RTDs must be
the three wire type. There are no provisions for the connection of thermistors.
The 369 RTD circuitry compensates for lead resistance, provided that each of the three leads is the same length. Lead
resistance should not exceed 25 Ω per lead for platinum and nickel type RTDs or 3 Ω per lead for Copper type RTDs.
Shielded cable should be used to prevent noise pickup in industrial environments. RTD cables should be kept close to
grounded metal casings and avoid areas of high electromagnetic or radio interference. RTD leads should not be run adja-
cent to or in the same conduit as high current carrying wires.
The shield connection terminal of the RTD is grounded in the 369 and should not be connected to ground at the motor or
anywhere else to prevent noise pickup from circulating currents.
3 If 10 Ω Copper RTDs are used special care should be taken to keep the lead resistance as low as possible to maintain
accurate readings.
MOTOR 3 WIRE SHIELDED CABLE MOTOR

369 RELAY STARTER Route cable in separate conduit from
current carrying conductors
SAFETY GROUND 12 RTD TERMINALS
AT MOTOR
Shield Shield 4
RTD SENSING
RTD #1
Hot 1 RTD IN
MOTOR
2 STATOR
Return OR
BEARING
Compensation Com 3
RTD
TERMINALS Maximum total lead resistance
IN MOTOR 25 ohms (Platinum & Nickel RTDs)
STARTER 3 ohms (Copper RTDs) 840717A2.CDR
Figure 3–9: RTD INPUTS
3.3.10 DIGITAL INPUTS
DO NOT CONNECT LIVE CIRCUITS TO THE 369 DIGITAL INPUTS. THEY ARE DESIGNED FOR DRY CON-
TACT CONNECTIONS ONLY.
CAUTION
Other than the ACCESS switch input the other 5 digital inputs are programmable. These programmable digital inputs have
default settings to match the functions of the 269Plus switch inputs (differential, speed, emergency restart, remote reset
and spare). However in addition to their default settings they can also be programmed for use as generic inputs to set up
trips and alarms or for monitoring purposes based on external contact inputs.
A twisted pair of wires should be used for digital input connections.

3.3.11 ANALOG OUTPUTS
The 369 provides 1 analog current output channel as part of the base unit and 3 additional analog outputs with the metering
option (M). These outputs are field programmable to a full-scale range of either 0 to 1 mA (into a maximum 2.4 kΩ imped-
ance) and 4 to 20 mA or 0 to 20 mA (into a maximum 600 Ω impedance).
As shown in the typical wiring diagram (Figure 3–4: TYPICAL WIRING on page 3–6), these outputs share one common
return. Polarity of these outputs must be observed for proper operation.
Shielded cable should be used for connections, with only one end of the shield grounded, to minimize noise effects. The
analog output circuitry is isolated. Transorbs limit this isolation to ±36 V with respect to the 369 safety ground.
If an analog voltage output is required, a burden resistor must be connected across the input of the SCADA or measuring
device (see the figure below). Ignoring the input impedance of the input,
V FULL SCALE
R LOAD = ---------------------------------
I MAX
- 3
For 0-1 mA, for example, if 5 V full scale is required to correspond to 1 mA
V FULL SCALE 5V
- = --------------------- = 5000 Ω
R LOAD = ---------------------------------
IMAX 0.001 A
For 4-20 mA, this resistor would be
V FULL SCALE 5 V - = 250 Ω
R LOAD = ---------------------------------
- = --------------------
I MAX 0.020 A
1 80
V+
Ana log Outputs
SCADA
2 81 OR
R PLC
3 82 OR
METERING
4 83 DEVICE
V-
Com- 84
840714A3.CDR
Shield 85
Figure 3–10: ANALOG OUTPUT VOLTAGE CONNECTION
3.3.12 REMOTE DISPLAY
The 369 display can be separated and mounted remotely up to 15 feet away from the main relay. No separate source of
control power is required for the display module. A 15 feet standard shielded network cable is used to make the connection
between the display module and the main relay. A recommended and tested cable is available from GE Power Manage-
ment. The cable should be wired as far away as possible from high current or voltage carrying cables or other sources of
electrical noise.
In addition the display module must be grounded if mounted remotely. A ground screw is provided on the back of the dis-
play module to facilitate this. A 12 AWG wire is recommended and should be connected to the same ground bus as the
main relay unit.
The 369 relay will still function and protect the motor without the display connected.

3.3.13 OUTPUT RELAYS
The 369 provides four (4) form C output relays. They are labeled Trip, Aux 1, Aux 2, and Alarm. Each relay has normally
open (NO) and normally closed (NC) contacts and can switch up to 8 A at either 250 V AC or 30 V DC with a resistive load.
The NO or NC state is determined by the ‘no power’ state of the relay outputs.
All four output relays may be programmed for fail-safe or non-fail-safe operation. When in fail-safe mode, output relay acti-
vation or a loss of control power will cause the contacts to go to their power down state.
For example:
• A fail-safe NO contact closes when the 369 is powered up (if no prior unreset trip conditions) and will open when acti-
vated (tripped) or when the 369 loses control power.
• A non-fail-safe NO contact remains open when the 369 is powered up (unless a prior unreset trip condition) and will
close only when activated (tripped). If control power is lost while the output relay is activated (NO contacts closed) the
3 NO contacts will open.
Thus, in order to cause a trip on loss of control power to the 369, the Trip relay should be programmed as fail-safe. See the
figure below for typical wiring of contactors and breakers for fail-safe and non-fail-safe operation. Output relays remain
latched after activation if the fault condition persists or the protection element has been programmed as latched. This
means that once this relay has been activated it remains in the active state until the 369 is manually reset.
The Trip relay cannot be reset if a timed lockout is in effect. Lockout time will be adhered to regardless of whether control
power is present or not. The relay contacts may be reset if motor conditions allow, by pressing the RESET key, using the
REMOTE RESET switch or via communications. The Emergency Restart feature overrides all features to reset the 369.
The rear of the 369 relay shows output relay contacts in their power down state.
In locations where system voltage disturbances cause voltage levels to dip below the control power
range listed in specifications, any relay contact programmed as fail-safe may change state. Therefore, in
any application where the ‘process’ is more critical than the motor, it is recommended that the trip relay
WARNING
contacts be programmed as non-fail-safe. If, however, the motor is more critical than the ‘process’ then
program the trip contacts as fail-safe.
840716A4.CDR
Figure 3–11: HOOKUP / FAIL & NON-FAILSAFE MODES

3.3.14 RS485 COMMUNICATIONS
Three independent two-wire RS485 ports are provided. If option (F), the fiber optic port, is installed and used the COMM 3,
RS485 port, may not be used. The RS485 ports are isolated as a group.
Up to 32 369s (or other devices) can be daisy-chained together on a single serial communication channel without exceed-
ing the driver capability. For larger systems, additional serial channels must be added. Commercially available repeaters
may also be used to increase the number of relays on a single channel to a maximum of 254. Note that there may only be
one master device per serial communication link.
Connections should be made using shielded twisted pair cables (typically 24 AWG). Suitable cables should have a charac-
teristic impedance of 120 Ω (e.g. Belden #9841) and total wire length should not exceed 4000 ft. Commercially available
repeaters can be used to extend transmission distances.
Voltage differences between remote ends of the communication link are not uncommon. For this reason, surge protection
devices are internally installed across all RS485 terminals. Internally, an isolated power supply with an optocoupled data
interface is used to prevent noise coupling. The source computer/PLC/SCADA system should have similar transient protec-
3
tion devices installed, either internally or externally, to ensure maximum reliability.
To ensure that all devices in a daisy-chain are at the same potential, it is imperative that the common ter-
minals of each RS485 port are tied together and grounded in one location only, at the master. Failure to
do so may result in intermittent or failed communications.
CAUTION
Correct polarity is also essential. 369 relays must be wired with all ‘+’ terminals connected together, and all ‘–’
terminals connected together. Each relay must be daisy-chained to the next one. Avoid star or stub connected configura-
tions. The last device at each end of the daisy-chain should be terminated with a 120 Ω ¼ watt resistor in series with a 1 nF
capacitor across the ‘+’ and ‘–’ terminals. Observing these guidelines will result in a reliable communication system that is
immune to system transients.
Figure 3–12: RS485 WIRING

3.4 REMOTE RTD MODULE (RRTD) 3 INSTALLATION
3.4 REMOTE RTD MODULE (RRTD) 3.4.1 MECHANICAL INSTALLATION
The optional remote RTD module is designed to be mounted near the motor. This eliminates the need for multiple RTD
cables to run back from the motor which may be in a remote location to the switchgear. Although the module is internally
shielded to minimize noise pickup and interference, it should be mounted away from high current conductors or sources of
strong magnetic fields.
The remote RTD module physical dimensions and mounting (drill diagram) are shown below. Mounting hardware (bolts and
washers) and instructions are provided with the module.
Figure 3–13: REMOTE RTD DIMENSIONS
4 OUTPUT RELAYS (IO) CONTROL POWER

Programmable alarm and HI: 50-300VDC/40-265VAC
trip conditions activated LO: 20-60VDC/20-48VAC
by programmable setpoints,
digital inputs and remote
communication control.
Customer Accessible
fuse
12 RTD INPUTS DIGITAL INPUTS

field selectable type (IO)
FIBER OPTIC DATA LINK (F)

For harsh environments
Communications
(3)-RS485 Com Ports
ANALOG OUTPUT
(IO)
813701A4.CDR
Figure 3–14: REMOTE RTD REAR VIEW

3 INSTALLATION 3.4 REMOTE RTD MODULE (RRTD)
3.4.2 ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION
g
STATOR
WINDING 1 2
RTD1
3 Com
4 shld. GE Power Management
GROUND
STATOR 5 BUS
RRTD
WINDING 2 6
RTD2 Remote RTD Module
7 Com
FILTER GROUND 123
CONTROL
L
POWER
8 shld. LINE + 124 CONTROL
9 NEUTRAL - 125 POWER
STATOR N
WINDING 3 10 SAFTY GROUND 126
11
12
Com
shld.
RTD3
111 RTD trip

380VAC / 125VDC
3
OUTPUT RELAYS OPTION(IO)

TRIP 112
STATOR
13
113
WINDING 4 14 114
RTD4
15 Com ALARM 115
16 shld. 116 ALARM
117
STATOR 17 AUX. 1 118
WINDING 5 18 RTD HI
RTD5 119 ALARM
19 Com 120
AUX. 2 121
20 shld. SELF TEST
122 ALARM
STATOR 21
WINDING 6 22
RTD6 51
23 Com INPUT 6
DIGITAL INPUTS OPTION (IO)

52
24 shld.
53
INPUT 5
MOTOR 25 54
BEARING 1 26 55
INPUT 4
RTD7 56
27 Com
57
28 shld. INPUT 3
58
MOTOR 29 INPUT 2
59 Flow
60 Value
BEARING 2 30 Pressure
RTD8 61
31 Com INPUT 1 Value
62
32 shld.
33 Hottest
PUMP 1 80 Stator RS485
34
OPTION (IO)
BEARING 1 2 81 RTD1
OUTPUTS
+
ANALOG
RTD9
35 Com 3 82 RTD2
36 shld. 4 83 -
Com- 84 cpm-
37 METER Shield
PUMP shld. 85 Shield
BEARING 2 38
39 Com
RTD10 PLC
40 shld.
PUMP
41
CASE 42
RTD11 g GE Power Management
SCADA
43 Com
369
44 shld. CHANNEL 1 CHANNEL 2 CHANNEL 3 Motor Management Relay
45 RS485 RS485 RS485
WITH OPTION (F)
AMBIENT FIBER
46 SHLD SHLD SHLD Tx Rx
FIBER
RTD12
47 Com Tx Rx
71 72 73 74 75 76 77 78 79
48 shld.
813703A5.CDR
Figure 3–15: REMOTE RTD MODULE

3.5 CT INSTALLATION 3 INSTALLATION
3.5 CT INSTALLATION 3.5.1 PHASE CT INSTALLATION
Figure 3–16: PHASE CT INSTALLATION

3 INSTALLATION 3.5 CT INSTALLATION
3.5.2 5 AMP GROUND CT INSTALLATION
Figure 3–17: 5A GROUND CT INSTALLATION

3.5 CT INSTALLATION 3 INSTALLATION
3.5.3 HGF (50:0.025) GROUND CT INSTALLATION
Figure 3–18: HGF (50:0.025) GROUND CT INSTALLATION - 3" AND 5" WINDOW
GE Power Management
Figure 3–19: HGF (50:0.025) GROUND CT INSTALLATION - 8" WINDOW

4 USER INTERFACES 4.1 FACEPLATE INTERFACE
4 USER INTERFACES 4.1 FACEPLATE INTERFACE 4.1.1 DISPLAY
All messages are displayed on a 40-character LCD display to make them visible under poor lighting conditions and from
various viewing angles. Messages are displayed in plain English and do not require the aid of an instruction manual for
deciphering. While the keypad and display are not actively being used, the display will default to user defined status mes-
sages. Any trip, alarm, or start inhibit will automatically override the default messages and appear on the display.
Contrast Adjustment and Lamp Test: Press the [HELP] key for 2 seconds to initiate lamp test. The contrast can also be
adjusted now as required. Use the [VALUE] up and down keys to adjust the contrast. Press the [ENTER] key to save the 4
adjustment when completed.
4.1.2 LED INDICATORS
There are ten LED indicators, as follows:

• TRIP Trip relay has operated (energized)
• ALARM Alarm relay has operated (energized)
• AUX 1 Auxiliary relay has operated (energized)
• AUX 2 Auxiliary relay has operated (energized)
• SERVICE Relay in need of technical service.
• BSD Relay has detected a backspin condition on a stopped motor
• RRTD RRTD module communication indication
• METERING 369 has option M or B installed
• COM 1 Channel 1 RS485 communication indication
• COM 2 Channel 2 RS485 communication indication
TRIP BSD
ALARM RRTD
AUX 1 METERING
AUX 2 COM 1
SERVICE COM 2
Figure 4–1: LED INDICATORS
4.1.3 RS232 PROGRAM PORT
This port is intended for connection to a portable PC. Setpoint files may be created at any location and downloaded through
this port using the 369PC software. Local interrogation of Setpoints and Actual Values is also possible. New firmware may
be downloaded to the 369 flash memory through this port. Upgrading of the relay firmware does not require a hardware
EPROM change.

4.1 FACEPLATE INTERFACE 4 USER INTERFACES
4.1.4 KEYPAD
The 369 messages are organized into pages under the main headings, Setpoints and Actual Values. The [SETPOINTS]
key is used to navigate through the page headers of the programmable parameters. The [ACTUAL VALUES] key is used to
navigate through the page headers of the measured parameters.
Each page is broken down further into logical subgroups of messages. The [PAGE] up and down keys may be used to nav-
igate through the subgroups.
4 • [SETPOINTS]: This key may be used to navigate through the page headers of the programmable parameters. Alter-
nately, one can press this key followed by using the Page Up / Page Down keys.
• [ACTUAL VALUES]: This key is used to navigate through the page headers of the measured parameters. Alternately,
one can scroll through the pages by pressing the Actual Values key followed by using the Page Up / Page Down keys.
• [PAGE]: The Page Up/ Page Down keys may be used to scroll through page headers for both Setpoints and Actual
Values.
• [LINE]: Once the required page is found, the Line Up/ Line Down keys may be used to scroll through the sub-headings.
• [VALUE]: The Value Up and Value Down keys are used to scroll through variables in the Setpoint programming mode.
It will increment and decrement numerical Setpoint values, or alter yes/no options.
• [RESET]: The reset key may be used to reset a trip or latched alarm, provided it has been activated by selecting the
local reset.
• [ENTER] The key is dual purpose. It is used to enter the subgroups or store altered setpoint values.
• [CLEAR] The key is also dual purpose. It may be used to exit the subgroups or to return an altered setpoint to its origi-
nal value before it has been stored.
• [HELP]: The help key may be pressed at any time for context sensitive help messages; such as the Setpoint range,
etc.
To enter setpoints, select the desired page header. Then press the [LINE UP] / [LINE DOWN] keys to scroll through the
page and find the desired subgroup. Once the desired subgroup is found, press the [VALUE UP] / [VALUE DOWN] keys to
adjust the setpoints. Press the [ENTER] key to save the setpoint or the [CLEAR] key to revert back to the old setpoint.
4.1.5 SETPOINT ENTRY
In order to store any setpoints, Terminals 57 and 58 (access terminals) must be shorted (a key switch may be used for
security). There is also a Setpoint Passcode feature that may be enabled to restrict access to setpoints. The passcode
must be entered to allow the changing of setpoint values. A passcode of 0 effectively turns off the passcode feature and
only the access jumper is required for changing setpoints.
If no key is pressed for 30 minutes, access to setpoint values will be restricted until the passcode is entered again. To pre-
vent setpoint access before the 30 minutes expires, the unit may be turned off and back on, the access jumper may be
removed, or the SETPOINT ACCESS setpoint may be changed to Restricted. The passcode cannot be entered until termi-
nals 57 and 58 (access terminals) are shorted.
Setpoint changes take effect immediately, even when motor is running. It is not recommended, however, to change set-
points while the motor is running as any mistake could cause a nuisance trip.
Refer to Section 5.2.2: SETPOINT ACCESS on page 5–4 for a detailed description of the setpoint access procedure.

4 USER INTERFACES 4.2 369PC INTERFACE
4.2 369PC INTERFACE 4.2.1 HARDWARE & SOFTWARE REQUIREMENTS
The following minimum requirements must be met for the 369PC Program to properly operate on a computer.
Processor: Minimum 486, Pentium or higher recommended.
Memory: Minimum 4 MB RAM, 16 MB recommended. Minimum 540 K of conventional memory.
Hard Drive: 20 MB free space required before installation of PC program.
O/S: Minimum Windows 3.1 or Windows 3.11 for Workgroups, 4
Windows NT or Windows 95/98 (recommended). Windows 2000/ME
Windows 3.1 users must ensure that SHARE.EXE is installed.
Other: CD-ROM or internet capability to load 369PC
(if neither is available, 3.5” floppy disks can be ordered from the factory)
If 369PC is currently installed, note the path and directory name. It will be required during upgrading.
The 369PC software is included on the GE Power Management Products CD that accompanied the 369. If your PC does
not have CD-ROM capability, the software may be downloaded from the GE Power Management website at www.GEin-
dustrial.com/pm or ordered on 3.5” floppy disks from the nearest GE Power Management office.
All 369 relays come with the GE Power Management Products CD. Since this CD is essentially a “snapshot” of
the GE Power Management website, the procedures for installation from the CD and the Web are identical. How-
ever, the website will always contain the newest versions and is recommended for upgrading the software.
NOTE
4.2.2 INSTALLING 369PC
Installation of the 369PC software is accomplished as follows.

1. Ensure that Windows is running and functional on the local PC
2. Insert the GE Power Management Products CD into your CD-ROM drive or point your web browser to the GE Power
Management website at www.GEindustrial.com/pm. With Windows 95/98, the Products CD will launch the welcome
screen automatically (alternately, you may open the index.htm file in the Products CD root directory). Since the
Products CD is essentially a “snapshot” of the GE Power Management website, the procedures for installation from the
CD and the Web are identical from this point forward.
3. Click the Index By Product Name item from the main page menu and select the 369 Motor Management Relay from
the product list to open the 369 product page.
4. Click the Software menu item from the Product Resources list to proceed to the 369 software page.
5. The latest version of the 369PC software will be shown. Click the 369PC Program item to download the installation
program to your local PC. Run the installation program and follow the prompts to install the software to the desired
directory. When complete, a new GE Power Management group window will appear containing the 369PC icon.
4.2.3 UPGRADING 369PC
The following procedure determines if the currently installed version of 369PC requires upgrading:
1. Run the 369PC software.
2. Select the Help > About 369PC menu item.
3. Compare the version shown in this window with the version on the Products CD or website. If the installed version is
lower than the version on the CD or web, then 369PC needs to be upgraded.
4. To upgrade the 369PC software, follow the installation instructions shown in Section 4.2.2: INSTALLING 369PC on
page 4–3. The installation program will automatically upgrade the 369PC software.

4.2 369PC INTERFACE 4 USER INTERFACES
4.2.4 CONFIGURATION
1. Connect the computer containing the 369PC software to the relay via one of the RS485 ports or directly via the RS232
faceplate port.
2. Run the 369PC software. Once the 369PC program starts to operate, it does not automatically communicate with the
relay unless it is enabled to do so (see the Startup Mode option below). The LED status and display message shown
will match actual relay state if communications is established.
4 3. To setup communications, select Communication > Computer menu item.
Figure 4–2: COMMUNICATION / COMPUTER WINDOW

4. Set Slave Address to match that programmed into relay.
5. Set Communication Port# to the computer port connected to the relay.
6. Set Baud Rate and Parity to match that programmed into relay.
7. Set Control Type to type used.
8. Set Startup Mode to the desired startup (communicate or file)
9. Select ON to enable communications with new settings.
4.2.5 UPGRADING RELAY FIRMWARE
1. To upgrade the relay firmware, connect a computer to the 369 via the front RS232 port. Then run the 369PC program
and establish communications with the relay.
2. Select the Communication > Upgrade Firmware menu item. The following window will appear:
3. Select Yes to proceed or No to abort. Remember, all previously programmed setpoints will be erased! If you have not
already created a setpoint file, it is highly recommended that the current setpoints be saved to disk by following the
procedure in Section 4.2.6: CREATING A NEW SETPOINT FILE on page 4–5 before continuing with the firmware
upgrade.
4. The Load Firmware window will appear. Locate the firmware file to load into the relay and select OK to proceed or
Cancel to quit the firmware upgrade.

5. The Upload Firmware dialog box shown below will appear. This provides one last chance to cancel the firmware
upgrade. Select Yes to proceed, No to load a different firmware file, or Cancel to end the firmware upgrade. This will
be the last chance to cancel the firmware upgrade – all previously programmed setpoints will be erased!
6. The 369PC software automatically puts the relay into upload mode and then begin loading the file selected.
7. When loading is complete, the relay will require programming. To reload the previously programmed setpoints, see the
procedure in Section 4.2.8: DOWNLOADING A SETPOINT FILE TO THE 369 on page 4–6.
4.2.6 CREATING A NEW SETPOINT FILE
1. To create a new setpoint file, run the 369PC Program. It is not necessary to have a 369 relay connected to the com-
puter to create the file. The 369PC status bar will indicate that the program is in “Editing File” mode and “Not Commu-
nicating”.
2. From the Setpoint menu, choose the appropriate setpoints section to program, for example, S2 System Setup > Out-
put Relay Setup to enter output relay setup setpoints.
Figure 4–3: OUTPUT RELAY SETUP WINDOW

3. When you are finished programming a page, select OK and store the information to the PC’s scratchpad memory
(note: this action does store the information as a file on a disk).
4. Repeat steps 2 to 3 until all the desired setpoints are programmed.
5. Select the File > Save As menu item to store these setpoints to the disk. Enter the location and file name of the set-
point file with a file extension of ‘.369’ and select OK.
6. The file is now saved. See Section 4.2.8: DOWNLOADING A SETPOINT FILE TO THE 369 on page 4–6 for instruc-
tions on reloading this file to the 369.

4.2.7 EDITING A SETPOINT FILE
The following procedure describes how to edit setpoint files.

1. Run the 369PC software. It is not necessary to have a 369 relay connected to the computer. If 369PC is not communi-
cating with the relay, the status bar will indicate that the program is in “Editing File” mode and “Not Communicating”.
2. If the 369PC program is communicating, select the Communication > Computer menu item to launch the COMMU-
NICATION/COMPUTER window (see Figure 4–2: COMMUNICATION / COMPUTER WINDOW on page 4–4) and set
4 Communicate to Off. Click OK to turn off communications to the relay and place 369PC in “Editing File” mode.
3. Open a setpoint file by selecting the File > Open menu item. Locate the appropriate 369 setpoint files (ending with the
extension 369) and select OK.
Note that 369PC can open both 369 and 269 setpoint files. For instructions on using 269 setpoint files with the 369,
see Section 4.2.10: CONVERTING 269 SETPOINT FILES TO 369 on page 4–8.
4. From the Setpoints menu item, choose the appropriate setpoints section to program; for example, System Setup >
Output Relay Setup to edit the output relay setup setpoints. When you have finished editing a page, select OK to
store the information to the PC’s scratchpad memory (NOTE: this action does store the information as a file on a disk).
5. Repeat Step 4 until all the desired setpoints are edited. Select the File > Save As menu item to store this file to disk.
Enter the location and file name of the setpoint file with a file extension of ‘.369’.
6. The file is now saved to disk. See Section 4.2.8: DOWNLOADING A SETPOINT FILE TO THE 369 on page 4–6 for
instructions on downloading this file to the 369.
4.2.8 DOWNLOADING A SETPOINT FILE TO THE 369
The following procedure describes how to download setpoint files to the 369.
1. To download a pre-programmed setpoint file to the 369, run 369PC and establish communications with the connected
relay via the faceplate RS232 port or through the RS485 connector.
2. Select the File > Open menu item to locate the setpoint file to be loaded into the relay. Click OK to load.
3. When the file is completely loaded, the 369PC software will break communications with the connected relay and the
status bar changes to indicate “Editing File”, “Not Communicating”.
4. Select the File > Send Info To Relay menu item to download the setpoint file to the connected relay.
5. When the file is completely downloaded, the status bar will revert back to “Communicating”. The relay now contains all
the setpoints as programmed in the setpoint file.
If an attempt is made to download a setpoint file with a revision number that does not match the relay firmware
revision, the following message type will appear:
NOTE
See Section 4.2.9: UPGRADING SETPOINT FILE TO NEW REVISION on page 4–7 for instructions on upgrad-
ing the setpoint file.

4.2.9 UPGRADING SETPOINT FILE TO NEW REVISION
The following procedure describes how to upgrade setpoint file revisions. It may be necessary to upgrade the revision code
for a previously saved setpoint file when the 369 firmware is upgraded.
1. To upgrade the revision of a previously saved setpoint file, run the 369PC software and establish communications with
the 369 through the front RS232 port or through the RS485 connector.
2. Select the Actual > A6 Relay Information menu item and record the Main Software revision number (for example,
53CMB130.000, where 130 is the main revision identifier and refers to firmware version 1.30). 4
Figure 4–4: RELAY INFORMATION WINDOW

3. Select the File > Open menu item and select the setpoint file to be downloaded to the connected relay. When the file is
open, the 369PC software will be in “File Editing” mode and “Not Communicating”.
4. Select the File > Properties menu item and note the version code of the setpoint file.
Figure 4–5: SETPOINT FILE PROPERTIES

5. If the Version code (e.g. 1.4X above) differs the firmware revision (noted in step 2 as 130), select the revision code
that matches the firmware from the pull-down tab. For example: for firmware revision 53CMB170.000 and current set-
point revision as 1.61; change the Version code to 1.7X to upgrade.
369 firmware versions 1.10 and 1.12 are not compatible with newer versions. A new setpoint file must
be created!
NOTE
6. Select the File > Save menu item to save the setpoint file.
7. To download the upgraded setpoint file to the 369, see Section 4.2.8: DOWNLOADING A SETPOINT FILE TO THE
369 on page 4–6.

4.2.10 CONVERTING 269 SETPOINT FILES TO 369
The 369PC software can convert a 269 setpoint file to a 369 setpoint file. These feature makes it extremely easy to replace
a 269 with a 369.
1. Load a 269 setpoint file by selecting the File > Open menu item. Select the path where the 269 setpoint file is located
and click OK to open.
2. The following warning may appear alerting you that not all of the setpoints can be converted. Click Yes to continue.
4
3. A second warning appears alerting you to the exceptions or the setpoints that could not be converted. Take note of
these setpoints and enter the affected setpoints after conversion is complete. Click OK to continue.
4. The setpoint file has now been converted. Manual configure the setpoints that did not convert in Steps 2 and 3. Save
the file under a different name with the File > Save As menu item. Select the path to save the file and the name of the
file. Click OK when complete.
5. The setpoint can now be downloaded to the 369. Refer to 4.2.8: DOWNLOADING A SETPOINT FILE TO THE 369 on
page 4–6 for more information.
4.2.11 PRINTING
This procedure describes how to print a list of the 369 setpoints and/or actual values.
1. Start 369PC. It is not necessary to establish communications.
2. Select the File > Open menu item to open a previously saved setpoint file, or
establish communications with a connected 369 unit.
3. Select the File > Print Setup menu item. The following window will appear.
• Select Actual Values to print a list of actual values.

• Select Setpoints (All) or Setpoints (Enabled Features) to print a list of setpoints.
• Select User Definable Memory Map to print the user-definable memory map.
4. Click OK to close the Window.
5. Select the File > Print menu item to send the setpoint/actual values file to the connected printer.

4.2.12 TRENDING
Trending from the 369 can be accomplished via the 369PC. Many different parameters can be trended and graphed at
sampling periods from 1 second up to 1 hour. The parameters which can be trended by 369PC are:
Currents/Voltages
Phase Currents A,B,C Avg. Phase Current Motor Load Current Unbalance
Ground Current Voltages Vab, Vbc, Vca Van, Vbn & Vcn
Power
4
Power Factor Real Power (kW) Reactive Power (kvar) Apparent Power (kVA)
Positive Watthours Positive Varhours Negative Varhours
Temperature
Hottest Stator RTD RTDs 1 through 12 RRTDs 1 through 12
Other
Thermal Capacity Used System Frequency
1. To use the Trending function, run the 369PC program and establish communications with a connected 369 relay.
Select the Actual > Trending menu item to open the Trending window (see Figure 4–7: TRENDING VIEW on page 4–
10).
2. Press the Setup button to enter the Graph Attribute page shown below.
Figure 4–6: GRAPH ATTRIBUTE PAGE

3. Program the Graphs to display by selecting the pull down menu beside each Graph Description. Change the Color,
Style, Width, Group #, and Spline selection as desired.
4. Select the same Group # for all parameters to be scaled together.
5. Select Save to store these Graph Attributes, and OK to close this window.
6. In the Trending window, select the Sample Rate, click the check boxes of the Graphs to be displayed, and select RUN
to begin the trending sampling.
7. Print will copy the window to the system printer. More information for navigating through Trending can be found under
Help.
8. The Trending File Setup button can be used to write the graph data to a file in a standard spreadsheet format. Ensure
that the Write Trended Data to File box is checked, and that the Sample Rate is at a minimum of 5 seconds. Set the
file capacity limit to the amount of memory available for trended data.

Mode Select Level Waveform

Click on these buttons to view Displays the value of the Graph The trended data
Cursor Line 1, Cursor Line 2, or Delta (difference) at the active Cursor Line. from the 369.
values for the graph.
Check Box Buttons Cursor Lines

Toggle the Check Box to Print, Setup (to edit Graph Attribute) Move Lines: Move mouse pointer
view the desired graphs. Zoom In, Zoom Out. over the cursor line. Hold the left
mouse button and drag the
Cursor Line to the new location.
Figure 4–7: TRENDING VIEW
4.2.13 WAVEFORM CAPTURE
The 369PC software can capture waveforms from the 369 at the instant of a trip. Sixteen (16) cycles can be captured and
the trigger point can be adjusted to anywhere within the set cycles. The last 3 waveform events are viewable.
The waveforms captured are:
• Phase Currents A, B, and C
• Ground Current
• Voltages AN, BN, CN if Wye connected or AB and CB if open delta connected.
1. To use the Waveform Capture function, run 369PC and establish communications with the 369 relay.
2. Select the Actual > Waveform Capture menu item to open the Waveform Capture window (see Figure 4–8: WAVE-
FORM CAPTURE VIEW on page 4–11)
3. The waveform of phase A current of the last trip of the 369 will appear. The date and time of this trip is displayed on the
top of the window. The RED vertical line indicates the trigger point of the relay.
4. Press the Setup button to enter the Graph Attribute page.
5. Program the graphs to display by selecting the pull down menu beside each Graph Description. Change the Color,
Style, Width, Group #, and Spline selection as desired.
6. Select the same Group # for all parameters to be scaled together.
7. Select Save to store these Graph Attributes, and OK to close this window.
8. In the Waveform Capture window, click the check boxes of the Graphs to be displayed,
9. The Save button can be used to store the current image on the screen, and Open can be used to recall a saved
image. Print will copy the window to the system printer. More information for navigating through Waveform Capture can
be found under Help.

Mode Select
Click on these buttons to view Waveform
Cursor Line 1, Cursor Line 2, or Delta (difference) The waveform data
values for the graphs. from the 369.
Date/Time Trigger Agent

Trigger Displays the Date and Display the cause of
Click to manually Trigger and Time of the Trip. Trip.
Capture waveforms.
Level
Displays the value
of the graph at the
Solid Cursor Line.
Check Box Buttons Cursor Lines

Toggle the Check Box to Print, Help Move Lines: Move mouse pointer over
view the desired graphs. Save (to save graph values to a file) the Cursor Line.
Open (to open a graph file) Hole the left mouse button and drag
Zoom In, Zoom Out the Cursor Line to the new location.
Figure 4–8: WAVEFORM CAPTURE VIEW
4.2.14 PHASORS
The 369PC program can be used to view the phasor diagram of three phase currents and voltages. The phasors are for
phase voltages A, B, and C, and phase currents A, B, and C
1. To use the Phasor Metering function, run 369PC and establish communications with the 369 relay.
2. Select the Actual > Metering Data menu item then click on the Phasors tab on the Metering Data Window. The phasor
diagram and the values of voltage phasors, and current phasors are displayed.
Voltage Level Current Phasor Voltage Phasor
Displays the value and the angle Short Arrow Long Arrow
of Voltage Phasors
Current Level
Displays the value and the angle
of Current Phasors
Figure 4–9: PHASOR DATA VIEW

3. Note that the longer arrows are the voltage phasors and the shorter arrows are the current phasors. Va and Ia are the
references (i.e. zero degree phase) and the lagging angle is clockwise.

4.2.15 EVENT RECORDING
The 369PC software can be used to view the 369 Event Recorder. The Event Recorder stores motor and system informa-
tion each time an event occurs (i.e. motor trip). The Event Recorder stores up to 40 events, where EVENT01 is the oldest
event. EVENT01 is overwritten when the number of events exceeds 40.
1. To use the Event Recording function, run 369PC and establish communications with the 369 relay.
2. Select the Actual > Event Recording menu item to open the Event Recording Window. The Event Recording Window
4 displays the list of events with the most current event displayed on top.
Display Event Listing View Data

Displays the date of last event and List of Events with the most Click to display the details of
the total number of events since last recent displayed on top selected Events
clear
Event Select Buttons Clear Events

Push the All button to Push the Clear Events button to
Select all Events clear the Event Listing from memory
Push the None button to
Clear all selections
Figure 4–10: EVENT RECORDER VIEW

3. Press the View Data button to view the details of selected events. The Event Record Selector at the top of the View
Data Window allows the user to scroll through different events.
4. Select Save to store the details of the selected events to a file, Print to send the events to the system printer, and OK
to close the window.
4.2.16 TROUBLESHOOTING
This section provides some procedures for troubleshooting the 369PC when troubles are encountered within the Window-
sTM Environment, e.g. General Protection Fault (GPF), Missing Window, Problems in Opening/Saving Files, and
Application Error.
If the 369 program causes WindowsTM system errors:
• Make sure the PC computer program is installed and meets the minimum requirements.
• Make sure only one copy of 369PC is running at a given time: 369PC cannot multi-task.

5 SETPOINTS 5.1 OVERVIEW
5 SETPOINTS 5.1 OVERVIEW 5.1.1 SETPOINTS MAIN MENU
S1 SETPOINTS SETPOINT ACCESS

See page 5–4.
369 SETUP
DISPLAY PREFERENCES
See page 5–5.
369 COMMUNICATIONS
See page 5–6.
REAL TIME CLOCK

See page 5–8.
WAVEFORM CAPTURE
See page 5–8.
MESSAGE SCRATCHPAD
See page 5–9.
DEFAULT MESSAGES
See page 5–9.
CLEAR\PRESET DATA
See page 5–10.
FACTORY SERVICE
See page 5–10.
5
S2 SETPOINTS CT/VT SETUP

See page 5–11.
SYSTEM SETUP
MONITORING SETUP
See page 5–12.
OUTPUT RELAY SETUP

See page 5–16.
CONTROL FUNCTIONS
See page 5–17.
S3 SETPOINTS THERMAL MODEL

See page 5–22.
OVERLOAD PROTECTION
OVERLOAD CURVES
See page 5–23.
OVERLOAD ALARM
See page 5–31.
S4 SETPOINTS SHORT CIRCUIT

See page 5–32.
CURRENT ELEMENTS
MECHANICAL JAM
See page 5–33.

5.1 OVERVIEW 5 SETPOINTS
UNDERCURRENT
See page 5–34.
CURRENT UNBALANCE
See page 5–35.
GROUND FAULT
See page 5–36.
S5 SETPOINTS ACCELERATION TRIP

See page 5–38.
MOTOR START/INHIBITS
START INHIBIT
See page 5–39.
BACKSPIN DETECTION
See page 5–40.
S6 SETPOINTS LOCAL RTD

See page 5–41.
RTD TEMPERATURE PROTECTION
REMOTE RTD
See page 5–42.
PROTECTION
5 OPEN RTD ALARM
See page 5–44.
SHORT/LOW TEMP RTD

See page 5–45.
ALARM
LOSS OF RRTD
See page 5–45.
COMMS ALARM
S7 SETPOINTS UNDERVOLTAGE
See page 5–46.
VOLTAGE ELEMENTS
OVERVOLTAGE
See page 5–47.
PHASE REVERSAL
See page 5–48.
UNDERFREQUENCY
See page 5–48.
OVERFREQUENCY
See page 5–49.
S8 SETPOINTS LEAD POWER FACTOR

See page 5–51.
POWER ELEMENTS
LAG POWER FACTOR

See page 5–51.

5 SETPOINTS 5.1 OVERVIEW
POSITIVE REACTIVE
See page 5–52.
POWER (kvar)
NEGATIVE REACTIVE
See page 5–53.
POWER (kvar)
UNDERPOWER
See page 5–53.
REVERSE POWER
See page 5–54.
S9 SETPOINTS SPARE SWITCH

See page 5–55.
DIGITAL INPUTS
EMERGENCY RESTART
See page 5–55.
DIFFERENTIAL SWITCH
See page 5–56.
SPEED SWITCH
See page 5–56.
REMOTE RESET
See page 5–56.
5
S10 SETPOINTS ANALOG OUTPUT 1
See page 5–59.
ANALOG OUTPUTS
ANALOG OUTPUT 2
ANALOG OUTPUT 3
ANALOG OUTPUT 4
S11 SETPOINTS SIMULATION MODE

See page 5–61.
369 TESTING
PRE-FAULT SETUP
See page 5–62.
FAULT SETUP
See page 5–63.
POST-FAULT SETUP
See page 5–64.
TEST OUTPUT RELAYS

See page 5–65.
TEST ANALOG OUTPUTS

See page 5–65.

5.2 S1 369 SETUP 5 SETPOINTS
5.2 S1 369 SETUP 5.2.1 SETPOINTS PAGE 1 MENU
S1 SETPOINTS SETPOINT ACCESS

See page 5–4.
369 SETUP
DISPLAY PREFERENCES
See page 5–5.
369 COMMUNICATIONS
See page 5–6.
REAL TIME CLOCK

See page 5–8.
WAVEFORM CAPTURE
See page 5–8.
MESSAGE SCRATCHPAD
See page 5–9.
DEFAULT MESSAGES
See page 5–9.
CLEAR\PRESET DATA
See page 5–10.
FACTORY SERVICE
5 See page 5–10.
These setpoints deal with the non-protective setup and operation of the 369.
5.2.2 SETPOINT ACCESS
PATH: S1 369 SETUP SETPOINT ACCESS
SETPOINT ACCESS FRONT PANEL ACCESS: Range: Read Only, Read & Write
Read & Write
COMM ACCESS Range: Read Only, Read & Write

Read & Write
ENCRYPTED COMM Range: 8 Alphabetic characters

PASSCODE: AIKFBAIK
There are two levels of access security: Read Only and Read & Write. The access terminals (Terminals 57 and 58) must be
shorted to gain read/write access via the front panel. The Front Panel Access displays the level of access based on the
condition of the access switch.
Read Only: Setpoints and Actual Values may be viewed but, not changed.
Read & Write: Permits viewing of Actual Values as well as changing and storing of Setpoints
Communication access can be changed with the 369PC. The setpoint access menu is located in the Setpoint > S1 Setup
menu item. An access tab is shown only when communicating with a relay. To set a password, click on the Change Pass-
word button, then enter and verify a new passcode when prompted. After a passcode is entered, Setpoint Access changes
to Read Only. When setpoints are changed through 369PC during Read Only access, the passcode must be entered
before the new setpoint is stored. To allow extended write access, click Allow Write Access and enter the passcode. To
change the access level back to Read Only, click Restrict Write Access. If no setpoints are stored for longer than 30 min-
utes, or if control power is cycled, access automatically reverts to Read Only.
If the access level is Read/Write, write access to setpoints is automatic and a 0 password need not be entered. If the pass-
word is not known, consult the factory service department with the ENCRYPTED COMM PASSCODE value to be decoded.

5 SETPOINTS 5.2 S1 369 SETUP
5.2.3 DISPLAY PREFERENCES
PATH: S1 369 SETUP DISPLAY PREFERENCES
DISPLAY PREFERENCES DEFAULT MESSAGE Range: 5 to 100 s in steps of 1

CYCLE TIME: 20 s
DEFAULT MESSAGE Range: 10 to 900 s in steps of 1

TIMEOUT: 300 s
CONTRAST ADJUSTMENT: Range: 0 to 255

145 Display darkens as number is increased.
FLASH MESSAGE Range: 1-10 s in steps of 1

DURATION: 2s
TEMPERATURE DISPLAY: Range: Celsius, Fahrenheit

Celsius Shown if option R installed or RRTD added
Some of the message characteristics can be modified to suit different situations preferences setpoints.
If no keys are pressed for a period of time longer than the default message timeout, the 369 automatically displays a series
of default messages. This time can be modified to ensure messages remain on the screen long enough during program-
ming or reading of actual values. Each default message remains on the screen for the default message cycle time.
The contrast of the LCD display can be changed for different lighting conditions. If the display is unreadable (dark or light)
press the [HELP] key for 2 seconds. This will put the relay in manual contrast adjustment mode. Use the value up or down
keys to adjust the contrast level. Press the [ENTER] key when complete.
The display update interval controls how often the display is updated. If the displayed readings are fluctuating, the time may
5
be increased to smooth out the readings. Temperatures may be displayed in either Celsius or Fahrenheit degrees. RTD
setpoints are programmed in Celsius only.

5.2.4 369 COMMUNICATIONS
PATH: S1 369 SETUP 369 COMMUNICATIONS
369 COMMUNICATIONS SLAVE ADDRESS: Range: 1 to 254 in steps of 1

254
COMPUTER RS232 Range: 1200, 2400, 4800, 9600, 19200

BAUD RATE: 19200
COMPUTER RS232 Range: None, Odd, Even

PARITY: None
CHANNEL 1 RS485 Range: 1200, 2400, 4800, 9600, 19200

BAUD RATE: 19200
CHANNEL 1 RS485 Range: None, Odd, Even

PARITY: None
CHANNEL 2: RS485 Range: 1200, 2400, 4800, 9600, 19200

BAUD RATE: 19200
CHANNEL 2: RS485 Range: None, Odd, Even

PARITY: None
CHANNEL 3 Range: Modbus, RRTD

APPLICATION: Modbus
CHANNEL 3 Range: RS485, Fiber

5 CONNECTION: RS485
CHANNEL 3 RS485 Range: 1200, 2400, 4800, 9600, 19200

BAUD RATE: 19200
CHANNEL 3 RS485 Range: None, Odd, Even

PARITY: None
PROFIBUS ADDRESS: Range: 1 to 126 in steps of 1

125 Shown only in models with Profibus (Option P)
IP ADDRESS Range: 0 to 255 in steps of 1

OCTET 1: 127 Shown only in models with Modbus/TCP (Option E)



SUBNET MASK Range: 0 to 255 in steps of 1





GATEWAY ADD. Range: 0 to 255 in steps of 1




The 369 is equipped with four independent serial ports. The RS232 port is for local use and responds regardless of the pro-
grammed slave address. The rear RS485 communication ports are addressed. If an RRTD module is used in conjunction
with the 369, channel 3 must be used for communication between the two devices and the CHANNEL 3 APPLICATION set-
point must be set to "RRTD" (note that the corresponding setting on the RRTD must be set to "MODBUS"). A fiber optic port
(Option F) may be ordered for channel 3. If the channel 3 fiber optic port is used, the channel 3 RS485 connection is dis-
abled.
The RS232 port may be connected to a personal computer running 369PC. This may be used for downloading and upload-
ing setpoints files, viewing actual values, and upgrading the 369 firmware. See Section 4.2: 369PC INTERFACE on page
4–3 for details on using 369PC.
The RS485 ports support a subset of the Modbus RTU protocol. Each port must have a unique address between 1 and
254. Address 0 is the broadcast address listened to by all relays. Addresses need not be sequential; however, no two
devices can have the same address. Generally, each addition to the link uses the next higher address, starting at 1. A max-
imum of 32 devices can be daisy-chained and connected to a DCS, PLC, or PC using the RS485 ports. A repeater may be
used to allow more than 32 relays on a single link.
The Profibus-DP protocol is supported with the optional Profibus protocol interface (option P). The bus address as Profi-
5
bus-DP node is set with the PROFIBUS ADDRESS setpoint, with an address range from 1 to 126. Address 126 is used only
for commissioning purposes and should not be used to exchange user data.
The Modbus/TCP protocol is also supported with the optional Modbus/TCP protocol interface (option E).

5.2.5 REAL TIME CLOCK
PATH: S1 369 SETUP REAL TIME CLOCK
REAL TIME CLOCK SET MONTH: Range: 1 to 12 in steps of 1

01
SET DAY: Range: 1 to 31 in steps of 1

01
SET YEAR: Range: 1998 to 2097 in steps of 1

2001
SET HOUR: Range: 0 to 23 in steps of 1

00
SET MINUTE: Range: 0 to 59 in steps of 1

00
SET SECOND: Range: 0 to 59 in steps of 1

00
The time/date stamp is used to track events for diagnostic purposes. The date and time are preset but may be entered
manually. A battery backed internal clock runs continuously even when power is off. It has the same accuracy as an elec-
tronic watch approximately ±1 minute per month. It may be periodically corrected either manually through the keypad or via
the clock update command over the serial link using 369PC.
Enter the current date using two digits for the month, two digits for the day, and four digits for the year. For example, July
5 15, 2001 is entered as "07 15 2001". If entered from the keypad, the new date takes effect the moment the [ENTER] key is
pressed. Enter the current time, by using two digits for the hour in 24 hour time, two digits for the minutes, and two digits for
the seconds. If entered from the keypad, the new time will take effect the moment the [ENTER] key is pressed.
If the serial communication link is used, then all the relays can keep time in synchronization with each other. A new clock
time is pre-loaded into the memory map via the communications port by a remote computer to each relay connected on the
communications channel. The computer broadcasts (address 0) a “set clock” command to all relays. Then all relays in the
system begin timing at the exact same instant. There can be up to 100 ms of delay in receiving serial commands so the
clock time in each relay is ±100 ms, ± the absolute clock accuracy, in the PLC or PC (see Chapter 10: COMMUNICATIONS
for information on programming the time and synchronizing commands.)
PATH: S1 369 SETUP WAVEFORM CAPTURE
WAVEFORM CAPTURE TRIGGER POSITION: Range: 0 to 100% in steps of 1

50 %
Waveform capture records contain waveforms captured at the sampling rate as well as contextual information at the point
of trigger. These records are triggered by trip functions, digital input set to capture or via the PC program.
Multiple waveforms are captured simultaneously for each record: Ia, Ib, Ic, Ig, Va, Vb, and Vc.
The trigger position is programmable as a percent of the total buffer size (e.g. 10%, 50%, 75%, etc.). The trigger position
determines the number of pre and post fault cycles the record will be divided into. The relay sampling rate is 16 samples
per cycle.

5.2.7 MESSAGE SCRATCHPAD
PATH: S1 369 SETUP MESSAGE SCRATCHPAD
MESSAGE SCRATCHPAD Text 1 Range: 2 x 20 alphanumeric
Text 2 Range: 2 x 20 alphanumeric
Five different 40-character message screens can be programmed. These messages may be notes that pertain to the 369
installation. This can be useful for reminding operators to perform certain tasks. The messages are entered through the any
of the communications ports. The 369PC software should be used to enter these messages.
5.2.8 DEFAULT MESSAGES
PATH: S1 369 SETUP DEFAULT MESSAGES
DEFAULT MESSAGES DEFAULT TO CURRENT

METERING: No
Range: Yes, No
5
DEFAULT TO MOTOR Range: Yes, No
LOAD: No
DEFAULT TO DELTA Range: Yes, No

VOLTAGE METERING: No Only shown if option M installed
DEFAULT TO POWER Range: Yes, No

FACTOR: No Only shown if option M installed
DEFAULT TO POSITIVE Range: Yes, No

WATTHOURS: No Only shown if option M installed
DEFAULT TO REAL Range: Yes, No

POWER: No Only shown if option M installed
DEFAULT TO REACTIVE Range: Yes, No

POWER: No Only shown if option M installed
DEFAULT TO HOTTEST Range: Yes, No

STATOR RTD: No Only shown if option R or RRTD installed
DEFAULT TO TEXT Range: Yes, No

MESSAGE 1: No

MESSAGE 2: No

MESSAGE 3: No

MESSAGE 4: No


MESSAGE 5: No
The 369 displays a series of default messages. These default messages appear after the value for the DEFAULT MESSAGE
CYCLE TIME expires and there are no active trips, alarms or start inhibits. See Section 5.2.3: DISPLAY PREFERENCES on
page 5–5 for details on setting time delays and message durations.
The default messages can be selected from the list above including the five user definable messages from the message
scratchpad.
5.2.9 CLEAR/PRESET DATA
PATH: S1 369 SETUP CLEAR/PRESET DATA
CLEAR/PRESET DATA CLEAR ALL DATA: Range: No, Yes

No
CLEAR LAST TRIP Range: No, Yes

DATA: No
CLEAR TRIP Range: No, Yes

COUNTERS: No
CLEAR EVENT Range: No, Yes

RECORD: No Clears all 40 events
CLEAR RTD Range: No, Yes
5 MAXIMUMS: No
CLEAR PEAK DEMAND Range: No, Yes

DATA: No
CLEAR MOTOR Range: No, Yes. Clears learned acceleration time,

DATA: No starting current, thermal capacity, and statistics.
CLEAR ENERGY DATA: Range: No, Yes

NO
PRESET MWh: Range: 0 to 65535 MWh in steps of 1

0 Can be preset or cleared by storing 0
PRESET POSITIVE Range: 0 to 65535 kvarh in steps of 1

kvarh: 0 Can be preset or cleared by storing 0
PRESET NEGATIVE Range: 0 to 65535 kvarh in steps of 1

kvarh: 0 Can be preset or cleared by storing 0
PRESET DIGITAL Range: 0 to 65535 in steps of 1

COUNTER: 0 Can be preset or cleared by storing 0
These commands may be used to clear various historical data. This is useful on new installations or to preset information
on existing installations where new equipment has been installed. The PRESET DIGITAL COUNTER setpoint appears only if
one of the digital inputs has been configured as a digital input counter.
5.2.10 FACTORY SERVICE
PATH: S1 369 SETUP FACTORY SERVICE
FACTORY SERVICE FACTORY SERVICE Range: 0 to 65535

PASSCODE: 0
This section is for use by GE Power Management personnel for testing and calibration purposes.

5 SETPOINTS 5.3 S2 SYSTEM SETUP
5.3 S2 SYSTEM SETUP 5.3.1 SETPOINTS PAGE 2 MENU
S2 SETPOINTS CT/VT SETUP

See page 5–11.
SYSTEM SETUP
MONITORING SETUP
See page 5–12.
OUTPUT RELAY SETUP

See page 5–16.
CONTROL FUNCTIONS
See page 5–17.
These setpoints are critical to the operation of the 369 protective and metering features and elements. Most protective ele-
ments are based on the information input for the CT/VT SETUP and OUTPUT RELAY SETUP. Additional monitoring alarms
and control functions of the relay are also set here.
5.3.2 CT/VT SETUP
PATH: S2 SYSTEM SETUP CT/VT SETUP
CT/VT SETUP PHASE CT PRIMARY: Range: 1 to 5000 in steps of 1

500
Range: 1 to 5000 in steps of 1
MOTOR FLA:
10 5
GROUND CT TYPE: Range: None, 5A secondary, 1A secondary, 50:0.025
5
GROUND CT PRIMARY: Range: 1 to 5000 in steps of 1

100:5 Only shown for 5A and 1A secondary CT
VT CONNECTION TYPE: Range: None, Open Delta, Wye

None Only shown if option M or B installed
VT RATIO: Range: 1.00:1 to 240.00:1

35:1 Not shown if VT Connection Type set to None
MOTOR RATED VOLTAGE: Range: 100 to 20000 in steps of 1

4160 Not shown if VT Connection Type set to None
NOMINAL FREQUENCY: Range: 50, 60

60 Hz
SYSTEM PHASE Range: ABC, ACB

SEQUENCE: ABC Not shown if VT Connection Type set to None
PHASE CT PRIMARY:
Enter the phase CT primary here. The phase CT secondary (1 A or 5A) is determined by terminal connection to the 369.
The phase CT should be chosen such that the motor FLA is between 50% and 100% of the phase CT primary. Ideally the
motor FLA should be as close to 100% of phase CT primary as possible, never more. The phase CT class or type should
also be chosen such that the CT can handle the maximum potential fault current with the attached burden without having its
output saturate. Information on how to determine this if required is available in Section 7.4: CT SPECIFICATION AND
SELECTION on page 7–7.
MOTOR FLA:
The motor FLA (full load amps or full load current) must be entered. This value may be taken from the motor nameplate or
motor data sheets.

5.3 S2 SYSTEM SETUP 5 SETPOINTS
GROUND CT TYPE / GROUND CT PRIMARY:

The GROUND CT TYPE and GROUND CT PRIMARY (if 5 A or 1 A secondary) must be entered here. For high resistance
grounded systems, sensitive ground detection is possible with the 50:0.025 CT. On solidly or low resistance grounded sys-
tems where fault current can be quite high, a 1 A or 5 A CT should be used for either zero-sequence (core balance) or
residual ground sensing. If a residual connection is used with the phase CTs, the phase CT primary must also be entered
for the ground CT primary. As with the phase CTs the type of ground CT should be chosen to handle all potential fault levels
without saturating.
VT CONNECTION TYPE / VT RATIO / MOTOR RATED VOLTAGE:
These voltage related setpoints are visible only if the 369 has metering installed.
The manner in which the voltage transformers are connected must be entered here or none if VTs are not used. The VT
turns ratio must be chosen such that the secondary voltage of the VTs is between 40 and 240 V when the primary is at
motor nameplate voltage. All voltage protection features are programmed as a percent of motor nameplate or rated voltage
which represents the rated motor design voltage line to line.
For example: If the motor nameplate voltage is 4160 V and the VTs are 4160/120 open-delta, program the following:
VT CONNECTION TYPE: Open Delta
VT RATIO: 34.67:1
MOTOR RATED VOLTAGE: 4160 V
NOMINAL FREQUENCY:
Enter the nominal system frequency here. This setpoint allows the 369 to determine the internal sampling rate for maximum
accuracy. Frequency is normally determined from the Va voltage input. If however this voltage drops below the minimum
voltage threshold the Ia current input will be used.
SYSTEM PHASE SEQUENCE:
5 If the phase sequence for a given system is ACB rather than the standard ABC the phase sequence may be changed. This
setpoint allows the 369 to properly calculate phase reversal and power quantities and is only visible if the 369 has metering
installed.
5.3.3 MONITORING SETUP
a) TRIP COUNTER
PATH: S2 SYSTEM SETUP MONITORING SETUP TRIP COUNTER
MONITORING SETUP TRIP COUNTER
TRIP COUNTER Range: Off, Latched, Unlatched

ALARM: Off
ASSIGN ALARM Range: None, Alarm, Aux1, Aux2, or

combinations of them
RELAYS: Alarm
ALARM PICKUP LEVEL: Range: 1 to 50000 in steps of 1

25 Trips
TRIP COUNTER ALARM Range: On, Off

EVENTS: Off
When the Trip Counter is enabled and the alarm pickup level is reached, an alarm will occur. To reset the alarm the trip
counter must be cleared (see Section 5.2.9: CLEAR/PRESET DATA on page 5–10 for details) or the pickup level increased
and the reset key pressed (if a latched alarm).
The trip counter alarm can be used to monitor and alarm when a predefined number of trips occur. This would then prompt
the operator or supervisor to investigate the causes of the trips that have occurred. Details of individual trip counters can be
found in the Motor Statistics section of Actual Values page 4 (see Section 6.5.3: MOTOR STATISTICS on page 6–17).

b) STARTER FAILURE
PATH: S2 SYSTEM SETUP MONITORING SETUP STARTER FAILURE
STARTER FAILURE
STARTER FAILER Range: Off, Latched, Unlatched

ALARM: Off
STARTER TYPE: Range: Breaker, Contactor

Breaker

RELAYS: Alarm combinations of them
STARTER FAILURE Range: 10 to 1000 ms in steps of 10

DELAY:100 ms
STARTER FAILURE Range: ON, OFF

ALARM EVENTS:
If the Starter Failure alarm feature is enabled, any time the 369 initiates a trip, the 369 will monitor the Starter Status input
(if assigned to "Spare Switch" in S9 DIGITAL INPUTS) and the motor current. If the starter status contacts do not change
state or motor current does not drop to zero after the programmed time delay, an alarm will occur. The time delay should be
slightly longer than the breaker or contactor operating time. In the event that an alarm does occur, if Breaker was chosen as
the starter type, the alarm will be Breaker Failure. If on the other hand, Contactor was chosen for starter type, the alarm will
5
be Welded Contactor.
c) DEMAND:
PATH: S2 SYSTEM SETUP MONITORING SETUP CURRENT DEMAND
STARTER FAILURE
CURRENT DEMAND
CURRENT DEMAND Range: 5 to 90 min in steps of 1

PERIOD: 15 min
CURRENT DEMAND Range: Off, Latched, Unlatched

ALARM: Off

CURRENT DEMAND Range: 1 to 65000 A in steps of 1

ALARM LEVEL: 100 A
CURRENT DEMAND Range: On, Off

ALARM EVENTS: Off
kW DEMAND

kW DEMAND Range: 5 to 90 min in steps of 1

PERIOD: 15 min
kW DEMAND Range: Off, Latched, Unlatched

ALARM: Off

kW DEMAND ALARM Range: 1 to 50000 kW in steps of 1

LEVEL: 100 kW
kW DEMAND ALARM Range: On, Off

EVENTS: Off
kvar DEMAND
kvar DEMAND Range: 5 to 90 min. in steps of 1

PERIOD: 15 min
kvar DEMAND Range: Off, Latched, Unlatched

ALARM: Off

kvar DEMAND ALARM Range: 1 to 50000 in steps of 1

5 LEVEL: 100 kvar
kvar DEMAND ALARM Range: On, Off

EVENTS: Off
kVA DEMAND
kVA DEMAND Range: 5 to 90 min in steps of 1

PERIOD: 15 min
kVA DEMAND Range: Off, Latched, Unlatched

ALARM: Off

kVA DEMAND ALARM Range: 1 to 50000 in steps of 1

LEVEL: 100 kVA
kVA DEMAND ALARM Range: On, Off

EVENTS: Off
The 369 can measure the demand of the motor for several parameters (current, kW, kvar, kVA). The demand values may
be of interest for energy management programs where processes may be altered or scheduled to reduce overall demand
on a feeder. An alarm will occur if the limit of any of the enabled demand elements is reached.
Demand is calculated in the following manner. Every minute, an average magnitude is calculated for current, +kW, +kvar,
and kVA based on samples taken every 5 seconds. These values are stored in a FIFO (First In, First Out buffer). The size
of the buffer is determined by the period selected for the setpoint. The average value of the buffer contents is calculated
and stored as the new demand value every minute. Demand for real and reactive power is only positive quantities (+kW
and +kvar).

1 N
DEMAND = ---- ∑ Average ( n )
Nn = 1
where: N = programmed demand period in minutes and n = time in minutes
ROLLING DEMAND (15 min. window)
160
140
120
100
80
60
40
20
0
t=0 t+10 t+20 t+30 t+40 t+50 t+60 t+70 t+80 t+90 t+100
TIME
d) SELF-TEST RELAY ASSIGNMENT:

PATH: S2 SYSTEM SETUP MONITORING SETUP TRIP COUNTER

5
STARTER FAILURE
CURRENT DEMAND
kW DEMAND
kvar DEMAND
kVA DEMAND
SELF TEST MODE
RELAYS: None Range: None, Trip, Aux1, Aux2, or combinations

of them
The 369 performs self-diagnostics of the hardware circuitry. The relay programmed as the Self-Test relay activates upon a
failure of any self-diagnostic tests.

5.3.4 OUTPUT RELAY SETUP
PATH: S2 SYSTEM SETUP OUTPUT RELAY SETUP
OUTPUT RELAY SETUP TRIP RELAY RESET Range: All Resets, Remote Only, Local Only
MODE: All Resets
TRIP RELAY Range: FS (=failsafe), NFS (=non-failsafe)

OPERATION: FS
AUX1 RELAY RESET Range: All Resets, Remote Only, Local Only
MODE: All Resets
AUX1 RELAY Range: FS (=failsafe), NFS (=non-failsafe)

OPERATION: NFS
AUX2 RELAY RESET Range: All Resets, Remote Only, Local Only
MODE: All Resets
AUX2 RELAY Range: FS (=failsafe), NFS (=non-failsafe)

OPERATION: NFS
ALARM RELAY RESET Range: All Resets, Remote Only, Local Only
MODE: All Resets
ALARM RELAY Range: FS (failsafe), NFS (=non-failsafe)

OPERATION: NFS
5 TRIP / AUX1 / AUX2 / ALARM RELAY RESET MODE:

A latched relay (caused by a protective elements alarm or trip) may be reset at any time, providing that the condition that
caused the relay operation is no longer present. Unlatched elements will automatically reset when the condition that
caused them has cleared. Reset location is defined in the following table.
RESET MODE RESET PERFORMED VIA
All Resets keypad, digital input, communications
Remote Only digital input, communications
Local Only keypad
TRIP / AUX1 / AUX2 / ALARM OPERATION:

These setpoints allow the choice of relay output operation to fail-safe or non-failsafe. Relay latchcode however, is defined
individually for each protective element.
Failsafe operation causes the output relay to be energized in its normal state and de-energized when activated by a protec-
tion element. A failsafe relay will also change state (if not already activated by a protection element) when control power is
removed from the 369. Conversely a non-failsafe relay is de-energized in its normal non-activated state and will not change
state when control power is removed from the 369 (if not already activated by a protection element).
The choice of failsafe or non-failsafe operation is usually determined by the motor’s application. In situations where the pro-
cess is more critical than the motor, non-failsafe operation is typically programmed. In situations where the motor is more
critical than the process, failsafe operation is programmed.

5.3.5 CONTROL FUNCTIONS
PATH: S2 SYSTEM SETUP CONTROL FUNCTIONS
CONTROL FUNCTIONS SERIAL COMMUNICATION

CONTROL
SERIAL COMMUNICATION Range: On, Off

CONTROL: Off
ASSIGN START Range: None, Alarm, Aux1, Aux2 or

combinations of them
CONTROL RELAYS: Aux1
REDUCED VOLTAGE
See page 5–17.
AUTORESTART
See page 5–19.
SERIAL COMMUNICATION CONTROL:

If enabled, the motor may be remotely started and stopped via Modbus® communications. Refer to the Modbus Protocol
Reference Guide (available from the Modbus website at www.modbus.org) for details on sending commands (function
code 5). When a Stop command is sent the Trip relay will activate for 1 second to complete the trip coil circuit for a breaker
application or break the coil circuit for a contactor application. When a Start command is issued the relay assigned for start-
ing control will activate for 1 second to complete the close coil circuit for a breaker application or complete the coil circuit for
5
a contactor application.
The Serial Communication Control functions may also be used to reset the relay and activate a waveform capture. Refer to
the Modbus Protocol Reference Guide (available from the Modbus website at www.modbus.org) for more information.
5.3.6 REDUCED VOLTAGE START TIMER
PATH: S2 SYSTEM SETUP CONTROL FUNCTIONS REDUCED VOLTAGE
REDUCED VOLTAGE REDUCED VOLTAGE Range: On, Off

STARTING: Off
ASSIGN CONTROL Range: None, Alarm, Aux1, Aux2, Alarm & Aux1, Alarm
& Aux2, Aux1 & Aux2, Alarm & Aux1 & Aux2
RELAYS: None
TRANSITION ON Range: Current Only, Current or Timer, Current and

Current Only Timer
REDUCED VOLTAGE Range: 25 to 300% FLA in steps of 1

START LEVEL: 100%FLA
REDUCED VOLTAGE Range: 1 to 500 s in steps of 1

START TIMER: 200 s
ASSIGN TRIP RELAYS: Range: None, Trip, Aux1, Aux2, Trip & Aux1, Trip &
Aux2, Aux1 & Aux2, Trip & Aux1&Aux2
Trip
The 369 is capable of controlling the transition of a reduced voltage starter from reduced to full voltage. That transition may
be based on "Current Only", "Current and Timer", or "Current or Timer" (whichever comes first). When the 369 measures
the transition of no motor current to some value of motor current, a 'Start' is assumed to be occurring (typically current will
rise quickly to a value in excess of FLA, e.g. 3 × FLA). At this point, the REDUCED VOLTAGE START TIMER will be initialized
with the programmed value in seconds.

• If "Current Only" is selected, when the motor current falls below the programmed Transition Level, transition will be ini-
tiated by activating the assigned output relay for 1 second. If the timer expires before that transition is initiated, an
Incomplete Sequence Trip will occur activating the assigned trip relay(s).
• If "Current or Timer" is selected, when the motor current falls below the programmed Transition Level, transition will be
initiated by activating the assigned output relay for 1 second. If the timer expires before that transition is initiated, the
transition will be initiated regardless.
• If "Current and Timer" is selected, when the motor current falls below the programmed Transition Level and the timer
expires, transition will be initiated by activating the assigned output relay for 1 second. If the timer expires before cur-
rent falls below the Transition Level, an Incomplete Sequence Trip will occur activating the assigned trip relay(s).
369 STOP START

BLOCK TRIP REDUCED VOLTAGE
CONTACTOR
CC1
369
R3 Aux.
CC1 SEAL-IN
CC2
Figure 5–1: REDUCED VOLTAGE START CONTACTOR CONTROL CIRCUIT
5
When the current falls below
the Transition Level and/or the
Timer expires, the Auxiliary Relay
Motor Amps activates for 1 second
(% FLA)
3 x FLA
Transition
Level
FLA
time
Transition Time
signifies
Open Transition
Figure 5–2: REDUCED VOLTAGE STARTING CURRENT CHARACTERISTIC

If this feature is used, Starter Status Switch input must be either from a common control contact or a parallel
combination of Auxiliary ‘a’ contacts or a series combination of Auxiliary ‘b’ contacts from the reduced voltage
contactor and the full voltage contactor. Once transition is initiated, the 369 will assume the motor is still running
NOTE for at least 2 seconds. This will prevent the 369 from recognizing an additional start if motor current goes to zero
during an open transition.

51
52
Figure 5–3: REDUCED VOLTAGE STARTER AUXILIARY A STATUS INPUT
51
52
Figure 5–4: REDUCED VOLTAGE STARTER AUXILIARY B STATUS INPUT
5.3.7 AUTORESTART
PATH: S2 SYSTEM SETUP CONTROL FUNCTIONS AUTORESTART
AUTORESTART AUTORESTART ENABLED: Range: Yes, No

No
5
TOTAL RESTARTS: Range: 0 to 20000 in steps of 1
1
RESTART DELAY Range: 0 to 20000 s in steps of 1

DELAY: 0 s
PROGRESSIVE DELAY Range: 0 to 20000 s in steps of 1

DELAY: 0 s
HOLD DELAY Range: 0 to 20000 s in steps of 1

DELAY: 0 s
BUS VALID ENABLED: Range: Yes, No

No
BUS VALID LEVEL: Range: 15 to 100% of Motor Rated Voltage, in steps of 1

100%
The 369 can be configured to automatically restart a motor in the event of a trip. When enabled, a restart timer will be
loaded with the programmed timer values and trigger a designated output contact to operate when the timer expires. This
contact can be wired with OR logic in the start circuit of the motor. This feature is very useful in remote pumping applica-
tions where the pumping station may be unmanned and an autoreclosure of contacts or breakers is required.
The autorestart implementation requires specific criteria to be present to allow motor restarting. The 369 will not attempt to
restart after any Short Circuit or Ground Fault trip, and only one autorestart is attempted after an Overload trip, provided the
Single Shot Restart feature is enabled. In this mode, the 369 start inhibit will be active for the lockout time upon the second
consecutive Overload trip. The 369 also requires that TRIP RELAY RESET MODE be set to "Remote Only" or "All Resets".
Upon determination of a successful restart attempt, the SERIAL COMMUNICATION CONTROL must be enabled and an output
contact assigned in the ASSIGNED START CONTROL RELAYS setpoint (these settings are found in S2 SYSTEM SETUP \ CON-
TROL FUNCTIONS). The 369 uses the logic shown in Figure 5–5: AUTORESTART LOGIC on the following page to deter-
mine restart conditions.
The Autorestart Delay Timer is calculated as follows:
Total Delay = RESTART DELAY + (total restarts × PROGRESSIVE DELAY) + HOLD DELAY

The base delay time is set with the RESTART DELAY setpoint. The PROGRESSIVE DELAY setpoint is used to progressively
add time to the total restart delay based upon the number of restarts. The HOLD DELAY is used to sequentially stagger
restarts of a series of motors on a bus in the event of the entire bus being brought online. For example, four motors on a
bus may have settings of 60, 120, 180, and 240 seconds, respectively. In the event of a common fault, the motors are
brought online in sequence. The minimizes the effect of voltage sag on the bus when each motor is brought online.
The last criteria for a valid restart attempt is determined by the BUS VALID ENABLED/LEVELS setpoints. When enabled, the
369 determines the average line voltage at the motor prior to restart and blocks an attempt if the voltage is below the BUS
VALID LEVEL setpoint. The setpoint is in terms of the S2 SYSTEM SETUP \ CT/VT SETUP \ MOTOR RATED VOLTAGE setpoint.
The 369 only examines this threshold at the instant of issuing a restart command to the designated output contact. This
gives time for the bus to settle after the trip has occurred. This setpoint is only available if the Metering Option (M) is
enabled.
Motor Running
No
Trip
Yes
AutoRestart Change Trip Contact

No Reset Attempt Yes
Enabled State
Yes No
5
Cause of Trip NOT
Short Circuit or No
Ground Fault
Yes
Restart Attempts
Cause of Trip =
No > Max Restarts Yes Abort Restart
Thermal Overload Setting
Yes No
Autorestart_Delay =
(Restart Attempts x
One Shot Restart On Progressive Timer Delay)+
Overload Enabled Restart Delay +
Hold Timer Delay
No
Yes
Yes AutoRestart Delay
Abort Restart
Active
No
No
Bus Valid Enabled No Any Trip Active Yes Abort Restart

Second Attempt on
Overload Restart
Yes
No
Yes
Any Trip Active

Abort Restart and load No Close Start Relay
or Bus Invalid
Overload Start Inhibit
Timer
Yes
Figure 5–5: AUTORESTART LOGIC

5 SETPOINTS 5.4 S3 OVERLOAD PROTECTION
5.4 S3 OVERLOAD PROTECTION 5.4.1 SETPOINTS PAGE 3 MENU
S3 SETPOINTS THERMAL MODEL

See page 5–22.
OVERLOAD PROTECTION
OVERLOAD CURVES
See page 5–23.
OVERLOAD ALARM
See page 5–31.
Heat is one of the principle enemies of motor life. When a motor is specified, the purchaser communicates to the manufac-
turer what the loading conditions, duty cycle, environment and pertinent information about the driven load such as starting
torque. The manufacturer then provides a stock motor or builds a motor that should have a reasonable life under those con-
ditions. The purchaser should request all safe stall, acceleration and running thermal limits for all motors they receive in
order to effectively program the 369.
Motor thermal limits are dictated by the design of the stator and the rotor. Motors have three modes of operation: locked
rotor or stall (rotor is not turning), acceleration (rotor is coming up to speed), and running (rotor turns at near synchronous
speed). Heating occurs in the motor during each of these conditions in very distinct ways. Typically, during motor starting,
locked rotor, and acceleration conditions, the motor is rotor limited. That is, the rotor approaches its thermal limit before the
stator. Under locked rotor conditions, voltage is induced in the rotor at line frequency, 50 or 60 Hz. This voltage causes a
current to flow in the rotor, also at line frequency, and the heat generated (I2R) is a function of the effective rotor resistance.
At 50 / Hz, the rotor cage reactance causes the current to flow at the outer edges of the rotor bars. The effective resistance
of the rotor is therefore at a maximum during a locked rotor condition as is rotor heating. When the motor is running at rated
speed, the voltage induced in the rotor is at a low frequency (approximately 1 Hz) and therefore, the effective resistance of
the rotor is reduced quite dramatically. During running overloads, the motor thermal limit is typically dictated by stator
5
parameters. Some special motors might be all stator or all rotor limited. During acceleration, the dynamic nature of the
motor slip dictates that rotor impedance is also dynamic, and a third overload thermal limit characteristic is necessary.
Typical thermal limit curves are shown below. The motor starting characteristic is shown for a high inertia load at 80% volt-
age. If the motor started quicker, the distinct characteristics of the thermal limit curves would not be required and the run-
ning overload curve would be joined with locked rotor safe stall times to produce a single overload curve.
400
HIGH
300
INERTIA
MOTOR RUNNING OVERLOAD
200
100 A,B,AND C ARE THE

80 ACCELERATION THERMAL LIMIT
60 CURVES AT 100%, 90%, AND
80%VOLTAGE, REPECTIVELY
40
TIME-SECONDS
C
B
20
A
G
10 F
8 E
6
4
E,F, AND G ARE THE
SAFE STALL THERMAL LIMIT
2 TIMES AT 100%, 90%, AND
80%VOLTAGE, REPECTIVELY
1
0 100 200 300 400 500 600 % CURRENT
806827A1.CDR
Figure 5–6: TYPICAL TIME-CURRENT AND THERMAL LIMIT CURVES (ANSI/IEEE C37.96)

5.4 S3 OVERLOAD PROTECTION 5 SETPOINTS
5.4.2 THERMAL MODEL
PATH: S3 OVERLOAD PROTECTION THERMAL MODEL
THERMAL MODEL OVERLOAD PICKUP Range: 1.01 to 1.25 in steps of 0.01

LEVEL: 1.01 x FLA
THERMAL CAPACITY Range: Off, Latched, Unlatched

ALARM: Off
ASSIGN TC ALARM Range: None, Alarm, Aux1, Aux2, or combinations of

RELAYS: Alarm them
TC ALARM LEVEL: Range: 1 to 100% in steps of 1

75 % Used
THERMAL CAPACITY Range: No, Yes

ALARM EVENTS: No
ASSIGN TC TRIP Range: None, Trip, Aux1, Aux2 or combinations of them

RELAYS: Trip (TC trip always on and latched)
ENABLE UNBALANCE Range: No, Yes

BIAS OF TC: No
UNBALANCE BIAS Range: Learned, 1 to 29 in steps of 1

K FACTOR: Learned Only shown if Unbalance Bias is enabled
HOT/COLD SAFE STALL Range: 0.01 to 1.00 in steps of 0.01

5 RATIO: 1.00
ENABLE LEARNED COOL Range: No, Yes

TIME: No
RUNNING COOL TIME Range: 1 to 500 min. in steps of 1

CONSTANT: 15 min. Not shown if Learned Cool time is enabled
STOPPED COOL TIME Range: 1 to 500 min. in steps of 1

CONSTANT: 30 min. Not shown if Learned Cool time is enabled
ENABLE RTD BIASING: Range: No, Yes

No
RTD BIAS MINIMUM: Range: 1to RTD BIAS MID POINT

40 °C Only shown if RTD biasing is enabled
RTD BIAS MID POINT: Range: RTD BIAS MINIMUM to MAXIMUM

RTD BIAS MAXIMUM: Range: RTD BIAS MID POINT to 200

The primary protective function of the 369 is the thermal model. It consists of five key elements: the overload curve and
pickup level, unbalance biasing, motor cooling time constants, and temperature biasing based on Hot/Cold motor informa-
tion and measured stator RTD temperature.
The 369 integrates both stator and rotor heating into one model. Motor heating is reflected in the THERMAL CAPACITY
USED actual value. If stopped for a long period of time, the motor will be at ambient temperature and THERMAL CAPACITY
USED should be zero. If the motor is in overload, a trip will occur once the thermal capacity used reaches 100%. Insulation
does not immediately melt when a motor’s thermal limit is exceeded. Rather, the rate of insulation degradation reaches a
point where the motor life will be significantly reduced if the condition persists. The thermal capacity used alarm may be
used as a warning of an impending overload trip.

5.4.3 OVERLOAD CURVES
PATH: S3 OVERLOAD PROTECTION OVERLOAD CURVES
OVERLOAD CURVE SELECT CURVE STYLE: Range: Standard, Custom

Standard
STANDARD OVERLOAD Range: 1 to 15 in steps of 1

CURVE NUMBER: 4 Only seen if curve style is selected as Standard
TIME TO TRIP AT Range: 0 to 32767 s in steps of 1

1.01xFLA: 17415s Only seen if curve style is Custom

1.05xFLA: 3415 s Only seen if curve style is Custom




TIME TO TRIP AT
1.50xFLA: 280 s
Range: 0 to 32767 s in steps of 1
Only seen if curve style is Custom 5




















8.00xFLA: 6 S Only seen if curve style is Custom

Only seen if curve style is Custom
5 10.0xFLA: 6 s
TIME TO TRIP AT

a) STANDARD OVERLOAD CURVE:

The overload curve accounts for motor heating during stall, acceleration, and running in both the stator and the rotor. The
OVERLOAD PICKUP setpoint dictates where the running overload curve begins as the motor enters an overload condition.
This is useful for service factor motors as it allows the pickup level to be defined. The curve is effectively cut off at current
values below this pickup.
Motor thermal limits consist of three distinct parts based on the three conditions of operation, locked rotor or stall, accelera-
tion, and running overload. Each of these curves may be provided for both a hot motor and a cold motor. A hot motor is
defined as one that has been running for a period of time at full load such that the stator and rotor temperatures have set-
tled at their rated temperature. A cold motor is defined as a motor that has been stopped for a period of time such that the
stator and rotor temperatures have settled at ambient temperature. For most motors, the distinct characteristics of the
motor thermal limits are formed into one smooth homogeneous curve. Sometimes only a safe stall time is provided. This is
acceptable if the motor has been designed conservatively and can easily perform its required duty without infringing on the
thermal limit. In this case, the protection can be conservative and process integrity is not compromised. If a motor has been
designed very close to its thermal limits when operated as required, then the distinct characteristics of the thermal limits
become important.
The 369 overload curve can take one of two formats: Standard or Custom Curve. Regardless of which curve style is
selected, the 369 will retain thermal memory in the form of a register called THERMAL CAPACITY USED. This register is
updated every 100 ms using the following equation:
100 ms
TCused t = TCused t – 100 ms + ------------------------------- × 100%
time_to_trip
where: time_to_trip = time taken from the overload curve at Ieq as a function of FLA.
The overload protection curve should always be set slightly lower than the thermal limits provided by the manufacturer. This
will ensure that the motor is tripped before the thermal limit is reached.

If the motor starting times are well within the safe stall times, it is recommended that the 369 Standard Overload Curves be
used. The standard overload curves are a series of 15 curves with a common curve shape based on typical motor thermal
limit curves (see Figure 5–7: 369 STANDARD OVERLOAD CURVES on page 5–25 and Figure 5–7: 369 STANDARD
OVERLOAD CURVES on page 5–25).
100000
10000
TIME IN SECONDS
1000
5
100
x15
10
x1
1.00
0.10 1.00 10 100 1000
MULTIPLE OF FULL LOAD AMPS

840719A1.CDR
Figure 5–7: 369 STANDARD OVERLOAD CURVES

Table 5–1: 369 STANDARD OVERLOAD CURVES

PICKUP STANDARD CURVE MULTIPLIERS
LEVEL
(× FLA) ×1 ×2 ×3 ×4 ×5 ×6 ×7 ×8 ×9 × 10 × 11 × 12 × 13 × 14 × 15
1.01 4353.6 8707.2 13061 17414 21768 26122 30475 34829 39183 43536 47890 52243 56597 60951 65304
1.05 853.71 1707.4 2561.1 3414.9 4268.6 5122.3 5976.0 6829.7 7683.4 8537.1 9390.8 10245 11098 11952 12806
1.10 416.68 833.36 1250.0 1666.7 2083.4 2500.1 2916.8 3333.5 3750.1 4166.8 4583.5 5000.2 5416.9 5833.6 6250.2
1.20 198.86 397.72 596.58 795.44 994.30 1193.2 1392.0 1590.9 1789.7 1988.6 2187.5 2386.3 2585.2 2784.1 2982.9
1.30 126.80 253.61 380.41 507.22 634.02 760.82 887.63 1014.4 1141.2 1268.0 1394.8 1521.6 1648.5 1775.3 1902.1
1.40 91.14 182.27 273.41 364.55 455.68 546.82 637.96 729.09 820.23 911.37 1002.5 1093.6 1184.8 1275.9 1367.0
1.50 69.99 139.98 209.97 279.96 349.95 419.94 489.93 559.92 629.91 699.90 769.89 839.88 909.87 979.86 1049.9
1.75 42.41 84.83 127.24 169.66 212.07 254.49 296.90 339.32 381.73 392.15 466.56 508.98 551.39 593.81 636.22
2.00 29.16 58.32 87.47 116.63 145.79 174.95 204.11 233.26 262.42 291.58 320.74 349.90 379.05 408.21 437.37
2.25 21.53 43.06 64.59 86.12 107.65 129.18 150.72 172.25 193.78 215.31 236.84 258.37 279.90 301.43 322.96
2.50 16.66 33.32 49.98 66.64 83.30 99.96 116.62 133.28 149.94 166.60 183.26 199.92 216.58 233.24 249.90
2.75 13.33 26.65 39.98 53.31 66.64 79.96 93.29 106.62 119.95 133.27 146.60 159.93 173.25 186.58 199.91
3.00 10.93 21.86 32.80 43.73 54.66 65.59 76.52 87.46 98.39 109.32 120.25 131.19 142.12 153.05 163.98
3.25 9.15 18.29 27.44 36.58 45.73 54.87 64.02 73.16 82.31 91.46 100.60 109.75 118.89 128.04 137.18
3.50 7.77 15.55 23.32 31.09 38.87 46.64 54.41 62.19 69.96 77.73 85.51 93.28 101.05 108.83 116.60
3.75 6.69 13.39 20.08 26.78 33.47 40.17 46.86 53.56 60.25 66.95 73.64 80.34 87.03 93.73 100.42
4.00 5.83 11.66 17.49 23.32 29.15 34.98 40.81 46.64 52.47 58.30 64.13 69.96 75.79 81.62 87.45
4.25 5.12 10.25 15.37 20.50 25.62 30.75 35.87 41.00 46.12 51.25 56.37 61.50 66.62 71.75 76.87
5 4.50
4.75
4.54
4.06
9.08
8.11
13.63
12.17
18.17
16.22
22.71
20.28
27.25
24.33
31.80
28.39
36.34
32.44
40.88
36.50
45.42
40.55
49.97
44.61
54.51
48.66
59.05
52.72
63.59
56.77
68.14
60.83
5.00 3.64 7.29 10.93 14.57 18.22 21.86 25.50 29.15 32.79 36.43 40.08 43.72 47.36 51.01 54.65
5.50 2.99 5.98 8.97 11.96 14.95 17.94 20.93 23.91 26.90 29.89 32.88 35.87 38.86 41.85 44.84
6.00 2.50 5.00 7.49 9.99 12.49 14.99 17.49 19.99 22.48 24.98 27.48 29.98 32.48 34.97 37.47
6.50 2.12 4.24 6.36 8.48 10.60 12.72 14.84 16.96 19.08 21.20 23.32 25.44 27.55 29.67 31.79
7.00 1.82 3.64 5.46 7.29 9.11 10.93 12.75 14.57 16.39 18.21 20.04 21.86 23.68 25.50 27.32
7.50 1.58 3.16 4.75 6.33 7.91 9.49 11.08 12.66 14.24 15.82 17.41 18.99 20.57 22.15 23.74
8.00 1.39 2.78 4.16 5.55 6.94 8.33 9.71 11.10 12.49 13.88 15.27 16.65 18.04 19.43 20.82
10.00 1.39 2.78 4.16 5.55 6.94 8.33 9.71 11.10 12.49 13.88 15.27 16.65 18.04 19.43 20.82
15.00 1.39 2.78 4.16 5.55 6.94 8.33 9.71 11.10 12.49 13.88 15.27 16.65 18.04 19.43 20.82
20.00 1.39 2.78 4.16 5.55 6.94 8.33 9.71 11.10 12.49 13.88 15.27 16.65 18.04 19.43 20.82
Above 8.0 x Pickup, the trip time for 8.0 is used. This prevents the overload curve from acting as an
instantaneous element.
NOTE
The Standard Overload Curves equation is:
curve_multiplier × 2.2116623
time_to_trip = ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
2
0.02530337 × ( pickup – 1 ) + 0.05054758 × ( pickup – 1 )

b) CUSTOM OVERLOAD CURVE:

If the motor starting current begins to infringe on the thermal damage curves, it may be necessary to use a custom curve to
ensure successful starting without compromising motor protection. Furthermore, the characteristics of the starting thermal
damage curve (locked rotor and acceleration) and the running thermal damage curves may not fit together very smoothly.
In this instance, it may be necessary to use a custom curve to tailor protection to the motor thermal limits so the motor may
be started successfully and used to its full potential without compromising protection. The distinct parts of the thermal limit
curves now become more critical. For these conditions, it is recommended that the 369 custom curve thermal model be
used. The custom overload curve of the 369 allows the user to program their own curve by entering trip times for 30 pre-
determined current levels. The 369 smooths the areas between these points to make the protection curve.
It can be seen below that if the running overload thermal limit curve were smoothed into one curve with the locked rotor
overload curve, the motor could not start at 80% line voltage. A custom curve is required.
g GE Power Management
TYPICAL CUSTOM CURVE

6500 HP, 13800 VOLT INDUCED DRAFT FAN MOTOR
10000
1 PROGRAMMED CUSTOM CURVE
2 RUNNING SAFETIME (STATOR LIMIT)
3 ACCELERATION SAFETIME (ROTOR LIMIT)
4 MOTOR CURRENT @ 100% VOLTAGE

1000
5 MOTOR CURRENT @ 80% VOLTAGE
1
5
2
TIME TO TRIP IN SECONDS
100
3
10
4
5
1.0
0.1
1
1000
100
10
0.5
MULTIPLE OF FULL LOAD CURRENT SETPOINT

840730A2.CDR
Figure 5–8: CUSTOM CURVE EXAMPLE

During the interval of discontinuity, the longer of the two trip times is used to reduce the chance of nui-
sance tripping during motor starts.
NOTE

5.4.4 UNBALANCE BIAS
Unbalanced phase currents cause additional rotor heating not accounted for by electromechanical relays and may not be
accounted for in some electronic protective relays. When the motor is running, the rotor rotates in the direction of the posi-
tive-sequence current at near synchronous speed. Negative-sequence current, having a phase rotation opposite to the
positive sequence current, and hence, opposite to the rotor rotation, generates a rotor voltage that produces a substantial
rotor current. This induced current has a frequency approximately twice the line frequency: 100 Hz for a 50 Hz system,
120 Hz for a 60 Hz system. Skin effect in the rotor bars at this frequency causes a significant increase in rotor resistance,
and therefore a significant increase in rotor heating. This extra heating is not accounted for in the motor manufacturer ther-
mal limit curves, since these curves assume positive-sequence currents only from a perfectly balanced supply and motor
design.
The 369 measures the percentage unbalance for the phase currents. The thermal model may be biased to reflect the addi-
tional heating caused by negative-sequence current, present during an unbalance when the motor is running. This is done
by creating an equivalent motor heating current that takes into account the unbalanced current effect along with the aver-
age phase current. This current is calculated as follows:
2
I avg 1 + k × ( UB% )
I eq = -----------------------------------------------------
-
FLA
where: Ieq = equivalent unbalance biased heating current
Iavg = average RMS phase current measured
UB% = unbalance percentage measured (100% = 1, 50% = 0.5, etc.)
k = unbalance bias k factor
The figure on the left shows motor derating as a function of voltage unbalance as recommended by the American organiza-
tion NEMA (National Electrical Manufacturers Association). Assuming a typical induction motor with an inrush of 6 × FLA
5 and a negative sequence impedance of 0.167, voltage unbalances of 1, 2, 3, 4, and 5% equal current unbalances of 6, 12,
18, 24, and 30% respectively. Based on this assumption, the figure on the right below illustrates the amount of motor derat-
ing for different values of k entered for the setpoint UNBALANCE BIAS K FACTOR. Note that the curve for k = 8 is almost
identical to the NEMA derating curve.
NEM A GE POW ER M AN AGEM ENT
1.05 1.05
1.00 1.00
DERATING FACTOR
DERATING FACTOR
0.95 0.95
k=2
0.90 0.90
0.85 0.85 k=4
0.80 0.80 k=6
k=8
0.75 0.75
k=10
0.70 0.70
0 1 2 3 4 5 0 1 2 3 4 5
PERCENT VOLTAGE UNBALANCE PERCENT VOLTAGE UNBALANCE

Figure 5–9: MEDIUM MOTOR DERATING FACTOR DUE TO UNBALANCED VOLTAGE
If a k value of 0 is entered, the unbalance biasing is defeated and the overload curve will time out against the measured per
unit motor current. The k value may be calculated as:
k = 175 230
---------- (typical estimate); k = ---------- (conservative estimate), where ILR is the per unit locked rotor current
2 2
I LR ILR
The 369 can also learn the unbalance bias k factor. It is recommended that the learned k factor not be enable until the
motor has had at least five successful starts. The calculation of the learned k factor is as follows:
175
k = --------------------------------- where I LSC = learned start current, FLA = Full Load Amps setpoint
( ILSC ⁄ FLA ) 2

5.4.5 MOTOR COOLING
The thermal capacity used quantity is reduced in an exponential manner when the motor is stopped or current is below the
overload pickup setpoint. This reduction simulates motor cooling. The motor cooling time constants should be entered for
both the stopped and running cases. A stopped motor will normally cool significantly slower than a running motor. Note that
the cool time constant is one fifth the total cool time from 100% thermal capacity used down to 0% thermal capacity used.
The 369 can learn and estimate the stopped and running cool time constants for a motor. Calculation of a cool time con-
stant is performed whenever the motor state transitions from starting to running or from running to stopped. The learned
cool times are based on the cooling rate of the hottest stator RTD, the hot/cold ratio, the ambient temperature (40 if no
ambient RTD), the measured motor load and the programmed service factor or overload pickup. Learned values should
only be enabled for motors that have been started, stopped and run at least five times.
Note that any learned cool time constants are mainly based on stator RTD information. Cool time, for starting, is typically a
rotor limit. The use of stator RTDs can only render an approximation. The learned values should only be used if the real val-
ues are not available from the motor manufacturer. Motor cooling is calculated using the following formulas:
–t ⁄ τ
TCused = ( TCused_start – TCused_end ) ⋅ ( e ) + TCused_end
TCused_end = Ieq ×  1 – ----------- × 100%

hot
 cold
where: TCused = thermal capacity used

TCused_start = TC used value caused by overload condition
TCused_end = TC used value set by the hot/cold curve ratio when motor is running = '0' when motor is stopped.
t = time in minutes
τ = cool time constant (running or stopped)
Ieq = equivalent motor heating current 5
overload_pickup = overload pickup setpoint as a multiple of FLA
hot/cold = hot/cold curve ratio
5.4.6 HOT/COLD CURVE RATIO
The motor manufacturer will sometimes provide thermal limit information for a hot/cold motor. The 369 thermal model will
adapt for these conditions if the Hot/Cold Curve Ratio is programmed. The value entered for this setpoint dictates the level
of thermal capacity used that the relay will settle at for levels of current that are below the Overload Pickup Level. When the
motor is running at a level that is below the Overload Pickup Level, the thermal capacity used will rise or fall to a value
based on the average phase current and the entered Hot/Cold Curve Ratio. Thermal capacity used will either rise at a fixed
rate of 5% per minute or fall as dictated by the running cool time constant.
TCused_end = Ieq ×  1 – ----------- × 100%

hot
 cold
where: TCused_end = Thermal Capacity Used if Iper_unit remains steady state

Ieq = equivalent motor heating current
hot/cold = HOT/COLD CURVE RATIO setpoint
The hot/cold curve ratio may be determined from the thermal limit curves if provided or the hot and cold safe stall times.
Simply divide the hot safe stall time by the cold safe stall time. If hot and cold times are not provided, there can be no differ-
entiation and the hot/cold curve ratio should be entered as 1.00.

100 100
80% LOAD 100% LOAD
75 75
Thermal Capacity Used

Cool Time Constant= 15 min Cool Time Constant= 15 min
TCused_start= 85% TCused_start= 85%
Hot/Cold Ratio= 80% Hot/Cold Ratio= 80%
50 Ieq/Overload Pickup= 80% 50 Ieq/Overload Pickup= 100%
25 25
0 0
0 30 60 90 120 150 180 0 30 60 90 120 150 180
Time in Minutes Time in Minutes
100
100
MOTOR STOPPED MOTOR TRIPPED
75 75
Cool Time Constant= 30 min

Cool Time Constant= 30 min
TCused_start= 100% TCused_start= 85%
Hot/Cold Ratio= 80% Hot/Cold Ratio= 80%
Motor Stopped after Overload Trip Motor Stopped after running Rated Load
50 TCused_end= 0% 50 TCused_end= 0%
5 25 25
0 0
0 30 60 90 120 150 180 0 30 60 90 120 150 180
Time in Minutes Time in Minutes
Figure 5–10: THERMAL MODEL COOLING
5.4.7 RTD BIAS
The 369 thermal replica operates as a complete and independent model. The thermal overload curves however, are based
solely on measured current, assuming a normal 40°C ambient and normal motor cooling. If there is an unusually high ambi-
ent temperature, or if motor cooling is blocked, motor temperature will increase. If the motor stator has embedded RTDs,
the 369 RTD bias feature should be used to correct the thermal model.
The RTD bias feature is a two part curve constructed using three points. If the maximum stator RTD temperature is below
the RTD Bias Minimum setpoint (typically 40°C), no biasing occurs. If the maximum stator RTD temperature is above the
RTD Bias Maximum setpoint (typically at the stator insulation rating or slightly higher), then the thermal memory is fully
biased and thermal capacity is forced to 100% used. At values in between, the present thermal capacity used created by
the overload curve and other elements of the thermal model is compared to the RTD Bias thermal capacity used from the
RTD Bias curve. If the RTD Bias thermal capacity used value is higher, then that value is used from that point onward. The
RTD Bias Center point should be set at the rated running temperature of the motor. The 369 will automatically determine
the thermal capacity used value for the center point using the Hot/Cold Safe stall ratio setpoint.
TCused@RTD_Bias_Center =  1 – ----------
hot- × 100%
 cold
At temperatures less than the RTD_Bias_Center temperature,
T actual – T min
- × TCused@RTD_Bias_Center
RTD_Bias_TCused = -----------------------------------
T center – Tmin
At temperatures greater than the RTD_Bias_Center temperature,

T actual – T center
RTD_Bias_TCused = ----------------------------------------- × ( 100 – TCused@RTD_Bias_Center ) + TCused@RTD_Bias_Center
Tmax – T center
where: RTD_Bias_TCused = TC used due to hottest stator RTD

Tactual = Actual present temperature of hottest stator RTD
Tmin = RTD Bias minimum setpoint (ambient temperature)
Tcenter = RTD Bias center setpoint (motor running temperature)
Tmax = RTD Bias max setpoint (winding insulation rating temperature)
TCused@RTD_Bias_Center = TC used defined by HOT/COLD SAFE STALL RATIO setpoint
In simple terms, the RTD bias feature is real feedback of measured stator temperature. This feedback acts as correction of
the thermal model for unforeseen situations. Since RTDs are relatively slow to respond, RTD biasing is good for correction
and slow motor heating. The rest of the thermal model is required during starting and heavy overload conditions when
motor heating is relatively fast.
It should be noted that the RTD bias feature alone cannot create a trip. If the RTD bias feature forces the thermal capacity
used to 100%, the motor current must be above the overload pickup before an overload trip occurs. Presumably, the motor
would trip on programmed stator RTD temperature setpoint at that time.
RTD Bias Maximum

100
Hot/Cold = 0.85
80 Rated Temperature=130 C
Insulation Rating=155 C
60
5
40
20
RTD Bias Center Point
RTD Bias Minimum
0
-50 0 50 100 150 200 250
Maximum Stator RTD Temperature
Figure 5–11: RTD BIAS CURVE
5.4.8 OVERLOAD ALARM
PATH: S3 OVERLOAD PROTECTION OVERLOAD ALARM
OVERLOAD ALARM OVERLOAD Range: Off, Latched, Unlatched

ALARM: Off
Range: 1.01 to 1.50 in steps of 0.01
OVERLOAD ALARM
LEVEL: 1.01 x FLA
ASSIGN O/L ALARM Range: None, Alarm, Aux1, Aux2, or combinations of

RELAYS: Alarm them
OVERLOAD ALARM Range: 0.1 to 60.0 s in steps of 0.1

DELAY: 1 s
Range: On, Off
OVERLOAD ALARM
EVENTS: Off
An overload alarm will occur only when the motor is running and the current rises above the programmed OVERLOAD
ALARM LEVEL. The overload alarm is disabled during a start. An application of an unlatched overload alarm is to signal a
PLC that controls the load on the motor, whenever the motor is too heavily loaded.

5.5 S4 CURRENT ELEMENTS 5 SETPOINTS
5.5 S4 CURRENT ELEMENTS 5.5.1 SETPOINTS PAGE 4 MENU
S4 SETPOINTS SHORT CIRCUIT

See page 5–32.
CURRENT ELEMENTS
MECHANICAL JAM
See page 5–33.
UNDERCURRENT
See page 5–34.
CURRENT UNBALANCE
See page 5–35.
GROUND FAULT
See page 5–36.
These elements deal with functions that are based on the current readings of the 369 from the external phase and/or
ground CTs. All models of the 369 include these features.
5.5.2 SHORT CIRCUIT
PATH: S4 CURRENT ELEMENTS SHORT CIRCUIT
SHORT CIRCUIT SHORT CIRCUIT Range: Off, Latched, Unlatched
5 TRIP: Off
Range: None, Trip, Aux1, Aux2, or combinations of them
ASSIGN TRIP RELAYS:
Trip
SHORT CIRCUIT TRIP Range: 2.0 to 20.0 x CT in steps of 0.1

LEVEL: 10.0 x CT
ADD S/C TRIP Range: 0 to 255.00 s in steps of 0.01

DELAY: 0.00 s 0 = Instantaneous
SHORT CIRCUIT TRIP Range: Off, Latched, Unlatched

BACKUP: Off
ASSIGN BACKUP RELAY: Range: None, Aux1, Aux2, or combinations of them

Aux1
ADD S/C BACKUP TRIP Range: 0 to 255.00 s in steps of 0.01

DELAY: 0.20 s
Care must be taken when turning on this feature. If the interrupting device (contactor or circuit breaker) is
not rated to break the fault current, this feature should be disabled. Alternatively, this feature may be
NOTE assigned to an auxiliary relay and connected such that it trips an upstream device that is capable of break-
ing the fault current.
Once the magnitude of either phase A, B, or C exceeds the Pickup Level × Phase CT Primary for a period of time specified
by the delay, a trip will occur. Note the delay is in addition to the 45 ms instantaneous operate time.
There is also a backup trip feature that can be enabled. The backup delay should be greater than the short circuit delay
plus the breaker clearing time. If a short circuit trip occurs with the backup on, and the phase current to the motor persists
for a period of time that exceeds the backup delay, a second backup trip will occur. It is intended that this second trip be
assigned to Aux1 or Aux2 which would be dedicated as an upstream breaker trip relay.

5 SETPOINTS 5.5 S4 CURRENT ELEMENTS
Various situations (e.g. charging a long line to the motor or power factor correction capacitors) may cause transient inrush
currents during motor starting that may exceed the Short Circuit Pickup level for a very short period of time. The Short Cir-
cuit time delay is adjustable in 10 ms increments. The delay can be fine tuned to an application such that it still responds
very fast, but rides through normal operational disturbances. Normally, the Phase Short Circuit time delay will be set as
quick as possible, 0 ms. Time may have to be increased if nuisance tripping occurs.
When a motor starts, the starting current (typically 6 × FLA for an induction motor) has an asymmetrical component. This
asymmetrical current may cause one phase to see as much as 1.6 times the normal RMS starting current. If the short cir-
cuit level was set at 1.25 times the symmetrical starting current, it is probable that there would be nuisance trips during
motor starting. As a rule of thumb the short circuit protection is typically set to at least 1.6 times the symmetrical starting
current value. This allows the motor to start without nuisance tripping.
Both the main Short Circuit delay and the backup delay start timing when the current exceeds the Short Circuit
Pickup level.
NOTE
5.5.3 MECHANICAL JAM
PATH: S4 CURRENT ELEMENTS MECHANICAL JAM
MECHANICAL JAM MECHANICAL JAM Range: Off, Latched, Unlatched

ALARM: Off
ASSIGN ALARM RELAYS: Range: None, Alarm, Aux1, Aux2, or combinations of

them
Alarm
MECHANICAL JAM ALARM Range: 1.01 to 6.00 in steps of 0.01

LEVEL: 1.50 x FLA
MECHANICAL JAM ALARM Range: 0.5 to 125.0 s in steps of 0.5 5

DELAY: 1.0 s
MECHANICAL JAM ALARM Range: On, Off

EVENTS: Off
MECHANICAL JAM Range: Off, Latched, Unlatched

TRIP: Off
ASSIGN TRIP RELAYS: Range: None, Trip, Aux1, Aux2, or combinations of them
Trip
MECHANICAL JAM TRIP Range: 1.01 to 6.00 in steps of 0.01

LEVEL: 1.50 x FLA
MECHANICAL JAM Range: 0.5 to 125.0 s in steps of 0.5

TRIP DELAY: 1.0 s
After a motor start, once the magnitude of any one of either phase A, B, or C exceeds the Trip/Alarm Pickup Level × FLA for
a period of time specified by the Delay, a Trip/Alarm will occur. This feature may be used to indicate a stall condition when
running. Not only does it protect the motor by taking it off-line quicker than the thermal model (overload curve), it may also
prevent or limit damage to the driven equipment that may occur if motor starting torque persists on jammed or broken
equipment.
The pickup level for the Mechanical Jam Trip should be set higher than motor loading during normal operations, but lower
than the motor stall level. Normally the delay would be set to the minimum time delay, or set such that no nuisance trips
occur due to momentary load fluctuations.

5.5.4 UNDERCURRENT
PATH: S4 CURRENT ELEMENTS UNDERCURRENT
UNDERCURRENT BLOCK UNDERCURRENT Range: 0 to 15000 s in steps of 1

FROM START: 0 s
UNDERCURRENT Range: Off, Latched, Unlatched

ALARM: Off

Alarm them
UNDERCURRENT ALARM Range: 0.10 to 0.99 in steps of 0.01

LEVEL: 0.70 x FLA
UNDERCURRENT ALARM Range: 1 to 255 s in steps of 1

DELAY: 1 s
UNDERCURRENT ALARM Range: On, Off

EVENTS: Off
UNDERCURRENT Range: Off, Latched, Unlatched

TRIP: Off
Trip
5 UNDERCURRENT TRIP
LEVEL: 0.70 x FLA
UNDERCURRENT TRIP Range: 1 to 255 s in steps of 1

DELAY: 1 s
If enabled, once the magnitude of either phase A, B or C falls below the pickup level × FLA for a period of time specified by
the Delay, a trip or alarm will occur. The undercurrent element is an indication of loss of load to the motor. Thus, the pickup
level should be set lower than motor loading levels during normal operations. The undercurrent element is active when the
motor is starting or running.
The undercurrent element can be blocked upon the initiation of a motor start for a period of time specified by the U/C Block
From Start setpoint (e.g. this block may be used to allow pumps to build up head before the undercurrent element trips). A
value of 0 means undercurrent protection is immediately enabled upon motor starting (no block). If a value other than 0 is
entered, the feature will be disabled from the time a start is detected until the time entered expires.
APPLICATION EXAMPLE:
If a pump is cooled by the liquid it pumps, loss of load may cause the pump to overheat. Undercurrent protection should
thus be enabled. If the motor loading should never fall below 0.75 × FLA, even for short durations, the Undercurrent Trip
pickup could be set to 0.70 and the Undercurrent Alarm to 0.75. If the pump is always started loaded, the block from start
feature should be disabled (programmed as 0).
Time delay is typically set as quick as possible, 1 second.

5.5.5 CURRENT UNBALANCE
PATH: S4 CURRENT ELEMENTS CURRENT UNBALANCE
CURRENT UNBALANCE BLOCK UNBALANCE FROM Range: 0 to 5000 s in steps of 1

START: 0 s
CURRENT UNBALANCE Range: Off, Latched, Unlatched

ALARM: Off

Alarm them
UNBALANCE ALARM Range: 4 to 30% in steps of 1

LEVEL: 15 %
UNBALANCE ALARM Range: 1 to 255 s in steps of 1

DELAY: 1 s
UNBALANCE ALARM Range: On, Off

EVENTS: Off
CURRENT UNBALANCE Range: Off, Latched, Unlatched

TRIP: Off
Trip
UNBALANCE TRIP
LEVEL: 20 %
Range: 4 to 30% in steps of 1
5
UNBALANCE TRIP Range: 1 to 255 s in steps of 1
DELAY: 1 s
Unbalanced three phase supply voltages are a major cause of induction motor thermal damage. Causes of unbalance can
include: increased resistance in one phase due to a pitted or faulty contactor, loose connections, unequal tap settings in a
transformer, non-uniformly distributed three phase loads, or varying single phase loads within a plant. The most serious
case of unbalance is single phasing – that is, the complete loss of one phase. This can be caused by a utility supply prob-
lem or a blown fuse in one phase and can seriously damage a three phase motor. A single phase trip will occur in 2 sec-
onds if the Unbalance trip is on and the level exceeds 30%. A single phase trip will also activate if the Motor Load is above
30% and at least one of the phase currents is zero. Single phasing protection is disabled if the Unbalance Trip is turned Off.
During balanced conditions in the stator, current in each motor phase is equal, and the rotor current is just sufficient to pro-
vide the turning torque. When the stator currents are unbalanced, a much higher current is induced into the rotor due to its
lower impedance to the negative sequence current component present. This current is at twice the power supply frequency
and produces a torque in the opposite direction to the desired motor output. Usually the increase in stator current is small
and timed overcurrent protection takes a long time to trip. However, the much higher induced rotor current can cause exten-
sive rotor damage in a short period of time. Motors can tolerate different levels of current unbalance depending on the rotor
design and heat dissipation characteristics.
To prevent nuisance trips/alarms on lightly loaded motors when a much larger unbalance level will not damage the rotor,
the unbalance protection will automatically be defeated if the average motor current is less than 30% of the full load current
(IFLA) setting. Unbalance is calculated as follows:
I max – Iavg I max – I avg

If I avg ≥ I FLA , Unbalance = ----------------------------- × 100 If Iavg < I FLA , Unbalance = ----------------------------- × 100
I avg I FLA
where: Iavg = average phase current

Imax = current in a phase with maximum deviation from Iavg
IFLA = motor full load amps setting

Unbalance protection is recommended at all times. When setting the unbalance pickup level, it should be noted that a 1%
voltage unbalance typically translates into a 6% current unbalance. Therefore, in order to prevent nuisance trips or alarms,
the pickup level should not be set too low. Also, since short term unbalances are common, a reasonable delay should be
set to avoid nuisance trips or alarms. It is recommended that the unbalance thermal bias feature be used to bias the Ther-
mal Model to account for rotor heating that may be caused by cyclic short term unbalances.
5.5.6 GROUND FAULT
PATH: S4 CURRENT ELEMENTS GROUND FAULT
GROUND FAULT GROUND FAULT Range: Off, Latched, Unlatched

ALARM: Off
ASSIGN G/F ALARM Range: None, Alarm, Aux1, Aux2, or combinations of

them
RELAYS: Alarm
GROUND FAULT ALARM Range: 0.10 to 1.00 x CT in steps of 0.01

LEVEL: 0.10 x CT Only shown if G/F CT is 1A or 5A
GROUND FAULT ALARM Range:0.25 to 25.00 A in steps of 0.01

LEVEL: 0.25 A Only shown if G/F CT is 50:0.025
GROUND FAULT ALARM Range: 0.00 to 255.00 s in steps of 0.01s

DELAY: 0.00 s
GROUND FAULT ALARM Range: On, Off

EVENTS: Off
5 GROUND FAULT Range: Off, Latched, Unlatched
TRIP: Off
Trip
GROUND FAULT TRIP Range: 0.10 to 1.00 x CT in steps of 0.01

LEVEL: 0.20 x CT Only shown if G/F CT is 1A or 5A
GROUND FAULT TRIP Range: 0.25 to 25.00 A in steps of 0.01

LEVEL: 0.25 A Only shown if G/F CT is 50:0.025
GROUND FAULT TRIP Range: 0 to 255.00 s in steps of 0.01

DELAY: 0.00 s
GROUND FAULT TRIP Range: Off, Latched, Unlatched

BACKUP: Off
ASSIGN G/F BACKUP Range: None, Aux1, Aux2, or combinations of them

RELAYS: Aux2
G/F TRIP BACKUP Range: 0.01 to 255.00s in steps of 0.01

DELAY: 0.20 s
Once the magnitude of ground current exceeds the Pickup Level for a period of time specified by the Delay, a trip and/or
alarm will occur. There is also a backup trip feature that can be enabled. If the backup is On, and a Ground Fault trip has
initiated, and the ground current persists for a period of time that exceeds the backup delay, a second ‘backup’ trip will
occur. It is intended that this second trip be assigned to Aux1 or Aux2 which would be dedicated as an upstream breaker
trip relay. The Ground Fault Trip Backup delay must be set to a time longer than the breaker clearing time.
Care must be taken when turning On this feature. If the interrupting device (contactor or circuit breaker)
is not rated to break ground fault current (low resistance or solidly grounded systems), the feature
should be disabled. Alternately, the feature may be assigned to an auxiliary relay and connected such
NOTE that it trips an upstream device that is capable of breaking the fault current.

Various situations (e.g. contactor bounce) may cause transient ground currents during motor starting that may exceed the
Ground Fault Pickup levels for a very short period of time. The delay can be fine tuned to an application such that it still
responds very fast, but rides through normal operational disturbances. Normally, the Ground Fault time delays will be set as
quick as possible, 0 ms. Time may have to be increased if nuisance tripping occurs.
Special care must be taken when the ground input is wired to the phase CTs in a residual connection. When a motor starts,
the starting current (typically 6 × FLA for an induction motor) has an asymmetrical component. This asymmetrical current
may cause one phase to see as much as 1.6 times the normal RMS starting current. This momentary DC component will
cause each of the phase CTs to react differently and the net current into the ground input of the 369 will not be negligible. A
20 ms block of the ground fault elements when the motor starts enables the 369 to ride through this momentary ground cur-
rent signal.
Both the main Ground Fault delay and the backup delay start timing when the Ground Fault current exceeds the
pickup level.
NOTE

5.6 S5 MOTOR START / INHIBITS 5 SETPOINTS
5.6 S5 MOTOR START / INHIBITS 5.6.1 SETPOINTS PAGE 5 MENU
S5 SETPOINTS ACCELERATION TRIP

See page 5–38.
MOTOR START/INHIBITS
START INHIBITS
See page 5–39.
BACKSPIN DETECTION See page 5–40.

Only shown if option B installed
These setpoints deal with those functions that prevent the motor from restarting once stopped until a set condition clears
and/or a set time expires. None of these functions will trip a motor that is already running.
5.6.2 ACCELERATION TRIP
PATH: S5 MOTOR START/INHIBITS ACCELERATION TRIP
ACCELERATION TRIP ACCELERATION Range: Off, Latched, Unlatched

TRIP: Off
Trip
ACCELERATION TIME Range: 1.0 to 250.0 s in steps of 0.1
5 FROM START: 10.0 s
The 369 Thermal Model is designed to protect the motor under both starting and overload conditions. The Acceleration
Timer trip feature may be used in addition to that protection. If for example, the motor should always start in 2 seconds, but
the safe stall time is 8 seconds, there is no point letting the motor remain in a stall condition for 7 or 8 seconds when the
thermal model would take it off line. Furthermore, the starting torque applied to the driven equipment for that period of time
could cause severe damage.
If enabled, the Acceleration Timer trip element will function as follows: A motor start is assumed to be occurring when the
369 measures the transition of no motor current to some value of motor current. Typically current will rise quickly to a value
in excess of FLA (e.g. 6 x FLA). At this point, the Acceleration Timer will be initialized with the entered value in seconds. If
the current does not fall below the overload curve pickup level before the timer expires, an acceleration trip will occur. If the
acceleration time of the motor is variable, this feature should be set just beyond the longest acceleration time.
Some motor soft starters may allow current to ramp up slowly while others may limit current to less than
Full Load Amps throughout the start. In these cases, as a generic relay that must protect all motors, the
NOTE 369 cannot differentiate between a motor that has a slow ramp up time and one that has completed a start
and gone into an overload condition. Therefore, if the motor current does not rise to greater than full load
within 1 second on start, the acceleration timer feature is ignored. In any case, the motor is still protected
by the overload curve.

5 SETPOINTS 5.6 S5 MOTOR START / INHIBITS
5.6.3 START INHIBITS
PATH: S5 MOTOR START/INHIBITS START INHIBITS
START INHIBITS ENABLE SINGLE SHOT Range: No, Yes

RESTART: No
ENABLE Range: No, Yes

START INHIBIT: No
MAX STARTS/HOUR Range: 1 to 5 in steps of 1, Off (0)

PERMISSIBLE: Off
TIME BETWEEN STARTS Range: 1 to 500 min. in steps of 1, Off (0)

PERMISSIBLE: Off
RESTART BLOCK: Range: 1 to 50000 s in steps of 1, Off (0)

Off
ASSIGN BLOCK RELAY Range: None, Trip, Aux1, Aux2, or combinations

TRIP & AUX2
SINGLE SHOT RESTART: Enabling this feature will allow the motor to be restarted immediately after an overload trip has
occurred. To accomplish this, a reset will cause the 369 to decrease the accumulated thermal capacity to zero. However, if
a second overload trip occurs within one hour of the first, another immediate restart will not be permitted. The displayed
lockout time must then be allowed to expire before the motor can be started.
START INHIBIT: The Start Inhibit feature is intended to help prevent tripping of the motor during a start if there is insufficient
thermal capacity for a start. The average value of thermal capacity used from the last five successful starts is multiplied by 5
1.25 and stored as thermal capacity used on start. This 25% margin is used to ensure that a motor start will be successful.
If the number is greater than 100%, 100% is stored as thermal capacity used on start. A successful motor start is one in
which phase current rises from 0 to greater than overload pickup and then, after acceleration, falls below the overload
curve pickup level. If the Start Inhibit feature is enabled, each time the motor is stopped, the amount of thermal capacity
available (100% – Thermal Capacity Used) is compared to the THERMAL CAPACITY USED ON START. If the thermal capac-
ity available does not exceed the THERMAL CAPACITY USED ON START, or is not equal to 100%, the Start Inhibit will
become active until there is sufficient thermal capacity. When an inhibit occurs, the lockout time will be equal to the time
required for the motor to cool to an acceptable temperature for a start. This time will be a function of the COOL TIME CON-
STANT STOPPED programmed. If this feature is turned Off, thermal capacity used must reduce to 15% before an overload
lockout resets. This feature should be turned off if the load varies for different starts.
MAX STARTS/HOUR PERMISSIBLE: A motor start is assumed to be occurring when the 369 measures the transition of no
motor current to some value of motor current. At this point, one of the STARTS/HOUR timers is loaded with 60 minutes.
Even unsuccessful start attempts will be logged as starts for this feature. Once the motor is stopped, the number of starts
within the past hour is compared to the number of starts allowable. If the two are the same, an inhibit will occur. If an inhibit
occurs, the lockout time will be equal to one hour less the longest time elapsed since a start within the past hour. An Emer-
gency restart will clear the oldest start time remaining.
TIME BETWEEN STARTS: A motor start is assumed to be occurring when the 369 measures the transition of no motor cur-
rent to some value of motor current. At this point, the Time Between Starts timer is loaded with the entered time. Even
unsuccessful start attempts will be logged as starts for this feature. Once the motor is stopped, if the time elapsed since the
most recent start is less than the TIME BETWEEN STARTS setpoint, an inhibit will occur. If an inhibit occurs, the lockout time
will be equal to the time elapsed since the most recent start subtracted from the TIME BETWEEN STARTS setpoint.
RESTART BLOCK: Restart Block may be used to ensure that a certain amount of time passes between stopping a motor
and restarting that motor. This timer feature may be very useful for some process applications or motor considerations. If a
motor is on a down-hole pump, after the motor stops, the liquid may fall back down the pipe and spin the rotor backwards.
It would be very undesirable to start the motor at this time. In another scenario, a motor may be driving a very high inertia
load. Once the supply to the motor is disconnected, the rotor may continue to turn for a long period of time as it decelerates.
The motor has now become a generator and applying supply voltage out of phase may result in catastrophic failure.
ASSIGN INHIBIT RELAY: The relay(s) assigned here will be used for all blocking/inhibit elements in this section. The
assigned relay will activate only when the motor is stopped. When a block/inhibit condition times out or is cleared, the
assigned relay will automatically reset itself.

5.6 S5 MOTOR START / INHIBITS 5 SETPOINTS
NOTES FOR ALL INHIBITS AND BLOCKS:

1. In the event of control power loss, all lockout times will be saved. Elapsed time will be recorded and decremented from
the inhibit times whether control power is applied or not. Upon control power being re-established to the 369, all
remaining inhibits (have not time out) will be re-activated.
2. If the motor is started while an inhibit is active an event titled ‘Start while Blocked’ will be recorded.
5.6.4 BACKSPIN DETECTION
PATH: S5 MOTOR START/INHIBITS BACKSPIN DETECTION
BACKSPIN DETECTION ENABLE BACKSPIN Range: No, Yes

START INHIBIT: No Only shown if B option installed
MINIMUM PERMISSIBLE Range: 0 to 9.99 Hz in steps of 0.01

FREQUENCY: 0.00 Hz Shown only if backspin start inhibit is enabled
PREDICTION ALGORITHM Range: Disabled, Enabled

Enabled Shown only if backspin start inhibit is enabled
ASSIGN BSD RELAY: Range: None, Trip, Aux1, Aux2, or combinations

Aux2 Seen only if backspin start inhibit is enabled
NUM OF MOTOR POLES: Range: 2 to 16 in steps of 2

2 Shown only if backspin start inhibit is enabled
Immediately after the motor is stopped, backspin detection commences and a backspin start inhibit is activated to prevent
5 the motor from being restarted. The backspin frequency is sensed through the BSD voltage input. If the measured fre-
quency is below the programmed Minimum Permissible Frequency, the backspin start inhibit will be removed. The time for
the motor to reach the Minimum Permissible Frequency is calculated throughout the backspin state. If the BSD frequency
signal is lost prior to reaching the Minimum Permissible Frequency, the inhibit remains active until the predication time has
expired. The calculated Predication Time and the Backspin State can be viewed in Voltage metering section of Actual Val-
ues page 2.
APPLICATION:
Backspin protection is typically used on down hole pump motors which can be located several kilometers underground.
Check valves are often used to prevent flow reversal when the pump stops. Very often however, the flow reverses due to
faulty or non existent check valves, causing the pump impeller to rotate the motor in the reverse direction. Starting the
motor during this period of reverse rotation (back-spinning) may result in motor damage. Backspin detection ensures that
the motor can only be started when the motor has slowed to within acceptable limits. Without backspin detection a long
time delay had to be used as a start permissive to ensure the motor had slowed to a safe speed.
These setpoints are only visible when option B has been installed.
NOTE

5 SETPOINTS 5.7 S6 RTD TEMPERATURE
5.7 S6 RTD TEMPERATURE 5.7.1 SETPOINTS PAGE 6 MENU
S6 SETPOINTS LOCAL RTD

See page 5–41.
RTD TEMPERATURE PROTECTION
REMOTE RTD
See page 5–42.
PROTECTION
REMOTE RTD MODULE 1
REMOTE RTD MODULE 2
REMOTE RTD MODULE 3
REMOTE RTD MODULE 4
OPEN RTD ALARM

See page 5–44.
SHORT/LOW TEMP RTD

See page 5–45.
ALARM
LOSS OF RRTD
COMMS ALARM
See page 5–45. 5
These setpoints deal with the RTD overtemperature elements of the 369. The Local RTD Protection setpoints will only be
seen if the 369 has option R installed. The Remote RTD Protection setpoints will only be seen if the 369 has the RRTD
accessory enabled. Both can be enabled and used at the same time and have the same functionality.
5.7.2 LOCAL RTD PROTECTION
PATH: S6 RTD TEMPERATURE LOCAL RTD PROTECTION
LOCAL RTD LOCAL RTD 1

PROTECTION
RTD 1 APPLICATION: Range: None, Stator, Bearing, Ambient, Other

None
RTD 1 TYPE: Range: 10 Ohm Copper, 100 Ohm Nickel, 120

100 Ohm Platinum Ohm Nickel, 100 Ohm Platinum; seen only if
RTD 1 Application is other than None.
RTD 1 NAME: Range: 8 character alphanumeric; seen only if

RTD 1 RTD 1 Application is other than None.
RTD 1 ALARM: Range: Off, Latched, Unlatched; seen only if

Off RTD 1 Application is other than None.
RTD 1 ALARM RELAYS: Range: None, Alarm, Aux1, Aux2, or

Alarm combinations; seen only if RTD 1
Application is other than None.
RTD 1 ALARM Range: 1 to 200°C in steps of 1
LEVEL: 130 °C 34 to 392°F in steps of 1;
only if RTD 1 Application is other than None.
RTD 1 HI ALARM: Range: Off, Latched, Unlatched; seen only if

5.7 S6 RTD TEMPERATURE 5 SETPOINTS
RTD 1 HI ALARM Range: None, Alarm, Aux1, Aux2, or

RELAYS: Aux1 combinations; seen only if RTD 1
RTD 1 HI ALARM Range: 1 to 200°C in steps of 1
RECORD RTD 1 ALARMS Range: No, Yes; seen only if RTD 1 Application
AS EVENTS: No is other than None.
RTD 1 TRIP: Range: Off, Latched, Unlatched; seen only if

RTD 1 TRIP RELAYS: Range: None, Trip, Aux1, Aux2, or

Trip combinations; seen only if RTD 1
RTD 1 TRIP Range: 1 to 200°C in steps of 1
ENABLE RTD 1 TRIP Range: Off, RTD 1-12, All Stator; seen only if
VOTING: Off RTD 1 Application is other than None.
LOCAL RTD 2
LOCAL RTD 12
5
5.7.3 REMOTE RTD PROTECTION
PATH: S6 RTD TEMPERATURE REMOTE RTD PROTECTION
REMOTE RTD
PROTECTION
REMOTE RTD MODULE 1
REMOTE RTD 1
RRTD 1 APPLICATION: Range: None, Stator, Bearing, Ambient, Other

None
RRTD 1 TYPE: Range: 10 Ohm Copper, 100 Ohm Nickel, 120 Ohm Nickel, 100 Ohm
100 Ohm Platinum Platinum.
RRTD 1 NAME: Range: 8 character alphanumeric

RRTD1 Seen only if RRTD 1 Application is other than None
RRTD 1 ALARM: Range: Off, Latched, Unlatched

Off Seen only if RRTD 1 Application is other than None
RRTD 1 ALARM RELAYS: Range: None, Alarm, Aux1, Aux2, or combinations

Alarm Seen only if RRTD 1 Application is other than None
RRTD 1 ALARM Range: 1 to 200°C or 34 to 392°F in steps of 1

LEVEL: 130 °C Seen only if RRTD 1 Application is other than None
RRTD 1 HI ALARM: Range: Off, Latched, Unlatched


RRTD1 HI ALARM Range: None, Alarm, Aux1, Aux2, or combinations

RELAY: Aux1 Seen only if RRTD 1 Application is other than None
RRTD 1 HI ALARM Range: 1 to 200°C or 34 to 392°F in steps of 1

RECORD RRTD 1 ALARMS Range: No, Yes

AS EVENTS: No Seen only if RRTD 1 Application is other than None
RRTD 1 TRIP: Range: Off, Latched, Unlatched

RRTD 1 TRIP RELAYS: Range: None, Trip, Aux1, Aux2, or combinations

Trip Seen only if RRTD 1 Application is other than None
RRTD 1 TRIP Range: 1 to 200°C or 34 to 392°F in steps of 1

ENABLE RRTD 1 TRIP Range: Off, RRTD 1 to 12, All Stator

VOTING: Off Seen only if RRTD 1 Application is other than None
REMOTE RTD 2
REMOTE RTD 12
REMOTE RTD MODULE 2 5
REMOTE RTD MODULE 4
APPLICATION: Each individual RTD may be assigned an application. A setting of "None" turns an individual RTD off. Only
RTDs with the application set to "Stator" are used for RTD biasing of the thermal model. If an RTD application is set to
"Ambient", then its is used in calculating the learned cool time of the motor.
TYPE: Each RTD is individually assigned the RTD type it is connected to. Multiple types may be used with a single 369.
NAME: Each RTD may have 8 character name assigned to it. This name is used in alarm and trip messages.
ALARM / HI ALARM / TRIP: Each RTD can be programmed for separate Alarm, Hi Alarm and Trip levels and relays. Trips
are automatically stored as events. Alarms and Hi Alarms are stored as events only if the Record Alarms as Events set-
point for that RTD is set to Yes.
TRIP VOTING: This feature provides added RTD trip reliability in situations where malfunction and nuisance tripping is
common. If enabled, the RTD trips only if the RTD (or RTDs) to be voted with are also above their trip level. For example, if
RTD 1 is set to vote with All Stator RTDs, the 369 will only trip if RTD 1 is above its trip level and any one of the other stator
RTDs is also above its own trip level. RTD voting is typically only used on Stator RTDs and typically done between adjacent
RTDs to detect hot spots.
Stator RTDs can detect heating due to non overload (current) conditions such as blocked or inadequate cooling and venti-
lation or high ambient temperature as well as heating due to overload conditions. Bearing or other RTDs can detect over-
heating of bearings or auxiliary equipment.

5.7 S6 RTD TEMPERATURE 5 SETPOINTS
Table 5–2: RTD RESISTANCE TO TEMPERATURE

TEMPERATURE RTD RESISTANCE (IN OHMS)
°C °F 100 Ω Pt 120 Ω Ni 100 Ω Ni 10 Ω Cu
DIN 43760
–40 –40 84.27 92.76 79.13 7.49
–30 –22 88.22 99.41 84.15 7.88
–20 –4 92.16 106.15 89.23 8.26
–10 14 96.09 113.00 94.58 8.65
0 32 100.00 120.00 100.0 9.04
10 50 103.90 127.17 105.6 9.42
20 68 107.79 134.52 111.2 9.81
30 86 111.67 142.06 117.1 10.19
40 104 115.54 149.79 123.0 10.58
50 122 119.39 157.74 129.1 10.97
60 140 123.24 165.90 135.3 11.35
70 158 127.07 174.25 141.7 11.74
80 176 130.89 182.84 148.3 12.12
90 194 134.70 191.64 154.9 12.51
100 212 138.50 200.64 161.8 12.90
110 230 142.29 209.85 168.8 13.28
120 248 146.06 219.29 176.0 13.67
5 130
140
266
284
149.82
153.58
228.96
238.85
183.3
190.9
14.06
14.44
150 302 157.32 248.95 198.7 14.83
160 320 161.04 259.30 206.6 15.22
170 338 164.76 269.91 214.8 15.61
180 356 168.47 280.77 223.2 16.00
190 374 172.46 291.96 231.6 16.39
200 392 175.84 303.46 240.0 16.78
5.7.4 OPEN RTD ALARM
PATH: S6 RTD TEMPERATURE OPEN RTD ALARM
OPEN RTD ALARM OPEN RTD Range: Off, Latched, Unlatched

ALARM: Off
ASSIGN ALARM RELAYS: Range: None, Alarm, Aux1, Aux2, or combinations

Alarm
OPEN RTD ALARM Range: Off, On

EVENTS: Off
The 369 has an Open RTD Sensor Alarm. This alarm will look at all RTDs that have been assigned an application other
than "None" and determine if an RTD connection has been broken. When a broken sensor is detected, the assigned output
relay will operate and a message will appear on the display identifying the RTD that is broken. It is recommended that if this
feature is used, the alarm be programmed as latched so that intermittent RTDs are detected and corrective action may be
taken.

5.7.5 SHORT/LOW TEMP RTD ALARM
PATH: S6 RTD TEMPERATURE SHORT/LOW TEMP RTD ALARM
SHORT/LOW TEMP RTD SHORT/LOW TEMP RTD Range: Off, Latched, Unlatched
ALARM ALARM: Off

Alarm
SHORT/LOW TEMP ALARM Range: Off, On

EVENTS: Off
The 369 has an RTD Short/Low Temperature alarm. This function tracks all RTDs that have an application other than
"None" to determine if an RTD has either a short or a very low temperature (less than –40°C). When a short/low tempera-
ture is detected, the assigned output relay will operate and a message will appear on the display identifying the RTD that
caused the alarm. It is recommended that if this feature is used, the alarm be programmed as latched so that intermittent
RTDs are detected and corrective action may be taken.
5.7.6 LOSS OF RRTD COMMS ALARM
PATH: S6 RTD TEMPERATURE LOSS OF RRTD COMMS ALARM
LOSS OF RRTD LOSS OF RRTD COMMS Range: Off, Latched, Unlatched

COMMS ALARM ALARM: OFF

Alarm 5
LOSS OF RRTD COMMS Range: Off, On
EVENTS: Off
The 369, if connected to a RRTD module, will monitor communications between them. If for some reason communications
is lost or interrupted the 369 can issue an alarm indicating the failure. This feature is useful to ensure that the remote RTDs
are continuously being monitored.

5.8 S7 VOLTAGE ELEMENTS 5 SETPOINTS
5.8 S7 VOLTAGE ELEMENTS 5.8.1 SETPOINTS PAGE 7 MENU
S7 SETPOINTS UNDERVOLTAGE
See page 5–46.
VOLTAGE ELEMENTS
OVERVOLTAGE
See page 5–47.
PHASE REVERSAL
See page 5–48.
UNDERFREQUENCY
See page 5–48.
OVERFREQUENCY
See page 5–49.
These elements are not used by the 369 unless the M or B option is installed and the VT CONNECTION TYPE setpoint (see
Section 5.3.2: CT/VT SETUP on page 5–11) is set to something other than "None".
5.8.2 UNDERVOLTAGE
PATH: S7 VOLTAGE ELEMENTS UNDERVOLTAGE
UNDERVOLTAGE U/V ACTIVE IF MOTOR Range: No, Yes
5 STOPPED: No
Range: Off, Latched, Unlatched
UNDERVOLTAGE
ALARM: Off
ASSIGN ALARM RELAYS: Range: None, Alarm, Aux1, Aux2 or combinations

Alarm
STARTING U/V ALARM Range: 0.50 to 0.99 in steps of 0.01

PICKUP: 0.85xRATED
RUNNING U/V ALARM Range: 0.50 to 0.99 in steps of 0.01

PICKUP: 0.85xRATED
UNDERVOLTAGE ALARM Range: 0.0 to 255.0 s in steps of 0.1

DELAY: 3.0 S
UNDERVOLTAGE ALARM Range: Off, On

EVENTS: Off
UNDERVOLTAGE Range: Off, Latched, Unlatched

TRIP: Off
ASSIGN TRIP RELAYS: Range: None, Trip, Aux1, Aux2 or combinations

Trip
STARTING U/V TRIP Range: 0.50 to 0.99 in steps of 0.01

PICKUP: 0.80xRATED
RUNNING U/V TRIP Range: 0.50 to 0.99 in steps of 0.01

PICKUP: 0.80xRATED
UNDERVOLTAGE TRIP Range: 0.0 to 255.0 s in steps of 0.1

DELAY: 1.0s

5 SETPOINTS 5.8 S7 VOLTAGE ELEMENTS
If enabled, an undervoltage trip or alarm occurs once the magnitude of either Vab, Vbc, or Vca falls below the running
pickup level while running or the starting pickup level while starting, for a period of time specified by the alarm or trip delay
(pickup levels are multiples of motor nameplate voltage).
An undervoltage on a running motor with a constant load results in increased current. The relay thermal model typically
picks up this condition and provides adequate protection. However, this setpoint may be used in conjunction with time delay
to provide additional protection that may be programmed for advance warning by tripping.
The U/V ACTIVE IF MOTOR STOPPED setpoint may be used to prevent nuisance alarms or trips when the motor is stopped.
If "No" is programmed the undervoltage element will be blocked from operating whenever the motor is stopped (no phase
current and starter status indicates breaker or contactor open). If the load is high inertia, it may be desirable to ensure that
the motor is tripped off line or prevented from starting in the event of a total loss or decrease in line voltage. Programming
"Yes" for the block setpoint will ensure that the motor is tripped and may be restarted only after the bus is re-energized.
APPLICATION:
An undervoltage of significant proportion that persists while starting a synchronous motor may prevent the motor from com-
ing up to rated speed within the rated time. An undervoltage may be an indication of a system fault. To protect a synchro-
nous motor from being restarted while out of step it may be necessary to use undervoltage to take the motor offline before
a reclose is attempted.
5.8.3 OVERVOLTAGE
PATH: S7 VOLTAGE ELEMENTS OVERVOLTAGE
OVERVOLTAGE OVERVOLTAGE Range: Off, Latched, Unlatched

ALARM: Off
Range: None, Alarm, Aux1, Aux2 or combinations
ASSIGN ALARM RELAYS:
Alarm
5
OVERVOLTAGE ALARM Range: 1.01 to 1.25 x RATED in steps of 0.01
PICKUP: 1.05xRATED
OVERVOLTAGE ALARM Range: 0.0 to 255.0 s in steps of 0.1

DELAY: 3.0s
OVERVOLTAGE ALARM Range: Off, On

EVENTS: Off
OVERVOLTAGE Range: Off, Latched, Unlatched

TRIP: Off
ASSIGN TRIP RELAYS: Range: None, Trip, Aux1, Aux2, or combinations

Trip
OVERVOLTAGE TRIP Range: 1.01 to 1.25 x RATED in steps of 0.01

PICKUP: 1.10xRATED
OVERVOLTAGE TRIP Range: 0.0 to 255.0 s in steps of 0.1

DELAY: 1.0s
If enabled, once the magnitude of either Vab, Vbc, or Vca rises above the Pickup Level for a period of time specified by the
Delay, a trip or alarm will occur (pickup levels are multiples of motor nameplate voltage).
An overvoltage on running motor with a constant load will result in decreased current. However, iron and copper losses
increase, causing an increase in motor temperature. The current overload relay will not pickup this condition and provide
adequate protection. Therefore, the overvoltage element may be useful for protecting the motor in the event of a sustained
overvoltage condition.
The Undervoltage and Overvoltage alarms and trips are activated based upon the phase to phase voltage
regardless of the VT connection type.
NOTE

5.8 S7 VOLTAGE ELEMENTS 5 SETPOINTS
5.8.4 PHASE REVERSAL
PATH: S7 VOLTAGE ELEMENTS PHASE REVERSAL
PHASE REVERSAL PHASE REVERSAL Range: Off, Latched, Unlatched

TRIP: Off

Trip
The 369 can detect the phase rotation of the three phase voltage. If the phase reversal feature is turned on when all 3
phase voltages are greater than 50% motor nameplate voltage and the phase rotation of the three phase voltages is not the
same as the setpoint, a trip and block start will occur in 500 ms to 700 ms.
5.8.5 UNDERFREQUENCY
PATH: S7 VOLTAGE ELEMENTS UNDERFREQUENCY
UNDERFREQUENCY BLOCK UNDERFREQUENCY Range: 0 to 5000 s in steps of 1

FROM START:
UNDERFREQUENCY Range: Off, Latched, Unlatched

ALARM:

Alarm
5 UNDERFREQUENCY ALARM
LEVEL: 59.50 Hz
Range: 20.00 to 70.00 Hz in steps of 0.01
UNDERFREQUENCY ALARM Range: 0.0 to 255.0 s in steps of 0.1

DELAY: 1.0s
UNDERFREQUENCY ALARM Range: Off, On

EVENTS: Off
UNDERFREQUENCY Range: Off, Latched, Unlatched

TRIP: Off

Trip
UNDERFREQUENCY TRIP Range: 20.00 to 70.00 Hz in steps of 0.01

LEVEL: 59.50 Hz
UNDERFREQUENCY TRIP Range: 0.0 to 255.0 s in steps of 0.1

DELAY: 1.0s
Once the frequency of the phase AN or AB voltage (depending on wye or delta connection) falls below the underfrequency
pickup level, a trip or alarm will occur.
APPLICATION:
This feature may be useful for load shedding applications on large motors. It could also be used to load shed an entire
feeder if the trip was assigned to an upstream breaker. Underfrequency can also be used to detect loss of power to a syn-
chronous motor. Due to motor generation, sustained voltage may prevent quick detection of power loss. Therefore, to
quickly detect the loss of system power, the decaying frequency of the generated voltage as the motor slows can be used.
The Underfrequency element is not active when the motor is stopped.

5 SETPOINTS 5.8 S7 VOLTAGE ELEMENTS
5.8.6 OVERFREQUENCY
PATH: S7 VOLTAGE ELEMENTS OVERFREQUENCY
OVERFREQUENCY BLOCK OVERFREQUENCY Range: 0 to 5000 s in steps of 1

FROM START: 1 s
OVERFREQUENCY Range: Off, Latched, Unlatched

ALARM:

Alarm
OVERFREQUENCY ALARM Range: 20.00 to 70.00 Hz in steps of 0.01

LEVEL: 60.50 Hz
OVERFREQUENCY ALARM Range: 0.0 to 255.0 s in steps of 0.1

DELAY: 1.0s
OVERFREQUENCY ALARM Range: Off, On

EVENTS: Off
OVERFREQUENCY Range: Off, Latched, Unlatched

TRIP: Off

Trip
OVERFREQUENCY TRIP
LEVEL: 60.50 Hz
5
OVERFREQUENCY TRIP Range: 0.0 to 255.0 s in steps of 0.1
DELAY: 1.0s
Once the frequency of the phase AN or AB voltage (depending on wye or delta connection) rises above the overfrequency
pickup level, a trip or alarm will occur.
APPLICATION:
This feature may be useful for load shedding applications on large motors. It could also be used to load shed an entire
feeder if the trip was assigned to an upstream breaker.
The Overfrequency element is not active when the motor is stopped.

5.9 S8 POWER ELEMENTS 5 SETPOINTS
5.9 S8 POWER ELEMENTS 5.9.1 SETPOINTS PAGE 8 MENU
S8 SETPOINTS LEAD POWER FACTOR

See page 5–51.
POWER ELEMENTS
LAG POWER FACTOR

See page 5–51.
POSITIVE REACTIVE
See page 5–52.
POWER (kvar)
NEGATIVE REACTIVE
See page 5–53.
POWER (kvar)
UNDERPOWER
See page 5–53.
REVERSE POWER
See page 5–54.
These protective elements rely on CTs and VTs being installed and setpoints programmed. The power elements are only
shown if the 369 has option M or B installed. By convention, an induction motor consumes Watts and vars. This condition is
displayed on the 369 as +Watts and +vars. A synchronous motor can consume Watts and vars or consume Watts and gen-
erate vars. These conditions are displayed on the 369 as +Watts, +vars, and +Watts, –vars respectively.
^
I 1
^
I 2
^
I 3
^
I 4
Figure 5–12: POWER MEASUREMENT CONVENTIONS

5 SETPOINTS 5.9 S8 POWER ELEMENTS
5.9.2 LEAD POWER FACTOR
PATH: S8 POWER ELEMENTS LEAD POWER FACTOR
LEAD POWER FACTOR BLOCK LEAD PF Range: 0 to 5000 s in steps of 1

FROM START: 1 s
LEAD POWER FACTOR Range: Off, Latched, Unlatched

ALARM: Off

Alarm
LEAD POWER FACTOR Range: 0.05 to 0.99 in steps of 0.01

ALARM LEVEL: 0.30
LEAD POWER FACTOR Range: 0.1 to 255.0 s in steps of 0.1

ALARM DELAY: 1.0s
LEAD POWER FACTOR Range: Off, On

ALARM EVENTS: Off
LEAD POWER FACTOR Range: Off, Latched, Unlatched

TRIP: Off

Trip
LEAD POWER FACTOR

TRIP LEVEL: 0.30
5
LEAD POWER FACTOR Range: 0.1 to 255.0 s in steps of 0.1
TRIP DELAY: 1.0s
If the 369 is applied on a synchronous motor, it is desirable not to trip or alarm on power factor until the field has been
applied. Therefore, this feature can be blocked until the motor comes up to speed and the field is applied. From that point
forward, the power factor trip and alarm elements will be active. Once the power factor is less than the lead level, for the
specified delay, a trip or alarm will occur indicating a lead condition.
The lead power factor alarm can be used to detect over-excitation or loss of load.
5.9.3 LAG POWER FACTOR
PATH: S8 POWER ELEMENTS LAG POWER FACTOR
LAG POWER FACTOR BLOCK LAG PF Range: 0 to 5000 s in steps of 1

FROM START: 1 s
LAG POWER FACTOR Range: Off, Latched, Unlatched

ALARM: Off

Alarm
LAG POWER FACTOR Range: 0.05 to 0.99 in steps of 0.01

ALARM LEVEL: 0.85
LAG POWER FACTOR Range: 0.1 to 255.0 s in steps of 0.1

ALARM DELAY: 1.0s
LAG POWER FACTOR Range: Off, On

ALARM EVENTS: Off

LAG POWER FACTOR Range: Off, Latched, Unlatched

TRIP: Off

Trip
LAG POWER FACTOR Range: 0.05 to 0.99 in steps of 0.01

TRIP LEVEL: 0.80
LAG POWER FACTOR Range: 0.1 to 255.0 s in steps of 0.1

TRIP DELAY: 1.0s
If the 369 is applied on a synchronous motor, it is desirable not to trip or alarm on power factor until the field has been
applied. Therefore, this feature can be blocked until the motor comes up to speed and the field is applied. From that point
forward, the power factor trip and alarm elements will be active. Once the power factor is less than the lag level, for the
specified delay, a trip or alarm will occur indicating lag condition.
The power factor alarm can be used to detect loss of excitation and out of step for a synchronous motor.
5.9.4 POSITIVE REACTIVE POWER
PATH: S8 POWER ELEMENTS POSITIVE REACTIVE POWER
POSITIVE REACTIVE BLOCK +kvar ELEMENT Range: 0 to 5000 s in steps of 1

POWER (kvar) FROM START: 1 s
POSITIVE kvar Range: Off, Latched, Unlatched
5 ALARM: Off

Alarm
POSITIVE kvar ALARM Range: 1 to 25000 kvar in steps of 1

LEVEL: 10 kvar
POSITIVE kvar Range: 0.1 to 255.0 s in steps of 0.1

ALARM DELAY: 1.0 s
POSITIVE kvar Range: Off, On

ALARM EVENTS: Off
POSITIVE kvar Range: Off, Latched, Unlatched

TRIP:

Trip
POSITIVE kvar TRIP Range: 1 to 25000 kvar in steps of 1

LEVEL: 25 kvar
POSITIVE kvar Range: 0.1 to 255.0 s in steps of 0.1

TRIP DELAY: 1.0 s
If the 369 is applied on a synchronous motor, it is desirable not to trip or alarm on kvar until the field has been applied.
Therefore, this feature can be blocked until the motor comes up to speed and the field is applied. From that point forward,
the kvar trip and alarm elements will be active. Once the kvar level exceeds the positive level, for the specified delay, a trip
or alarm will occur indicating a positive kvar condition. The reactive power alarm can be used to detect loss of excitation
and out of step.

5 SETPOINTS 5.9 S8 POWER ELEMENTS
5.9.5 NEGATIVE REACTIVE POWER
PATH: S8 POWER ELEMENTS NEGATIVE REACTIVE POWER
NEGATIVE REACTIVE BLOCK -kvar ELEMENT Range: 0 to 5000 s in steps of 1

POWER (kvar) FROM START: 1 s
NEGATIVE kvar Range: Off, Latched, Unlatched

ALARM: Off

Alarm
NEGATIVE kvar ALARM Range: 1 to 25000 kvar in steps of 1

LEVEL: 10 kvar
NEGATIVE kvar Range: 0.1 to 255.0 s in steps of 0.1

ALARM DELAY: 1.0 s
NEGATIVE kvar Range: Off, On

ALARM EVENTS: Off
NEGATIVE kvar Range: Off, Latched, Unlatched

TRIP: Off

Trip
NEGATIVE kvar TRIP

LEVEL: 25 kvar
Range: 1 to 25000 kvar in steps of 1
5
NEGATIVE kvar Range: 0.1 to 255.0 s in steps of 0.1
TRIP DELAY: 1.0s
When using the 369 on a synchronous motor, it is desirable not to trip or alarm on kvar until the field has been applied. As
such, this feature can be blocked until the motor comes up to speed and the field is applied. From that point forward, the
kvar trip and alarm elements will be active. Once the kvar level exceeds the negative level for the specified delay, a trip or
alarm occurs, indicating a negative kvar condition. The reactive power alarm can be used to detect overexcitation or loss of
load.
5.9.6 UNDERPOWER
PATH: S8 POWER ELEMENTS UNDERPOWER
UNDERPOWER BLOCK UNDERPOWER Range: 0 to 15000 s in steps of 1

FROM START: 1 s
UNDERPOWER Range: Off, Latched, Unlatched

ALARM: Off

Alarm
UNDERPOWER ALARM Range: 1 to 25000 kW in steps of 1

LEVEL: 2 kW
UNDERPOWER Range: 0.5 to 255.0 s in steps of 0.5

ALARM DELAY: 1 s
UNDERPOWER Range: Off, On

ALARM EVENTS: Off

UNDERPOWER Range: Off, Latched, Unlatched

TRIP: Off

Trip
UNDERPOWER TRIP Range: 1 to 25000 kW in steps of 1

LEVEL: 1 kW
UNDERPOWER Range: 0.5 to 255.0 s in steps of 0.5

TRIP DELAY: 1 s
If enabled, a trip or alarm occurs when the magnitude of 3∅ total real power falls below the pickup level for a period of time
specified by the delay. The underpower element is active only when the motor is running and will be blocked upon the initi-
ation of a motor start for a period of time defined by the BLOCK UNDERPOWER FROM START setpoint (e.g. this block may be
used to allow pumps to build up head before the underpower element trips or alarms). A value of 0 means the feature is not
blocked from start; otherwise the feature is disabled when the motor is stopped and also from the time a start is detected
until the time entered expires. The pickup level should be set lower than motor loading during normal operations.
Underpower may be used to detect loss of load conditions. Loss of load conditions will not always cause a significant loss
of current. Power is a more accurate representation of loading and may be used for more sensitive detection of load loss or
pump cavitation. This may be especially useful for detecting process related problems.
5.9.7 REVERSE POWER
PATH: S8 POWER ELEMENTS REVERSE POWER
5 REVERSE POWER BLOCK REVERSE POWER

FROM START: 1 s
REVERSE POWER Range: Off, Latched, Unlatched

ALARM: Off
ASSIGN ALARM RELAYS: Range: None, Alarm, Aux1, Aux2, or combination

Alarm
REVERSE POWER ALARM Range: 1 to 25000 kW in steps of 1

LEVEL: 1 kW
REVERSE POWER Range: 0.5 to 30.0 s in steps of 0.5

ALARM DELAY: 1.0 s
REVERSE POWER Range: Off, On

ALARM EVENTS: Off
REVERSE POWER Range: Off, Latched, Unlatched

TRIP: Off

Trip
REVERSE POWER TRIP Range: 1 to 25000 kW in steps of 1

LEVEL: 1 kW
REVERSE POWER Range: 0.5 to 30 s in steps of 0.5

TRIP DELAY: 1.0 s
If enabled, once the magnitude of 3∅ total real power exceeds the pickup level in the reverse direction (negative kW) for a
period of time specified by the delay, a trip or alarm will occur.
The minimum magnitude of power measurement is determined by the phase CT minimum of 5% rated CT
primary. If the level for reverse power is set below that level, a trip or alarm will only occur once the phase
NOTE current exceeds the 5% cutoff.

5 SETPOINTS 5.10 S9 DIGITAL INPUTS
5.10 S9 DIGITAL INPUTS 5.10.1 SETPOINTS PAGE 9 MENU
S9 SETPOINTS SPARE SWITCH

See page 5–55.
DIGITAL INPUTS
EMERGENCY RESTART
See page 5–55.
DIFFERENTIAL SWITCH
See page 5–56.
SPEED SWITCH
See page 5–56.
REMOTE RESET
See page 5–56.
The Access switch is predefined and is non programmable.
NOTE
5.10.2 SPARE SWITCH
PATH: S9 DIGITAL INPUTS SPARE SWITCH
SPARE SWITCH SPARE SW FUNCTION: Range: Off, Starter Status, General, Digital Counter,
Waveform Capture, Simulate Pre-Fault, Simulate
Off Fault, Simulate Pre-Fault to Fault 5
STARTER AUX CONTACT Range: 52a, 52b
TYPE: 52a Only seen if function is Starter Status
See Section 5.10.7: DIGITAL INPUT FUNCTIONS on page 5–57 for an explanation of the spare switch functions.
In addition to the normal selections, the Spare Switch may be used as a starter status contact input. An auxiliary ‘a’ type
contact follows the state of the main contactor or breaker and an auxiliary ‘b’ type contact is in the opposite state. This fea-
ture is recommended for use on all motors. It is essential for proper operation of start inhibits (i.e., Starts/Hour, Time
Between Starts, Start Inhibit, Restart Block, Backspin Start Inhibit), especially when the motor may be run lightly or
unloaded.
A motor stop condition is detected when the current falls below 5% of CT. When SPARE SWITCH is programmed as "Starter
Status", motor stop conditions are detected when the current falls below 5% of CT and the breaker is open. Enabling the
Starter Status and wiring the breaker contactor to the Spare Switch eliminates nuisance lockouts initiated by the 369 if the
motor (synchronous or induction) is running unloaded or idling, and if the STARTS/HOUR, TIME BETWEEN STARTS, START
INHIBIT, RESTART BLOCK, and BACKSPIN START INHIBIT are programmed.
5.10.3 EMERGENCY RESTART
PATH: S9 DIGITAL INPUTS EMERGENCY RESTART
EMERGENCY RESTART EMERGENCY FUNCTION: Range: Off, Emergency Restart, General, Digital Counter,
Emergency Restart
Fault, Simulate Pre-Fault to Fault
See Section 5.10.7: DIGITAL INPUT FUNCTIONS on page 5–57 for an explanation of the emergency restart functions. In
addition to the normal selections, the Emergency Restart Switch may be used as a emergency restart input to the 369 to
override protection for the motor.
When the emergency restart switch is closed all trip and alarm functions are reset. Thermal capacity used is set to zero and
all protective elements are disabled until the switch is opened. Starts per hour are also reduced by one each time the switch
is closed.

5.10 S9 DIGITAL INPUTS 5 SETPOINTS
5.10.4 DIFFERENTIAL SWITCH
PATH: S9 DIGITAL INPUTS DIFFERENTIAL SWITCH
DIFFERENTIAL SWITCH DIFF SW FUNCTION: Range: Off, Differential Switch, General, Digital Counter,
Differential Switch
ASSIGN DIFF RELAY: Range: None, Trip, Aux1, Aux2 or combinations
Trip Only seen if function is Differential Switch
See Section 5.10.7: DIGITAL INPUT FUNCTIONS on page 5–57 for an explanation of differential switch functions.
In addition to the normal selections, the Differential Switch may be used as a contact input for a separate external 86 (differ-
ential trip) relay. Contact closure will cause the 369 relay to issue a differential trip.
5.10.5 SPEED SWITCH
PATH: S9 DIGITAL INPUTS SPEED SWITCH
SPEED SWITCH SPEED SW FUNCTION: Range: Off, Speed Switch, General, Digital Counter,
Speed Switch
SPEED SW TRIP RELAY: Range: None, Trip, Aux1, Aux2 or combinations
Trip Only seen if function is Speed Switch
SPEED SWITCH TIME Range: 0.5 to 100.0s in steps of 0.5

DELAY: 2.0s Only seen if function is Speed Switch
5 See Section 5.10.7: DIGITAL INPUT FUNCTIONS on page 5–57 for an explanation of speed switch functions.
In addition to the normal selections, the Speed Switch may be used as an input for an external speed switch. This allows
the 369 to utilize a speed device for locked rotor protection. During a motor start, if no contact closure occurs within the pro-
grammed time delay, a trip will occur. The speed input must be opened for a speed switch trip to be reset.
5.10.6 REMOTE RESET
PATH: S9 DIGITAL INPUTS REMOTE RESET
REMOTE RESET REMOTE SW FUNCTION: Range: Off, Remote Reset, General, Digital Counter,
Remote Reset
See Section 5.10.7: DIGITAL INPUT FUNCTIONS on page 5–57 for an explanation of remote reset functions.
In addition to the normal selections, the Remote Reset may be used as a contact input to reset the relay.

5 SETPOINTS 5.10 S9 DIGITAL INPUTS
5.10.7 DIGITAL INPUT FUNCTIONS
a) GENERAL
xxxxx SW FUNCTION: GENERAL SWITCH Range: 12 character alphanumeric
General NAME: General Only seen if function is selected as General
GENERAL SWITCH Range: NO (normally open), NC (normally closed)

TYPE: NO Only seen if function is selected as General
BLOCK INPUT FROM Range: 0 - 5000 s in steps of 1

START: 0 s Only seen if function is selected as General
GENERAL SWITCH Range: Off, Latched, Unlatched

ALARM: Off Only seen if function is selected as General

Alarm Only seen if function is selected as General
GENERAL SWITCH Range: 0.1 to 5000.0 s in steps of 0.1

ALARM DELAY: 5.0 s Only seen if function is selected as General
RECORD ALARMS AS Range: No, Yes

EVENTS: No Only seen if function is selected as General
GENERAL SWITCH Range: Off, Latched, Unlatched

TRIP: Off Only seen if function is selected as General

Trip Only seen if function is selected as General 5
GENERAL SWITCH Range: 0.1 to 5000.0 s in steps of 0.1
TRIP DELAY: 5.0 s Only seen if function is selected as General
Any of the programmable digital inputs may be selected and programmed as a separate General Switch Input.
xxxxx refers to the configurable switch input name which includes Spare, Emergency, Differential, Speed, or Remote
Reset
b) DIGITAL COUNTER
xxxxx SW FUNCTION: COUNTER Range: 8 character alphanumeric
Digital Counter NAME: Counter Only seen if function is Digital Counter
COUNTER Range: 6 character alphanumeric

UNITS: Units Only seen if function is Digital Counter
COUNTER Range: Increment, Decrement

TYPE: Increment Only seen if function is Digital Counter
DIGITAL COUNTER Range: Off, Latched, Unlatched

ALARM: Off Only seen if function is Digital Counter
ASSIGN ALARM RELAYS: Range: None, Alarm, Aux1, Aux2, or combinations. Only
Alarm seen if function is Digital Counter
COUNTER ALARM LEVEL: Range: 0 to 65535 in steps of 1

100 Only seen if function is Digital Counter
RECORD ALARMS AS Range: No, Yes

EVENTS: No Only seen if function is Digital Counter
Only one digital input may be selected as a digital counter at a time. User defined units and counter name may be defined
and these will appear on all counter related actual value and alarm messages. To clear a digital counter alarm, the alarm
level must be increased or the counter must be cleared or preset to a lower value.

5.10 S9 DIGITAL INPUTS 5 SETPOINTS
c) WAVEFORM CAPTURE
The Waveform Capture setting for the digital inputs allows the 369 to capture a waveform upon command (contact closure).
The captured waveforms can then be displayed via the 369PC program.
d) SIMULATE PRE-FAULT
The Simulate Pre-Fault setting for the digital inputs allows the 369 to start simulating the pre-fault settings as programmed.
This is typically used for relay or system testing.
e) SIMULATE FAULT
The Simulate Fault setting for the digital inputs allows the 369 to start simulating the fault settings as programmed. This is
typically used for relay or system testing.
f) SIMULATE PRE-FAULT to FAULT

The Simulate Pre-Fault to Fault setting for the digital inputs allows the 369 to start simulating the pre-fault to fault settings
as programmed. This is typically used for relay or system testing.

5 SETPOINTS 5.11 S10 ANALOG OUTPUTS
5.11 S10 ANALOG OUTPUTS 5.11.1 SETPOINTS PAGE 10 MENU
S10 SETPOINTS ANALOG OUTPUT 1

ANALOG OUTPUTS
ANALOG OUTPUT 2
ANALOG OUTPUT 3
ANALOG OUTPUT 4
5.11.2 ANALOG OUTPUTS
PATH: S10 ANALOG OUTPUTS ANALOG OUTPUT 1,2,3,4
ANALOG OUTPUT 1 ANALOG OUTPUT 1: Range: Disabled, Enabled

DISABLED
ANALOG OUTPUT 1 Range: 0–1mA, 0–20 mA, 4–20 mA

RANGE: 0-1 mA
ANALOG OUTPUT 1 Range: See Analog Output selection table

Phase A Current
ANALOG OUTPUT 1 Range: See Analog Output selection table 5

MIN: 0 A
ANALOG OUTPUT 1 Range: See Analog Output selection table

MAX: 100 A
ANALOG OUTPUT 2 See Analog Output 1 for details

5.11 S10 ANALOG OUTPUTS 5 SETPOINTS
5.11.3 ANALOG OUTPUT PARAMETER SELECTION
Table 5–3: ANALOG OUTPUT PARAMETERS

PARAMETER NAME RANGE /UNITS STEP DEFAULT
MINIMUM MAXIMUM
Phase A Current 0 to 65535 A 1 0 100
Phase B Current 0 to 65535 A 1 0 100
Phase C Current 0 to 65535 A 1 0 100
Avg. Phase Current 0 to 65535 A 1 0 100
AB Line Voltage 50 to 20000 V 1 3200 4500
BC Line Voltage 50 to 20000 V 1 3200 4500
CA Line Voltage 50 to 20000 V 1 3200 4500
Avg. Line Voltage 50 to 20000 V 1 3200 4500
Phase AN Voltage 50 to 20000 V 1 1900 2500
Phase BN Voltage 50 to 20000 V 1 1900 2500
Phase CN Voltage 50 to 20000 V 1 1900 2500
Avg. Phase Voltage 50 to 20000 V 1 1900 2500
Hottest Stator RTD –40 to +200°C or –40 to +392°F 1 0 200
RTD #1 to 12 –40 to +200°C or –40 to +392°F 1 –40 200
Remote RTD #1 to 12 –40 to +200°C or –40 to +392°F 1 –40 200
Power Factor 0.01 to 1.00 lead/lag 0.01 0.8 lag 0.8 lead
5 Reactive Power
Real Power
–32768 to 32768 kvar
–32768 to 32768 kW
1
1
0
0
750
1000
Apparent Power 0 to 50000 kVA 1 0 1250
Thermal Capacity Used 0 to 100% 1 0 100
Relay Lockout Time 0 to 500 minutes 1 0 150
Current Demand 0 to 65535 A 1 0 700
kvar Demand 0 to 50000 kvar 1 0 1000
kW Demand 0 to 50000 kW 1 0 1250
kVA Demand 0 to 50000 kVA 1 0 1500
Motor Load 0.00 to 20.00 × FLA 0.01 0.00 1.25

5 SETPOINTS 5.12 S11 369 TESTING
5.12 S11 369 TESTING 5.12.1 SETPOINTS PAGE 11 MENU
S11 SETPOINTS SIMULATION MODE

369 TESTING
PRE-FAULT SETUP
See page 5–62.
FAULT SETUP
See page 5–63.
POST-FAULT SETUP
See page 5–64.
FORCE OUTPUT RELAYS

See page 5–65.
FORCE ANALOG OUTPUTS

See page 5–65.
5.12.2 SIMULATION MODE
PATH: S11 369 TESTING SIMULATION MODE
SIMULATION MODE SIMULATION MODE: Range: Off, Simulate Pre-Fault, Simulate Fault, Simulate
Post Fault, Pre-Fault to Fault, Fault to Post-Fault
Off
PRE-FAULT TO FAULT Range: 0 to 300 s in steps of 1

Only shown if in Pre-Fault to Fault mode
5
TIME DELAY: 10 s
FAULT TO POST-FAULT Range: 0 to 300 s in steps of 1

TIME DELAY: 10 s Only shown if in Pre-Fault to Fault mode
The 369 may be placed in several simulation modes. This simulation may be useful for several purposes. First, it may be
used to understand the operation of the 369 for learning or training purposes. Second, simulation may be used during star-
tup to verify that control circuitry operates as it should in the event of a trip, alarm, or block start. In addition, simulation may
be used to verify that setpoints had been set properly in the event of fault conditions.
Simulation mode may be entered only if the motor is stopped and there are no trips, alarms, or block starts active. The val-
ues entered as Pre-Fault Values will be substituted for the measured values in the 369 when the simulation mode is 'Simu-
late Pre-Fault'. The values entered as Fault Values will be substituted for the measured values in the 369 when the
simulation mode is 'Simulate Fault'. And, the values entered as Post-Fault Values will be substituted for the measured val-
ues in the 369 when the simulation mode is 'Simulate Post-Fault'. If the simulation mode: Pre-Fault to Fault is selected, the
Pre-Fault values will be substituted for the period of time specified by the delay, followed by the Fault values. Likewise, if
the simulation mode: Fault to Post-Fault is selected, the Fault values will be substituted for the period of time specified by
the delay, followed by the Post-Fault values. If a trip occurs, simulation mode will revert to Off. Selecting 'Off' for the simula-
tion mode will also place the 369 back in service. If the 369 measures phase current or control power is cycled, simulation
mode will automatically revert to Off.

5.12 S11 369 TESTING 5 SETPOINTS
5.12.3 PRE-FAULT SETUP
PATH: S11 369 TESTING PRE-FAULT SETUP
PRE-FAULT SETUP: PRE-FAULT CURRENT Range: 0.00 to 20.00 x CT in steps of 0.01

PHASE A: 0.00x CT
PRE-FAULT CURRENT Range: 0.00 to 20.00 x CT in steps of 0.01

PHASE B: 0.00x CT
PRE-FAULT CURRENT Range: 0.00 to 20.00 x CT in steps of 0.01

PHASE C: 0.00x CT
PRE-FAULT CURRENT Range: 0.0 to 5000.0 A in steps of 0.1 (1A/5A), 0.00 to

GROUND: 0.0 A 25.00 A in steps of 0.01 (50: 0.025 CT)
PRE-FAULT VOLTAGE Range: 0.00 to 1.10 x RATED in steps of 0.01

PHASE A: 0.00x RATED

PHASE B: 0.00x RATED

PHASE C: 0.00x RATED
PRE-FAULT CURRENT Range: 0 to 359° in steps of 1

LAGS VOLTAGE: 0 °
5 PRE-FAULT SYSTEM
FREQUENCY: 60.0 Hz
PRE-FAULT STATOR RTD Range: –40 to 200° in steps of 1

TEMPERATURE: 40 °
PRE-FAULT BEARING Range: –40 to 200° in steps of 1

RTD TEMP: 40 °
PRE-FAULT OTHER RTD Range: –40 to 200° in steps of 1

TEMPERATURE: 40 °
PRE-FAULT AMBIENT Range: –40 to 200° in steps of 1

RTD TEMP: 40 °
The values entered under Pre-Fault Setup will be substituted for the real metred values when the simulation mode is in Pre-
Fault mode.

5.12.4 FAULT SETUP
PATH: S11 369 TESTING FAULT SETUP
FAULT SETUP: FAULT CURRENT Range: 0.00 to 20.00 x CT in steps of 0.01

PHASE A: 0.00x CT
FAULT CURRENT Range: 0.00 to 20.00 x CT in steps of 0.01

PHASE B: 0.00x CT
FAULT CURRENT Range: 0.00 to 20.00 x CT in steps of 0.01

PHASE C: 0.00x CT
FAULT CURRENT Range: 0.0 to 5000.0 A in steps of 0.1 (1A/5A), 0.00 to

FAULT VOLTAGE Range: 0.00 to 1.10 x RATED in steps of 0.01



FAULT CURRENT LAGS Range: 0 to 359° in steps of 1

VOLTAGE: 0 °
FAULT SYSTEM
FREQUENCY: 60.0 Hz
5
FAULT STATOR RTD Range: –40 to 200° in steps of 1
TEMPERATURE: 40 °
FAULT BEARING RTD Range: –40 to 200° in steps of 1

TEMPERATURE: 40 °
FAULT OTHER RTD Range: –40 to 200° in steps of 1

TEMPERATURE: 40 °
FAULT AMBIENT RTD Range: –40 to 200° in steps of 1

TEMPERATURE: 40 °
The values entered under Fault Setup will be substituted for the real metered values when the simulation mode is in Fault
mode.

5.12.5 POST- FAULT SETUP
PATH: S11 369 TESTING POST-FAULT SETUP
POST-FAULT SETUP: POST-FAULT CURRENT Range: 0.00 to 20.00 x CT in steps of 0.01

PHASE A: 0.00x CT
POST-FAULT CURRENT Range: 0.00 to 20.00 x CT in steps of 0.01

PHASE B: 0.00x CT
POST-FAULT CURRENT Range: 0.00 to 20.00 x CT in steps of 0.01

PHASE C: 0.00x CT
POST-FAULT CURRENT Range: 0.0 to 5000.0 A in steps of 0.1 (1A/5A), 0.00 to

POST-FAULT VOLTAGE Range: 0.00 to 1.10 x RATED in steps of 0.01



POST-FAULT CURRENT Range: 0 to 359° in steps of 1

LAGS VOLTAGE: 0 °
5 POST-FAULT SYSTEM
FREQUENCY: 60.0 Hz
POST-FAULT STATOR Range: –40 to 200° in steps of 1

RTD TEMP: 40 °
POST-FAULT BEARING Range: –40 to 200° in steps of 1

RTD TEMP: 40 °
POST-FAULT OTHER RTD Range: –40 to 200° in steps of 1

TEMPERATURE: 40 °
POST-FAULT AMBIENT Range: –40 to 200° in steps of 1

RTD TEMP: 40 °

5.12.6 TEST OUTPUT RELAYS
PATH: S11 369 TESTING TEST OUTPUT RELAYS
TEST OUTPUT RELAYS FORCE TRIP RELAY: Range: Disabled, Energized, De-energized
Disabled
FORCE TRIP RELAY Range: Static, 1 to 300 s in steps of 1

DURATION: Static
FORCE AUX1 RELAY: Range: Disabled, Energized, De-energized

Disabled
FORCE AUX1 RELAY Range: Static, 1 to 300 s in steps of 1

DURATION: Static
FORCE AUX2 RELAY: Range: Disabled, Energized, De-energized

Disabled
FORCE AUX2 RELAY: Range: Static, 1 to 300 s in steps of 1

DURATION: Static
FORCE ALARM RELAY: Range: Disabled, Energized, De-energized

Disabled
FORCE ALARM RELAY Range: Static, 1 to 300 s in steps of 1

DURATION: Static
The Test Output Relay feature provides a method of performing checks on all relay contact outputs. The feature can also 5
be used for control purposes while the motor is running. The forced state overrides the normal operation of the relay out-
put.
The forced state, if enabled (energized or de-energized), forces the selected relay into the programmed state for as long as
the programmed duration. After the programmed duration expires, the forced state will return to disabled and relay opera-
tion will return to normal. If the duration is programmed as Static, the forced state will remain in effect until changed or dis-
abled. If control power to the 369 is interrupted, any forced relay condition will be removed.
5.12.7 TEST ANALOG OUTPUTS
PATH: S11 369 TESTING TEST ANALOG OUTPUTS
TEST ANALOG OUTPUTS FORCE ANALOG Range: Off, 1 to 100% in steps of 1

OUTPUT 1: Off
FORCE ANALOG Range: Off, 1 to 100% in steps of 1

OUTPUT 2: Off

OUTPUT 3: Off

OUTPUT 4: Off
In addition to the simulation modes, the Test Analog Output setpoints may be used during startup or testing to verify that the
analog outputs are functioning correctly. It may also be used when the motor is running to give manual or communication
control of an analog output. Forcing an analog output overrides its normal functionality.
When the Force Analog Outputs Function is enabled, the output will reflect the forced value as a percentage of the range 4
to 20 mA, 0 to 20 mA, or 0 to 1 mA. Selecting Off will place the analog output channels back in service, reflecting the
parameters programmed to each.


6 ACTUAL VALUES 6.1 OVERVIEW
6 ACTUAL VALUES 6.1 OVERVIEW 6.1.1 ACTUAL VALUES MAIN MENU
A1 ACTUAL VALUES MOTOR STATUS

See page 6–3.
STATUS
LAST TRIP DATA

See page 6–4.
ALARM STATUS
See page 6–4.
START INHIBIT STATUS

See page 6–5.
DIGITAL INPUT STATUS

See page 6–5.
OUTPUT RELAY STATUS

See page 6–6.
REAL TIME CLOCK

See page 6–6.
A2 ACTUAL VALUES CURRENT METERING

See page 6–7.
METERING DATA
VOLTAGE METERING
See page 6–8.
POWER METERING
See page 6–8.
BACKSPIN METERING
6
See page 6–9.
LOCAL RTD
See page 6–9.
REMOTE RTD
See page 6–10.
DEMAND METERING
See page 6–11.
PHASORS
See page 6–11.

6.1 OVERVIEW 6 ACTUAL VALUES
A3 ACTUAL VALUES MOTOR DATA

See page 6–13.
LEARNED DATA
LOCAL RTD MAXIMUMS

See page 6–14.
REMOTE RTD MAXIMUMS

See page 6–15.
A4 ACTUAL VALUES TRIP COUNTERS

See page 6–16.
STATISTICAL DATA
MOTOR STATISTICS
See page 6–17.
A5 ACTUAL VALUES EVENT: 40

See page 6–18.
EVENT RECORD
EVENT: 39
EVENT: 2
EVENT: 1
6
A6 ACTUAL VALUES MODEL INFORMATION
See page 6–19.
RELAY INFORMATION
FIRMWARE VERSION
See page 6–19.

6 ACTUAL VALUES 6.2 A1 STATUS
6.2 A1 STATUS 6.2.1 ACTUAL VALUES PAGE 1 MENU
A1 ACTUAL VALUES MOTOR STATUS

See page 6–3.
STATUS
LAST TRIP DATA

See page 6–4.
ALARM STATUS
See page 6–4.

See page 6–5.

See page 6–5.
OUTPUT RELAY STATUS

See page 6–6.
REAL TIME CLOCK

See page 6–6.
6.2.2 MOTOR STATUS
PATH: A1 STATUS MOTOR STATUS
MOTOR STATUS MOTOR STATUS: Range: Stopped, Starting, Running, Overload, Tripped
Stopped
MOTOR THERMAL Range: 0 to 100% in steps of 1

CAPACITY USED: 0%
ESTIMATED TRIP TIME Range: Never, 0 to 65500 s in steps of 1

6
ON OVERLOAD: Never
These messages describe the status of the motor at the current point in time. The Motor Status message indicates the cur-
rent state of the motor.
MOTOR STATE DEFINITION

Stopped phase current = 0 A and starter status input = breaker/contactor open
Starting motor previously stopped and phase current has gone from 0 to > FLA
Running FLA > phase current > 0 or starter status input = breaker/contactor closed and motor was previously running
Overload motor previously running and phase current now > FLA
Tripped a trip has been issued and not cleared
The Motor Thermal Capacity Used message indicates the current level which is used by the overload and cooling algo-
rithms. The Estimated Trip Time On Overload is only active for the Overload motor status.

6.2 A1 STATUS 6 ACTUAL VALUES
6.2.3 LAST TRIP DATA
PATH: A1 STATUS LAST TRIP DATA
LAST TRIP DATA CAUSE OF LAST TRIP: Range: No Trip to Date, cause of trip
No Trip to date
TIME OF LAST TRIP: Range: hour: min: seconds

00:00:00
DATE OF LAST TRIP: Range: month day year

Jan 01 1999
A: 0 B: 0 Range: 0 to 100000 A in steps of 1

C: 0 A Pretrip
MOTOR LOAD Range: 0.00 to 20.00 in steps of 0.01

Pretrip 0.00 x FLA
CURRENT UNBALANCE Range: 0 to 100% in steps of 1

Pretrip: 0%
GROUND CURRENT Range: 0.0 to 5000.0 in steps of 0.1 (1A/5A CT)

Pretrip: 0.00 Amps 0.00 to 25.00 in steps of 0.01 (50: 0.025 A CT)
HOTTEST STATOR RTD Range: –40 to +200 °C in steps of 1

RTD#1 0°C Pretrip Only shown if a stator RTD is programmed
Vab: 0 Vbc: 0 Range: 0 to 20000 in steps of 1

Vca: 0 V Pretrip Only shown if VT connection is programmed
Van: 0 Vbn: 0 Range: 0 to 20000 in steps of 1

Vcn: 0 V Pretrip Only shown if VT connection is Wye
SYSTEM FREQUENCY Range: 0.00, 15.00 to 120.00 in steps of 0.01

6 Pretrip: 0.00 Hz Only shown if VT connection is programmed
0 kW 0 kVA Range: –50000 to +50000 in steps of 1

0 kvar Pretrip Only shown if VT connection is programmed
POWER FACTOR Range: 0.00 lag to 1 to 0.00 lead

Pretrip: 1.00 Only shown if VT connection is programmed
Immediately prior to a trip, the 369 takes a snapshot of the metered parameters along with the cause of trip and the date
and time and stores this as pre-trip values. This allows for ease of troubleshooting when a trip occurs. Instantaneous trips
on starting (< 50 ms) may not allow all values to be captured. These values are overwritten when the next trip occurs. The
event record shows details of the last 40 events including trips.
6.2.4 ALARM STATUS
PATH: A1 STATUS ALARM STATUS
DIAGNOSTIC MESSAGES No Trips or Alarms Range: No Trips or Alarms are Active, active alarm
name and level, active trip name
are Active
Any active trips or alarms may be viewed here. If there is more than one active trip or alarm, using the Line Up and Down
keys will cycle through all the active alarm messages. If the [LINE UP] and [LINE DOWN] keys are not pressed, the active
messages will automatically cycle. The current level causing the alarm is displayed along with the alarm name.

6 ACTUAL VALUES 6.2 A1 STATUS
6.2.5 START INHIBIT STATUS
PATH: A1 STATUS START INHIBIT STATUS
START INHIBIT STATUS OVERLOAD LOCKOUT Range: 1 to 9999 min. in steps of 1

TIMER: None
START INHIBIT Range: 1 to 999 min. in steps of 1

TIMER: None
STARTS/HOUR TIMERS: Range: 1 to 60 min. in steps of 1

0 0 0 0 0 min
TIME BETWEEN STARTS Range: 1 to 500 min. in steps of 1

TIMER: None
RESTART BLOCK TIMER: Range: 1 to 50000 s in steps of 1

None
OVERLOAD LOCKOUT TIMER: Determined from the thermal model, this is the remaining amount of time left before the
thermal capacity available will be sufficient to allow another start and the start inhibit will be removed.
SELECT INHIBIT TIMER: If enabled this timer will indicate the remaining time for the Thermal Capacity to reduce to a level
to allow for a safe start according to the Start Inhibit setpoints.
STARTS/HOUR TIMER: If enabled this display will indicate the number of starts within the last hour by showing the time
remaining in each. The oldest start will be on the left. Once the time of one start reaches 0, it is no longer considered a start
within the hour and is removed from the display and any remaining starts are shifted over to the left.
TIME BETWEEN STARTS TIMER: If enabled this timer will indicate the remaining time from the last start before the start
inhibit will be removed and another start may be attempted. This time is measure from the beginning of the last motor start.
RESTART BLOCK TIMER: If enabled this display will reflect the amount of time since the last motor stop before the start
block will be removed and another start may be attempted.
6.2.6 DIGITAL INPUT STATUS

6
PATH: A1 STATUS DIGITAL INPUT STATUS
DIGITAL INPUT STATUS EMERGENCY RESTART: Range: Open, Closed

Open Note: Programmed input name displayed
DIFFERENTIAL RELAY: Range: Open, Closed

SPEED SWITCH: Range: Open, Closed

RESET: Range: Open, Closed

ACCESS: Range: Open, Closed

SPARE: Range: Open, Closed

The present state of the digital inputs will be displayed here.

6.2 A1 STATUS 6 ACTUAL VALUES
6.2.7 OUTPUT RELAY STATUS
PATH: A1 STATUS OUTPUT RELAY STATUS
OUTPUT RELAY STATUS TRIP: De–energized Range: Energized, De–energized, Forced
ALARM: De–energized Range: Energized, De–energized, Forced
AUX 1: De–energized Range: Energized, De–energized, Forced
AUX 2: De–energized Range: Energized, De–energized, Forced
The present state of the output relays will be displayed here. Energized indicates that the NO contacts are now closed and
the NC contacts are now open. De-energized indicates that the NO contacts are now open and the NC contacts are now
closed. Forced indicates that the output relay has been commanded into a certain state.
6.2.8 REAL TIME CLOCK
PATH: A1 STATUS REAL TIME CLOCK
REAL TIME CLOCK DATE: 01/01/1999 Range: month/day/year, hour: minute: second
TIME: 00:00:00
The date and time from the 369 real time clock may be viewed here.

6 ACTUAL VALUES 6.3 A2 METERING DATA
6.3 A2 METERING DATA 6.3.1 ACTUAL VALUES PAGE 2 MENU
A2 ACTUAL VALUES CURRENT METERING

METERING DATA
VOLTAGE METERING
See page 6–8.
POWER METERING
See page 6–8.
BACKSPIN METERING
See page 6–9.
LOCAL RTD
See page 6–9.
REMOTE RTD
See page 6–10.
DEMAND METERING
See page 6–11.
PHASORS
See page 6–11.
6.3.2 CURRENT METERING
PATH: A2 METERING DATA CURRENT METERING
CURRENT METERING A: 0 B: 0 Range: 0 to 65535 A in steps of 1

C: 0 Amps
AVERAGE PHASE Range: 0 to 65535 A in steps of 1 6

CURRENT: 0 Amps
MOTOR LOAD: Range: 0.00 to 20.00 in steps of 0.01

0.00 X FLA
CURRENT UNBALANCE: Range: 0 to 100% in steps of 1

0%
GROUND CURRENT: Range: 0.0 to 5000.0 in steps of 0.1 (1A/5A CT)

0.0 to 25.0 in steps of 0.1 (50: 0.025 A CT)
0.0 Amps
All measured current values are displayed here. Note that the unbalance level is de-rated below FLA. See the unbalance
setpoint for more details.

6.3 A2 METERING DATA 6 ACTUAL VALUES
6.3.3 VOLTAGE METERING
PATH: A2 METERING DATA VOLTAGE METERING
VOLTAGE METERING Vab: 0 Vbc: 0 Range: 0 to 20000 V in steps of 1

Vca: 0 V RMS φ-φ Only shown if a VT connection programmed
AVERAGE LINE Range: 0 to 20000 V in steps of 1

VOLTAGE: 0 V Only shown if VT connection programmed
Va: 0 Vb: 0 Range: 0 to 20000 V in steps of 1

Vc: 0 V RMS φ-N Only shown if a Wye connection programmed
AVERAGE PHASE Range: 0 to 20000 V in steps of 1

VOLTAGE: 0 V Only shown if a Wye connection programmed
SYSTEM FREQUENCY: Range: 0.00, 15.00 to 120.00 Hz in steps of 0.01

0.00 Hz
Measured voltage parameters will be displayed here. If option M or B has not been installed, the following message will
appear when attempting to enter this section.
THIS FEATURE NOT

INSTALLED
6.3.4 POWER METERING
PATH: A2 METERING DATA POWER METERING
POWER METERING POWER FACTOR: Range: 0.00 to 1.00 lag or lead

1.00 Only shown if VT connection programmed
REAL POWER: Range: 0 to ±50000 kW in steps of 1

6 0 kW Only shown if VT connection programmed
REAL POWER: Range: 0 to 65000 hp in steps of 1

0 hp Only shown if VT connection programmed
REACTIVE POWER: Range: 0 to ±50000 kvar in steps of 1

0 kvar Only shown if VT connection programmed
APPARENT POWER: Range: 0 to 50000 kVA in steps of 1

0 kVA Only shown if VT connection programmed
POSITIVE WATTHOURS: Range: 0 to 65535 in steps of 1

0 MWh Only shown if VT connection programmed
POSITIVE VARHOURS: Range: 0 to 65535 in steps of 1

0 kvarh Only shown if VT connection programmed
NEGATIVE VARHOURS: Range: 0 to 65535 in steps of 1

0 kvarh Only shown if VT connection programmed
The values for three phase power metering, consumption and generation will be displayed here. If option M or B has not
been installed the following message will appear when attempting to enter this section.
THIS FEATURE NOT

INSTALLED

6.3.5 BACKSPIN METERING
PATH: A2 METERING DATA BACKSPIN METERING
BACKSPIN METERING BACKSPIN FREQUENCY: Range: 0 to 120 Hz in steps of 0.01

0.00 Hz Only shown if option B installed and enabled.
BACKSPIN DETECTION Range: Motor Running, No Backspin, Slowdown,

Acceleration, Backspinning, Prediction, Soon to Restart.
STATE:No_BSD_Running
Shown only if backspin start inhibit is enabled
BACKSPIN PREDICTION Range: 0 to 50000 s in steps of 1. Shown only if backspin
start inhibit is enabled and predication timer is enabled.
TIMER:30 s
Backspin metering parameters will be displayed here. If option B has not been installed, the following message will appear
when attempting to enter this section.
THIS FEATURE NOT
INSTALLED
6.3.6 LOCAL RTD
PATH: A2 METERING DATA LOCAL RTD
LOCAL RTD HOTTEST STATOR RTD Range: None, 1 to 12 in steps of 1

NUMBER: 1
HOTTEST STATOR RTD Range: –40 to 200°C or –40 to 392°F

TEMPERATURE: 40°C No RTD = open, Shorted = shorted RTD
RTD #1 Range: –40 to 200°C or –40 to 392°F


Range: –40 to 200°C or –40 to 392°F

6
RTD #3










The temperature level of all 12 internal RTDs will be displayed here if the 369 has option R enabled. The programmed
name of each RTD (if changed from the default) will appear as the first line of each message. If option R has not been
installed, the following message appears when attempting to enter this section.
THIS FEATURE NOT
INSTALLED
6.3.7 REMOTE RTD
PATH: A2 METERING DATA REMOTE RTD
REMOTE RTD HOTTEST STATOR RRTD Range: None, 1 to 12 in steps of 1

NUMBER: 1
HOTTEST STATOR RTD Range: –40 to 200°C or –40 to 392°F

RRTD #1 Range: –40 to 200°C or –40 to 392°F






6 RRTD #7
TEMPERATURE: 40°C
Range: –40 to 200°C or –40 to 392°F
No RTD = open, Shorted = shorted RTD





The temperature level of all 12 remote RTDs will be displayed here if programmed and connected to a RRTD module. The
name of each RRTD (if changed from the default) will appear as the first line of each message. If option R has not been
installed, the following message will appear when attempting to enter this section.
THIS FEATURE NOT
INSTALLED
If communications with the RRTD module is lost, the following message will appear:
RRTD MODULE
COMMUNICATIONS LOST

6.3.8 DEMAND METERING
PATH: A2 METERING DATA DEMAND METERING
DEMAND METERING CURRENT Range: 0 to 65535 A in steps of 1

DEMAND: 0 Amps
REAL POWER Range: 0 to 50000 kW in steps of 1

DEMAND: 0 kW Only shown if VT connection programmed
REACTIVE POWER Range: –32000 to 32000 kvar in steps of 1

DEMAND: 0 kvar Only shown if VT connection programmed
APPARENT POWER Range: 0 to 50000 kVA in steps of 1

DEMAND: 0 kVA Only shown if VT connection programmed
PEAK CURRENT Range: 0 to 65535 A in steps of 1

DEMAND: 0 Amps
PEAK REAL POWER Range: 0 to 50000 kW in steps of 1

DEMAND: 0 kW Only shown if VT connection programmed
PEAK REACTIVE POWER Range: –32000 to 32000 kvar in steps of 1

DEMAND: 0 kvar Only shown if VT connection programmed
PEAK APPARENT POWER Range: 0 to 50000 kVA in steps of 1

DEMAND: 0 kVA Only shown if VT connection programmed
The values for current and power demand are displayed here. Peak demand information can be cleared using the
CLEAR PEAK DEMAND command located in S1 369 SETUP \ CLEAR/PRESET DATA. Demand is only shown for positive real
(kW) and reactive (kvar) powers. Only the current demand will be visible if options M or B are not installed.
6.3.9 PHASORS
PATH: A2 METERING DATA PHASORS 6

PHASORS Ia PHASOR: Range: 0 to 359 degrees in steps of 1
0 Degrees Lag
Ib PHASOR: Range: 0 to 359 degrees in steps of 1

0 Degrees Lag
Ic PHASOR: Range: 0 to 359 degrees in steps of 1

0 Degrees Lag
Va PHASOR: Range: 0 to 359 degrees in steps of 1

0 Degrees Lag Only shown if VT connection programmed
Vb PHASOR: Range: 0 to 359 degrees in steps of 1

Vc PHASOR: Range: 0 to 359 degrees in steps of 1

All angles shown are with respect to the reference phasor. The reference phasor is based on the VT connection type. In the
event that option M has not been installed, Van for Wye is 0 V, or Vab for Delta is 0 V, Ia will be used as the reference phasor.
Reference Phasor VT Connection Type
Ia None
Van Wye
Vab Delta

Note that the phasor display is not intended to be used as a protective metering element. Its prime purpose is to diagnose
errors in wiring connections.
To aid in wiring, the following tables can be used to determine if VTs and CTs are on the correct phase and their polarity is
correct. Problems arising from incorrect wiring are extremely high unbalance levels (CTs), erroneous power readings (CTs
and VTs), or phase reversal trips (VTs). To correct wiring, simply start the motor and record the phasors. Using the following
tables along with the recorded phasors, system rotation, VT connection type, and motor power factor, the correct phasors
can be determined. Note that Va (Vab if delta) is always assumed to be 0° and is the reference for all angle measurements.
Common problems include: Phase currents 180° from proper location (CT polarity reversed)
Phase currents or voltages 120° or 240° out (CT/VT on wrong phase)
Table 6–1: THREE PHASE WYE VT CONNECTION
ABC 72.5° 45° 0° –45° –72.5°
ROTATION = 0.3 PF LAG = 0.7 PF LAG = 1.00 PF = 0.7 PF LEAD = 0.2 PF LEAD
Va 0 0° lag 0° lag 0° lag 0
Vb 120 120 120 120 120
Vc 240 240 240 240 240
Ia 75 45 0 315 285
Ib 195 165 120 75 45
Ic 315 285 240 195 165
kW + + + + +
kvar + + 0 – –
kVA + + + (= kW) + +
ACB 72.5° 45° 0° –45° –72.5°
Va 0 0° lag 0° lag 0° lag 0
Vb 240 240 240 240 240
Vc 120 120 120 120 120
Ia 75 45 0 315 285
Ib 315 285 240 195 165
Ic 195 165 120 75 45
kW + + + + +
6 kvar
kVA
+
+
+
+
0
+ (= kW)
–
+ +
–
Table 6–2: THREE PHASE OPEN DELTA VT CONNECTION

ABC 72.5° 45° 0° –45° –72.5°
Va 0 0° 0° 0° 0
Vb ---- ---- ---- ---- ----
Vc 300 300 300 300 300
Ia 100 75 30 345 320
Ib 220 195 150 105 80
Ic 340 315 270 225 200
kW + + + + +
kvar + + 0 – –
kVA + + + (= kW) + +
ACB 72.5° 45° 0° –45° –72.5°
Va 0 0° 0° 0° 0
Vb ---- ---- ---- ---- ----
Vc 60 60 60 60 60
Ia 45 15 330 285 260
Ib 285 255 210 165 140
Ic 165 135 90 45 20
kW + + + + +
kvar + + 0 – –
kVA + + + (= kW) + +

6 ACTUAL VALUES 6.4 A3 LEARNED DATA
6.4 A3 LEARNED DATA 6.4.1 ACTUAL VALUES PAGE 3 MENU
A3 ACTUAL VALUES MOTOR DATA

See page 6–13.
LEARNED DATA
LOCAL RTD MAXIMUMS

See page 6–14.
REMOTE RTD MAXIMUMS

See page 6–15.
This page contains the data the 369 learns to adapt itself to the motor protected.
6.4.2 MOTOR DATA
PATH: A3 LEARNED DATA MOTOR DATA
MOTOR DATA LEARNED ACCELERATION Range: 1.0 to 250.0 s in steps of 0.1

TIME: 0.0 s
LEARNED STARTING Range: 0 to 100000 A in steps of 1

CURRENT: 0 A
LEARNED STARTING Range: 0 to 100% in steps of 1%

CAPACITY: 85%
LEARNED RUNNING COOL Range: 0 to 500 min in steps of 1

TIME CONST.: 0 min
LEARNED STOPPED COOL Range: 0 to 500 min in steps of 1

TIME CONST.: 0 min
Range: 0 to 100000 A in steps of 1
LAST STARTING
CURRENT: 0 A 6
LAST STARTING Range: 0 to 100% in steps of 1%
CAPACITY: 85%
LAST ACCELERATION Range: 1.0 to 250.0 s in steps of 0.1

TIME: 0.0 s
AVERAGE MOTOR LOAD Range: 0.00 to 20.00 x FLA in steps of 0.01

LEARNED: 0.00 X FLA
LEARNED UNBALANCE k Range: 0 to 29 in steps of 1

FACTOR: 0
The learned values for acceleration time and starting current are the average of the individual values acquired for the last
five successful starts. The value for starting current is used when learned k factor is enabled.
The learned value for starting capacity is the amount of thermal capacity required for a start that has been determined by
the 369 from the last five successful motor starts. The last five learned start capacities are averaged and a 25% safety mar-
gin is factored in. This is done to guarantee enough thermal capacity available to start the motor. The Start Inhibit feature,
when enabled, uses this value in determining lockout time.
The learned cool time constants and unbalance k factor are displayed here. The learned value is the average of the last five
measured constants. These learned cool time constants are used only when ENABLE LEARNED COOL TIMES feature of the
thermal model is set to "Yes". The learned unbalance k factor is the average of the last five calculated k factors. The
learned k factor is only used when unbalance biasing of thermal capacity is set on and to learned.
It should be noted that learned values are calculated even when the features requiring them are turned off. None of the
learned features should be used until at least five successful motor starts and stops have been accomplished.

6.4 A3 LEARNED DATA 6 ACTUAL VALUES
Values for starting capacity, starting current, and acceleration time are displayed for the last start. The average motor load
while running is also displayed here. The motor load is averaged over a 15 minute sliding window.
Clearing motor data (see Section 5.2.9: CLEAR/PRESET DATA on page 5–10) resets these values to their default settings.
6.4.3 LOCAL RTD MAXIMUMS
PATH: A3 LEARNED DATA LOCAL RTD MAXIMUMS
LOCAL RTD MAXIMUMS RTD #1 MAXIMUM Range: –40 to 200°C or –40 to 392°F
RTD #2 MAXIMUM Range: –40 to 200°C or –40 to 392°F








6 RTD #10 MAXIMUM Range: –40 to 200°C or –40 to 392°F



The maximum temperature level of all 12 internal RTDs will be displayed here if the 369 has option R enabled. The pro-
grammed name of each RTD (if changed from the default) will appear as the first line of each message. If option R has not
been installed, the following message will appear when attempting to enter this section.
THIS FEATURE NOT
INSTALLED
If options R is enabled and no RTDs are programmed, the following message will appear when an attempt is made to enter
this group of messages.
NO RTDs PROGRAMMED

6 ACTUAL VALUES 6.4 A3 LEARNED DATA
6.4.4 REMOTE RTD MAXIMUMS
PATH: A3 LEARNED DATA REMOTE RTD MAXIMUMS
REMOTE RTD MAXIMUMS RRTD #1 MAXIMUM Range: –40 to 200°C or –40 to 392°F
RRTD #2 MAXIMUM Range: –40 to 200°C or –40 to 392°F










TEMPERATURE: 40°C No RTD = open, Shorted = shorted RTD 6
The maximum temperature level of all 12 remote RTDs will be displayed here if the 369 has been programmed and con-
nected to a RRTD module. The programmed name of each RTD (if changed from the default) will appear as the first line of
each message. If an RRTD module is connected and no RRTDs are programmed, the following message will appear when
an attempt is made to enter this group of messages.
NO RRTDs PROGRAMMED

6.5 A4 STATISTICAL DATA 6 ACTUAL VALUES
6.5 A4 STATISTICAL DATA 6.5.1 ACTUAL VALUES PAGE 4 MENU
A4 ACTUAL VALUES TRIP COUNTERS

STATISTICAL DATA
MOTOR STATISTICS
See page 6–17.
6.5.2 TRIP COUNTERS
PATH: A4 STATISTICAL DATA TRIP COUNTERS
TRIP COUNTERS TOTAL NUMBER OF Range: 0 to 50000 in steps of 1

TRIPS: 0
INCOMPLETE SEQUENCE Range: 0 to 50000 in steps of 1

TRIPS: 0
SWITCH Range: 0 to 50000 in steps of 1

TRIPS: 0
OVERLOAD Range: 0 to 50000 in steps of 1

TRIPS: 0
SHORT CIRCUIT Range: 0 to 50000 in steps of 1

TRIPS: 0
MECHANICAL JAM Range: 0 to 50000 in steps of 1

TRIPS: 0
UNDERCURRENT Range: 0 to 50000 in steps of 1

TRIPS: 0
6 CURRENT UNBALANCE Range: 0 to 50000 in steps of 1
TRIPS: 0
SINGLE PHASE Range: 0 to 50000 in steps of 1

TRIPS: 0
GROUND FAULT Range: 0 to 50000 in steps of 1

TRIPS: 0
ACCELERATION Range: 0 to 50000 in steps of 1

TRIPS: 0
STATOR RTD Range: 0 to 50000 in steps of 1

TRIPS: 0
BEARING RTD Range: 0 to 50000 in steps of 1

TRIPS: 0
OTHER RTD Range: 0 to 50000 in steps of 1

TRIPS: 0
AMBIENT RTD Range: 0 to 50000 in steps of 1

TRIPS: 0
UNDER VOLTAGE Range: 0 to 50000 in steps of 1

TRIPS: 0
OVER VOLTAGE Range: 0 to 50000 in steps of 1

TRIPS: 0

6 ACTUAL VALUES 6.5 A4 STATISTICAL DATA
PHASE REVERSAL Range: 0 to 50000 in steps of 1

TRIPS: 0
UNDERFREQUENCY Range: 0 to 50000 in steps of 1

TRIPS: 0
OVERFREQUENCY Range: 0 to 50000 in steps of 1

TRIPS: 0
LEAD POWER FACTOR Range: 0 to 50000 in steps of 1

TRIPS: 0
LAG POWER FACTOR Range: 0 to 50000 in steps of 1

TRIPS: 0
POSITIVE REACTIVE Range: 0 to 50000 in steps of 1

TRIPS: 0
NEGATIVE REACTIVE Range: 0 to 50000 in steps of 1

TRIPS: 0
UNDERPOWER TRIPS: Range: 0 to 50000 in steps of 1

0
REVERSE POWER: Range: 0 to 50000 in steps of 1

0
TRIP COUNTERS LAST Range: 0 to 50000 in steps of 1

CLEARED: 01/01/1999
A breakdown of the number of trips by type is displayed here. When the total reaches 50000, the counter resets to 0 on the
next trip and continues counting. This information can be cleared in the Clear/Preset Data section of setpoints page one.
The date the counters are cleared will be recorded.
6.5.3 MOTOR STATISTICS

6
PATH: A4 STATISTICAL DATA MOTOR STATISTICS
MOTOR STATISTICS NUMBER OF MOTOR Range: 0 to 50000 in steps of 1

STARTS: 0
NUMBER OF EMERGENCY Range: 0 to 50000 in steps of 1

RESTARTS: 0
MOTOR RUNNING HOURS: Range: 0 to 100000 in steps of 1

0 hrs
DIGITAL COUNTER: Range: 0 to 65535 in steps of 1

0 Shown if counter set to a digital input
The number of motor starts and emergency restarts is recorded here. This information may be useful when troubleshooting
a motor failure or in understanding the history and use of a motor for maintenance purposes. When either of these counters
reaches 50000, it will automatically be reset to 0.
Motor running hours displays the amount of time that the 369 has detected the motor in a running state (current applied
and/or starter status indicating contactor/breaker closed).
The motor starts, emergency restarts and running hours counters may be cleared in setpoints page 1, preset/clear data
section, by clearing motor data.
The digital counter will be displayed when one of the digital inputs has been set up as a digital counter. The digital counter
may be cleared in setpoints page 1, preset/clear data section, by clearing or presetting the digital counter. When the digital
counter reaches 65535, it will automatically be reset by the 369 to 0.

6.6 A5 EVENT RECORD 6 ACTUAL VALUES
6.6 A5 EVENT RECORD 6.6.1 ACTUAL VALUES PAGE 5 MENU
A5 ACTUAL VALUES EVENT: 40

EVENT RECORD
EVENT: 39
EVENT: 02
EVENT: 01
6.6.2 EVENT 01
PATH: A5 EVENT RECORD EVENT 01
EVENT 01 TIME OF EVENT 01 Time: hours / minutes / seconds / hundreds of seconds

00:00:00:00
DATE OF EVENT 01 Date: month / day / year

Jan. 01, 1999
A: 0 B: 0 Range: 0 to 65535 A in steps of 1

C: 0 A E: 01
MOTOR LOAD Range: 0.00 to 20.00 x FLA in steps of 0.01

0.00 X FLA E: 01
Range: 0 to 100% in steps of 1
6 CURRENT UNBALANCE:
0% E: 01
GROUND CURRENT: Range:0.0 to 5000.0 A steps of 0.1 (1A/5A CT)

0.0 Amps E: 01 0.00 to 25.00 A steps of 0.01 (50: 0.025 A CT)
HOTTEST STATOR Range: –40 to 200°C or –40 to 392°F,

RTD 1: 0°C E: 01 No RTD = open, Shorted = shorted RTD
Vab: 0 Vbc: 0 Range: 0 to 20000 V in steps of 1

Vca: 0 V E: 01 Only shown if VT Connection Programmed Delta
Van: 0 Vbn: 0 Range: 0 to 20000 V in steps of 1

Vcn: 0 V E: 01 Only shown if VT Connection Programmed Wye
SYSTEM FREQUENCY: Range: 0.00, 15.00 to 120 Hz in steps of 1

0.00 Hz E: 01 Only shown if VT Connection Programmed
0 kW 0 kVA Range: –50000 to +50000 in steps of 1

0 kvar E: 01 Only shown if VT Connection Programmed
POWER FACTOR: Range: 0.00 lag to 1 to 0.00 lead

1.00 E: 01 Only shown if VT Connection Programmed
A breakdown of the last 65535 events is available here along with the cause of the event and the date and time. All trips
automatically trigger an event. Alarms only trigger an event if turned on for that alarm. Loss or application of control power,
service alarm and emergency restart opening and closing also triggers an event. After 65535 events have been recorded,
the oldest one is removed when a new one is added. The event record may be cleared in the setpoints page 1, clear/preset
data, clear event record section.

6 ACTUAL VALUES 6.7 A6 RELAY INFORMATION
6.7 A6 RELAY INFORMATION 6.7.1 ACTUAL VALUES PAGE 6 MENU
A6 ACTUAL VALUES MODEL INFORMATION

RELAY INFORMATION
FIRMWARE VERSION
6.7.2 MODEL INFORMATION
PATH: A6 RELAY INFORMATION MODEL INFORMATION
MODEL INFORMATION SERIAL NUMBER: Range: See Autolabel.

MXXXXXXXX
INSTALLED OPTIONS: Range: 369 HI/LO, R/0, M/B/0, F/0, P/0

369-HI-R-M-0-0
MANUFACTURE Range: month/day/year

DATE: Jan. 01 1999
LAST CALIBRATION Range: month/day/year

DATE: Jan. 01 1999
369 model and manufacture information may be viewed here. The last calibration date is the date the relay was last cali-
brated at GE Power Management.
6.7.3 FIRMWARE VERSION
PATH: A6 RELAY INFORMATION FIRMWARE VERSION
FIRMWARE VERSION FIRMWARE REVISION:

XXXXXXXX
6
BOOT REVISION:
XXXXXXXX
MODIFICATION NUMBER:
000
This information reflects the revisions of the software currently running in the 369. This information should be noted and
recorded before calling for technical support or service.

6.7 A6 RELAY INFORMATION 6 ACTUAL VALUES

7 APPLICATIONS 7.1 269-369 COMPARISON
7 APPLICATIONS 7.1 269-369 COMPARISON 7.1.1 369 AND 269PLUS COMPARISON
Table 7–1: COMPARISON BETWEEN 369 AND 269Plus

369 269Plus
All options can be turned on or added in the field Must be returned for option change or add other devices
Current and optional voltage inputs are included on all relays Current inputs only. Must use additional meter device to obtain
voltage and power measurements.
Optional 12 RTDs with an additional 12 RTDs available with the 10 RTDs not programmable, must be specified at time of order.
RRTD. All RTDs are individually configured
(100P, 100N, 120N, 10C)
Fully programmable digital inputs No programmable digital inputs
4 programmable analog outputs assignable to 49 parameters 1 Analog output programmable for 5 parameters
1 RS232 (19.2K baud), 3 RS485 (1200 TO 19.2K baud 1 RS485 Communication port (2400 baud maximum)
programmable) communication ports. Also Optional profibus port
and optional fiber optics port
Flash memory firmware upgrade thru PC software and comm port EPROM must be replaced to change firmware
EVENT RECORDER: time and date stamp last 40 events. Displays cause of last trip and last event
Records all trips and selectable alarms
OSCILLOGRAPHY: up to 64 cycles at 16 samples/cycle for last N/A
event(s)
TESTING\SIMULATION function to force relays, analog outputs Exercise relays, force RTDs, force analog output
and simulate metered values
Programmable text message(s) N/A
Backspin frequency detection and backspin timer Backspin timer
Starter failure indication N/A
Measures up to 20 x CT at 16 samples/cycle Measures up to 12 x CT at 12 samples/cycle
15 standard overload curves 8 standard overload curves
Remote display is standard Remote display with mod

7.2 369 FAQs 7 APPLICATIONS
7.2 369 FAQs 7.2.1 FREQUENTLY ASKED QUESTIONS (FAQs)
1. What is the difference between Firmware and Software?

Firmware is the program running inside the relay, which is responsible for all relay protection and control elements.
Software is the program running on the PC, which is used to communicate with the relay and provide relay control
remotely in a user friendly format.
2. How can I obtain copies of the latest manual and PC software?
I need it now!: via the GE Power Management website at http://www.GEindustrial.com/pm
I guess I can wait: fax a request to the GE Power Management Literature department at (905) 201-2113
3. Cannot communicate through the front port (RS232).
Check the following settings:
• Communication Port (COM1, COM2, COM3 etc.) on PC or PLC
• Parity settings must match between the relay and the master (PC or PLC)
• Baud rate setting on the master (PC or PLC) must match RS232 baud rate on the 369 relay.
• Cable has to be a straight through cable, do not use null modem cables where pin 2 and 3 are transposed
• Check the pin outs of RS232 cable (TX - pin 2, RX - pin 3, GND - pin 5)
4. Cannot communicate with RS485.
Check the following settings:
• Communication Port (COM1, COM2, COM3 etc.) on PC or PLC
• Parity settings must match between the relay and the master (PC or PLC)
• Baud rate must match between the relay and the master
• Slave address polled must match between the relay and the master
• Is terminating filter circuit present?
• Are you communicating in half duplex? (369 communicates in half duplex mode only)
• Is wiring correct? (“+” wire should go to “+” terminal of the relay, and “–” goes to “–” terminal)
• Is the RS485 cable shield grounded? (shielding diminishes noise from external EM radiation)
Check the appropriate communication port LED on the relay. The LED should be solidly lit when communicating prop-
erly. The LED will blink on and off when the relay has communication difficulties and the LED will be off if no activity
7 detected on communication lines.
5. Can the 4 wire RS485 (full duplex) be used with 369?
No, the 369 communicates in 2-wire half duplex mode only. However, there are commercial RS485 converters that will
convert a 4 wire to a 2 wire system.
6. Can the 369 be used on Variable Frequency Drives (VFD)?
Yes. Consider the following tables showing the 369 input current frequency response at 50 and 60 Hz:
MEASURED ERROR (% FULL SCALE) MEASURED ERROR (% FULL SCALE)
FREQUENCY FREQUENCY
(60 Hz) ≤ 2 x CT > 2 x CT (50 Hz) ≤ 2 x CT > 2 x CT
25 Hz –17.80 –5.03 25 Hz –11.90 –1.54

45 Hz –2.75 –0.75 45 Hz –0.25 –0.14
55 Hz –0.30 –0.04 50 Hz –0.40 –0.03
60 Hz –0.40 –0.01 55 Hz –0.15 –0.04
65 Hz –0.30 –0.01 65 Hz –0.90 –0.28
90 Hz –1.15 –0.34 90 Hz –0.20 –0.10
105 Hz –0.65 –0.12 105 Hz 0.00 0.00
135 Hz –0.30 –0.14 135 Hz –0.35 –0.16

7 APPLICATIONS 7.2 369 FAQs
The above results indicate a worst-case scenario at the lowest end of the frequency spectrum. Lower frequencies are
typically experienced during initial motor starting. The starting settings can be adjusted to compensate for these differ-
ences during the short duration of the motor start. During normal motor operating conditions above 25 Hz, the 369 fre-
quency response is such that compensation is not required for current-based protection elements.
7. Cannot store setpoint into the relay.
Check and ensure the ACCESS switch is shorted, and check for any PASSCODE restrictions.
8. The 369 relay displays incorrect power reading, yet the power system is balanced. What could be the possible
reasons?
It is highly possible that the secondary wiring to the relay is not correct. Incorrect power can be read when any of the A,
B, or C phases are swapped, a CT or VT is wired backwards, or the relay is programmed as ABC sequence when the
power system is actually ACB and vice versa. The easiest way to verify is to check the voltage and the current phasor
readings on the 369 relay and ensure that each respective voltage and current angles match.
9. What are the merits of a residual ground fault connection versus a core balance connection?
The use of a zero sequence (core balance) CT to detect ground current is recommended over the G/F residual con-
nection. This is especially true at motor starting. During across-the-line starting of large motors, care must be taken to
prevent the high inrush current from operating the ground element of the 369. This is especially true when using the
residual connection of 2 or 3 CTs.
In a residual connection, the unequal saturation of the current transformers, size and location of motor, size of power
system, resistance in the power system from the source to the motor, type of iron used in the motor core & saturation
density, and residual flux levels may all contribute to the production of a false residual current in the secondary or relay
circuit. The common practice in medium and high voltage systems is to use low resistance grounding. By using the
“doughnut CT” scheme, such systems offer the advantages of speed and reliability without much concern for starting
current, fault contribution by the motor, or false residual current.
When a zero sequence CT is used, a voltage is generated in the secondary winding only when zero sequence current
is flowing in the primary leads. Since virtually all motors have their neutrals ungrounded, no zero sequence current can
flow in the motor leads unless there is a ground fault on the motor side.
10. Can I send a 269 setpoint file to a 369 relay?
Yes. Using the 369PC software, a 269 setpoint file can be sent to the 369. Note that any settings/features not in the
269 setpoint file are set to default values on the 369. All setpoints should be confirmed before operating the relay.
11. Can I use an 86 lockout on the 369?
Yes, but if an external 86 lockout device is used and connected to the 369, ensure the 369 is reset prior to attempting
to reset the lockout switch. If the 369 is still tripped, it will immediately re-trip the lockout switch. Also, if the lockout
switch is held reset, the high current draw of the switch coil may cause damage to itself and/or the 369 output relay.
7
12. Can I assign more than one output relay to be blocked when using Start Inhibits?
Yes, but keep in mind that if two output relays are wired in series to inhibit a start it is possible that another element
could be programmed to control one or both of the relays. If this is happening and the other element is programmed
with a longer delay time, this will make it seem as if the Start Inhibit is not working properly when in fact, it is.
13. Can I name a digital input?
Yes. By configuring the digital input as "General" a menu will appear that will allow naming.
14. Can I apply an external voltage to the digital inputs on the 369?
No. The 369 uses an internal voltage to operate the digital inputs. Applying an external voltage may cause damage to
the internal circuitry.
15. No display, no characters on the display but there is a backlight.
Check the contrast using the help button. Press and hold the help button for 2 seconds. When all the LED’s are illumi-
nated press the value up key to darken the contrast or value down key to lighten the contrast. When the desired con-
trast is selected press the enter key to accept the change.
16. Can I upload setpoint files from previous versions to the latest version of firmware?
Yes, with the exception of setpoint files from versions 1.10 and 1.12. Unfortunately these setpoint files must be rewrit-
ten, as they are not compatible.

7.2 369 FAQs 7 APPLICATIONS
17. What method does the 369 use to calculate current unbalance?
The 369 uses the NEMA method. Previous revisions of the 369 manual have incorrectly included a functional test that
measured the ratio of negative sequence current to positive sequence current. The NEMA method is as follows:
I max – Iavg
If Iavg ≥ IFLA, then Unbalance = -------------------------- × 100
I avg
where: Iavg = average phase current

Imax = current in a phase with maximum derivation from Iavg
IFLA = motor full load amps setting
I max – Iavg
If Iavg < IFLA, then Unbalance = -------------------------- × 100
IFLA
To prevent nuisance trips/alarms on lightly loaded motors when a much larger unbalance level will not damage the
rotor, the unbalance protection will automatically be defeated if the average motor current is less than 30% of the full
load current (IFLA) setting.
18. I need to update the options for my 369/RRTD in the field, can I do this?
Yes. All options of the 369/RRTD can be turned on or added in the field. To do this contact the factory.
19. Can I test my output relays?
Yes, but keep in mind that the output relays cannot be forced into a different state while the motor is running.
20. Is the communication interface for Profibus RS232 or RS485?
It is RS485. The 9-pin connector on the rear of the 369 is the connector used by the manufacturer of the Profibus card
and although it is a DB-9, the electrical interface is RS485.
21. Can I use the options enabler code to upgrade my 369 in the field to get the Profibus option?
Yes, but keep in mind that there is a Profibus card that is required and is not installed in units that were not ordered
from the factory with the Profibus option.
22. Can the 369 be used as a remote unit, similar to the 269 remote?
Yes. Every 369 can be used as remote. When ordering the 369, an external 15 foot cable must be ordered.
23. Can the RRTD module be used as a standalone unit?
Yes. The RRTD unit with the IO option, has 4 output relays, 6 digital inputs and 4 analog outputs. With this option the
RRTD can provide temperature protection.
7

7 APPLICATIONS 7.3 369 DOs and DON’Ts
7.3 369 DOs and DON’Ts 7.3.1 DOs and DON’Ts
a) DOs
Always check the power supply rating before applying power to the relay
Applying voltage greater than the maximum rating to the power supply (e.g. 120 V AC to the low-voltage rated power
supply) could result in component damage to the relay's power supply. This will result in the unit no longer being able
to power up.
Ensure that the 369 nominal phase current of 1 A or 5 A matches the secondary rating and the connections of the
connected CTs
Unmatched CTs may result in equipment damage or inadequate protection.
Ensure that the source CT and VT polarity match the relay CT and VT polarity
Polarity of the Phase CTs is critical for power measurement, and residual ground current detection (if used). Polarity of
the VTs is critical for correct power measurement and voltage phase reversal operation.
Properly ground the 369
Connect both the Filter Ground (terminal 123) and Safety Ground (terminal 126) of the 369 directly to the main
GROUND BUS. The benefits of proper grounding of the 369 are numerous, e.g,
• Elimination of nuisance tripping
• Elimination of internal hardware failures
• Reliable operation of the relay
• Higher MTBF (Mean Time Between Failures)
• It is recommended that a tinned copper braided shielding and bonding cable be used. A Belden 8660 cable or
equivalent should be used as a minimum to connect the relay directly to the ground bus.
Grounding of Phase and Ground CTs
All Phase and Ground CTs must be grounded. The potential difference between the CT's ground and the ground bus
should be minimal (ideally zero).
It is highly recommended that the two CT leads be twisted together to minimize noise pickup, especially when the
highly sensitive 50:0.025 Ground CT sensor is used.
RTDs
Consult the application notes of the 369 Instruction Manual for the full description of the 369 RTD circuitry and the dif-
ferent RTD wiring schemes acceptable for proper operation. However, for best results the following recommendations
should be adhered to: 7
a) Use a 3 wire twisted, shielded cable to connect the RTDs from the motor to the 369. The shields should be con-
nected to the proper terminals on the back of the 369.
b) RTD shields are internally connected to the 369 ground (terminal #126) and must not be grounded anywhere else.
c) RTD signals can be characterized as very small, sensitive signals. Therefore, cables carrying RTD signals should
be routed as far away as possible from power carrying cables such as power supply and CT cables.
d) If after wiring the RTD leads to the 369, the RTD temperature displayed by the Relay is zero, then check for the
following conditions:
1. Shorted RTD
2. RTD hot and compensation leads are reversed, i.e. hot lead in compensation terminal and compensation lead
in hot terminal.
RS485 Communications Port
The 369 can provide direct or remote communications (via a modem). An RS232 to RS485 converter is used to tie it to
a PC/PLC or DCS system. The 369 uses the Modicon MODBUS® RTU protocol (functions 03, 04, & 16) to interface
with PCs, PLCs, and DCS systems.
RS485 communications was chosen to be used with the 369 because it allows communications over long distances of
up to 4000 ft. However, care must be taken for it to operate properly and trouble free. The recommendations listed
below must be followed to obtain reliable communications:

7.3 369 DOs and DON’Ts 7 APPLICATIONS
a) A twisted, shielded pair (preferably a 24 gauge Belden 9841 type or 120 equivalent) must be used and routed
away from power carrying cables, such as power supply and CT cables.
b) No more than 32 devices can co-exist on the same link. If however, more than 32 devices should be daisy chained
together, a REPEATER must be used. Note that a repeater is just another RS232 to RS485 converter device. The
shields of all 369 units should also be daisy chained together and grounded at the MASTER (PC/PLC) only. This
is due to the fact that if shields are grounded at different points, a potential difference between grounds might exist
resulting in placing one or more of the transceiver chips (chip used for communications) in an unknown state, i.e.
not receiving nor sending. The corresponding 369 communications might be erroneous, intermittent or unsuccess-
ful.
c) Two sets of 120 Ω / 0.5 W resistor and 1 nF / 50 V capacitor in series must be used (value matches the character-
istic impedance of the line). One set at the 369 end, connected between the positive and negative terminals (#46
& #47 on 369) and the second at the other end of the communications link. This is to prevent reflections and ring-
ing on the line. If a different value resistor is used, it runs the risk of over loading the line and communications
might be erroneous, intermittent or totally unsuccessful.
d) It is highly recommended that connection from the 369 communication terminals be made directly to the interfac-
ing Master Device (PC/PLC/DCS), without the use of stub lengths and/or terminal blocks. This is also to minimize
ringing and reflections on the line.
b) DON'Ts
Don’t apply direct voltage to the Digital Inputs.
There are 6 switch inputs (Spare Input; Differential Input; Speed Switch; Access; Emergency Restart; External Reset)
that are designed for dry contact connections only. Applying direct voltage to the inputs, it may result in component
damage to the digital input circuitry.
Grounding of the RTDs should not be done in two places.
When grounding at the 369, only one Return lead need be grounded as all are hard-wired together internally. No error
will be introduced into the RTD reading by grounding in this manner.
Running more than one RTD Return lead back will cause significant errors as two or more parallel paths for return
have been created.
Don’t reset an 86 Lockout switch before resetting the 369.
If an external 86 lockout device is used and connected to the 369, ensure that the 369 is reset prior to attempting to
reset the lockout switch. If the 369 is still tripped, it will immediately re-trip the lockout switch. Also if the lockout switch
is held reset, the high current draw of the lockout switch coil may cause damage to itself and/or the 369 output relay.

7 APPLICATIONS 7.4 CT SPECIFICATION AND SELECTION
7.4 CT SPECIFICATION AND SELECTION 7.4.1 CT SPECIFICATION
a) 369 CT WITHSTAND
Withstand is important when the phase or ground CT has the capability of driving a large amount of current into the inter-
posing CTs in the relay. This typically occurs on retrofit installations when the CTs are not sized to the burden of the relay.
Electronic relays typically have low burdens (8 mΩ for 369), while the older electromechanical relays have typically high
burdens (1 Ω).
For high current ground faults, the system will be either low resistance or solidly grounded. The limiting factor that deter-
mines the ground fault current that can flow in these types of systems is the source capacity. Withstand is not important for
ground fault on high resistance grounded systems. On these systems, a resistor makes the connection from source to
ground at the source (generator, transformer). The resistor value is chosen so that in the event of a ground fault, the current
that flows is limited to a low value, typically 5, 10, or 20 A.
Since the potential for very large faults exists (ground faults on high resistance grounded systems excluded), the fault must
be cleared as quickly as possible. It is therefore recommended that the time delay for short circuit and high ground faults be
set to instantaneous. Then the duration for which the 369 CTs subjected to high withstand will be less than 250 ms (369
reaction time is less than 50ms + breaker clearing time).
Care must be taken to ensure that the interrupting device is capable of interrupting the potential fault. If
not, some other method of interrupting the fault should be used, and the feature in question should be dis-
NOTE abled (e.g. a fused contactor relies on fuses to interrupt large faults).
The 369 CTs were subjected to high currents for 1 second bursts. The CTs were capable of handling 500 A (500 A relates
to a 100 times the CT primary rating). If the time duration required is less than 1 second, the withstand level will increase.
b) CT SIZE AND SATURATION

The rating (as per ANSI/IEEE C57.13.1) for relaying class CTs may be given in a format such as: 2.5C100, 10T200, T1OO,
10C50, or C200. The number preceding the letter represents the maximum ratio correction; no number in this position
implies that the CT accuracy remains within a 10% ratio correction from 0 to 20 times rating.
The letter is an indication of the CT type:
• A 'C' (formerly L) represents a CT with a low leakage flux in the core where there is no appreciable effect on the ratio
when used within the limits dictated by the class and rating. The 'C' stands for calculated; the actual ratio correction
should be different from the calculated ratio correction by no more than 1%. A 'C' type CT is typically a bushing, win-
dow, or bar type CT with uniformly distributed windings.
• A 'T' (formerly H) represents a CT with a high leakage flux in the core where there is significant effect on CT perfor-
mance. The 'T' stands for test; since the ratio correction is unpredictable, it is to be determined by test. A 'T' type CT is
typically primary wound with unevenly distributed windings. The subsequent number specifies the secondary termi-
nal voltage that may be delivered by the full winding at 20 times rated secondary current without exceeding the ratio 7
correction specified by the first number of the rating. (Example: a 10C100 can develop 100 V at 20 × 5 A, therefore an
appropriate external burden would be 1 Ω or less to allow 20 times rated secondary current with less than 10% ratio
correction.) Note that the voltage rating is at the secondary terminals of the CT and the internal voltage drop across the
secondary resistance must be accounted for in the design of the CT. There are seven voltage ratings: 10, 20, 50, 100,
200, 400, and 800. If a CT comes close to a higher rating, but does not meet or exceed it, then the CT must be rated to
the lower value.
In order to determine how much current CTs can output, the secondary resistance of the CT is required. This resistance will
be part of the equation as far as limiting the current flow. This is determined by the maximum voltage that may be devel-
oped by the CT secondary divided by the entire secondary resistance, CT secondary resistance included.
7.4.2 CT SELECTION
The 369 phase CT should be chosen such that the FLA (FLC) of the motor falls within 50 to 100% of the CT primary rating.
For example, if the FLA of the motor is 173 A, a primary CT rating of 200, 250, or 300 can be chosen (200 being the better
choice). This provides maximum protection of the motor.
The CT selected must then be checked to ensure that it can drive the attached burden (relay and wiring and any auxiliary
devices) at maximum fault current levels without saturating. There are essentially two ways of determining if the CT is being
driven into saturation:

7.4 CT SPECIFICATION AND SELECTION 7 APPLICATIONS
1. Use CT secondary resistance.

Burden = CT secondary resistance + Wire resistance + Relay burden resistance
I fault maximum
CT secondary voltage = Burden × ----------------------------------
-
CT ratio
Example:
Maximum fault level = 6 kA
369 burden = 0.003 Ω
CT = 300:5
CT secondary resistance = 0.088 Ω
Wire length (1 lead) = 50 m
Wire Size = 4.00 mm2
Ohms/km = 4.73 Ω
∴ Burden = 0.088 + (2 × 50)(4.73 / 1000) + 0.003 = 0.564 Ω
∴ CT secondary voltage = 0.564 × (6000 / (300 / 5)) = 56.4 V
Using the excitation curves for the 300:5 CT we see that the knee voltage is at 70 V, therefore this CT is acceptable for
this application.
2. Use CT class.
Burden = Wire resistance + Relay burden resistance
I fault maximum
CT secondary voltage = Burden × ----------------------------------
-
CT ratio
Example:
Maximum fault level = 6 kA, 369 burden = 0.003 Ω, CT = 300:5, CT class = C20,
Wire length (1 lead) = 50 m, Wire Size = 4.00 mm2, Ohms/km = 4.73 Ω
∴ Burden = (2 × 50) × (4.73/1000) + 0.003 = 0.476 Ω
∴ CT secondary voltage = 0.476 × (6000 / (300 / 5)) = 47.6 V
From the CT class (C20): The amount of secondary voltage the CT can deliver to the load burden at 20 × CT without
exceeding the 10% ratio error is 20 V. This application calls for 6000/300 = 20 × CT (Fault current / CT primary). Thus
the 10% ratio error may be exceeded.
The number in the CT class code refers to the guaranteed secondary voltage of the CT. Therefore, the maximum cur-
7 rent that the CT can deliver can be calculated as follows:
maximum secondary current = CT class / Burden = 20 / 0.476 = 42.02 A
CT secondary resistance
CT class voltage
{
Wire Wire
resistance resistance
Relay
burden resistance
Figure 7–1: EQUIVALENT CT CIRCUIT

7 APPLICATIONS 7.5 PROGRAMMING EXAMPLE
7.5 PROGRAMMING EXAMPLE 7.5.1 PROGRAMMING EXAMPLE
Information provided by a motor manufacturer can vary from nameplate information to a vast amount of data related to
every parameter of the motor. The table below shows selected information from a typical motor data sheet and Figure 7–2:
MOTOR THERMAL LIMITS shows the related motor thermal limit curves. This information is required to set the 369 for a
proper protection scheme.
The following is a example of how to determine the 369 setpoints. It is only a example and the setpoints should be
determined based on the application and specific design of the motor.
Table 7–2: SELECTED INFORMATION FROM A TYPICAL MOTOR DATA SHEET

Driven equipment Reciprocating Compressor
Ambient Temperature min. –20°C; max. 41°C
Type or Motor Synchronous
Voltage 6000 V
Nameplate power 2300 kW
Service Factor 1
Insulation class F
Temperature rise stator / rotor 79 / 79 K
Max. locked rotor current 550% FLC
Locked rotor current% FLC 500% at 100% Voltage / 425% at 85% Voltage
Starting time 4 seconds at 100% Voltage / 6.5 seconds at 85% Voltage
Max. permissible starts cold / hot 3/2
Rated Load Current 229A at 100% Load
1000
Current vs. Time Diagram

1) at V=100% rated voltage
2) at V=85% rated voltage
Thermal Limit
3) from hot condition
4) from cold condition
100
7
TIME (S)
369 OVERLOAD
CURVE #4
10
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
CURRENT P.U. 840736A2.CDR
Figure 7–2: MOTOR THERMAL LIMITS

7.5 PROGRAMMING EXAMPLE 7 APPLICATIONS
Phase CT
The phase CT should be chosen such that the FLC is 50% to 100% of CT primary. Since the FLC is 229 A a 250:5, 300:5,
or 400:5 CT may be chosen (a 250:5 is the better choice).
229 / 0.50 = 458 or 229 / 1.00 = 229
Motor FLC
Set the Motor Full Load Current to 229A, as per data sheets.
Ground CT
For high resistive grounded systems, sensitive ground detection is possible with the 50:0.025 CT. On solidly grounded or
low resistive grounded systems where the fault current is much higher, a 1A or 5A CT should be used. If residual ground
fault connection is to be used, the ground fault CT ratio most equal the phase CT ratio. The zero sequence CT chosen
needs to be able to handle all potential fault levels without saturating.
VT Settings
The motor is going to be connected in Wye, hence, the VT connection type will be programmed as Wye. Since the motor
voltage is 6000V, the VT being used will be 6000:120. The VT ratio to be programmed into the 369 will then be 50:1 (6000/
120) and the Motor Rated Voltage will be programmed to 6000V, as per the motor data sheets.
Overload Pickup
The overload pickup is set to the same as the service factor of the motor. In this case, it would be set to the lowest setting
of 1.01 x FLC for the service factor of 1.
Unbalance Bias Of Thermal Capacity
Enable the Unbalance Bias of Thermal Capacity so that the heating effect of unbalance currents is added to the Thermal
Capacity Used.
Unbalance Bias K Factor
The K value is used to calculate the contribution of the negative sequence current flowing in the rotor due to unbalance. It
is defined as:
Rr 2
-------- , where: Rr2 = rotor negative sequence resistance, Rr1 = rotor positive sequence resistance
Rr 1
175 175
K = ---------
2
- = ----------2- @ 6
LRA 5.5
7 where: LRA = Locked Rotor Current

The above formula is based on empirical data.
NOTE
The 369 has the ability to learn the K value after five successful starts. After 5 starts, turn this setpoint off so that the 369
uses the learned value
Hot/Cold Curve Ratio
The hot/cold curve ratio is calculated by simply dividing the hot safe stall time by the cold safe stall time. This information
can be extracted from the Thermal Limit curves. From Figure 7–2: MOTOR THERMAL LIMITS, we can determine that the
hot safe stall time is approximately 18 seconds and the cold safe stall time is approximately 24 seconds. Therefore, the
Hot/Cold curve ratio should be programmed as 0.75 (18 / 24) for this example.
Running and Stopped Cool Time Constant
The running cool time is the time required for the motor to cool while running. This information is usually supplied by the
motor manufacturer but is not part of the given data. The motor manufacturer should be contacted to find out what the cool
times are.

7 APPLICATIONS 7.5 PROGRAMMING EXAMPLE
The Thermal Capacity Used quantity decays exponentially to simulate the cooling of the motor. The rate of cooling is based
upon the running cool time constant when the motor is running, or the stopped cool time constant when the motor is
stopped. The entered cool time constant is one fifth the total cool time from 100% thermal capacity used down to 0% ther-
mal capacity used.
The 369 has a unique capability of learning the cool time constant. This learned parameter is only functional if the Stator
RTDs are connected to the 369. The learned cool time algorithm observes the temperature of the motor as it cools, thus
determining the length of time required for cooling. If the cool times can not be retrieved from the motor manufacturer, then
the Learned Cool Time must be enabled (if the stator RTDs are connected).
Motors have a fanning action when running due to the rotation of the rotor. For this reason, the running cool time is typically
half of the stopped cool time.
Refer to the Selection of Cool Time application note for more details on how to determine the cool time constants when not
provided with the motor.
RTD Biasing
This will enable the temperature from the Stator RTD sensors to be included in the calculations of Thermal Capacity. This
model determines the Thermal Capacity Used based on the temperature of the Stators and is a separate calculation from
the overload model for calculating Thermal Capacity Used. RTD biasing is a back up protection element which accounts for
such things as loss of cooling or unusually high ambient temperature. There are three parameters to set: RTD Bias Min,
RTD Bias Mid, RTD Bias Max.
RTD Bias Minimum
Set to 40°C which is the ambient temperature (obtained from data sheets).
RTD Bias Mid Point
The center point temperature is set to the motor’s hot running temperature and is calculated as follows:
Temperature Rise of Stator + Ambient Temperature.
The temperature rise of the stator is 79°K, obtained from the data sheets. Therefore, the RTD Center point temperature is
set to 120°C (79 + 40).
RTD Bias Maximum
This setpoint is set to the rating of the insulation or slightly less. A class F insulation is used in this motor which is rated at
155°C.
Overload Curve
If only one thermal limit curve is provided, the chosen overload curve should fit below it. When a hot and cold thermal limit
curve is provided, the chosen overload curve should fit between the two curves and the programmed Hot/Cold ratio is used
in the Thermal Capacity algorithm to take into account the thermal state of the motor. The best fitting 369 standard curve is 7
curve # 4, as seen in Figure 7–2: MOTOR THERMAL LIMITS on page 7–9.
Short Circuit Trip
The short circuit trip should be set above the maximum locked rotor current but below the short circuit current of the fuses.
The data sheets indicate a maximum locked rotor current of 550% FLC or 5.5 × FLC. A setting of 6 × FLC with a instanta-
neous time delay will be ideal but nuisance tripping may result due to unusually high demanding starts or starts while the
load is coupled. If need be, set the S/C level higher to a maximum of 8 × FLC to override these conditions.
Mechanical Jam
If the process causes the motor to be prone to mechanical jams, set the Mechanical Jam Trip and Alarm accordingly. In
most cases, the overload trip will become active before the Mechanical Trip, however, if a high overload curve is chosen,
the Mechanical Jam level and time delay become more critical. The setting should then be set to below the overload curve
but above any normal overload conditions of the motor. The main purpose of the mechanical jam element is to protect the
driven equipment due to jammed, or broken equipment.
Undercurrent
If detection of loss of load is required for the specific application, set the undercurrent element according to the current that
will indicate loss of load. For example, this could be programmed for a pump application to detect loss of fluid in the pipe.

7.5 PROGRAMMING EXAMPLE 7 APPLICATIONS
Unbalance Alarm and Trip

The unbalance settings are determined by examining the motor application and motor design. In this case, the motor being
protected is a reciprocating compressor, in which unbalance will be a normal running condition, thus this setting should be
set high. A setting of 20% for the Unbalance Alarm with a delay of 10 seconds would be appropriate and the trip may be set
to 25% with a delay of 10 seconds
Ground Fault
Unfortunately, there is not enough information to determine a ground fault setting. These settings depend on the following
information:
1. The Ground Fault current available.
2. System Grounding - high resistive grounding, solidly grounded, etc.
3. Ground Fault CT used.
4. Ground Fault connection - zero sequence or Residual connection.
Acceleration Trip
This setpoint should be set higher than the maximum starting time to avoid nuisance tripping when the voltage is lower or
for varying loads during starting. If reduced voltage starting is used, a setting of 8 seconds would be appropriate, or if direct
across the line starting is used, a setting of 5 seconds could be used.
Start Inhibit
This function should always be enabled after five successful starts to protect the motor during starting while it is already
hot. The 369 learns the amount of thermal capacity used at start. If the motor is hot, thus having some thermal capacity, the
369 will not allow a start if the available thermal capacity is less than the required thermal capacity for a start. For more
information regarding start inhibit refer to application note in section 7.6.6.
Starts/Hour
Starts/Hour can be set to the # of cold starts as per the data sheet. For this example, the starts/hour would be set to 3.
Time Between Starts
In some cases, the motor manufacturer will specify the time between motor starts. In this example, this information is not
given so this feature can be turned “Off”. However, if the information is given, the time provided on the motor data sheets
should be programmed.
Stator RTDs
RTD trip level should be set at or below the maximum temperature rating of the insulation. This example has a class F insu-
lation which has a temperature rating of 155°C, therefore the Stator RTD Trip level should be set to between 140°C to
7 155°C. The RTD alarm level should be set to a level to provide a warning that the motor temperature is rising. For this
example, 120°C or 130°C would be appropriate.
Bearing RTDs
The Bearing RTD alarm and trip settings will be determined by evaluating the temperature specification from the bearing
manufacturer.

7 APPLICATIONS 7.6 APPLICATIONS
7.6 APPLICATIONS 7.6.1 MOTOR STATUS DETECTION
The 369 detects a stopped motor condition when the phase current falls below 5% of CT, and detects a starting motor con-
dition when phase current is sensed after a stopped motor condition. If the motor idles at 5% of CT, several starts and stops
can be detected causing nuisance lockouts if Starts/Hour, Time Between Starts, Restart Block, Start Inhibit, or Backspin
Timer are programmed. As well, the learned values, such as the Learned Starting Thermal Capacity, Learned Starting Cur-
rent and Learned Acceleration time can be incorrectly calculated.
To overcome this potential problem, the Spare Digital Input can be configured to read the status of the breaker and deter-
mine whether the motor is stopped or simply idling. With the spare input configured as Starter Status and the breaker aux-
iliary contacts wired across the spare input terminals, the 369 senses a stopped motor condition only when the phase
current is below 5% of CT (or zero) AND the breaker is open. If both of these conditions are not met, the 369 will continue
to operate as if the motor is running and the starting elements remain unchanged. Refer to the flowchart below for details of
how the 369 detects motor status and how the starter status element further defines the condition of the motor.
When the Starter Status is programmed, the type of breaker contact being used for monitoring must be set. The following
are the states of the breaker auxiliary contacts in relation to the breaker:
• 52a, 52aa - open when the breaker contacts are open and closed when the breaker contacts are closed
• 52b, 52bb - closed when the breaker contacts are open and open when the breaker contacts are closed
GET PREVIOUS
MOTOR MODE
ACTIVE OR Y IS TRIP Y RESET Y

RESET TRIP
LATCHED TRIP RESETABLE REQUEST
N N N
TRIP
Y Y
MODE = STOP I > FLA START
N
N
7
Y
I>0 RUN
Y N
MODE = START
N BREAKER Y
CLOSED?
N
STOPPED
Y
MODE = RUN
N
N Y
I > FLA RUN IN OVERLOAD
PREVIOUS MODE
MUST = RUN IN
OVERLOAD
Figure 7–3: FLOWCHART SHOWING HOW MOTOR STATUS IS DETERMINED

7.6 APPLICATIONS 7 APPLICATIONS
7.6.2 SELECTION OF COOL TIME CONSTANTS
Thermal limits are not a black and white science and there is some art to setting a protective relay thermal model. The def-
inition of thermal limits mean different things to different manufacturers and quite often, information is not available. There-
fore, it is important to remember what the goal of the motor protection thermal modeling is: to thermally protect the motor
(rotor and stator) without impeding the normal and expected operating conditions that the motor will be subject to.
The thermal model of the 369 provides integrated rotor and stator heating protection. If cooling time constants are supplied
with the motor data they should be used. Since the rotor and stator heating and cooling is integrated into a single model,
use the longer of the cooling time constants (rotor or stator).
If however, no cooling time constants are provided, settings will have to be determined. Before determining the cool time
constant settings, the duty cycle of the motor should be considered. If the motor is typically started and run continuously for
very long periods of time with no overload duty requirements, the cooling time constants can be large. This would make the
thermal model conservative. If the normal duty cycle of the motor involves frequent starts and stops with a periodic over-
load duty requirement, the cooling time constants will need to be shorter and closer to the actual thermal limit of the motor.
Normally motors are rotor limited during starting. Thus RTDs in the stator do not provide the best method of determining
cool times. Determination of reasonable settings for the running and stopped cool time constants can be accomplished in
one of the following manners listed in order of preference.
1. The motor running and stopped cool times or constants may be provided on the motor data sheets or by the manufac-
turer if requested. Remember that the cooling is exponential and the time constants are one fifth the total time to go
from 100% thermal capacity used to 0%.
2. Attempt to determine a conservative value from available data on the motor. See the following example for details.
3. If no data is available an educated guess must be made. Perhaps the motor data could be estimated from other motors
of a similar size or use. Note that conservative protection is better as a first choice until a better understanding of the
motor requirements is developed. Remember that the goal is to protect the motor without impeding the operating duty
that is desired.
EXAMPLE:
Motor data sheets state that the starting sequence allowed is 2 cold or 1 hot after which you must wait 5 hours before
attempting another start.
• This implies that under a normal start condition the motor is using between 34 and 50% thermal capacity. Hence, two
consecutive starts are allowed, but not three (i.e. 34 × 3 > 100).
• If the hot and cold curves or a hot/cold safe stall ratio are not available program 0.5 (1 hot / 2 cold starts) in as the hot/
cold ratio.
• Programming Start Inhibit ‘On’ makes a restart possible as soon as 62.5% (50 × 1.25) thermal capacity is available.
7 • After 2 cold or 1 hot start, close to 100% thermal capacity will be used. Thermal capacity used decays exponentially
(see 369 manual section on motor cooling for calculation). There will be only 37% thermal capacity used after 1 time
constant which means there is enough thermal capacity available for another start. Program 60 minutes (5 hours) as
the stopped cool time constant. Thus after 2 cold or 1 hot start, a stopped motor will be blocked from starting for 5
hours.
Since the rotor cools faster when the motor is running, a reasonable setting for the running cool time constant might be half
the stopped cool time constant or 150 minutes.

7.6.3 THERMAL MODEL
start
U/B I/P to
Y
Thermal Memory
Enabled?
Ieq = Iavg Ieq = Ip 2 + K × In 2
Ieq >
Y Add to TC as per Ieq
FLC x O/L
and O/L Curve
Pickup ?
TC >
Y Y
Ieq > FLC FLC TCR x
(Iavg/FLC)
N N
TC <
Y Add 6% TC per Minute until
FLC TCR X
TC = FLC TCR x (Iavg/FLC)
(Iavg/FLC)
Decrement TC to
FLC TCR x (Iavg/FLC) as per
the rate defined by User's Cool
Rate or Learned Cool Rate
RTD BIAS Y RTD BIAS TC > Y

TC = RTD BIAS TC
ENABLED? TC ?
N N 7
end
Figure 7–4: THERMAL MODEL BLOCK DIAGRAM

LEGEND
U/B..........................Unbalance
I/P ...........................Input
Iavg.........................Average Three Phase Current
Ieq...........................Equivalent Average Three Phase Current
Ip.............................Positive Sequence Current
In.............................Negative Sequence Current
K .............................Constant Multiplier that Equates In to Ip
FLC .........................Full Load Current
FLC TCR ................FLC Thermal Capacity Reduction Setpoint
TC ...........................Thermal Capacity used
RTD BIAS TC .........TC Value looked up from RTD Bias Curve
If Unbalance input to thermal memory is enabled, the increase in heating is reflected in the thermal model.
If RTD Input to Thermal Memory is enabled, the feed-back from the RTDs will correct the thermal model.
NOTE

7.6.4 RTD BIAS FEATURE
START
RTD BIAS N
ENABLED ?
Y HOTTEST
STATOR RTD
> Tmax
T.C. = T.C. RTD =

100%
HOTTEST Y
STATOR RTD
<Tmin
N Tmin < HOTTEST

OVERLOAD ? STATOR RTD < Tmax
(T.C. LOOKED UP ON
RTD BIAS CURVE)
N
T.C. MODEL =
100%
Y T.C. RTD >
T.C. THERMAL
MODEL
Y
N
TRIP
T.C. = T.C. RTD T.C. = T.C. MODEL
7
END
840739A1.CDR
Figure 7–5: RTD BIAS FEATURE

LEGEND
Tmax .......................RTD Bias Maximum Temperature Value
Tmin ........................RTD Bias Minimum Temperature Value
Hottest RTD ............Hottest Stator RTD measured
TC ...........................Thermal Capacity Used
TC RTD...................Thermal Capacity Looked up on RTD Bias Curve.
TC Model ................Thermal Capacity based on the Thermal Model

7.6.5 THERMAL CAPACITY USED CALCULATION
The overload element uses a Thermal Capacity algorithm to determine an overload trip condition. The extent of overload
current determines how fast the Thermal Memory is filled, i.e. if the current is just over FLC × O/L Pickup, Thermal Capacity
slowly increases; versus if the current far exceeds the FLC pickup level, the Thermal Capacity rapidly increases. An over-
load trip occurs when the Thermal Capacity Used reaches 100%.
The overload current does not necessarily have to pass the overload curve for a trip to take place. If there is Thermal
Capacity already built up, the overload trip will occur much faster. In other words, the overload trip will occur at the specified
time on the curve only when the Thermal Capacity is equal to zero and the current is applied at a stable rate. Otherwise, the
Thermal Capacity increases from the value prior to overload, until a 100% Thermal Capacity is reached and an overload
trip occurs.
It is important to chose the overload curve correctly for proper protection. In some cases it is necessary to calculate the
amount of Thermal Capacity developed after a start. This is done to ensure that the 369 does not trip the motor prior to the
completion of a start. The actual filling of the Thermal Capacity is the area under the overload current curve. Therefore, to
calculate the amount of Thermal Capacity after a start, the integral of the overload current most be calculated. Below is an
example of how to calculate the Thermal Capacity during a start:
Thermal Capacity Calculation:
1. Draw lines intersecting the acceleration curve and the overload curve. This is illustrated in Figure 7–6: THERMAL
LIMIT CURVES on page 7–18.
2. Determine the time at which the drawn line intersect, the acceleration curve and the time at which the drawn line inter-
sects the chosen overload curve.
3. Integrate the values that have been determined.
Table 7–3: THERMAL CAPACITY CALCULATIONS

Time Period Motor Starting Current Custom Curve Trip Total Accumulated Thermal
(seconds) (% of FLC) Time (seconds) Capacity Used (%)
0 to 3 580 38 3 / 38 × 100 = 7.8%
3 to 6 560 41 (3 / 41 × 100) + 7.8% = 15.1%
6 to 9 540 44 (3 / 44 × 100) + 15.1% = 21.9%
9 to 12 520 47 (3 / 47 × 100) + 21.9% = 28.3%
12 to 14 500 51 (2 / 51 × 100) + 28.3% = 32.2%
14 to 15 480 56 (1 / 56 × 100) + 32.2% = 34.0%
15 to 16 460 61 (1 / 61 × 100) + 34.0% = 35.6% 7
16 to 17 440 67 (1 / 67 × 100) + 35.6% = 37.1%
17 to 18 380 90 (1 / 90 × 100) + 37.1% = 38.2%
18 to 19 300 149 (1 / 149 × 100) + 38.2% = 38.9%
19 to 20 160 670 (1 / 670 × 100) + 38.9% = 39.0%
Therefore, after this motor has completed a successful start, the Thermal Capacity would have reached approximately
40%.

100000
Motor Manufacturer's Thermal Limit
Curve
369 Custom Overload Curve
10000
44 sec.
1000
Time (Seconds)
Motor
Acceleration
Curve
38 sec.
100
9 sec.
10
3 sec.
7 1
60
20 60 101 140 180 220 260 300 340 380 420 460 500 540 580
5
Percent Full Load
Figure 7–6: THERMAL LIMIT CURVES

Thermal limit curves illustrate thermal capacity used calculation during a start.
7.6.6 START INHIBIT
The Start Inhibit element of the 369 provides an accurate and reliable start protection without unnecessary prolonged lock-
out times causing production down time. The lockout time is based on the actual performance and application of the motor
and not on the worst case scenario, as other start protection elements.
The 369 Thermal Capacity algorithm is used to establish the lockout time of the Start Inhibit element. Thermal Capacity is a
percentage value that gives an indication of how hot the motor is and is derived from the overload currents (as well as
Unbalance currents and RTDs if the respective biasing functions are enabled). The easiest way to understand the Thermal
Modeling function of the 369 is to image a bucket that holds Thermal Capacity. Once this imaginary bucket is full, an over-
load trip occurs. The bucket is filled by the amount of overload current integrated over time and is compared to the pro-
grammed overload curve to obtain a percentage value. The thermal capacity bucket is emptied based on the programmed
running cool time when the current has fallen below the Full Load Current (FLC) and is running normally.

Upon a start, the inrush current is very high, causing the thermal capacity to rapidly increase. The Thermal Capacity Used
variable is compared to the amount of the Thermal Capacity required to start the motor. If there is not enough thermal
capacity available to start the motor, the 369 blocks the operator from starting until the motor has cooled to a level of ther-
mal capacity to successfully start.
Assume that a motor requires 40% Thermal Capacity to start. If the motor was running in overload prior to stopping, the
thermal capacity would be some value; say 80%. Under such conditions the 369 (with Start Inhibit enabled) will lockout or
prevent the operator from starting the motor until the thermal capacity has decreased to 60% so that a successful motor
start can be achieved. This example is illustrated in Figure 7–7: ILLUSTRATION OF THE START INHIBIT FUNCTIONAL-
ITY on page 7–19.
The lockout time is calculated as follows:
lockout time = stopped_cool_time_constant × ln  --------------------------------------------

TCused
100 – TClearned
where:
TC_used = Thermal Capacity Used
TC_learned = Learned Thermal Capacity required to start
stopped_cool_time = one of two variables will be used:
1. Learned cool time is enabled, or
2. Programmed stopped cool time
The INITIAL START CAPACITY setpoint provides a value to be used instead of the TC_learned value until the relay has
observed the five successful starts and can determine a learned value. After the initial five starts, the INITIAL START
CAPACITY setpoint is ignored and learned value is automatically used. The learned start capacity is then updated every
four starts. A safe margin is built into the calculation of the LEARNED START CAPACITY REQUIRED to ensure successful
completion of the longest and most demanding starts. The Learned Start Capacity is calculated as follows:
Start_TC1 + Start_TC2 + Start_TC3 + Start_TC4 + Start_TC5

LEARNED START CAPACITY = ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
4
where: Start_TC1 = the thermal capacity required for the first start
Start_TC2 = the thermal capacity required for the second start, etc.
Thermal Capacity
required to start
40%
7
due to Overload
80%
Thermal Capacity must

80%
20% { 60%
decay by 20% to 60%
in order to start the motor
Figure 7–7: ILLUSTRATION OF THE START INHIBIT FUNCTIONALITY

7.6.7 2φ CT CONFIGURATION
This section illustrates how to use two CTs to sense three phase currents.
The proper configuration for using two CTs rather than three to detect phase current is shown below. Each of the two CTs
acts as a current source. The current from the CT on phase ‘A’ flows into the interposing CT on the relay marked ‘A’. From
there, the it sums with the current flowing from the CT on phase ‘C’ which has just passed through the interposing CT on
the relay marked ‘C’. This ‘summed’ current flows through the interposing CT marked ‘B’ and splits from there to return to
its respective source (CT). Polarity is very important since the value of phase ‘B’ must be the negative equivalent of
'A' + 'C' for the sum of all the vectors to equate to zero. Note that there is only one ground connection. Making two
ground connections creates a parallel path for the current
A B C
:5
:COM
:5
:COM
:5
:COM
Figure 7–8: TWO PHASE WIRING

In the two CT configuration, the currents sum vectorially at the common point of the two CTs. The following diagram illus-
trates the two possible configurations. If one phase is reading high by a factor of 1.73 on a system that is known to be bal-
anced, simply reverse the polarity of the leads at one of the two phase CTs (taking care that the CTs are still tied to ground
at some point). Polarity is important.
Figure 7–9: VECTORS SHOWING REVERSE POLARITY

To illustrate the point further, the diagram here shows how the current in phases 'A' and 'C' sum up to create phase 'B'.
Figure 7–10: RESULTANT PHASE CURRENT - CORRECTLY WIRED 2φ CT SYSTEM

Once again, if the polarity of one of the phases is out by 180°, the magnitude of the resulting vector on a balanced system
will be out by a factor of 1.73.
Figure 7–11: RESULTANT PHASE CURRENT - INCORRECTLY WIRED 2φ CT SYSTEM

On a three wire supply, this configuration will always work and unbalance will be detected properly. In the event of a single
phase, there will always be a large unbalance present at the interposing CTs of the relay. If for example phase ‘A’ was lost,
phase ‘A’ would read zero while phases ‘B’ and ‘C’ would both read the magnitude of phase ‘C’. If on the other hand, phase
‘B’ was lost, at the supply, ‘A’ would be 180× out of phase with phase ‘C’ and the vector addition would be zero at phase ‘B’.
7.6.8 GROUND FAULT DETECTION ON UNGROUNDED SYSTEMS
The 50:0.025 ground fault input is designed for sensitive detection of faults on a high resistance grounded system. Detec-
tion of ground currents from 1 to 10 A primary translates to an input of 0.5 mA to 5 mA into the 50:0.025 tap. Understanding
this allows the use of this input in a simple manner for the detection of ground faults on ungrounded systems.
The following diagram illustrates how to use a wye-open delta voltage transformer configuration to detect phase grounding.
Under normal conditions, the net voltage of the three phases that appears across the 50:0.025 input and the resistor is
close to zero. Under a fault condition, assuming the secondaries of the VTs to be 69 V, the net voltage seen by the relay
and the resistor is 3Vo or 3 × 69 V = 207 V.
a
b
c
101 104
RESISTOR
RESISTOR
369
50:0.025
INPUT
Figure 7–12: GROUND FAULT DETECTION ON UNGROUNDED SYSTEMS

Since the wire resistance should be relatively small in comparison to the resistor chosen, the current flow will be a function
of the fault voltage seen on the open delta transformer divided by the chosen resistor value plus the burden of the 50:0.025
input (1200 Ω).
EXAMPLE:
If a pickup range of 10 to 100 V is desired, the resistor should be chosen as follows:

1. 1 to 10 A pickup on the 2000:1 tap = 0.5 mA – 5 mA.

2. 10 V / 0.5 mA = 20 kΩ.
3. If the resistor chosen is 20 kΩ – 1.2 kΩ = 18.8 kΩ, the wattage should be greater than E2/R, approximately (207 V)2 /
18.8 kΩ = 2.28 W. Therefore, a 5 W resistor will suffice.
The VTs must have a primary rating equal or greater than the line to line voltage, as this is the voltage
that will be seen by the unfaulted inputs in the event of a fault.
NOTE 7.6.9 RTD CIRCUITRY
This section illustrates the functionality of the RTD circuitry in the 369 Motor Protection Relay.
3 mA COMPENSATION
A
B 6 mA RETURN
RTD
3 mA HOT
C 840733A1.CDR
Figure 7–13: RTD CIRCUITRY

A constant current source sends 3 mA DC down legs A and C. A 6 mA DC current returns down leg B. It may be seen that:
( V AB = VLeadA + V LeadB ) and V CB = VLeadC + V RTD + VLeadB
or
( V AB = V comp + V return ) and V CB = Vhot + V RTD + V return
The above holds true providing that all three leads are the same length, gauge, and material, hence the same resistance.
R LeadA = R LeadB = R LeadC = R Lead
or
7 R comp = R return = R hot = R Lead
Electronically, subtracting VAB from VBC leaves only the voltage across the RTD. In this manner lead length is effectively
negated:
VCB – VAB = ( V Lead + VRTD + V Lead ) – ( V Lead + V Lead )

VCB – VAB = V RTD

7.6.10 REDUCED RTD LEAD NUMBER APPLICATION
The 369 requires three leads to be brought back from each RTD: Hot, Return, and Compensation. In certain situations this
can be quite expensive. However, it is possible to reduce the number of leads so that three are required for the first RTD
and only one for each successive RTD. Refer to the following diagram for wiring configuration.
369 SHIELD
MOTOR
HOT 1
RTD #1 RETURN 2
RTD #1
COMPENSATION 3
HOT 5
RTD #2 RETURN 6
RTD #2
COMPENSATION 7
HOT 9
RTD #3 RETURN 10
RTD #3
COMPENSATION 11
HOT 13
RTD #4 RETURN 14
RTD #4
COMPENSATION 15
HOT 17
RTD #5 RETURN 18
RTD #5
COMPENSATION 19
HOT 21
RTD #6 RETURN 22
RTD #6
COMPENSATION 23
SHIELD 24
840732A2.CDR
Figure 7–14: REDUCED WIRING RTDs

The Hot line for each RTD is run as usual for each RTD. However, the Compensation and Return leads need only be run for
the first RTD. At the motor RTD terminal box, connect the RTD Return leads together with as short as possible jumpers. At 7
the 369 relay, the Compensation leads must be jumpered together.
Note that an error is produced on each RTD equal to the voltage drop across the RTD return jumper. This error increases
for each successive RTD added as:
VRTD1 = VRTD1
VRTD2 = VRTD2 + VJ3
VRTD3 = VRTD3 + VJ3 + VJ4
VRTD4 = VRTD4 + VJ3+ VJ4 + VJ5, etc....
This error is directly dependent on the length and gauge of the jumper wires and any error introduced by a poor connection.
For RTD types other than 10C, the error introduced by the jumpers is negligible.
Although this RTD wiring technique reduces the cost of wiring, the following disadvantages must be noted:
1. There is an error in temperature readings due to lead and connection resistances. Not recommended for 10C RTDs.
2. If the RTD Return lead to the 369 or one of the jumpers breaks, all RTDs from the point of the break onwards will read
open.
3. If the Compensation lead breaks or one of the jumpers breaks, all RTDs from the point of the break onwards will func-
tion without any lead compensation.

7.6.11 TWO WIRE RTD LEAD COMPENSATION
An example of how to add lead compensation to a two wire RTD is shown below.
369
COMPENSATION
RESISTOR
24 RETURN
23 COMPENSATION
RTD #6 RETURN
22 MOTOR
21 HOT HOT
840734A1.CDR
TERMINAL
Figure 7–15: 2 WIRE RTD LEAD COMPENSATION

The compensation lead would be added and it would compensate for the Hot and the Return assuming they are all of equal
length and gauge. To compensate for resistance of the Hot and Compensation leads, a resistor equal to the resistance of
the Hot lead could be added to the compensation lead, though in many cases this is unnecessary.
7.6.12 AUTO TRANSFORMER STARTER WIRING
Figure 7–16: AUTO TRANSFORMER, REDUCED VOLTAGE STARTING CIRCUIT

8 TESTING 8.1 TEST SETUP
8 TESTING 8.1 TEST SETUP 8.1.1 INTRODUCTION
This chapter demonstrates the procedures necessary to perform a complete functional test of all the 369 hardware while
also testing firmware/hardware interaction in the process. Testing of the relay during commissioning using a primary injec-
tion test set will ensure that CTs and wiring are correct and complete.
8.1.2 SECONDARY INJECTION TEST SETUP
C(B)
3 PHASE VARIABLE AC TEST SET FREQUENCY
GENERATOR
A START
B(C)
IA IAN IB IBN IC ICN
+ -
VA VB VC VN
MULTILIN
50:.025
105 106 107 108 109 110 93 94 92 96 97 95 99 100 98 102 104 103 101 91 90
50:
VA VN VB VN VC VN 1A COM 5A 1A COM 5A 1A COM 5A 1A COM 5A 0.025A N V
VOLTAGE INPUTS Phase A Phase B Phase C Neut/Gnd Back Spin

WITH METERING OPTION (M) Option (B) GROUND
CURRENT INPUTS
BUS
FILTER GROUND 123
CONTROL
POWER
1 LINE + 124 L
2 NEUTRAL - 125 N
RTD1
3 Com SAFTY GROUND 126
GE Power Management
4 shld.
START
5
111 G TRIGGER
6
RTD2
369 TRIP 112 STOP
7 Com Motor Management 113 TRIGGER
8 shld. Relay R
OUTPUT RELAYS
114 G
9
10
ALARM 115 00000
RTD3
116 R
11 Com 117 G TIMER
12 shld. AUX. 1 118
13 119 R
14 120 G
RTD4 AUX. 2 121
15 Com
122 R +
16 shld.
17 -
18 51
RTD5 SPARE
19 Com 52
20 shld. DIFFERENTIAL 53
RELAY
DIGITAL INPUTS
21 54
22 SPEED 55
RTD6
OPTION ( R )
23 Com SWITCH 56
500 ohm 24 shld. ACCESS 57
SWITCH 58
25
26 EMERGENCY 59
RTD7 RESTART 60
27 Com
EXTERNAL 61
28 shld.
RESET 62
29
30
RTD8 1 80 A
31 Com
2 81 A
OUTPUTS
32 shld.
ANALOG
OPTION
(M,B)
33 3 82 A
34 4 83 A
RTD9 Com- 84
35 Com
36 shld. shld. 85
37
38
39
40
41
Com
shld.
RTD10
(Option (P)
Profibus))
8
42
RTD11
43 Com
CHANNEL 1 CHANNEL 2 CHANNEL 3
44 shld.
DB-9 OPTION (F)
RS485 RS485 RS485
45 (front) FIBER
46 SHLD SHLD SHLD Tx Rx
RTD12
47 Com
71 72 73 74 75 76 77 78 79
48 shld.
RTD1
REMOTE
5 4 3 2 1
RTD
9 8 7 6 MODULE
RTD12
369 PC
PROGRAM
840726B4.CDR
PC
Figure 8–1: SECONDARY INJECTION TEST SETUP

8.2 HARDWARE FUNCTIONAL TESTING 8 TESTING
8.2 HARDWARE FUNCTIONAL TESTING 8.2.1 PHASE CURRENT ACCURACY TEST
The 369 specification for phase current accuracy is ±0.5% of 2 × CT when the injected current is less than 2 × CT. Perform
the steps below to verify accuracy.
1. Alter the following setpoint:
SETPOINT S2:SYSTEM SETUP \ CT / VT SETUP \ PHASE CT PRIMARY: 1000A
2. Measured values should be within ±10A of expected. Inject the values shown in the table below and verify accuracy of
the measured values. View the measured values in:
ACTUAL VALUES A2:\METERING DATA\CURRENT METERING
INJECTED INJECTED EXPECTED MEASURED MEASURED MEASURED

CURRENT 1 A UNIT CURRENT 5 A UNIT CURRENT CURRENT PHASE CURRENT PHASE CURRENT PHASE
READING A B C
0.1 A 0.5 A 100 A
0.2 A 1.0 A 200 A
0.5 A 2.5 A 500 A
1A 5A 1000 A
1.5 A 7.5 A 1500 A
2A 10 A 2000 A
8.2.2 VOLTAGE INPUT ACCURACY TEST
The 369 specification for voltage input accuracy is ±1.0% of full scale (240 V). Perform the steps below to verify accuracy.
1. Alter the following setpoints:
SETPOINT S2:SYSTEM \ CT / VT SETUP \ VT CONNECTION TYPE: Wye
SETPOINT S2:SYSTEM SETUP \ CT / VT SETUP \ VOLTAGE TRANSFORMER RATIO: 10
2. Measured values should be within ±24 V (±1 × 240 × 10) of expected. Apply the voltage values shown in the table and
verify accuracy of the measured values. View the measured values in:
ACTUAL VALUES A2:\METERING DATA\VOLTAGE METERING
APPLIED LINE- EXPECTED VOLTAGE MEASURED VOLTAGE MEASURED VOLTAGE MEASURED VOLTAGE
NEUTRALVOLTAGE READING A-N B-N C-N
30 V 300 V
50 V 500 V
100 V 1000 V
150 V 1500 V
200 V 2000 V
8 240 V 2400 V

8 TESTING 8.2 HARDWARE FUNCTIONAL TESTING
8.2.3 GROUND (1A/5A) ACCURACY TEST
The 369 specification for the 1 A/5 A ground current input accuracy is ±0.5% of 1 × CT for the 5 A input and ±0.5% of 5 × CT
for the 1 A input. Perform the steps below to verify accuracy.
5A INPUT:
SETPOINT S2:SYSTEM SETUP \ CT / VT SETUP \ GROUND CT TYPE: 5A Secondary
SETPOINT S2:SYSTEM SETUP \ CT / VT SETUP \ GROUND CT PRIMARY: 1000 A
2. Measured values should be ±5 A. Inject the values shown in the table below into one phase only and verify accuracy of
the measured values. View the measured values in A2: METERING DATA\CURRENT METERING
INJECTED EXPECTED MEASURED

CURRENT CURRENT GROUND
5 A UNIT READING CURRENT
0.5 A 100 A
1.0 A 200 A
2.5 A 500 A
5A 1000 A
1A INPUT:
SETPOINT S2:SYSTEM SETUP \ CT / VT SETUP \ GROUND CT TYPE: 1A Secondary
SETPOINT S2:SYSTEM SETUP \ CT / VT SETUP \ GROUND CT PRIMARY: 1000 A
2. Measured values should be ±25 A. Inject the values shown in the table below into one phase only and verify accuracy
of the measured values. View the measured values in A2:\METERING DATA\CURRENT METERING
INJECTED EXPECTED MEASURED

CURRENT CURRENT GROUND
1 A UNIT READING CURRENT
0.1 A 10 A
1A 100 A
2.5 A 2500 A
5A 5000 A
8.2.4 50:0.025 GROUND ACCURACY TEST
The 369 specification for GE Power Management 50:0.025 ground current input accuracy is ±0.5% of CT rated primary
(25 A). Perform the steps below to verify accuracy.
1. Alter the following setpoint: 8
SETPOINT S2:SYSTEM SETUP \ CT / VT SETUP \ GROUND CT TYPE: MULTILIN 50:0.025
2. Measured values should be within ±0.125 A of expected. Inject the values shown below either as primary values into a
GE Power Management 50:0.025 Core Balance CT or as secondary values that simulate the core balance CT. Verify
accuracy of the measured values. View the measured values in A2:\METERING DATA\CURRENT METERING
PRIMARY INJECTED SECONDARY INJECTED EXPECTED CURRENT MEASURED GROUND

CURRENT 50:0.025 CT CURRENT READING CURRENT
0.25 A 0.125 mA 0.25 A
1A 0.5 mA 1.00 A
10 A 5 mA 10.00 A
25 A 12.5 mA 25.00 A

8.2.5 RTD ACCURACY TEST
1. The 369 specification for RTD input accuracy is ±2°. Alter the following setpoints:
SETPOINT S6:RTD TEMPERATURE \ RTD TYPE \ STATOR RTD TYPE: 100 ohm Platinum (select desired type)
2. Measured values should be ±2°C or ±4°F. Alter the resistances applied to the RTD inputs as per the table below to
simulate RTDs and verify accuracy of the measured values. View the measured values in:
ACTUAL VALUES A2:\METERING DATA\ LOCAL RTD (and/or REMOTE RTD if using the RRTD Module)
3. Select the preferred temperature units for the display. Alter the following setpoint:
SETPOINT S1: 369 SETUP \ DISPLAY PREFERENCES \ TEMPERATURE DISPLAY: Celsius (or Fahrenheit if preferred)
4. Repeat the above measurements for the other RTD types (120 Ω Nickel, 100 Ω Nickel and 10 Ω Copper)
APPLIED EXPECTED RTD TEMPERATURE MEASURED RTD TEMPERATURE
RESISTANCE READING 9 SELECT ONE: ____(°C)
____(°F)
100 Ω PLATINUM
CELSIUS FAHRENHEIT 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
80.31 Ω –50°C –58°F
100.00 Ω 0°C 32°F
119.39 Ω 50°C 122°F
138.50 Ω 100°C 212°F
157.32 Ω 150°C 302°F
175.84 Ω 200°C 392°F

____(°F)
120 Ω NICKEL
86.17 Ω –50°C –58°F
120.00 Ω 0°C 32°F
157.74 Ω 50°C 122°F
200.64 Ω 100°C 212°F
248.95 Ω 150°C 302°F
303.46 Ω 200°C 392°F

____(°F)
100 Ω NICKEL
71.81 Ω –50°C –58°F
100.00 Ω 0°C 32°F
131.45 Ω 50°C 122°F
167.20 Ω 100°C 212°F
207.45 Ω 150°C 302°F
8 252.88 Ω 200°C 392°F

____(°F)
10 Ω COPPER
7.10 Ω –50°C –58°F
9.04 Ω 0°C 32°F
10.97 Ω 50°C 122°F
12.90 Ω 100°C 212°F
14.83 Ω 150°C 302°F
16.78 Ω 200°C 392°F
18.73 Ω 250°C 482°F

8 TESTING 8.2 HARDWARE FUNCTIONAL TESTING
8.2.6 DIGITAL INPUTS AND TRIP COIL SUPERVISION
The digital inputs and trip coil supervision can be verified easily with a simple switch or pushbutton. Perform the steps
below to verify functionality of the digital inputs.
1. Open switches of all of the digital inputs and the trip coil supervision circuit.
2. View the status of the digital inputs and trip coil supervision in A1: \ STATUS \ DIGITAL INPUT STATUS
3. Close switches of all of the digital inputs and the trip coil supervision circuit.
4. View the status of the digital inputs and trip coil supervision in A1: \ STATUS \ DIGITAL INPUT STATUS
INPUT EXPECTED STATUS 9 PASS EXPECTED STATUS 9 PASS

(SWITCH OPEN) 8 FAIL (SWITCH CLOSED) 8 FAIL
SPARE Open Shorted
DIFFERENTIAL RELAY Open Shorted
SPEED SWITCH Open Shorted
ACCESS SWITCH Open Shorted
EMERGENCY RESTART Open Shorted
EXTERNAL RESET Open Shorted
8.2.7 ANALOG INPUTS AND OUTPUTS
The 369 specification for analog input and analog output accuracy is ±1% of full scale. Perform the steps below to verify
accuracy.
4 to 20mA ANALOG INPUT:
SETPOINT S10:ANALOG OUTPUTS \ ANALOG OUTPUT 1 \ ANALOG RANGE: 4-20 mA (repeat for analog inputs 2 to 4)
2. Analog output values should be ±0.2 mA on the ammeter. Force the analog outputs using the following setpoints:
SETPOINT S11:TESTING\TEST ANALOG OUTPUTS \ FORCE ANALOG OUTPUT 1: 0%
(enter desired percent, repeat for analog outputs 2 to 4)
3. Verify the ammeter readings for all the analog outputs
4. Repeat 1 to 3 for the other forced output settings
ANALOG OUTPUT EXPECTED AMMETER MEASURED AMMETER READING (mA)

FORCE VALUE READING
1 2 3 4
0 4 mA
25 8 mA
50 12 mA
75 16 mA 8
100 20 mA

4. Repeat 1 to 3 for the other forced output settings.


FORCE VALUE READING
1 2 3 4
0 0 mA
25 0.25 mA
50 0.5 mA
75 0.75 mA
100 1.0 mA

4. Repeat steps 1 to 3 for the other forced output settings.

FORCE VALUE READING
1 2 3 4
0 0 mA
25 5 mA
50 10 mA
75 15 mA
100 20 mA
8.2.8 OUTPUT RELAYS
To verify the functionality of the output relays, perform the following steps:
1. Use the following setpoints:
SETPOINT S11:TESTING\TEST OUTPUT RELAYS\FORCE TRIP RELAY: Energized
SETPOINT S11:TESTING\TEST OUTPUT RELAYS\FORCE TRIP RELAY DURATION: Static
2. Using the above setpoints, individually select each of the other output relays (AUX 1, AUX 2 and ALARM) and verify
operation.
FORCE EXPECTED MEASUREMENT (9 for SHORT) ACTUAL MEASUREMENT (9 for SHORT)

8 OPERATION
SETPOINT R1 R2 R3 R4 R1 R2 R3 R4
no nc no nc no nc no nc no nc no nc no nc no nc
R1 Trip 9 9 9 9
R2 Auxiliary 9 9 9 9
R3 Auxiliary 9 9 9 9
R4 Alarm 9 9 9 9

8 TESTING 8.3 ADDITIONAL FUNCTIONAL TESTING
8.3 ADDITIONAL FUNCTIONAL TESTING 8.3.1 OVERLOAD CURVE TEST
The 369 specification for overload curve timing accuracy is ±100 ms or ±2% of time to trip. Pickup accuracy is as per cur-
rent inputs (±0.5% of 2 × CT when the injected current is < 2 × CT; ±1% of 20 × CT when the injected current is ≥ 2 × CT).
1. Perform the steps below to verify accuracy. Alter the following setpoints:
SETPOINT S2:SYSTEM SETUP \ CT / VT SETUP \ PHASE CT PRIMARY: 1000
SETPOINT S2:SYSTEM SETUP \ CT / VT SETUP \ MOTOR FULL LOAD AMPS FLA: 1000
SETPOINT S3:OVERLOAD PROTECTION \ OVERLOAD CURVES \ SELECT CURVE STYLE: Standard
SETPOINT S3: OVERLOAD PROTECTION \ OVERLOAD CURVES \ STANDARD OVELOAD CURVE NUMBER: 4
SETPOINT S3: OVERLOAD PROTECTION \ THERMAL MODEL \ OVERLOAD PICKUP LEVEL: 1.10
SETPOINT S3: OVERLOAD PROTECTION \ THERMAL MODEL \ UNBALANCE BIAS K FACTOR: 0
SETPOINT S3: OVERLOAD PROTECTION \ THERMAL MODEL \ HOT / COLD SAFE STALL RATIO: 1.00
SETPOINT S3: OVERLOAD PROTECTION \ THERMAL MODEL \ ENABLE RTD BIASING: No
2. Any trip must be reset prior to each test. Short the emergency restart terminals momentarily immediately prior to each
overload curve test to ensure that the thermal capacity used is zero. Failure to do so will result in shorter trip times.
Inject the current of the proper amplitude to obtain the values as shown and verify the trip times. Motor load may be
viewed in A2:\METERING DATA\CURRENT METERING
Thermal capacity used and estimated time to trip may be viewed in A1:\STATUS\MOTOR STATUS
AVERAGE PHASE INJECTED PICKUP EXPECTED TIME TOLERANCE RANGE MEASURED TIME TO
CURRENT CURRENT LEVEL TO TRIP TRIP
DISPLAYED 1 A UNIT
1050 A 1.05 A 1.05 never N/A
1200 A 1.20 A 1.20 795.44 s 779.53 to 811.35 s
1750 A 1.75 A 1.75 169.66 s 166.27 to 173.05 s
3000 A 3.0 A 3.00 43.73 s 42.86 to 44.60 s
6000 A 6.0 A 6.00 9.99 s 9.79 to 10.19 s
10000 A 10.0 A 10.00 5.55 s 5.44 to 5.66 s
8.3.2 POWER MEASUREMENT TEST
The 369 specification for reactive and apparent power is ±1.5% of 2 × CT × VT full scale @ Iavg < 2 × CT. Perform the steps
below to verify accuracy.
SETPOINT S2:SYSTEM SETUP \ CT / VT SETUP \ VT CONNECTION TYPE: Wye
SETPOINT S2:SYSTEM SETUP \ CT / VT SETUP \ VT RATIO: 10.00:1
2. Inject current and apply voltage as per the table below. Verify accuracy of the measured values. View the measured
values in A2:\METERING DATA\POWER METERING
8
INJECTED CURRENT / APPLIED VOLTAGE POWER QUANTITY POWER FACTOR
(Ia is reference vector)
1 A UNIT 5 A UNIT EXPECTED TOLERANCE MEASURED EXPECTED MEASURED
RANGE
Ia = 1 A∠0° Ia = 5 A∠0° +3424 kW 3352 to 3496 0.95 lag
Ib = 1 A∠120° Ib = 5 A∠120° kW
Ic = 1 A∠240° Ic = 5 A∠240°
Va = 120 V∠342° Va = 120 V∠342°
Vb = 120 V∠102° Vb = 120 V∠102°
Vc = 120 V∠222° Vc = 120 V∠222°
Ia = 1 A∠0° Ia = 5 A∠0° +3424 kvar 3352 to 3496 0.31 lag
Ib = 1 A∠120° Ib = 5 A∠120° kvar
Ic = 1 A∠240° Ic = 5 A∠240°
Va = 120 V∠288° Va = 120 V∠288°
Vb = 120 V∠48° Vb = 120 V∠48°
Vc = 120 V∠168° Vc = 120 V∠168°

8.3 ADDITIONAL FUNCTIONAL TESTING 8 TESTING
8.3.3 VOLTAGE PHASE REVERSAL TEST
The 369 can detect voltage phase rotation and protect against phase reversal. To test the phase reversal element, perform
the following steps:
SETPOINT S2:SYSTEM SETUP \ CT / VT SETUP \ VT CONNECTION TYPE: Wye or Open Delta
SETPOINT S7:VOLTAGE ELEMENTS \ PHASE REVERSAL \ PHASE REVERSAL TRIP: On
SETPOINT S7:VOLTAGE ELEMENTS \ PHASE REVERSAL \ ASSIGN TRIP RELAYS: Trip
SETPOINT S2: SYSTEM SETUP \ CT / VT SETUP \ SYSTEM PHASE SEQUENCE: ABC
2. Apply voltages as per the table below. Verify the 369 operation on voltage phase reversal.
APPLIED VOLTAGE EXPECTED RESULT OBSERVED RESULT

8 NO TRIP 8 NO TRIP
9 PHASE REVERSAL TRIP 9 PHASE REVERSAL TRIP
Va = 120 V∠0°
Vb = 120 V∠120° 8
Vc = 120 V∠240°
Va = 120 V∠0°
Vb = 120 V∠240° 9
Vc = 120 V∠120°
8.3.4 SHORT CIRCUIT TEST
The 369 specification for short circuit timing is +40 ms or ±0.5% of total time. The pickup accuracy is as per the phase cur-
rent inputs. Perform the steps below to verify the performance of the short circuit element.
SETPOINT S4:CURRENT ELEMENTS \ SHORT CIRCUIT \ SHORT CIRCUIT TRIP: On
SETPOINT S4:CURRENT ELEMENTS \ SHORT CIRCUIT \ ASSIGN TRIP RELAYS: Trip
SETPOINT S4:CURRENT ELEMENTS \ SHORT CIRCUIT \ SHORT CIRCUIT PICKUP LEVEL: 5.0 x CT
SETPOINT S4:CURRENT ELEMENTS \ SHORT CIRCUIT \ ADD S/C DELAY: 0
2. Inject current as per the table below, resetting the unit after each trip by pressing the [RESET] key, and verify timing
accuracy. Pre-trip values may be viewed in
ACTUAL VALUES A1: STATUS \ LAST TRIP DATA
INJECTED CURRENT TIME TO TRIP (ms)

5 A UNIT 1 A UNIT EXPECTED MEASURED
30 A 6A < 40 ms
40 A 8A < 40 ms
50 A 10 A < 40 ms
8

9 COMMISSIONING 9.1 COMMISSIONING SETPOINTS
9 COMMISSIONING 9.1 COMMISSIONING SETPOINTS 9.1.1 SETPOINTS TABLE
Table 9–1: SETPOINTS TABLE (Sheet 1 of 38)

GROUP DESCRIPTION MIN. MAX. SETTING
SETPOINT Front Panel Access
ACCESS
Comm Access
Encrypted Comm Password
DISPLAY Default Message Cycle Time 5s 100 s
PREFERENCES
Default Message Timeout 10 s 900 s
Contrast Adjustment 0 255
Flash Message Duration 1s 10 s
Temperature Display Units °C °F
COMMUNICATIONS Slave Address 1 254
Computer RS232 Baud Rate 1200 19200
Computer RS232 Parity None odd, even
Channel 1 RS485 Baud Rate 1200 19200
Channel 1 RS485 Parity None odd, even
Channel 3 Application Modbus RRTD
Channel 3 Connection RS485 fiber
Profibus Address 1 126
IP Address Octet 1 0 255
Subnet Mask Octet 1 0 255
Gateway Address Octet 1 0 255
WAVEFORM Trigger Position 0% 100%
CAPTURE
MESSAGE Text Message 1 --- 40 char.
SCRATCHPAD
Text Message 2 --- 40 char.
Text Message 5 --- 40 char. 9

9.1 COMMISSIONING SETPOINTS 9 COMMISSIONING

DEFAULT Default to Current Metering Yes No
MESSAGES
Default to Motor Load Yes No
Default to Delta Voltage Metering Yes No
Default to Power Factor Yes No
Default to Positive Watthours Yes No
Default to Real Power Yes No
Default to Reactive Power Yes No
Default to Hottest Stator RTD Yes No
Default to Text Message 1 Yes No
CT / VT SETUP Phase CT Primary 1 5000
Motor Full Load Amps 1 5000
Ground CT Type 1 5 or 50:0.025
Ground CT Primary 1 5000
Voltage Transformer Connection Type None Wye,Delta
Voltage Transformer Ratio 1 240
Motor Rated Voltage 100 20000
Nominal Frequency 50,60 Variable
System Phase Sequence ABC ACB
TRIP COUNTER Trip Counter Alarm Off L,UL
Assign Alarm Relays None Aux2
Alarm Pickup Level 1 50000
Trip Counter Alarm Events Off On
STARTER FAILURE Starter Failure Alarm Off L,UL
Starter Type Breaker Contactor
Starter Failure Delay 10 1000
Starter Failure Alarm Events Off On
CURRENT Current Demand Period 5 90
DEMAND
Current Demand Alarm Off L,UL
Current Demand Alarm Level 10 65535
Current Demand Alarm Events Off On
kW DEMAND kW Demand Period 5 90
kW Demand Alarm Off L,UL
kW Demand Alarm Level 1 50000
9 kW Demand Alarm Events Off On
kvar DEMAND kvar Demand Period 5 90
kvar Demand Alarm Off L,UL
kvar Demand Alarm Level 1 50000
kvar Demand Alarm Events Off On


kVA DEMAND kVA Demand Period 5 90
kVA Demand Alarm Off L,UL
kVA Demand Alarm Level 1 50000
kVA Demand Alarm Events Off On
OUTPUT RELAY Trip Relay Reset Mode All Local, Remote
SETUP
Trip Relay Operation FS NFS
Aux1 Relay Reset Mode All Local, Remote
Aux1 Relay Operation FS NFS
Aux2 Relay Reset Mode All Local, Remote
Aux2 Relay Operation FS NFS
Alarm Relay Reset Mode All Local, Remote
Alarm Relay Operation FS NFS
SERIAL COMM Serial Communication Control Off On
CONTROL
Assign Start Control Relays None Aux2
REDUCED Reduced Voltage Starting Off On
VOLTAGE
Assign Control Relays --- ---
Transition On --- ---
Reduced Voltage Start Level 25% FLA 300% FLA
Reduced Voltage Start Timer 1s 500 s
Assign Trip Relays --- ---
AUTORESTART Autorestart Enabled No Yes
Total Restarts 0s 20000
Restart Delay Delay 0s 20000 s
Progressive Delay Delay 0s 20000 s
Hold Delay Delay 0s 20000 s
Bus Valid Enabled Yes No
Bus Valid Level 15% 100%
THERMAL MODEL Overload Pickup Level 1.01 1.25
Thermal Capacity Alarm Off L,UL
Assign Thermal Capacity Alarm Relays None Aux2
Thermal Capacity Alarm Level 1 100
Thermal Capacity Alarm Events No Yes
Assign Thermal Capacity Trip Relay None Aux2
Enable Unbalance Biasing of TC No Yes
Unbalance k Factor Learned 29
Hot/Cold Safe Stall Ratio 0.01 1
Enable Learned Cool Time No Yes
Running Cool Time Constant 1 500
Stopped Cool Time Constant 1 500
Enable RTD Biasing No Yes 9
RTD Bias Minimum 0 mid
RTD Bias Center Point min max
RTD Bias Maximum mid 200


O/L CURVE SETUP Select Curve Style Standard Custom
Standard Overload Curve Number 1 15
Time to Trip at 1.01 x FLA 0 65500
OVERLOAD Overload Alarm Off L,UL
ALARM
Overload Alarm Level 1.01 1.50
Assign Overload Alarm Relays None Aux2
Overload Alarm Delay 0.1 60.0
Overload Alarm Events Off On
SHORT CIRCUIT Short Circuit Trip Off L,UL
Assign Trip Relays None Aux2
Short Circuit Pickup 2.0 20.0
9 Short Circuit Trip Delay 0.00 255.00
Short Circuit Trip Backup Off L,UL
Assign Backup Relays None Aux2
Add Short Circuit Backup Trip Delay 0.00 255.00


MECHNICAL JAM Mechanical Jam Alarm Off L,UL
Mechanical Jam Alarm Level 1.01 6.00
Mechanical Jam Alarm Delay 0.5 125.0
Mechanical Jam Alarm Events Off On
Mechanical Jam Trip Off L,UL
Mechanical Jam Trip Level 1.01 6.00
Mechanical Jam Trip Delay 0.5 125.0
UNDERCURRENT Block Undercurrent from Start 0 15000
Undercurrent Alarm Off L,UL
Undercurrent Alarm Level 0.1 0.99
Undercurrent Alarm Delay 1 255
Undercurrent Alarm Events Off On
Undercurrent Trip Off L,UL
Undercurrent Trip Level 0.1 0.99
Undercurrent Trip Delay 1 255
CURRENT Block Unbalance From Start 0 5000
UNBALANCE
Current Unbalance Alarm Off L,UL
Unbalance Alarm Level 4 30
Unbalance Alarm Delay 1 255
Unbalance Alarm Events Off On
Current Unbalance Trip Off L,UL
Unbalance Trip Level 4 30
Unbalance Trip Delay 1 255
GROUND FAULT Ground Fault Alarm Off L,UL
Assign Ground Fault Alarm Relays None Aux2
Ground Fault Alarm Level 0.10 1.00
Alarm Pickup for 50:0.025 CT 0.25 25.00
Ground Fault Alarm Delay 0.00 255.00
Ground Fault Alarm Events Off On
Ground Fault Trip Off L,UL
Ground Fault Trip Level 0.10 1.00
Ground Fault Trip Level for 50:0.025 CT 0.25 25.00
Ground Fault Trip Delay 0.00 255.00
Ground Fault Trip Backup Off On 9
Ground Fault Trip Backup Relays None Aux1, Aux2
Ground Fault Trip Backup Delay 0.01 255.00
ACCELERATION Acceleration Trip Off L,UL
TRIP
Acceleration Timer From Start 1 250


START INHIBITS Enable Single Shot Restart No Yes
Enable Start Inhibit No Yes
Maximum Starts/Hour Permissible Off 5
Time Between Starts Off 500
Restart Block Off 50000
Assign Block Relay None Aux2
BACKSPIN Enable Backspin Start Inhibit No Yes
DETECTION
Minimum Permissible Frequency 0 9.99
Predication Algorithm Enabled Disabled
Assigned BSD Relay None Aux 2
Number of Motor Poles 2 16
Local RTD #1 Local RTD #1 Application None S,B,A,O
Local RTD #1 RTD Type 10C,100P 100N,120N
Local RTD #1 Name 0 8 chars.
Local RTD #1 Alarm Off L,UL
Local RTD #1 Alarm Relays None Aux2
Local RTD #1 Alarm Level 1 200
Local RTD #1 High Alarm Off L,UL
Local RTD #1 High Alarm Relays None Aux2
Local RTD #1 High Alarm Level 1 200
Record RTD #1 Alarms as Events No Yes
Local RTD #1 Trip Off L,UL
Local RTD #1 Trip Relays None Aux2
Local RTD #1 Trip Level 1 200
Enable RTD #1 Trip Voting Off 1-12,Stator


Local RTD #5 Trip Level 1 200 9


9 Local RTD #8 Trip Level 1 200


Local RTD #11 Trip Level 1 200 9


Local RTD#12 Local RTD #12 Application None S,B,A,O
LOSS OF REMOTE Loss Remote RTD Comm Alarm Off L,UL
RTD COMMs
Loss Remote RTD Comm Alarm Relays None Aux2
Loss Remote RTD Comm Alarm Events Off On
RRTD Module 1 RRTD Module 1 - RTD #1 Application None S,B,A,O
RTD #1
RRTD Module 1 - RTD #1 RTD Type 10C,100P 100N,120N
RRTD Module 1 - RTD #1 Name 0 8 chars.
RRTD Module 1 - RTD #1 Alarm Off L,UL
RRTD Module 1 - RTD #1 Alarm Relays None Aux2
RRTD Module 1 - RTD #1 Alarm Level 1 200
RRTD Module 1 - RTD #1 High Alarm Off L,UL
RRTD Module 1 - RTD #1 High Alarm Relays None Aux2
RRTD Module 1 - RTD #1 High Alarm Level 1 200
RRTD Module 1 - Record RTD #1 Alarms as Events No Yes
RRTD Module 1 - RTD #1 Trip Off L,UL
RRTD Module 1 - RTD #1 Trip Relays None Aux2
RRTD Module 1 - RTD #1 Trip Level 1 200
RRTD Module 1 - Enable RTD #1 Trip Voting Off 1-12,Stator
RTD #2
9 RRTD Module 1 - Record RTD #2 Alarms as Events No Yes


RTD #3
RTD #4
RTD #5
RRTD Module 1 - RTD #5 Trip Level 1 200 9


RTD #6
RTD #7
RTD #8
9 RRTD Module 1 - RTD #8 Trip Level 1 200


RTD #9
RTD #10
RTD #11


RTD #12
RRTD Module 1 RRTD Module 1 - Open RTD Alarm Off L,UL
OPEN RTD ALARM
RRTD Module 1 - Assign Alarm Relays None Aux2
RRTD Module 1 - Open RTD Alarm Events Off On
RRTD Module 1 RRTD Module 1 - Short / Low Temp RTD Alarm Off L,UL
SHORT/LOW TEMP
RTD ALARM RRTD Module 1 - Assign Alarm Relays None Aux2
RRTD Module 1 - Short / Low Temp Alarm Events Off On
RTD #1


RTD #2
RTD #3
RTD #4


RTD #5
RTD #6
RTD #7


RTD #8
RTD #9
RTD #10


RTD #11
RTD #12
OPEN RTD ALARM
SHORT/LOW TEMP


RTD #1
RTD #2
RTD #3


RTD #4
RTD #5
RTD #6


RTD #7
RTD #8
RTD #9


RTD #10
RTD #11
RTD #12
OPEN RTD ALARM


SHORT/LOW TEMP
RTD #1
RTD #2
RTD #3
RRTD Module 4 - Record RTD #3 Alarms as Events No Yes 9


RTD #4
RTD #5
RTD #6


RTD #7
RTD #8
RTD #9


RTD #10
RTD #11
RTD #12
OPEN RTD ALARM


SHORT/LOW TEMP
UNDERVOLTAGE Undervoltage Active If Motor Stopped No Yes
Undervoltage Alarm Off L,UL
Starting Undervoltage Alarm Pickup 0.50 0.99
Running Undervoltage Alarm Pickup 0.50 0.99
Undervoltage Alarm Delay 0.0 255.0
Undervoltage Alarm Events Off On
Undervoltage Trip Off L,UL
Undervoltage Trip Relays None Aux2
Starting Undervoltage Trip Pickup 0.50 0.99
Running Undervoltage Trip Pickup 0.50 0.99
Undervoltage Trip Delay 0.0 255.0
OVERVOLTAGE Overvoltage Alarm Off L,UL
Overvoltage Alarm Relays None Aux2
Overvoltage Alarm Pickup 1.01 1.25
Overvoltage Alarm Delay 0.0 255.0
Overvoltage Alarm Events Off On
Overvoltage Trip Off L,UL
Overvoltage Trip Relays None Aux2
Overvoltage Trip Pickup 1.01 1.25
Overvoltage Trip Delay 0.0 255.0
PHASE REVERSAL Phase Reversal Trip Off L,UL
UNDER Block Underfrequency on Start 0 5000
FREQUENCY
Underfrequency Alarm Off L,UL
Underfrequency Alarm Level 20.00 70.00
Underfrequency Alarm Delay 0.0 255.0
Underfrequency Alarm Events Off On
Underfrequency Trip Off L,UL
Underfrequency Trip Level 20.00 70.00
Underfrequency Trip Delay 0.0 255.0
OVER FREQUENCY Block Overfrequency on Start 0 5000
Overfrequency Alarm Off L,UL
Overfrequency Alarm Level 20.00 70.00
Overfrequency Alarm Delay 0.1 255.0 9
Overfrequency Alarm Events Off On
Overfrequency Trip Off L,UL
Overfrequency Trip Level 20.00 70.00
Overfrequency Trip Delay 0.1 255.0


LEAD POWER Block Lead Power Factor From Start 0 5000
FACTOR
Power Factor Lead Alarm Off L,UL
Power Factor Lead Alarm Relays None ,Aux2
Power Factor Lead Alarm Level 0.5 0.99
Power Factor Lead Alarm Delay 0.1 255.0
Power Factor Lead Alarm Events Off On
Power Factor Lead Trip Off L,UL
Power Factor Lead Trip Level 0.5 0.99
Power Factor Trip Lead Delay 0.1 255.0
LAG POWER Block Lag Power Factor From Start 0 5000
FACTOR
Lag Power Factor Alarm Off L,UL
Lag Power Factor Alarm Level 0.5 0.99
Lag Power Factor Alarm Delay 0.1 255.0
Lag Power Factor Alarm Events Off On
Lag Power Factor Trip Off L,UL
Lag Power Factor Trip Level 0.5 0.99
Lag Power Factor Trip Delay 0.1 255.0
POSITIVE Block Positive kvar Element From Start 0 5000
REACTIVE POWER
Positive kvar Alarm Off L,UL
Positive kvar Alarm Level 1 25000
Positive kvar Alarm Delay 0.1 255.0
Positive kvar Alarm Events Off On
Positive kvar Trip Off L,UL
Positive kvar Trip Level 1 25000
Positive kvar Trip Delay 0.1 255.0
NEGATIVE Block kvar Element from Start 0 5000
REACTIVE
Negative kvar Alarm Off L,UL
Negative kvar Alarm Level 1 25000
Negative kvar Alarm Delay 0.1 255.0
Negative kvar Alarm Events Off On
Negative kvar Trip Off L,UL
Negative kvar Trip Level 1 25000
Negative kvar Trip Delay 0.1 255.0
9


UNDERPOWER Block Underpower From Start 0 15000
Underpower Alarm Off L,UL
Underpower Alarm Level 1 25000
Underpower Alarm Delay 0.5 255.0
Underpower Alarm Events Off On
Underpower Trip Off L,UL
Underpower Trip Relays None Aux2
Underpower Trip Level 1 25000
Underpower Trip Delay 0.5 255.0
REVERSE POWER Block Reverse Power From Start 0 50000
Reverse Power Alarm Off L,UL
Reverse Power Alarm Level 1 25000
Reverse Power Alarm Delay 0.5 30.0
Reverse Power Alarm Events Off On
Reverse Power Trip Off L,UL
Reverse Power Trip Level 1 25000
Reverse Power Trip Delay 0.5 30.0
SPARE SWITCH Spare Switch Assignable Function Off See manual
Starter Aux Contact Type 52a 52b
General Spare Switch Name 0 12 chars.
General Spare Switch Type NO NC
General Spare Switch Block Input From Start 0 5000
General Spare Switch Alarm Off L,UL
General Spare Switch Alarm Relays None Aux2
General Spare Switch Alarm Delay 0.1 5000.0
General Spare Switch Alarm Events Off On
General Spare Switch Trip Off L,UL
General Spare Switch Trip Relays None Aux2
General Spare Switch Trip Delay 0.1 5000.0
EMERGENCY Emergency Switch Assignable Function Off See manual
SWITCH
General Emergency Switch Name 0 12 chars.
General Emergency Switch Type NO NC
General Emergency Switch Block Input From Start 0 5000
General Emergency Switch Alarm Off L,UL
General Emergency Switch Alarm Relays None Aux2
General Emergency Switch Alarm Delay 0.1 5000.0
General Emergency Switch Alarm Events Off On
General Emergency Switch Trip Off L,UL 9
General Emergency Switch Trip Relays None Aux2
General Emergency Switch Trip Delay 0.1 5000.0


DIFFERENTIAL Differential Switch Assignable Function Off See manual
SWITCH
Assign Differential Switch Trip Relays None Aux2
General Differential Switch Name 0 12 chars.
General Differential Switch Type NO NC
General Differential Switch Block Input From Start 0 5000
General Differential Switch Alarm Off L,UL
General Differential Switch Alarm Relays None Aux2
General Differential Switch Alarm Delay 0.1 5000.0
General Differential Switch Alarm Events Off On
General Differential Switch Trip Off L,UL
General Differential Switch Trip Relays None Aux2
General Differential Switch Trip Delay 0.1 5000.0
SPEED SWITCH Speed Switch Assignable Function Off See manual
Speed Switch Delay 0.5 100.0
Assign Speed Switch Trip Relays None Aux2
General Speed Switch Name 0 12 chars.
General Speed Switch Type NO NC
General Speed Switch Block Input from Start 0 5000
General Speed Switch Alarm Off L,UL
General Speed Switch Alarm Relays None Aux2
General Speed Switch Alarm Delay 0.1 5000.0
General Speed Switch Alarm Events Off On
General Speed Switch Trip Off L,UL
General Speed Switch Trip Relays None Aux2
General Speed Switch Trip Delay 0.1 5000.0
DIGITAL COUNTER Counter Name 0 8 chars.
Assigned to: Counter Units 0 6 chars.

Counter Type Increment Decrement
Digital Counter Alarm Off L,UL
Counter Alarm Level 0 65535
Record Alarms as Events No Yes
RRTD MODULE 1 RRTD Module 1 - Digital Input 1 Assignable Function Off See manual
DIGITAL INPUT 1
RRTD Module 1 - Digital Input 1 Name 0 12 chars.
RRTD Module 1 - Digital Input 1 Type NO NC
RRTD Module 1 - Digital Input 1 Alarm Off L,UL
RRTD Module 1 - Digital Input 1 Alarm Relays None Aux2
RRTD Module 1 - Digital Input 1 Alarm Delay 0.1 5000.0
RRTD Module 1 - Digital Input 1 Alarm Events Off On
RRTD Module 1 - Digital Input 1 Trip Off L,UL
9 RRTD Module 1 - Digital Input 1 Trip Relays None Aux2
RRTD Module 1 - Digital Input 1 Trip Delay 0.1 5000.0


DIGITAL INPUT2
RRTD Module 1 - Digital Input 2 Trip Relays None Aux2
DIGITAL INPUT3
DIGITAL INPUT4
DIGITAL INPUT5
9


DIGITAL INPUT6
RRTD MODULE 1 Counter Name 0 8 chars.
DIGITAL COUNTER
Counter Units 0 6 chars.
Assigned to: Counter Type Increment Decrement
DIGITAL INPUT 1
DIGITAL INPUT2
DIGITAL INPUT3
9 RRTD Module 2 - Digital Input 3 Alarm Off L,UL


DIGITAL INPUT4
DIGITAL INPUT5
DIGITAL INPUT6
DIGITAL COUNTER
DIGITAL INPUT 1
RRTD Module 3 - Digital Input 1 Alarm Off L,UL 9


DIGITAL INPUT2
DIGITAL INPUT3
DIGITAL INPUT4
DIGITAL INPUT5
9


DIGITAL INPUT6
DIGITAL COUNTER
DIGITAL INPUT 1
DIGITAL INPUT2
DIGITAL INPUT3
RRTD Module 4 - Digital Input 3 Alarm Off L,UL 9


DIGITAL INPUT4
DIGITAL INPUT5
DIGITAL INPUT 6
RRTD MODULE 4 RRTD Module 4 - Counter Name 0 8 chars.
DIGITAL COUNTER
RRTD Module 4 - Counter Units 0 6 chars.
Assigned to: RRTD Module 4 - Counter Type Increment Decrement
RRTD Module 4 - Digital Counter Alarm Off L,UL
RRTD Module 4 - Counter Alarm Level 0 65535
RRTD Module 4 - Record Alarms as Events No Yes
ANALOG OUTPUT Enable Analog Output 1 Disabled Enabled
1
Analog Output 1 Range 0-1 0-20,4-20
Analog Output 1 Parameter - See Manual
9 Analog Output 1 Minimum - See Manual
Analog Output 1 Maximum - See Manual
2
Analog Output 2 Minimum - See Manual


3
4
RRTD MODULE 1 RRTD Module 1 - Enable Analog Output 1 Disabled Enabled
ANALOG OUTPUT
1 RRTD Module 1 - Analog Output 1 Range 0-1 0-20,4-20
RRTD Module 1 - Analog Output 1 Parameter - See Manual
RRTD Module 1 - Analog Output 1 Minimum - See Manual
RRTD Module 1 - Analog Output 1 Maximum - See Manual
ANALOG OUTPUT
ANALOG OUTPUT
ANALOG OUTPUT
ANALOG OUTPUT
ANALOG OUTPUT
RRTD MODULE 2
ANALOG OUTPUT
RRTD Module 2 - Enable Analog Output 3 Disabled Enabled 9


ANALOG OUTPUT
ANALOG OUTPUT
ANALOG OUTPUT
ANALOG OUTPUT
ANALOG OUTPUT
ANALOG OUTPUT
ANALOG OUTPUT
ANALOG OUTPUT
9 RRTD MODULE 4
ANALOG OUTPUT
RRTD Module 4 - Enable Analog Output 4 Disabled Enabled


10 COMMUNICATIONS 10.1 OVERVIEW
10 COMMUNICATIONS 10.1 OVERVIEW 10.1.1 ELECTRICAL INTERFACE
The hardware or electrical interface is one of the following:

• one of three 2-wire RS485 ports from the rear terminal connector,
• the RS232 from the front panel connector
• a fibre optic connection.
In a 2-wire RS485 link, data flow is bidirectional. Data flow is half duplex for both the RS485 and the RS232 ports. That is,
data is never transmitted and received at the same time. RS485 lines should be connected in a daisy chain configuration
(avoid star connections) with a terminating network installed at each end of the link, i.e. at the master end and at the slave
farthest from the master. The terminating network should consist of a 120 Ω resistor in series with a 1 nF ceramic capacitor
when used with Belden 9841 RS485 wire. The value of the terminating resistors should be equal to the characteristic
impedance of the line. This is approximately 120 Ω for standard #22 AWG twisted pair wire. Shielded wire should always be
used to minimize noise. Polarity is important in RS485 communications. Each '+' terminal of every 369 must be connected
together for the system to operate. See Section 3.3.14: RS485 COMMUNICATIONS on page 3–13 for details on correct
serial port wiring.
When using a fibre optic link the Tx from the 369 should be connected to the Rx of the Master device and the Rx from the
369 should be connected to the Tx of the Master device.
10.1.2 PROFIBUS COMMUNICATIONS
The 369 Motor Management Relay supports Profibus-DP protocol as slave that can be read and written to, from a Profibus-
DP master which can read DMD file in the form of 369_xxxx.gs* files.
The relay supports the following configurations and indications:
• Fieldbus type: PROFIBUS-DP EN 50170 (DIN 19245) Part 3.
• Extended functions supported: Diagnostics Data via mailbox telegram.
• Auto baud rate detection 9.6Kbit - 12Mbit.
• Address range: 1-126, setting via 369PC Program or front keypad.
• Input data: 220 bytes - cyclical.
• Diagnostic data: 26 bytes - non-cyclical.
See Section 10.2: PROFIBUS PROTOCOL on page 10–2 for complete details.
10.1.3 MODBUS COMMUNICATIONS
The 369 implements a subset of the AEG Modicon Modbus RTU serial communication standard. Many popular program-
mable controllers support this protocol directly with a suitable interface card allowing direct connection of relays. Although
the Modbus protocol is hardware independent, the 369 interfaces include three 2-wire RS485 ports and one RS232 port.
Modbus is a single master, multiple slave protocol suitable for a multi-drop configuration as provided by RS485 hardware.
In this configuration up to 32 slaves can be daisy-chained together on a single communication channel.
The 369 is always a slave. It cannot be programmed as a master. Computers or PLCs are commonly programmed as mas-
ters. The Modbus protocol exists in two versions: Remote Terminal Unit (RTU, binary) and ASCII. Only the RTU version is
supported by the 369. Monitoring, programming and control functions are possible using read and write register com-
mands.
See Section 10.3: MODBUS RTU PROTOCOL on page 10–8 for complete details.
10

10.2 PROFIBUS PROTOCOL 10 COMMUNICATIONS
10.2 PROFIBUS PROTOCOL 10.2.1 369MMR-DP PARAMETERIZATOIN
The 369 Motor Management Relay supports mandatory parametrization. The relay keeps its user parameter data / set-
points in a non-volatile memory and does not need device related parametrization during startup of the DP master. The
369PC software is the best tool for user parametrization of the 369 device.
10.2.2 369MMR-DP CONFIGURATION
The Profibus-DP basic configuration has one DP master and one DP slave. In a typical bus segment up to 32 stations can
be connected (a repeater has to be used if more then 32 stations operate on a bus). The end nodes on a Profibus-DP net-
work must be terminated to avoid reflections on the bus line. If the 369 Motor Management Relay is used as the first or last
module in a network the on-board termination switch has be in the ON position (default is OFF), or an external termination
connector has to be used.
The bus address for the relay as Profibus-DP node can be set using the S1: 369 COMMUNICATIONS \ PROFIBUS ADDRESS
setpoint or via the 369PC software, which extends address range from 1 to 126. Address 126 is used only for commission-
ing purposes and should not be used to exchange user data.
The media for the fieldbus is a twisted pair copper cable along with 9-pin SUB-D connector, which connects the bus to the
369 socket on the back of the relay. The 369 Motor Management Relay has autobaud support. The baud rates and other
slave specific information needed for configuration are contained in 369_xxxx.gs* which is used by a network configura-
tion program.
The 369 Motor Management Relay as a DP slave transfers fast process data to the DP master according to master-slave
principle.
The 369 Motor Management Relay is a modular device, supporting up to 8 input modules.
During the configuration session, all modules have to be selected in order to get the entire area of 110 words of input data.
There are no output data for processing. The following diagram shows the possible DP Master Class2 configuration menu:
Figure 10–1: SLAVE CONFIGURATION
10

10 COMMUNICATIONS 10.2 PROFIBUS PROTOCOL
Table 10–1: PROFIBUS INPUT DATA (Sheet 1 of 3)

OFFSET CYCLIC DATA LENGTH MINIMUM MAXIMUM STEP UNITS FORMAT DEFAULT
(ACTUAL VALUES) (BYTES) VALUE CODE
VALUE HEX VALUE HEX
0 MotorStatus 2 0 0000 4 0004 1 – F133 0
2 TC_Used 2 0 0000 100 0064 1 % F1 0
4 Time_to_Trip 2 –1 FFFF 65500 FFDC 1 s F20 –1
6 OverloadLT 2 0 0000 50000 C350 1 s F1 0
8 StartInhibit LT 2 0 0000 60 003C 1 min F1 0
10 StartsHour LT[5] 2 0 0000 60 003C 1 min F1 0
12 TimeBetween StartsLT 2 0 0000 500 01F4 1 min F1 0
14 RestartBlock LT 2 0 0000 50000 C350 1 s F1 0
16 AccessSwitch Status 2 0 0000 1 0001 1 – F131 0
18 SpeedSwitch Status 2 0 0000 1 0001 1 – F131 0
20 SpareSwitch Status 2 0 0000 1 0001 1 – F131 0
22 DiffSwitch Status 2 0 0000 1 0001 1 – F131 0
24 EmergencySwitch status 2 0 0000 1 0001 1 – F131 0
26 ResetSwitch Status 2 0 0000 1 0001 1 – F131 0
28 TripRelayStatus 2 0 0000 1 0001 1 N/A F150 2
30 AlarmRelayStatus 2 0 0000 1 0001 1 N/A F150 2
32 Aux1RelayStatus 2 0 0000 1 0001 1 N/A F150 2
34 Aux2RelayStatus 2 0 0000 1 0001 1 N/A F150 2
36 Ia 2 0 0000 65535 FFFF 1 A F1 0
38 Ib 2 0 0000 65535 FFFF 1 A F1 0
40 Ic 2 0 0000 65535 FFFF 1 A F1 0
42 AveragePhaseCurrent 2 0 0000 65535 FFFF 1 A F1 0
44 MotorLoad 2 0 0000 2000 07D0 1 xFLA F3 0
46 CurrentUnbalance 2 0 0000 100 0064 1 % F1 0
48 Leq 2 0 0000 65535 FFFF 1 A F1 0
50 GroundCurrent 2 0 0000 50000 C350 1 A F23 0
52 Vab 2 0 0000 20000 4E20 1 V F1 0
54 Vbc 2 0 0000 20000 4E20 1 V F1 0
56 Vca 2 0 0000 20000 4E20 1 V F1 0
58 Van 2 0 0000 20000 4E20 1 V F1 0
60 Vbn 2 0 0000 20000 4E20 1 V F1 0
62 Vcn 2 0 0000 20000 4E20 1 V F1 0
64 AvgLineVoltage 2 0 0000 20000 4E20 1 V F1 0
66 AvgPhaseVoltage 2 0 0000 20000 4E20 1 V F1 0
68 Frequency 2 0 0000 12000 2EE0 1 Hz F3 0
70 BackSpinFrequency 2 1 0001 12000 2EE0 1 Hz F3 0
72 PowerFactor 2 –99 FF9D 100 0064 1 – F21 0
74 RealPower–kW 2 –32000 8300 32000 7D00 1 kW F4 0
76 RealPower–HP 2 0 0000 65000 FDE8 1 hp F1 0
78 ReactivePower 2 –32000 8300 32000 7D00 1 kvar F4 0
80 ApparentPower 2 0 0000 50000 C350 1 kVA F1 0
82 MWh 2 0 0000 65535 FFFF 1 MWh F1 0
84 PositiveKvarh 2 0 0000 65535 FFFF 1 kvarh F1 0
86 NegativeKvarh 2 0 0000 65535 FFFF 1 kvarh F1 0
88 HottestStatorRtd 2 0 0000 12 000C 1 F2 0 10
90 HottestStatorRtdTemp 2 –40 FFD8 200 00C8 1 °C F4 –42


VALUE HEX VALUE HEX
92 LocalRtd1 2 –40 FFD8 200 00C8 1 °C F4 –42
94 LocalRtd2 2 –40 FFD8 200 00C8 1 °C F4 –42
96 LocalRtd3 2 –40 FFD8 200 00C8 1 °C F4 –42
98 LocalRtd4 2 –40 FFD8 200 00C8 1 °C F4 –42
100 LocalRtd5 2 –40 FFD8 200 00C8 1 °C F4 –42
102 LocalRtd6 2 –40 FFD8 200 00C8 1 °C F4 –42
104 LocalRtd7 2 –40 FFD8 200 00C8 1 °C F4 –42
106 LocalRtd8 2 –40 FFD8 200 00C8 1 °C F4 –42
108 LocalRtd9 2 –40 FFD8 200 00C8 1 °C F4 –42
110 LocalRtd10 2 –40 FFD8 200 00C8 1 °C F4 –42
112 LocalRtd11 2 –40 FFD8 200 00C8 1 °C F4 –42
114 LocalRtd12 2 –40 FFD8 200 00C8 1 °C F4 –42
116 CurrentDemand 2 0 0000 50000 C350 1 A F1 0
118 RealPowerDemand 2 0 0000 50000 C350 1 kW F1 0
120 ReactivePowerDemand 2 –32000 8300 32000 7D00 1 kvar F4 0
122 ApparentPowerDemand 2 0 0000 50000 C350 1 kVA F1 0
124 PeakCurrent 2 0 0000 65535 FFFF 1 A F1 0
126 PeakRealPower 2 0 0000 50000 C350 1 kW F1 0
128 PeakReactivePower 2 –32000 8300 32000 7D00 1 kvar F4 0
130 PeakApparentPower 2 0 0000 50000 C350 1 kVA F1 0
132 Va angle 2 0 0000 359 0167 1 o F1 0
134 Vb angle 2 0 0000 359 0167 1 o F1 0
136 Vc angle 2 0 0000 359 0167 1 o F1 0
138 Ia angle 2 0 0000 359 0167 1 o F1 0
140 Ib angle 2 0 0000 359 0167 1 o F1 0
142 Ic angle 2 0 0000 359 0167 1 o F1 0
144 Learned AccelerationTime 2 1 0001 2500 09C4 1 s F2 0
146 Learned StartingCurrent 2 0 0000 65535 FFFF 1 A F1 0
148 Learned StartingCapacity 2 0 0000 100 0064 1 % F1 0
150 Learned RunningCoolTime 2 0 0000 500 01F4 1 min F1 0
Constant
152 LearnedStoppedCoolTime 2 0 0000 500 01F4 1 min F1 0
Constant
154 Last StartingCapacity 2 0 0000 100 0064 1 % F1 0
156 Learned UnbalanceKfactor 2 0 0000 29 001D 1 – F1 0
158 BSDState 2 0 0000 6 0006 1 – F27 0
160 RawPredictionTimer 2 0 0000 50000 C350 1 s F2 0
162 NumberOfStarts 2 0 0000 50000 C350 1 – F1 0
164 NumberOfRestarts 2 0 0000 50000 C350 1 – F1 0
166 DigitalCounter 2 0 0000 65535 FFFF 1 – F1 0
168 MotorRunningHours 2 0 0000 65535 FFFF 1 hr F1 0
170 RelayOperatingHours 2 0 0000 65535 FFFF 1 hr F1 0
172 Last trip Cause 2 0 0000 169 00A9 1 – F134 0
174 Last trip Date 4 N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A F18 N/A
178 Last trip Time 4 N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A F19 N/A
10 182 last pre–trip Ia 2 0 0000 65535 FFFF 1 A F1 0
184 last pre–trip Ib 2 0 0000 65535 FFFF 1 A F1 0


VALUE HEX VALUE HEX
186 last pre–trip Ic 2 0 0000 65535 FFFF 1 A F1 0
188 last pre–trip MotorLoad 2 0 0000 2000 07D0 1 FLA F3 0
190 last pre–trip Unbalance 2 0 0000 100 0064 1 % F1 0
192 last pre–trip Ig 2 0 0000 50000 C350 1 A F23 0
194 last trip HottestStatorRtd 2 0 0000 12 000C 1 – F1 0
196 Last trip HottestStatorTemp 2 –40 FFD8 200 00C8 1 oC F4 0
198 Last pre–trip Vab 2 0 0000 20000 4E20 1 V F1 0
200 Last pre–trip Vbc 2 0 0000 20000 4E20 1 V F1 0
202 Last pre–trip Vca 2 0 0000 20000 4E20 1 V F1 0
204 Last pre–trip Van 2 0 0000 20000 4E20 1 V F1 0
206 Last pre–trip Vbn 2 0 0000 20000 4E20 1 V F1 0
208 Last pre–trip Vcn 2 0 0000 20000 4E20 1 V F1 0
210 Last pre–trip Frequency 2 0 0000 12000 2EE0 1 Hz F3 0
212 Last pre–trip KiloWatts 2 –32000 8300 32000 7D00 1 kW F4 0
214 Last pre–trip KiloVAR 2 –32000 8300 32000 7D00 1 kvar F4 0
216 Last pre–trip KiloVA 2 0 0000 50000 C350 1 kVA F1 0
218 Last pre–trip PowerFactor 2 –99 FF9D 100 0064 1 – F21 0
10.2.3 369MMR-DP DIAGNOSTICS
The 369 Motor Management Relay supports both slave mandatory (6 bytes system-wide standardized) and slave specific
diagnostic data. If the diagnostics are considered hi-priority, the PLC/host program will be informed of the fault (alarm or
trip) and can call a special error routine. When the 369 is in Simulation mode, the DP master will get a static diagnostic
message, which means the 369MMR-DP produced non-process (simulated values), and the DP master should stop data
exchange with the 369MMR-DP. The extended diagnosis for the relay is composed of 26 bytes (bytes 7 to 32) and contains
diagnostic information according to the following table.
Table 10–2: PROFIBUS DIAGNOSTICS (Sheet 1 of 5)

BIT BYTE FUNCTION
0 8 SinglePhasingTrip
1 8 SpareSwitchTrip
2 8 EmergencySwitchTrip
3 8 DifferentialSwitchTrip
4 8 SpeedSwitchTrip
5 8 ResetSwitchTrip
6 8 AccessSwitchTrip
7 8 OverloadTrip
8 9 ShortCircuitTrip
9 9 ShortCircuitBackupTrip
10 9 MechanicalJamTrip
11 9 UndercurrentTrip
12 9 CurrentUnbalanceTrip
13 9 GroundFaultTrip
14 9 GroundFaultBackupTrip
15 9 PhaseDifferentialTrip
16 10 AccelerationTimerTrip 10
17 10 Rtd1Trip

Table 10–2: PROFIBUS DIAGNOSTICS (Sheet 2 of 5) Table 10–2: PROFIBUS DIAGNOSTICS (Sheet 3 of 5)
BIT BYTE FUNCTION BIT BYTE FUNCTION
18 10 Rtd2Trip 65 16 Rtd3Alarm
28 11 Rtd12Trip 75 17 Rtd1HighAlarm
29 11 UnderVoltageTrip 76 17 Rtd2HighAlarm
30 11 OverVoltageTrip 77 17 Rtd3HighAlarm
31 11 VoltagePhaseReversalTrip 78 17 Rtd4HighAlarm
32 12 UnderfrequencyTrip 79 17 Rtd5HighAlarm
33 12 OverfrequencyTrip 80 18 Rtd6HighAlarm
34 12 LeadPowerFactorTrip 81 18 Rtd7HighAlarm
35 12 LagPowerFactorTrip 82 18 Rtd8HighAlarm
36 12 PositivekvarTrip 83 18 Rtd9HighAlarm
37 12 NegativekvarTrip 84 18 Rtd10HighAlarm
38 12 UnderpowerTrip 85 18 Rtd11HighAlarm
39 12 ReversePowerTrip 86 18 Rtd12HighAlarm
40 13 IncompleteSequenceTrip 87 18 OpenRTDSensorAlarm
41 13 SpareSwitchAlarm 88 19 ShortRTDAlarm
42 13 EmergencySwitchAlarm 89 19 TripCountersAlarm
43 13 DifferentialSwitchAlarm 90 19 StarterFailureAlarm
44 13 SpeedSwitchAlarm 91 19 CurrentDemandAlarm
45 13 ResetSwitchAlarm 92 19 KWDemandAlarm
46 13 AccessSwitchAlarm 93 19 KVARDemandAlarm
47 13 ThermalCapacityAlarm 94 19 KVADemandAlarm
48 14 OverloadAlarm 95 19 DigitalCounterAlarm
49 14 MechanicalJamAlarm 96 20 OverloadLockoutBlock
50 14 UndercurrentAlarm 97 20 StartInhibitBlock
51 14 CurrentUnbalanceAlarm 98 20 StartsHourBlock
52 14 GroundFaultAlarm 99 20 TimeBetweenStartsBlock
53 14 UndervoltageAlarm 100 20 RestartBlock
54 14 OvervoltageAlarm 101 20 NotProgrammedBlock
55 14 OverfrequencyAlarm 102 20 BackSpinBlock
56 15 UnderfrequencyAlarm 103 20 LossofRemoteRTDCommunication"
57 15 LeadPowerFactorAlarm 104 21 RemoteRTD1Rtd1Trip
58 15 LagPowerFactorAlarm 105 21 RemoteRTD1Rtd2Trip
59 15 PositivekvarAlarm 106 21 RemoteRTD1Rtd3Trip
60 15 NegativekvarAlarm 107 21 RemoteRTD1Rtd4Trip
61 15 UnderpowerAlarm 108 21 RemoteRTD1Rtd5Trip
62 15 ReversePowerAlarm 109 21 RemoteRTD1Rtd6Trip
10 63
64
15
16
Rtd1Alarm
Rtd2Alarm
110
111
21
21
RemoteRTD1Rtd7Trip
RemoteRTD1Rtd8Trip

Table 10–2: PROFIBUS DIAGNOSTICS (Sheet 4 of 5) Table 10–2: PROFIBUS DIAGNOSTICS (Sheet 5 of 5)
BIT BYTE FUNCTION BIT BYTE FUNCTION
112 22 RemoteRTD1Rtd9Trip 157 27 RemoteRTD1Rtd6Alarm
152 27 RemoteRTD1Rtd1Alarm 197 32 RemoteRTD4Rtd10Alarm
155 27 RemoteRTD1Rtd4Alarm
156 27 RemoteRTD1Rtd5Alarm
10
The 369 Motor Management Relay will support DPV1 specifications soon.

10.3 MODBUS RTU PROTOCOL 10 COMMUNICATIONS
10.3 MODBUS RTU PROTOCOL 10.3.1 DATA FRAME FORMAT AND DATA RATE
One data frame of an asynchronous transmission to or from an 369 is default to 1 start bit, 8 data bits, and 1 stop bit. This
produces a 10 bit data frame. This is important for transmission through modems at high bit rates (11 bit data frames are
not supported by Hayes modems at bit rates of greater than 300 bps). The parity bit is optional as odd or even. If it is pro-
grammed as odd or even, the data frame consists of 1 start bit, 8 data bits, 1 parity bit, and 1 stop bit.
Modbus protocol can be implemented at any standard communication speed. The 369 RS485, fiber optic and RS232 ports
support operation at 1200, 2400, 4800, 9600, and 19200 baud.
10.3.2 DATA PACKET FORMAT
A complete request/response sequence consists of the following bytes (transmitted as separate data frames):
Master Request Transmission:
SLAVE ADDRESS - 1 byte
FUNCTION CODE - 1 byte
DATA - variable number of bytes depending on FUNCTION CODE
CRC - 2 bytes
Slave Response Transmission:
FUNCTION CODE - 1 byte
DATA - variable number of bytes depending on FUNCTION CODE
CRC - 2 bytes
SLAVE ADDRESS: This is the first byte of every transmission. It represents the user-assigned address of the slave device
that is to receive the message sent by the master. Each slave device must be assigned a unique address and only the
addressed slave will respond to a transmission that starts with its address. In a master request transmission the SLAVE
ADDRESS represents the address of the slave to which the request is being sent. In a slave response transmission the
SLAVE ADDRESS represents the address of the slave that is sending the response. Note: A master transmission with a
SLAVE ADDRESS of 0 indicates a broadcast command. Broadcast commands can be used for specific functions.
FUNCTION CODE: This is the second byte of every transmission. The modbus protocol defines function codes of 1 to 127.
The 369 implements some of these functions. In a master request transmission the FUNCTION CODE tells the slave what
action to perform. In a slave response transmission if the FUNCTION CODE sent from the slave is the same as the FUNC-
TION CODE sent from the master indicating the slave performed the function as requested. If the high order bit of the
FUNCTION CODE sent from the slave is a 1 (i.e. if the FUNCTION CODE is > 127) then the slave did not perform the func-
tion as requested and is sending an error or exception response.
DATA: This will be a variable number of bytes depending on the FUNCTION CODE. This may be actual values, setpoints,
or addresses sent by the master to the slave or by the slave to the master. Data is sent MSByte first followed by the
LSByte.
CRC: This is a two byte error checking code. CRC is sent LSByte first followed by the MSByte.
10.3.3 ERROR CHECKING
The RTU version of Modbus includes a two byte CRC-16 (16 bit cyclic redundancy check) with every transmission. The
CRC-16 algorithm essentially treats the entire data stream (data bits only; start, stop and parity ignored) as one continuous
binary number. This number is first shifted left 16 bits and then divided by a characteristic polynomial
(11000000000000101B). The 16 bit remainder of the division is appended to the end of the transmission, LSByte first. The
resulting message including CRC, when divided by the same polynomial at the receiver will give a zero remainder if no
transmission errors have occurred.
If an 369 Modbus slave device receives a transmission in which an error is indicated by the CRC-16 calculation, the slave
device will not respond to the transmission. A CRC-16 error indicates than one or more bytes of the transmission were
received incorrectly and thus the entire transmission should be ignored in order to avoid the 369 performing any incorrect
operation.
10 The CRC-16 calculation is an industry standard method used for error detection. An algorithm is included here to assist
programmers in situations where no standard CRC-16 calculation routines are available.

10 COMMUNICATIONS 10.3 MODBUS RTU PROTOCOL
10.3.4 CRC-16 ALGORITHM
Once the following algorithm is complete, the working register "A" will contain the CRC value to be transmitted. Note that
this algorithm requires the characteristic polynomial to be reverse bit ordered. The MSbit of the characteristic polynomial is
dropped since it does not affect the value of the remainder. The following symbols are used in the algorithm:
--> data transfer
A 16 bit working register
AL low order byte of A
AH high order byte of A
CRC 16 bit CRC-16 value
i, j loop counters
(+) logical exclusive or operator
Di i-th data byte (i = 0 to N-1)
G 16 bit characteristic polynomial = 1010000000000001 with MSbit dropped and bit order
reversed
shr(x) shift right (the LSbit of the low order byte of x shifts into a carry flag, a '0' is shifted into the
MSbit of the high order byte of x, all other bits shift right one location
The algorithm is as follows:
1. FFFF hex --> A
2. 0 --> i
3. 0 --> j
4. Di (+) AL --> AL
5. j+1 --> j
6. shr(A)
7. is there a carry? No: go to 8.
Yes: G (+) A --> A
8. is j = 8? No: go to 5.
Yes: go to 9.
9. i+1 --> i
10. is i = N? No: go to 3.
Yes: go to 11.
11. A --> CRC
10.3.5 TIMING
Data packet synchronization is maintained by timing constraints. The receiving device must measure the time between the
reception of characters. If three and one half character times elapse without a new character or completion of the packet,
then the communication link must be reset (i.e. all slaves start listening for a new transmission from the master). Thus at
9600 baud a delay of greater than 3.5 × 1 / 9600 × 10 = 3.65 ms will cause the communication link to be reset.
10.3.6 SUPPORTED MODBUS FUNCTIONS
The following Modbus functions are supported by the 369:

• 03 - Read Setpoints and Actual Values
• 04 - Read Setpoints and Actual Values
• 05 - Execute Operation
• 06 - Store Single Setpoint
• 07 - Read Device Status
• 08 - Loopback Test
• 16 - Store Multiple Setpoints
For detailed Modbus function code descriptions, refer to the Modicon Modbus Protocol Reference guide. 10

10.3 MODBUS RTU PROTOCOL 10 COMMUNICATIONS
10.3.7 ERROR RESPONSES
When an 369 detects an error other than a CRC error, a response will be sent to the master. The MSbit of the FUNCTION
CODE byte will be set to 1 (i.e. the function code sent from the slave will be equal to the function code sent from the master
plus 128). The following byte will be an exception code indicating the type of error that occurred.
Transmissions received from the master with CRC errors will be ignored by the 369.
The slave response to an error (other than CRC error) will be:
FUNCTION CODE - 1 byte (with MSbit set to 1)
EXCEPTION CODE - 1 byte
CRC - 2 bytes
The 369 implements the following exception response codes.
01 - ILLEGAL FUNCTION
The function code transmitted is not one of the functions supported by the 369.
02 - ILLEGAL DATA ADDRESS
The address referenced in the data field transmitted by the master is not an allowable address for the 369.
03 - ILLEGAL DATA VALUE
The value referenced in the data field transmitted by the master is not within range for the selected data address.
10

10 COMMUNICATIONS 10.4 MEMORY MAP
10.4 MEMORY MAP 10.4.1 MEMORY MAP INFORMATION
The data stored in the 369 is grouped as setpoints and actual values. Setpoints can be read and written by a master com-
puter. Actual Values are read-only. All setpoints and actual values are stored as two-byte values. That is, each register
address is the address of a two-byte value. Addresses are listed in hexadecimal. Data values (setpoint ranges, increments,
factory values) are in decimal.
Many Modbus communications drivers add 40001d to the actual address of the register addresses. For
example: if address 0h was to be read, 40001d would be the address required by the Modbus communi-
cations driver; if address 320h (800d) was to be read, 40801d would be the address required by the Mod-
NOTE bus communications driver.
10.4.2 USER DEFINABLE MEMORY MAP AREA
The 369 has a powerful feature, called the User Definable Memory Map, which allows a computer to read up to 124 non-
consecutive data registers (setpoints or actual values) by using one Modbus packet. It is often necessary for a master com-
puter to continuously poll various values in each of the connected slave relays. If these values are scattered throughout the
memory map, reading them would require numerous transmissions and would burden the communication link. The User
Definable Memory Map can be programmed to join any memory map address to one in the block of consecutive User Map
locations, so that they can be accessed by reading these consecutive locations.
The User Definable area has two sections:
1. A Register Index area (memory map addresses 0180h-01FCh) that contains 125 Actual Values or Setpoints register
addresses.
2. A Register area (memory map addresses 0100h-017Ch) that contains the data at the addresses in the Register Index.
Register data that is separated in the rest of the memory map may be remapped to adjacent register addresses in the User
Definable Registers area. This is accomplished by writing to register addresses in the User Definable Register Index area.
This allows for improved through-put of data and can eliminate the need for multiple read command sequences.
For example, if the values of Average Phase Current (register address 0306h) and Hottest Stator RTD Temperature (regis-
ter address 0320h) are required to be read from an 369, their addresses may be remapped as follows:
1. Write 0306h to address 0180h (User Definable Register Index 0000) using function code 06 or 16.
2. Write 0320h to address 0181h (User Definable Register Index 0001) using function code 06 or 16.
A read (function code 03 or 04) of registers 0100h (User Definable Register 0000) will return the Phase A Current and reg-
ister 0101h (User Definable Register 0001) will return Hottest Stator RTD Temperature.
10.4.3 EVENT RECORDER
The 369 event recorder data starts at address 3000h. Address 3003h is a pointer to the event of interest (1 representing the
oldest event and 40 representing the latest event. To retrieve event 1, write ‘1’ to the Event Record Selector (3003h) and
read the data from 3004h to 3022h. To retrieve event 2, write ‘2’ to the Event Record Selector (3003h) and read the data
from 3004h to 3022h. All 40 events may be retrieved in this manner. The time and date stamp of each event may be used
to ensure that all events have been retrieved in order without new events corrupting the sequence of events (event 1
should be more recent than event 2, event 2 should be more recent than event 3, etc.).
The 369 stores 16 cycles of A/D samples each time a trip occurs in a trace buffer. The Trace Memory Trigger is set up in S1
Preferences and determines how many pre-trip and post-trip cycles are stored. The trace buffer is time and date stamped
and may be correlated to a trip in the event record. 7 waveforms are captured this way when a trip occurs. These are the 3
phase currents, ground current and 3 voltage waveforms. The last three captured records are retained by the 369. This
information is stored in volatile memory and will be lost if power is cycled to the relay.
To access the captured waveforms, select the captured record by writing to the Trace Memory Buffer Selector (address
30F5h), then select waveform of interest by writing its trace memory channel (see following table) to the Trace Memory
Channel Selector (address 30F6h). Then read the trace memory data from address 3100h to 31FFh. The values read are 10
in actual amperes or volts.

10.4 MEMORY MAP 10 COMMUNICATIONS
TRACE MEMORY WAVEFORM

CHANNEL
0 Phase A current
1 Phase B current
2 Phase C current
3 Ground current
4 Phase A voltage
5 Phase B voltage
6 Phase C voltage
10.4.5 MODBUS MEMORY MAP
Table 10–3: MEMORY MAP (Sheet 1 of 52)

ADDR DESCRIPTION MIN. MAX. STEP UNITS FORMAT FACTORY
(hex) VALUE CODE DEFAULT
PRODUCT ID (ADDRESSES 0000 TO 007F)
PRODUCT ID
0000 GE Power Management Product Code - - - - F1 53
0001 Product Hardware Revision 1 26 1 N/A F15 A
0002 Firmware Revision N/A N/A N/A N/A F16 N/A
0003 Modification Number 0 999 1 N/A F1 0
0004 Boot Revision 0 999 1 - F1 0
0005 Boot Mod Number - - - - - -
0006 Reserved - - - - - -
0007 Reserved - - - - - -
0008 Order Code 0 63 1 N/A 0
↓ ↓ - - - - - -
000F Modify Options 0 N/A - N/A N/A -
0010 Modify Options Passcode Characters 1 & 2 32 127 1 - F1 ""
↓ ↓ - - - - - -
0017 Modify Options Passcode Characters 15 & 16 32 127 1 - F1 ""
--- --- - - - - - -
0020 Serial Number character 1 and 2 N/A N/A N/A ASCII F22 N/A
... Reserved - - - - - -
0030 Calibration Date 1995 2094 1 - F18 Jan.1,1999
... Reserved - - - - - -
0040 Manufacturing Date 1995 2094 1 - F18 Jan.1,1999
... Reserved - - - - - -
SETPOINT ACCESS
0050 Keypad Access Level 0 1 1 N/A F162 0
0051 Comm Access Level 0 1 1 N/A F162 0
0052 Access Password Character 1 and 2 32 127 1 - F1 ""
0055 Access Password Character 7 and 8 32 127 1 - F1
0056 Encrypted Access Password 1 and 2 32 127 1 - F1 “AI”
0057 Encrypted Access Password 3 and 4 32 127 1 - F1 “KF”
0058 Encrypted Access Password 5 and 6 32 127 1 - F1 “BA”
0059 Encrypted Access Password 7 and 8 32 127 1 - F1 IK”
... Reserved - - - - - -
10 COMMANDS (ADDRESSES 0000 TO 00FF)

0080 Command Function Code 0 12 1 - F31 0
0081 Reserved


0082 RRTD 1 Command Function Code 0 4 1 - F31 0
... Reserved
USER MAP (ADDRESSES 0100 TO 017F)
0100 User Map Value # 1 --- --- --- --- --- ---
↓ ↓
017C User Map Value # 125 --- --- --- --- --- ---
... Reserved
0180 User Map Address # 1 0 3FFF 1 hex F1 0
↓ ↓
01FC User Map Address # 125 0 3FFF 1 hex F1 0
... Reserved
ACTUAL VALUES (ADDRESSES 0200 TO 0FFF)
MOTOR STATUS
0200 Motor Status 0 4 1 - F133 0
0201 Motor Thermal Capacity Used 0 100 1 % F1 0
0202 Estimated Time to Trip on Overload -1 65500 1 s F20 -1
AUTORESTART
0203 Restart Attempts 0 20000 1 - F1 -
0204 Restart Total Delay 0 65535 1 sec. F1 -
0205 Restart In Progress 0 1 1 Y/N F1 -
... Reserved
LAST TRIP DATA
0220 Cause of Last Trip 0 276 1 - F134 0
0221 Time of Last Trip (2 words) N/A N/A N/A N/A F19 -
0223 Date of Last Trip (2 words) N/A N/A N/A N/A F18 -
0225 Reserved
0226 Phase A Pre-Trip Current 0 65535 1 A F1 0
0228 Phase B Pre-Trip Current 0 65535 1 A F1 0
022A Phase C Pre-Trip Current 0 65535 1 A F1 0
022C Motor Load Pre - Trip 0 2000 1 FLA F3 0
022D Current Unbalance Pre - Trip 0 100 1 % F1 0
022E Ground Current Pre - Trip 0 50000 1 A F23 0
... Reserved - - - - - -
0234 Hottest Stator RTD During Trip 0 12 1 - F1 0
oC
0235 Pre-Trip Temperature of Hottest Stator RTD -40 200 1 F4 0
0236 Pre-Trip Voltage Vab 0 20000 1 V F1 0
0237 Pre-Trip Voltage Vbc 0 20000 1 V F1 0
0238 Pre-Trip Voltage Vca 0 20000 1 V F1 0
0239 Pre-Trip Voltage Van 0 20000 1 V F1 0
023A Pre-Trip Voltage Vbn 0 20000 1 V F1 0
023B Pre-Trip Voltage Vcn 0 20000 1 V F1 0
023C Pre-Trip System Frequency 0 12000 1 Hz F3 0
023D Pre-Trip Real Power -32000 32000 1 kW F4 0
023E Pre-Trip Reactive Power -32000 32000 1 kvar F4 0
023F Pre-Trip Apparent Power 0 50000 1 kVA F1 0
0240 Pre-Trip Power Factor -99 100 1 - F21 0
... Reserved - - - - - -
ALARM STATUS
0260 General Spare Switch Alarm Status 0 4 1 - F123 0
0261 General Emergency Restart Switch Alarm Status 0 4 1 - F123 0
0262 General Differential Switch Alarm Status 0 4 1 - F123 0
0263 General Speed Switch Alarm Status 0 4 1 - F123 0
0264 General Reset Switch Alarm Status 0 4 1 - F123 0
... Reserved
0267 Thermal Capacity Alarm 0 4 1 - F123 0 10
0268 Overload Alarm Status 0 4 1 - F123 0


0269 Mechanical Jam Alarm Status 0 4 1 - F123 0
026A Undercurrent Alarm Status 0 4 1 - F123 0
026B Current Unbalance Alarm Status 0 4 1 - F123 0
026C Ground Fault Alarm Status 0 4 1 - F123 0
... Reserved
026F Undervoltage Alarm Status 0 4 1 - F123 0
0270 Overvoltage Alarm Status 0 4 1 - F123 0
0271 Under Frequency Alarm Status 0 4 1 - F123 0
0272 Over Frequency Alarm Status 0 4 1 - F123 0
... Reserved
0275 Lead Power Factor Alarm Status 0 4 1 - F123 0
0276 Lag Power Factor Alarm Status 0 4 1 - F123 0
0277 Positive kvar Alarm Status 0 4 1 - F123 0
0278 Negative kvar Alarm Status 0 4 1 - F123 0
0279 Underpower Alarm Status 0 4 1 - F123 0
027A Reverse Power Alarm Status 0 4 1 - F123 0
... Reserved
027D Local RTD #1 Alarm Status 0 4 1 - F123 0
027E Local RTD #2 Alarm Status 0 4 1 - F123 0
027F Local RTD #3 Alarm Status 0 4 1 - F123 0
0280 Local RTD #4 Alarm Status 0 4 1 - F123 0
0289 Local RTD #1 High Alarm Status 0 4 1 - F123 0
028A Local RTD #2 High Alarm Status 0 4 1 - F123 0
028B Local RTD #3 High Alarm Status 0 4 1 - F123 0
028C Local RTD #4 High Alarm Status 0 4 1 - F123 0
028D Local RTD #5 High Alarm Status 0 4 1 - F123 0
028E Local RTD #6 High Alarm Status 0 4 1 - F123 0
028F Local RTD #7 High Alarm Status 0 4 1 - F123 0
0295 Broken / Open RTD Alarm Status 0 4 1 - F123
0296 Short / Low Temp Alarm Status 0 1 1 - F123
0297 Reserved
0298 Trip Counter Alarm Status 0 4 1 - F123 0
0299 Starter Failure Alarm 0 4 1 - F123 0
029A Current Demand Alarm Status 0 4 1 - F123 0
029B kW Demand Alarm Status 0 4 1 - F123 0
029C kvar Demand Alarm Status 0 4 1 - F123 0
029D kVA Demand Alarm Status 0 4 1 - F123 0
029E Self Test Alarm
02C0 Overload Lockout Timer 0 500 1 min F1 0
02C1 Start Timer 1 0 60 1 min F1 0
10 02C5 Start Timer 5 0 60 1 min F1 0
02C6 Time Between Starts Timer 0 500 1 min F1 0


02C7 Restart Block Timer 0 50000 1 s F1 0
02C8 Reserved
02C9 Start Inhibit Timer 0 60 1 min F1 0
... Reserved
02D0 Access 0 1 1 - F131 0
02D1 Speed 0 1 1 - F131 0
02D2 Spare 0 1 1 - F131 0
02D3 Differential Relay 0 1 1 - F131 0
02D4 Emergency Restart 0 1 1 - F131 0
02D5 Reset 0 1 1 - F131 0
... Reserved
OUTPUT RELAY STATUS
02E0 Trip 0 2 1 N/A F150 2
02E1 Alarm 0 2 1 N/A F150 2
02E2 Aux.1 0 2 1 N/A F150 2
02E3 Aux.2 0 2 1 N/A F150 2
... Reserved
REAL TIME CLOCK
02F0 Date (Read Only) N/A N/A N/A N/A F18 N/A
02F4 Time (Read Only) N/A N/A N/A N/A F19 N/A
... Reserved
CURRENT METERING
0300 Phase A Current 0 65535 1 A F1 0
0302 Phase B Current 0 65535 1 A F1 0
0304 Phase C Current 0 65535 1 A F1 0
0306 Average Phase Current 0 65535 1 A F1 0
0308 Motor Load 0 2000 1 x FLA F3 0
0309 Current Unbalance 0 100 1 % F1 0
030A Reserved - - - - - -
030B Ground Current 0 50000 1 A F23 0
... Reserved - - - - - -
TEMPERATURE
031F Hottest Stator RTD Number 0 12 1 - F1 0
o
0320 Hottest Stator RTD Temperature -40 200 1 C F4 40
o
0321 Local RTD #1 Temperature -40 200 1 C F4 40
0322 Local RTD #2 Temperature -40 200 1 oC F4 40
o
o
032A Local RTD #10 Temperature -40 200 1 oC F4 40
032B Local RTD #11 Temperature -40 200 1 oC F4 40
o
032C Local RTD #12 Temperature -40 200 1 C F4 40
... Reserved
VOLTAGE METERING
0360 Vab 0 20000 1 V F1 0
0361 Vbc 0 20000 1 V F1 0
0362 Vca 0 20000 1 V F1 0
0363 Average Line Voltage 0 20000 1 V F1 0
0364 Van 0 20000 1 V F1 0
0365 Vbn 0 20000 1 V F1 0
0366 Vcn 0 20000 1 V F1 0
0367 Average Phase Voltage 0 20000 1 V F1 0
0368 System Frequency 0 12000 1 Hz F3 0 10


BACKSPIN METERING
0369 Backspin Frequency 1 12000 1 Hz F3 0
036A Backspin Detection State 0 6 1 - F27 0
036B Backspin Prediction Timer 0 50000 1 s F2 0
... Reserved
POWER METERING
0370 Power Factor -99 100 1 - F21 0
0371 Real Power -32000 32000 1 kW F4 0
0373 Real Power 0 65000 1 hp F1 0
0374 Reactive Power -32000 32000 1 kvar F4 0
0376 Apparent Power 0 50000 1 kVA F1 0
0377 Positive Watthours 0 65535 1 MWh F1 0
0379 Positive Varhours 0 65535 1 kvarh F1 0
037B Negative Varhours 0 65535 1 kvarh F1 0
... Reserved
DEMAND METERING
0390 Current Demand 0 50000 1 A F1 0
0392 Real Power Demand 0 50000 1 kW F1 0
0394 Reactive Power Demand -32000 32000 1 kvar F4 0
0396 Apparent Power Demand 0 50000 1 kVA F1 0
0397 Peak Current Demand 0 65535 1 A F1 0
0399 Peak Real Power Demand 0 50000 1 kW F1 0
039B Peak Reactive Power Demand -32000 32000 1 kvar F4 0
039D Peak Apparent Power Demand 0 50000 1 kVA F1 0
... Reserved
MOTOR DATA (0 = OFF)
03C0 Learned Acceleration Time 1 2500 1 s F2 0
03C1 Learned Starting Current 0 65535 1 A F1 0
03C2 Learned Starting Capacity 0 100 1 % F1 0
03C3 Learned Running Cool Time Constant 0 500 1 min F1 0
03C4 Learned Stopped Cool Time Constant 0 500 1 min F1 0
03C5 Last Starting Current 0 65535 1 A F1 0
03C6 Last Starting Capacity 0 100 1 % F1 0
03C7 Last Acceleration Time 1 2500 1 s F2 0
03C8 Average Motor Load Learned 0 2000 1 x FLA F3 0
03C9 Learned Unbalance k factor 0 29 1 - F1 0
... Reserved
RTD MAXIMUMS
oC
03E0 Local RTD # 1 Max. Temperature -40 200 1 F4 40
03E1 Local RTD # 2 Max. Temperature -40 200 1 oC F4 40
o
03E2 Local RTD # 3 Max. Temperature -40 200 1 C F4 40
o
o
o
03EA Local RTD # 11 Max. Temperature -40 200 1 oC F4 40
03EB Local RTD # 12 Max. Temperature -40 200 1 oC F4 40
... Reserved
TRIP COUNTERS
0430 Total Number of Trips 0 50000 1 - F1 0
... Reserved
0433 Switch Trips 0 50000 1 - F1 0
... Reserved
0436 Overload Trips 0 50000 1 - F1 0
10 0437 Short Circuit Trips 0 50000 1 - F1 0
0438 Mechanical Jam Trips 0 50000 1 - F1 0


0439 Undercurrent Trips 0 50000 1 - F1 0
043A Current Unbalance Trips 0 50000 1 - F1 0
043B Single Phase Trips
043C Ground Fault Trips 0 50000 1 - F1 0
043D Acceleration Trips 0 50000 1 - F1 0
... Reserved
043F Under Voltage Trips 0 50000 1 - F1 0
0440 Over Voltage Trips 0 50000 1 - F1 0
0441 Phase Reversal Trips 0 50000 1 - F1 0
0442 Under Frequency Trips 0 50000 1 - F1 0
0443 Over Frequency Trips 0 50000 1 - F1 0
... Reserved
0446 Lead Power Factor Trips 0 50000 1 - F1 0
0447 Lag Power Factor Trips 0 50000 1 - F1 0
0448 Positive Reactive Power Trips 0 50000 1 - F1 0
0449 Negative Reactive Power Trips 0 50000 1 - F1 0
044A Underpower Trips 0 50000 1 - F1 0
044B Reverse Power Trips 0 50000 1 - F1 0
... Reserved
044E Stator RTD Trips 0 50000 1 - F1 0
044F Bearing RTD Trips 0 50000 1 - F1 0
0450 Other RTD Trips 0 50000 1 - F1 0
0451 Ambient RTD Trips 0 50000 1 - F1 0
... Reserved
0454 Incomplete Sequence Trips 0 50000 1 - F1 0
... Reserved
0457 Trip Counters Last Cleared N/A N/A N/A N/A F18 N/A
... Reserved
MOTOR STATISTICS
0470 Number of Motor Starts 0 50000 1 - F1 0
0471 Number of Emergency Restarts 0 50000 1 - F1 0
0472 Reserved - - - - - -
0473 Digital Counter 0 65535 1 - F1 0
... Reserved
04A0 Motor Running Hours 0 65535 1 hr. F1 0
... Reserved
PHASORS
0500 Va Angle 0 359 1 degrees F1 0
0501 Vb Angle 0 359 1 degrees F1 0
0502 Vc Angle 0 359 1 degrees F1 0
0503 Ia Angle 0 359 1 degrees F1 0
0504 Ib Angle 0 359 1 degrees F1 0
0505 Ic Angle 0 359 1 degrees F1 0
... Reserved
REMOTE RTD ACTUAL VALUES (ADDRESSES 0600 TO 1FFF)
RRTD 1 TEMPERATURES
0600 RRTD 1 - Hottest Stator Number 0 12 1 - F1 0
o
0601 RRTD 1 - Hottest Stator Temperature -40 200 1 C F4 40
0602 RRTD 1 - RTD #1 Temperature -40 200 1 oC F4 40
o
0606 RRTD 1 - RTD #5 Temperature -40 200 1 C F4 40
o
060A RRTD 1 - RTD #9 Temperature -40 200 1 oC F4 40
060B RRTD 1 - RTD #10 Temperature -40 200 1 oC
o
F4 40 10
060C RRTD 1 - RTD #11 Temperature -40 200 1 C F4 40


060D RRTD 1 - RTD #12 Temperature -40 200 1 oC F4 40
... Reserved
RRTD 2 TEMPERATURES
0610 RRTD 2 - RTD - Hottest Stator Number 0 12 1 - F1 0
o
0611 RRTD 2 - RTD - Hottest Stator Temperature -40 200 1 C F4 40
0612 RRTD 2 - RTD #1Temperature -40 200 1 oC F4 40
o
o
061A RRTD 2 - RTD #9 Temperature -40 200 1 oC F4 40
061B RRTD 2 - RTD #10 Temperature -40 200 1 oC F4 40
061C RRTD 2 - RTD #11 Temperature -40 200 1 oC F4 40
o
061D RRTD 2 - RTD #12 Temperature -40 200 1 C F4 40
... Reserved
RRTD 3 TEMPERATURES
0620 RRTD 3 - RTD - Hottest Stator Number 0 12 1 - F1 0
0621 RRTD 3 - RTD - Hottest Stator Temperature -40 200 1 oC F4 40
o
o
o
o
062A RRTD 3 - RTD #9 Temperature -40 200 1 C F4 40
062B RRTD 3 - RTD #10 Temperature -40 200 1 oC F4 40
062C RRTD 3 - RTD #11 Temperature -40 200 1 oC F4 40
062D RRTD 3 - RTD #12 Temperature -40 200 1 oC F4 40
... Reserved
RRTD 4 TEMPERATURES
0630 RRTD 4 - RTD- Hottest Stator Number 0 12 1 - F1 0
0631 RRTD 4 - RTD- Hottest Stator Temperature -40 200 1 oC F4 40
0632 RRTD 4 - RTD#1 Temperature -40 200 1 oC F4 40
o
0635 RRTD 4 - RTD#4 Temperature -40 200 1 C F4 40
o
0636 RRTD 4 - RTD#5 Temperature -40 200 1 C F4 40
063A RRTD 4 - RTD#9 Temperature -40 200 1 oC F4 40
o
063B RRTD 4 - RTD#10 Temperature -40 200 1 C F4 40
o
063C RRTD 4 - RTD#11 Temperature -40 200 1 C F4 40
063D RRTD 4 - RTD#12 Temperature -40 200 1 oC F4 40
LOSS OF RRTD COMMUNICATIONS
063E Lost RRTD Communications alarm 0 4 1 - F123 0
... Reserved
RRTD 1 ALARM STATUS
0650 RRTD 1 - RTD #1 Alarm Status 0 4 1 - F123 0
10 0654 RRTD 1 - RTD #5 Alarm Status 0 4 1 - F123 0


065A RRTD 1 - RTD #11 Alarm Status 0 4 1 - F123 0
065B RRTD 1 - RTD #12 Alarm Status 0 4 1 - F123 0
065C RRTD 1 - RTD #1 High Alarm Status 0 4 1 - F123 0
065D RRTD 1 - RTD #2 High Alarm Status 0 4 1 - F123 0
065E RRTD 1 - RTD #3 High Alarm Status 0 4 1 - F123 0
065F RRTD 1 - RTD #4 High Alarm Status 0 4 1 - F123 0
0660 RRTD 1 - RTD #5 High Alarm Status 0 4 1 - F123 0
0668 RRTD 1 - Broken / Open RTD Alarm Status 0 4 1 - F123 0
0669 RRTD 1 - Short / Low Temp Alarm Status 0 1 1 - F123 0
066A RRTD 1 - Digital Input 6 Alarm Status 0 4 1 - F123 0
066B RRTD 1 - Digital Input 2 Alarm Status 0 4 1 - F123 0
066C RRTD 1 - Digital Input 5 Alarm Status 0 4 1 - F123 0
066D RRTD 1 - Digital Input 4 Alarm Status 0 4 1 - F123 0
066E RRTD 1 - Digital Input 1 Alarm Status 0 4 1 - F123 0
066F RRTD 1 - Digital Input 3 Alarm Status 0 4 1 - F123 0
RRTD 2 ALARM STATUS
0688 RRTD 2 - Broken / Open RTD Alarm Status 0 4 1 - F123 0
0689 RRTD 2 - Short / Low Temp Alarm Status 0 1 1 - F123 0
068A RRTD 2 - Digital Input 6 Alarm Status 0 4 1 - F123 0
068B RRTD 2 - Digital Input 2 Alarm Status 0 4 1 - F123 0
068C RRTD 2 - Digital Input 5 Alarm Status 0 4 1 - F123 0
068D RRTD 2 - Digital Input 4 Alarm Status 0 4 1 - F123 0
068E RRTD 2 - Digital Input 1 Alarm Status 0 4 1 - F123 0 10
068F RRTD 2 - Digital Input 3 Alarm Status 0 4 1 - F123 0


RRTD 3 ALARM STATUS
06A0 RRTD 3 - RTD #5 High Alarm Status 0 4 1 - F123 0
06A8 RRTD 3 - Broken / Open RTD Alarm Status 0 4 1 - F123 0
06A9 RRTD 3 - Short / Low Temp Alarm Status 0 1 1 - F123 0
06AA RRTD 3 - Digital Input 6 Alarm Status 0 4 1 - F123 0
06AB RRTD 3 - Digital Input 2 Alarm Status 0 4 1 - F123 0
06AC RRTD 3 - Digital Input 5 Alarm Status 0 4 1 - F123 0
06AD RRTD 3 - Digital Input 4 Alarm Status 0 4 1 - F123 0
06AE RRTD 3 - Digital Input 1 Alarm Status 0 4 1 - F123 0
06AF RRTD 3 - Digital Input 3 Alarm Status 0 4 1 - F123 0
RRTD 4 ALARM STATUS
06B0 RRTD 4 - RTD #1 Alarm Status 0 4 1 - F123 0
06BA RRTD 4 - RTD #11 Alarm Status 0 4 1 - F123 0
06BB RRTD 4 - RTD #12 Alarm Status 0 4 1 - F123 0
06BC RRTD 4 - RTD #1 High Alarm Status 0 4 1 - F123 0
06BD RRTD 4 - RTD #2 High Alarm Status 0 4 1 - F123 0
06BE RRTD 4 - RTD #3 High Alarm Status 0 4 1 - F123 0
06BF RRTD 4 - RTD #4 High Alarm Status 0 4 1 - F123 0
06C0 RRTD 4 - RTD #5 High Alarm Status 0 4 1 - F123 0
10 06C7 RRTD 4 - RTD #12 High Alarm Status 0 4 1 - F123 0
06C8 RRTD 4 - Broken / Open RTD Alarm Status 0 4 1 - F123 0


06C9 RRTD 4 - Short / Low Temp Alarm Status 0 1 1 - F123 0
06CA RRTD 4 - Digital Input 6 Alarm Status 0 4 1 - F123 0
06CB RRTD 4 - Digital Input 2 Alarm Status 0 4 1 - F123 0
06CC RRTD 4 - Digital Input 5 Alarm Status 0 4 1 - F123 0
06CD RRTD 4 - Digital Input 4 Alarm Status 0 4 1 - F123 0
06CE RRTD 4 - Digital Input 1 Alarm Status 0 4 1 - F123 0
06CF RRTD 4 - Digital Input 3 Alarm Status 0 4 1 - F123 0
RRTD 1 MAXIMUM TEMPERATURES
0700 RRTD 1 - RTD # 1 Max. Temperature -40 200 1 oC F4 40
o
0701 RRTD 1 - RTD # 2 Max. Temperature -40 200 1 C F4 40
o
o
o
070A RRTD 1 - RTD # 11 Max. Temperature -40 200 1 oC F4 40
070B RRTD 1 - RTD # 12 Max. Temperature -40 200 1 oC F4 40
... Reserved
o
o
o
o
... Reserved
o
o
o
072A RRTD 3 - RTD # 11 Max. Temperature -40 200 1 C F4 40
o
072B RRTD 3 - RTD # 12 Max. Temperature -40 200 1 C F4 40
... Reserved
o
o
0737 RRTD 4 - RTD # 8 Max. Temperature -40 200 1 oC
o
F4 40 10


... Reserved
RRTD 1 TRIP COUNTER
0800 RRTD 1 - Stator RTD Trips 0 50000 1 - F1 0
0801 RRTD 1 - Bearing RTD Trips 0 50000 1 - F1 0
0802 RRTD 1 - Other RTD Trips 0 50000 1 - F1 0
0803 RRTD 1 - Ambient RTD Trips 0 50000 1 - F1 0
0804 RRTD 1 - Digital Input Trips 0 50000 1 - F1 0
... Reserved
RRTD 2 TRIP COUNTER
... Reserved
RRTD 3 TRIP COUNTER
... Reserved
RRTD 4 TRIP COUNTER
... Reserved
RRTD 1 DIGITAL INPUT STATUS
0840 Digital Input 3 0 1 1 - F131 0
0841 Digital Input 4 0 1 1 - F131 0
0842 Digital Input 6 0 1 1 - F131 0
0843 Digital Input 5 0 1 1 - F131 0
0844 Digital Input 2 0 1 1 - F131 0
0845 Digital Input 1 0 1 1 - F131 0
... Reserved
0850 Digital Input 3 0 1 1 - F131 0
0851 Digital Input 4 0 1 1 - F131 0
0852 Digital Input 6 0 1 1 - F131 0
0853 Digital Input 5 0 1 1 - F131 0
0854 Digital Input 2 0 1 1 - F131 0
0855 Digital Input 1 0 1 1 - F131 0
... Reserved
0860 Digital Input 3 0 1 1 - F131 0
0861 Digital Input 4 0 1 1 - F131 0
0862 Digital Input 6 0 1 1 - F131 0
0863 Digital Input 5 0 1 1 - F131 0
0864 Digital Input 2 0 1 1 - F131 0
0865 Digital Input 1 0 1 1 - F131 0
... Reserved
10 0870 Digital Input 3 0 1 1 - F131 0
0871 Digital Input 4 0 1 1 - F131 0


0872 Digital Input 6 0 1 1 - F131 0
0873 Digital Input 5 0 1 1 - F131 0
0874 Digital Input 2 0 1 1 - F131 0
0875 Digital Input 1 0 1 1 - F131 0
... Reserved
RRTD 1 OUTPUT RELAY STATUS
0880 RRTD 1 - Trip 0 2 1 N/A F150 2
0881 RRTD 1 - Alarm 0 2 1 N/A F150 2
0882 RRTD 1 - Aux. 1 0 2 1 N/A F150 2
0883 RRTD 1 - Aux. 2 0 2 1 N/A F150 2
... Reserved
0890 RRTD 2 - Trip 0 2 1 N/A F150 2
0891 RRTD 2 - Alarm 0 2 1 N/A F150 2
0892 RRTD 2 - Aux. 1 0 2 1 N/A F150 2
0893 RRTD 2 - Aux. 2 0 2 1 N/A F150 2
... Reserved
08A0 RRTD 3 - Trip 0 2 1 N/A F150 2
08A1 RRTD 3 - Alarm 0 2 1 N/A F150 2
08A2 RRTD 3 - Aux. 1 0 2 1 N/A F150 2
08A3 RRTD 3 - Aux. 2 0 2 1 N/A F150 2
... Reserved
08B0 RRTD 4 - Trip 0 2 1 N/A F150 2
08B1 RRTD 4 - Alarm 0 2 1 N/A F150 2
08B2 RRTD 4 - Aux. 1 0 2 1 N/A F150 2
08B3 RRTD 4 - Aux. 2 0 2 1 N/A F150 2
... Reserved
COMMUNICATIONS MODULE STATUS
08C0 Communications Module Status 0 65535 1 N/A F164 -
SETPOINTS (ADDRESSES 1000 TO 1FFF)
DISPLAY PREFERENCES
1000 Default Message Cycle Time 5 100 1 s F1 20
1001 Default Message Timeout 10 900 1 s F1 300
1002 Contrast Adjustment 1 254 1 - F1 145
1003 Flash Message 1 10 1 s F1 2
1004 Temperature Display Units 0 1 1 - F100 0
... Reserved
WAVEFORM CAPTURE
1008 Trigger Position 0 100 1 % F1 20
... Reserved
369 COMMUNICATIONS
1010 Slave Address 1 254 1 - F1 254
1011 Computer RS232 Baud Rate 0 4 1 - F101 4
1012 Computer RS232 Parity 0 2 1 - F102 0
1013 CHANNEL 1 Parity 0 2 1 - F101 4
1014 CHANNEL 1 Baud Rate 0 4 1 - F102 0
1015 CHANNEL 2 Parity 0 2 1 - F101 4
1017 CHANNEL 3 Parity 0 2 1 - F101 4
1019 CHANNEL 3 Connection 0 1 1 - F151 0
101A CHANNEL 3 Application 0 1 1 - F149 0
101B PROFIBUS Slave Address 1 126 1 - F1 125
101C IP Address Octet 1 0 255 1 - F1 127
101D IP Address Octet 2 0 255 1 - F1 0
101E IP Address Octet 3 0 255 1 - F1 0 10
101F IP Address Octet 4 0 255 1 - F1 1


1020 Subnet Mask Octet 1 0 255 1 - F1 255
1024 Gateway Address Octet 1 0 255 1 - F1 127
... Reserved
REAL TIME CLOCK
1030 Date (2 words) valid date N/A - F18 -
1034 Time (2 words) valid time N/A - F19 -
... Reserved
DEFAULT MESSAGES
1041 Default to Current Metering 0 1 1 - F103 0
1042 Default to Motor Load 0 1 1 - F103 0
1043 Default to Delta Voltage Metering 0 1 1 - F103 0
1044 Default to Power Factor 0 1 1 - F103 0
1045 Default to Positive Watthours 0 1 1 - F103 0
1046 Default to Real Power 0 1 1 - F103 0
1047 Default to Reactive Power 0 1 1 - F103 0
1048 Default to Hottest Stator RTD 0 1 1 - F103 0
1049 Default to Text Message 1 0 1 1 - F103 0
104A Default to Text Message 2 0 1 1 - F103 0
104B Default to Text Message 3 0 1 1 - F103 0
104C Default to Text Message 4 0 1 1 - F103 0
104D Default to Text Message 5 0 1 1 - F103 0
... Reserved - - - - - -
MESSAGE SCRATCHPAD
1060 1st & 2nd Character of 1st Scratchpad Message 32 127 1 - F1 ’T’
↓ ↓
1073 39th & 40th Character of 1st Scratchpad Message 32 127 1 - F1 ""
1074 1st & 2nd Character of 2nd Scratchpad Message 32 127 1 - F1 ’T’
↓ ↓
1087 39th & 40th Character of 2nd Scratchpad Message 32 127 1 - F1 ""
1088 1st & 2nd Character of 3rd Scratchpad Message 32 127 1 - F1 ’T’
↓ ↓
109B 39th & 40th Character of 3rd Scratchpad Message 32 127 1 - F1 ""
109C 1st & 2nd Character of 4th Scratchpad Message 32 127 1 - F1 ’T’
↓ ↓
10AF 39th & 40th Character of 4th Scratchpad Message 32 127 1 - F1 ""
10B0 1st & 2nd Character of 5th Scratchpad Message 32 127 1 - F1 ’T’
↓ ↓
10C3 39th & 40th Character of 5th Scratchpad Message 32 127 1 - F1 ""
... Reserved
CLEAR PRESET DATA
1130 Clear Last Trip Data 0 1 1 - F103 0
1131 Clear Peak Demand Data 0 1 1 - F103 0
1132 Clear RTD Maximums 0 1 1 - F103 0
1133 Preset MWh 0 65535 1 MWh F7 0
1134 Clear Trip Counters 0 1 1 - F103 0
1135 Preset Digital Counter 0 65535 1 - F1 0
1136 Clear Event Records 0 1 1 - F103 0
1137 Preset Positive kvarh 0 65535 1 kvarh F7 0
1138 Preset Negative kvarh 0 65535 1 kvarh F7 0
... Reserved
1140 Clear Motor Data 0 1 1 - F103 0
10 1141 Reserved - - - - - -
1142 Clear All Data 0 1 1 - F103 0


1143 RRTD 1 - Preset Digital Counter 0 65535 1 - F1 0
... Reserved
CT/VT SETUP
1180 Phase CT Primary 1 5000 1 A F1 500
1181 Motor Full Load Amps 1 5000 1 A F1 10
1182 Ground CT Type 0 3 1 - F104 2
1183 Ground CT Primary 1 5000 1 A F1 100
... Reserved
11A0 Voltage Transformer Connection Type 0 2 1 - F106 0
11A1 Voltage Transformer Ratio 100 24000 1 - F3 35
11A2 Motor Rated Voltage 100 20000 1 V F1 4160
... Reserved
11C0 Nominal Frequency 0 2 1 - F107 0
11C1 System Phase Sequence 0 1 1 - F124 0
... Reserved
SERIAL COMM CONTROL
11C8 Serial Communication Control 0 1 1 - F103 0
11C9 Assign Start Control Relays 0 7 1 - F113 2
... Reserved
REDUCED VOLTAGE
11D0 Reduced Voltage Starting 0 1 1 - F103 0
11D1 Start Control Relays 0 2 1 - F113 4
11D2 Transition On 0 2 1 - F108 0
11D3 Incomplete Sequence Trip Relays 0 6 1 - F111 0
11D4 Reduced Voltage Start Level 25 300 1 % FLA F1 100
11D5 Reduced Voltage Start Timer 1 500 1 s F1 200
AUTORESTART
11D6 Autorestart 0 1 1 - F103 0
11D7 Total Restarts 0 20000 1 starts F1 1
11D8 Restart Delay 0 20000 1 sec. F1 0
11D9 Progressive Delay 0 20000 1 sec. F1 0
11DA Hold Delay 0 20000 1 sec. F1 0
11DB Bus Valid 0 1 1 - F103 0
11DC Bus Valid Level 15 100 1 %VT F1 100
... Reserved
DIGITAL COUNTER
12E6 First Character of Counter Name 32 127 1 - F1 “G”
12F2 First Character of Counter Unit Name 32 127 1 - F1 ‘U’
12F8 Counter Type 0 1 1 - F114 0
12F9 Digital Counter Alarm 0 2 1 - F115 0
12FA Assign Alarm Relays 0 6 1 - F113 0
12FB Counter Alarm Level 0 65535 1 - F1 100
12FD Reserved - - - - - -
12FE Record Alarms as Events 0 1 1 - F103 0
EMERGENCY
1330 1st & 2nd Character of Emergency Switch Name 32 127 1 - F22 ’G’
1340 General Emergency Switch Type 0 1 1 - F116 0
1341 General Emergency Switch Block Input From Start 0 5000 1 s F1 0
1342 General Emergency Switch Alarm 0 2 1 - F115 0
1343 General Emergency Switch Alarm Relays 0 6 1 - F113 0
1344 General Emergency Switch Alarm Delay 1 50000 1 100ms F2 50
1345 General Emergency Switch Alarm Events 0 1 1 - F103 0
1346 General Emergency Switch Trip 0 2 1 - F115 0
1347 General Emergency Switch Trip Relays 0 6 1 - F111 0
1348 General Emergency Switch Trip Delay 1 50000 1 100ms F2 50 10
1349 Emergency Switch Assignable Function 0 7 1 - F110 0


... Reserved
DIFFERENTIAL
1370 1st & 2nd Character of Differential Switch Name 32 127 1 - F22 ’G’
1380 General Differential Switch Type 0 1 1 - F116 0
1381 General Differential Switch Block Input From Start 0 5000 1 s F1 0
1382 General Differential Switch Alarm 0 2 1 - F115 0
1383 General Differential Switch Alarm Relays 0 7 1 - F113 1
1384 General Differential Switch Alarm Delay 1 50000 1 100ms F2 50
1385 General Differential Switch Alarm Events 0 1 1 - F103 0
1386 General Differential Switch Trip 0 2 1 - F115 0
1387 General Differential Switch Trip Relays 0 7 1 - F111 1
1388 General Differential Switch Trip Delay 1 50000 1 100ms F2 50
1389 Differential Switch Assignable Function 0 7 1 - F157 0
138A Assign Differential Switch Trip Relays 0 7 1 - F111 1
... Reserved
SPEED
13A0 1st & 2nd Character of Speed Switch Name 32 127 1 - F22 ’G’
13B0 General Speed Switch Type 0 1 1 - F116 0
13B1 General Speed Switch Block Input from Start 0 5000 1 s F1 0
13B2 General Speed Switch Alarm 0 2 1 - F115 0
13B3 General Speed Switch Alarm Relays 0 7 1 - F113 1
13B4 General Speed Switch Alarm Delay 1 50000 1 100ms F2 50
13B5 General Speed Switch Alarm Events 0 1 1 - F103 0
13B6 General Speed Switch Trip 0 2 1 - F115 0
13B7 General Speed Switch Trip Relays 0 7 1 - F111 1
13B8 General Speed Switch Trip Delay 1 50000 1 100ms F2 50
13B9 Speed Switch Assignable Function 0 7 1 - F158 0
13BA Speed Switch Delay 5 1000 5 100ms F2 20
13BB Assign Speed Switch Trip Relays 0 7 1 - F111 1
... Reserved
RESET
13D0 1st & 2nd Character of Reset Switch Name 32 127 1 - F22 ’G’
13E0 General Reset Switch Type 0 1 1 - F116 0
13E1 General Reset Switch Block Input From Start 0 5000 1 s F1 0
13E2 General Reset Switch Alarm 0 2 1 - F115 0
13E3 General Reset Switch Alarm Relays 0 7 1 - F113 1
13E4 General Reset Switch Alarm Delay 1 50000 1 100ms F2 50
13E5 General Reset Switch Alarm Events 0 1 1 - F103 0
13E6 General Reset Switch Trip 0 2 1 - F115 0
13E7 General Reset Switch Trip Relays 0 7 1 - F111 1
13E8 General Reset Switch Trip Delay 1 50000 1 100ms F2 50
13E9 Reset Switch Assignable Function 0 7 1 - F160 0
... Reserved
SPARE
1400 1st & 2nd Character of Spare Switch Name 32 127 1 - F22 ’G’
1410 General Spare Switch Type 0 1 1 - F116 0
1411 General Spare Switch Block Input From Start 0 5000 1 s F1 0
1412 General Spare Switch Alarm 0 2 1 - F115 0
1413 General Spare Switch Alarm Relays 0 7 1 - F113 1
1414 General Spare Switch Alarm Delay 1 50000 1 100ms F2 50
1415 General Spare Switch Alarm Events 0 1 1 - F103 0
1416 General Spare Switch Trip 0 1 1 - F115 0
1417 General Spare Switch Trip Relays 0 7 1 - F111 1
1418 General Spare Switch Trip Delay 1 50000 1 100 ms F2 50
1419 Spare Switch Assignable Function 0 7 1 - F159 0
141A Starter Aux Contact Type 0 1 1 - F109 0
... Reserved
10 OUTPUT RELAY SETUP
1500 Trip Relay Reset Mode 0 2 1 - F117 0


1501 Alarm Relay Reset Mode 0 2 1 - F117 0
1502 Aux 1 Relay Reset Mode 0 2 1 - F117 0
1503 Aux 2 Relay Reset Mode 0 2 1 - F117 0
1504 Trip Relay Operation 0 1 1 - F161 0
1505 Alarm Relay Operation 0 1 1 - F161 1
1506 Aux1 Relay Operation 0 1 1 - F161 1
1507 Aux2 Relay Operation 0 1 1 - F161 0
... Reserved
THERMAL MODEL (0=OFF)
1581 Overload Pickup Level 101 125 1 0.01xFLA F3 101
1582 Assign Thermal Capacity Trip Relay 0 7 1 - F111 1
1583 Unbalance k Factor (0=Learned) 0 29 1 - F1 0
1584 Running Cool Time Constant 1 500 1 min F1 15
1585 Stopped Cool Time Constant 1 500 1 min F1 30
1586 Hot/Cold Safe Stall Ratio 1 100 1 - F3 100
1587 RTD Biasing 0 1 1 - F103 0
o
1588 RTD Bias Minimum 0 198 1 C F1 40
o
1589 RTD Bias Mid Point 0 199 1 C F1 120
158A RTD Bias Maximum 0 200 1 oC F1 155
158B Thermal Capacity Alarm 0 2 1 - F115 0
158C Assign Thermal Capacity Alarm Relays 0 7 1 - F113 1
158D Thermal Capacity Alarm Level 1 100 1 % used F1 75
158E Thermal Capacity Alarm Events 0 1 1 - F103 0
158F Enable Learned Cool Time 0 1 1 - F103 0
1590 Enable Unbalance Biasing 0 1 1 - F103 0
... Reserved
15AE Select Curve Style 0 1 1 - F128 0
O/L CURVE SETUP
15AF Standard Overload Curve Number 1 15 1 - F1 4
15B0 Time to Trip at 1.01 x FLA 0 65500 1 s F1 17415
15BA Time to Trip at 1.40 x FLA 0 65500 1 s F1 365
15BC Time to Trip at 1.50 x FLA 0 65500 1 s F1 280
15BE Time to Trip at 1.75 x FLA 0 65500 1 s F1 170
15C0 Time to Trip at 2.00 x FLA 0 65500 1 s F1 117
15CA Time to Trip at 3.25 x FLA 0 65500 1 s F1 37
15CC Time to Trip at 3.50 x FLA 0 65500 1 s F1 31
15CE Time to Trip at 3.75 x FLA 0 65500 1 s F1 27
15D0 Time to Trip at 4.00 x FLA 0 65500 1 s F1 23
15DA Time to Trip at 5.50 x FLA 0 65500 1 s F1 12
15DC Time to Trip at 6.00 x FLA 0 65500 1 s F1 10
15DE Time to Trip at 6.50 x FLA 0 65500 1 s F1 9
15E0 Time to Trip at 7.00 x FLA 0 65500 1 s F1 7
15E8 Time to Trip at 15.0 x FLA 0 65500 1 s F1 6 10
15EA Time to Trip at 20.0 x FLA 0 65500 1 s F1 6


... Reserved
SHORT CIRCUIT TRIP (0 = INSTANTANEOUS TIME DELAY)
1640 Short Circuit Trip 0 1 1 - F103 0
1641 Reserved
1642 Assign Trip Relays 0 7 1 - F111 1
1643 Short Circuit Pickup 20 200 1 x CT F2 100
1644 Short Circuit Trip Delay 0 255.00 0.01 s F3 0
1645 Short Circuit Trip Backup 0 2 1 - F115 0
1646 Assign Backup Relays 0 3 1 - F119 1
1647 Short Circuit Trip Backup Delay 0 25500 0.01 s F3 0
... Reserved
OVERLOAD ALARM
1650 Overload Alarm 0 2 1 - F115 0
1651 Overload Alarm Level 101 150 1 0.01xFLA F3 101
1652 Assign Overload Alarm Relays 0 7 1 - F113 1
1653 Overload Alarm Delay 1 600 1 s F2 1
1654 Overload Alarm Events 0 1 1 - F103 0
... Reserved
MECHANICAL JAM
1660 Mechanical Jam Alarm 0 2 1 - F115 0
1661 Assign Alarm Relays 0 7 1 - F113 1
1662 Mechanical Jam Alarm Pickup 101 600 1 0.01xFLA F3 150
1663 Mechanical Jam Alarm Delay 5 1250 5 s F2 10
1664 Mechanical Jam Alarm Events 0 1 1 - F103 0
1665 Mechanical Jam Trip 0 2 1 - F115 0
1667 Mechanical Jam Trip Pickup 101 600 1 0.01xFLA F3 150
1668 Mechanical Jam Trip Delay 5 1250 5 s F2 10
... Reserved - - - - - -
UNDERCURRENT
1670 Block Undercurrent from Start 0 15000 1 s F1 0
1671 Undercurrent Alarm 0 2 1 - F115 0
1673 Undercurrent Alarm Pickup 10 99 1 0.01xFLA F3 70
1674 Undercurrent Alarm Delay 1 255 1 s F1 1
1675 Undercurrent Alarm Events 0 1 1 - F103 0
1676 Undercurrent Trip 0 2 1 - F115 0
1678 Undercurrent Trip Pickup 10 99 1 0.01xFLA F3 70
1679 Undercurrent Trip Delay 1 255 1 s F1 1
... Reserved
CURRENT UNBALANCE
1680 Block Unbalance From Start 0 5000 1 s F1 0
1681 Current Unbalance Alarm 0 2 1 - F115 0
1683 Unbalance Alarm Pickup 4 30 1 % F1 15
1684 Unbalance Alarm Delay 1 255 1 s F1 1
1685 Unbalance Alarm Events 0 1 1 - F103 0
1686 Current Unbalance Trip 0 2 1 - F115 0
1688 Unbalance Trip Pickup 4 30 1 % F1 20
1689 Unbalance Trip Delay 1 255 1 s F1 1
... Reserved
GROUND FAULT
16A1 Ground Fault Alarm 0 2 1 - F115 0
16A2 Assign Alarm Relays 0 7 1 - F113 1
16A3 Ground Fault Alarm Pickup 10 100 1 0.1xCT F3 10
10 16A4 Alarm Pickup for Multilin CT 50 / 0.025 25 2500 1 Amps F3 25
16A5 Ground Fault Alarm Delay 0 255.00 0.01 s F3 0


16A6 Ground Fault Alarm Events 0 1 1 - F103 0
16A7 Ground Fault Trip 0 2 1 - F 115 0
16A8 Assign Trip Relays 0 7 1 - F 111 1
16A9 Ground Fault Trip Pickup 10 100 1 0.1xCT F3 20
16AA Trip Pickup for Multilin CT 50 / 0.025 25 2500 1 0.1xCT F3 25
16AB Ground Fault Trip Delay 0 255.00 0.01 s F3 0
16AC Ground Fault Trip Backup 0 1 1 - F103 0
16AD Ground Fault Trip Backup Relays 0 3 1 - F119 33
16AE Ground Fault Trip Backup Delay 0.10 255.00 0.01 s F3 0.20
... Reserved
ACCELERATION TRIP
16D0 Acceleration Trip 0 1 1 - F115 0
16D1 Assign Trip Relays 0 7 1 - F111 1
16D2 Acceleration Timer From Start 10 2500 1 1s F1 100
... Reserved - - - - - -
16E0 Enable Single Shot Restart 0 1 1 - F103 0
16E1 Enable Start Inhibit 0 1 1 - F103 0
16E2 Maximum Starts/Hour Permissible 0 5 1 - F1 0
16E3 Time Between Starts 0 500 1 min F1 10
16E4 Restart Block 0 50000 1 s F1 0
16E5 Assign Start Inhibit Relay 0 7 1 - F111 1
... Reserved
BACKSPIN DETECTION
1780 Enable Back-Spin Start Inhibit 0 1 1 - F103 0
1781 Minimum Permissible Frequency 0 999 1 Hz F3 200
... Reserved
1784 Enable Prediction Algorithm 0 1 1 - F103 1
1785 Assign Backspin Inhibit Relays 0 7 1 - F111 1
1786 Number of Motor Poles 2 16 2 - F1 2
... Reserved
LOCAL RTD #1
1790 Local RTD #1 Application 0 4 1 - F121 0
1791 Local RTD #1 High Alarm 0 2 1 - F115 0
1792 Local RTD #1 High Alarm Relays 0 7 1 - F113 2
o
1793 Local RTD #1 High Alarm Level 1 200 1 C F1 130
1794 Local RTD #1 Alarm 0 2 1 - F115 0
1795 Local RTD #1 Alarm Relays 0 7 1 - F113 1
1796 Local RTD #1 Alarm Level 1 200 1 oC F1 130
1797 Record RTD #1 Alarms as Events 0 1 1 - F103 0
1798 Local RTD #1 Trip 0 2 1 - F115 0
1799 Enable RTD #1 Trip Voting 0 13 1 - F122 1
179A Local RTD #1 Trip Relays 0 7 1 - F111 1
179B Local RTD #1 Trip Level 1 200 1 oC F1 130
179C Local RTD #1 RTD Type 0 3 1 - F120 0
17A0 First Character of Local RTD #1 Name 32 127 1 - F1 ’R’
↓ ↓ - - - - - -
17A3 8th Character of Local RTD #1 Name 32 127 1 - F1 ""
... Reserved
LOCAL RTD #2
17B0 Local RTD #2 Application 0 4 1 - F121 0
17B1 Local RTD #2 High Alarm 0 2 1 - F115 0
17B2 Local RTD #2 High Alarm Relays 0 7 1 - F113 2
o
17B3 Local RTD #2 High Alarm Level 1 200 1 C F1 130
17B4 Local RTD #2 Alarm 0 2 1 - F115 0
17B5 Local RTD #2 Alarm Relays 0 7 1 - F113 1
17B6 Local RTD #2 Alarm Level 1 200 1 oC F1 130
17B7 Record RTD #2 Alarms as Events 0 1 1 - F103 0
17B8 Local RTD #2 Trip 0 2 1 - F 115 0 10
17B9 Enable RTD #2 Trip Voting 0 13 1 - F122 1


17BA Local RTD #2 Trip Relays 0 7 1 - F111 1
17BB Local RTD #2 Trip Level 1 200 1 oC F1 130
17BC Local RTD #2 RTD Type 0 3 1 - F120 0
17C0 First Character of Local RTD #2 Name 32 127 1 - F1 ’R’
↓ ↓
17C3 8th Character of Local RTD #2 Name 32 127 1 - F1 ""
... Reserved
LOCAL RTD #3
17D0 Local RTD #3 Application 0 4 1 - F121 0
17D1 Local RTD #3 High Alarm 0 2 1 - F115 0
17D2 Local RTD #3 High Alarm Relays 0 7 1 - F113 2
17D3 Local RTD #3 High Alarm Level 1 200 1 oC F1 130
17D4 Local RTD #3 Alarm 0 2 1 - F115 0
17D5 Local RTD #3 Alarm Relays 0 7 1 - F113 1
17D6 Local RTD #3 Alarm Level 1 200 1 oC F1 130
17D7 Record RTD #3 Alarms as Events 0 1 1 - F103 0
17D8 Local RTD #3 Trip 0 2 1 - F115 0
17D9 Enable RTD #3 Trip Voting 0 13 1 - F122 1
17DA Local RTD #3 Trip Relays 0 7 1 - F111 1
17DB Local RTD #3 Trip Level 1 200 1 oC F1 130
17DC Local RTD #3 RTD Type 0 3 1 - F120 0
17E0 First Character of Local RTD #3 Name 32 127 1 - F1 ’R’
↓ ↓
17E3 8th Character of Local RTD #3 Name 32 127 1 - F1 ""
... Reserved
LOCAL RTD #4
17F0 Local RTD #4 Application 0 4 1 - F121 0
17F1 Local RTD #4 High Alarm 0 2 1 - F115 0
17F2 Local RTD #4 High Alarm Relays 0 7 1 - F113 2
o
17F3 Local RTD #4 High Alarm Level 1 200 1 C F1 130
17F4 Local RTD #4 Alarm 0 2 1 - F115 0
17F5 Local RTD #4 Alarm Relays 0 7 1 - F113 1
17F6 Local RTD #4 Alarm Level 1 200 1 oC F1 130
17F7 Enable RTD #4 Alarms as Events 0 1 1 - F103 0
17F8 Local RTD #4 Trip 0 2 1 - F115 0
17F9 Enable RTD #4 Trip Voting 0 13 1 - F122 1
17FA Local RTD #4 Trip Relays 0 7 1 - F111 1
17FB Local RTD #4 Trip Level 1 200 1 oC F1 130
17FC Local RTD #4 RTD Type 0 3 1 - F120 0
1800 First Character of Local RTD #4 Name 32 127 1 - F1 ’R’
↓ ↓
1803 8th Character of Local RTD #4 Name 32 127 1 - F1 ""
... Reserved
LOCAL RTD #5
o
1813 Local RTD #5 High Alarm Level 1 250 1 C / oF F1 130
1814 Local RTD #5 Alarm 0 2 1 - F115 0
1818 Local RTD #5 Trip 0 2 1 - F115 0
10 1820 First Character of Local RTD #5 Name 32 127 1 - F1 ’R’
↓ ↓


... Reserved
LOCAL RTD #6
1833 Local RTD #6 High Alarm Level 1 200 1 oC F1 130
1834 Local RTD #6 Alarm 0 2 1 - F115 0
o
1836 Local RTD #6 Alarm Level 1 200 1 C F1 130
1838 Local RTD #6 Trip 0 2 1 - F115 0
↓ ↓
... Reserved
LOCAL RTD #7
1854 Local RTD #7 Alarm 0 2 1 - F115 0
1858 Local RTD #7 Trip 0 2 1 - F115 0
↓ ↓
1864 Reserved
LOCAL RTD #8
1874 Local RTD #8 Alarm 0 2 1 - F115 0
1878 Local RTD #8 Trip 0 2 1 - F115 0
↓ ↓
1884 Reserved
LOCAL RTD #9
1890 Local RTD #9 Application 0 4 1 - F121 0 10


1894 Local RTD #9 Alarm 0 2 1 - F115 0
o
1896 Local RTD #9 Alarm Level 1 200 1 C F1 130
1898 Local RTD #9 Trip 0 2 1 - F115 0
o
189B Local RTD #9 Trip Level 1 200 1 C F1 130
18A0 First Character of Local RTD #9 Name 32 127 1 - F1 ’R’
↓ ↓
18A3 8th Character of Local RTD #9 Name 32 127 1 - F1 ""
18A4 Reserved
LOCAL RTD #10
18B0 Local RTD #10 Application 0 4 1 - F121 0
18B1 Local RTD #10 High Alarm 0 2 1 - F115 0
18B2 Local RTD #10 High Alarm Relays 0 7 1 - F113 2
18B3 Local RTD #10 High Alarm Level 1 200 1 oC F1 130
18B4 Local RTD #10 Alarm 0 2 1 - F115 0
18B5 Local RTD #10 Alarm Relays 0 7 1 - F113 1
o
18B6 Local RTD #10 Alarm Level 1 200 1 C F1 130
18B7 Record RTD #10 Alarms as Events 0 1 1 - F103 0
18B8 Local RTD #10 Trip 0 2 1 - F115 0
18B9 Enable RTD #10 Trip Voting 0 13 1 - F122 1
18BA Local RTD #10 Trip Relays 0 7 1 - F111 1
18BB Local RTD #10 Trip Level 1 200 1 oC F1 130
18BC Local RTD #10 RTD Type 0 3 1 - F120 0
18C0 First Character of Local RTD #10 Name 32 127 1 - F1 ’R’
↓ ↓
18C3 8th Character of RTD #10 Name 32 127 1 - F1 ""
... Reserved
LOCAL RTD #11
18D0 Local RTD #11 Application 0 4 1 - F121 0
18D1 Local RTD #11 High Alarm 0 2 1 - F115 0
18D2 Local RTD #11 High Alarm Relays 0 7 1 - F113 2
18D3 Local RTD #11 High Alarm Level 1 200 1 oC F1 130
18D4 Local RTD #11 Alarm 0 2 1 - F115 0
18D5 Local RTD #11 Alarm Relays 0 7 1 - F113 1
o
18D6 Local RTD #11 Alarm Level 1 200 1 C F1 130
18D7 Record RTD #11 Alarm Events 0 1 1 - F103 0
18D8 Local RTD #11 Trip 0 2 1 - F115 0
18D9 Enable RTD #11 Trip Voting 0 13 1 - F122 1
18DA Local RTD #11 Trip Relays 0 7 1 - F111 1
18DB Local RTD #11 Trip Level 1 200 1 oC F1 130
18DC Local RTD #11 RTD Type 0 3 1 - F120 0
18E0 First Character of Local RTD #11 Name 32 127 1 - F1 ’R’
↓ ↓
18E3 8th Character of Local RTD #11 Name 32 127 1 - F1 ""
... Reserved
LOCAL RTD #12
18F0 Local RTD #12 Application 0 4 1 - F121 0
18F1 Local RTD #12 High Alarm 0 2 1 - F115 0
18F2 Local RTD #12 High Alarm Relays 0 7 1 - F113 2
18F3 Local RTD #12 High Alarm Level 1 200 1 oC F1 130
18F4 Local RTD #12 Alarm 0 2 1 - F115 0
10 18F5 Local RTD #12 Alarm Relays 0 7 1
o
- F113 1
18F6 Local RTD #12 Alarm Level 1 200 1 C F1 130


18F7 Record RTD #12 Alarms as Events 0 1 1 - F103 0
18F8 Local RTD #12 Trip 0 2 1 - F115 0
18F9 Enable RTD #12 Trip Voting 0 13 1 - F122 1
18FA Local RTD #12 Trip Relays 0 7 1 - F111 1
o
18FB Local RTD #12 Trip Level 1 200 1 C F1 130
18FC Local RTD #12 RTD Type 0 3 1 - F120 0
↓ ↓
... Reserved
OPEN RTD ALARM
1B20 Open RTD Alarm 0 2 1 - F115 0
1B21 Assign Alarm Relays 0 7 1 - F113 1
1B22 Open RTD Alarm Events 0 1 1 - F103 0
SHORT/LOW TEMPERATURE RTD ALARM
1B23 Short / Low Temp RTD Alarm 0 2 1 - F115 0
1B25 Short / Low Temp Alarm Events 0 1 1 - F103 0
... Reserved - - - - - -
LOSS OF REMOTE RTD COMMUNICATIONS
1B30 Loss RRTD Comm Alarm 0 2 1 - F115 0
1B31 Loss RRTD Comm Alarm Relays 0 7 1 - F113 1
1B32 Loss RRTD Comm Alarm Events 0 1 1 - F103 0
... Reserved
UNDERVOLTAGE
1B60 Undervoltage Active If Motor Stopped 0 1 1 - F103 0
1B61 Undervoltage Alarm 0 2 1 - F115 0
1B63 Undervoltage Alarm Pickup 50 99 1 x Rated F3 85
1B64 Starting Undervoltage Alarm Pickup 50 99 1 x Rated F3 85
1B65 Undervoltage Alarm Delay 0 2550 1 0.1s F2 30
1B66 Undervoltage Alarm Events 0 1 1 - F103 0
1B67 Undervoltage Trip 0 2 1 - F115 0
1B68 Undervoltage Trip Relays 0 7 1 - F111 1
1B69 Undervoltage Trip Pickup 50 99 1 x Rated F3 80
1B6A Starting Undervoltage Trip Pickup 50 99 1 x Rated F3 80
1B6B Undervoltage Trip Delay 0 2550 1 0.1s F2 30
... Reserved
OVERVOLTAGE
1B80 Overvoltage Alarm 0 2 1 - F115 0
1B81 Overvoltage Alarm Relays 0 7 1 - F113 1
1B82 Overvoltage Alarm Pickup 101 125 1 x Rated F3 105
1B83 Overvoltage Alarm Delay 0 2550 1 s F2 10
1B84 Overvoltage Alarm Events 0 1 1 - F103 0
1B85 Overvoltage Trip 0 1 1 - F103 0
1B86 Overvoltage Trip Relays 0 7 1 - F111 1
1B87 Overvoltage Trip Pickup 101 125 1 x Rated F3 110
1B88 Overvoltage Trip Delay 0 2550 1 s F2 10
... Reserved
PHASE REVERSAL
1BA0 Phase Reversal Trip 0 2 1 - F115 0
1BA1 Assign Trip Relays 0 7 1 - F111 1
... Reserved - - - - - -
OVERFREQUENCY
1BB0 Block Overfrequency on Start 0 5000 1 s F1 1
1BB1 Overfrequency Alarm 0 2 1 - F115 0
1BB2 Assign Alarm Relays 0 7 1 - F113 1
1BB3 Overfrequency Alarm Level 2000 7000 1 Hz F3 6050 10
1BB4 Overfrequency Alarm Delay 0 2550 1 s F2 10


1BB5 Overfrequency Alarm Events 0 1 1 - F103 0
1BB6 Overfrequency Trip 0 1 1 - F103 0
1BB7 Assign Trip Relays 0 7 1 - F111 1
1BB8 Overfrequency Trip Level 2000 7000 1 Hz F3 6050
1BB9 Overfrequency Trip Delay 0 2550 1 s F2 10
... Reserved - - - - - -
UNDERFREQUENCY
1BC0 Block Underfrequency on Start 0 5000 1 s F1 1
1BC1 Underfrequency Alarm 0 2 1 - F115 0
1BC2 Assign Alarm Relays 0 7 1 - F113 1
1BC3 Underfrequency Alarm Level 2000 7000 1 Hz F3 5950
1BC4 Underfrequency Alarm Delay 0 2550 1 s F2 10
1BC5 Underfrequency Alarm Events 0 1 1 - F103 0
1BC6 Underfrequency Trip 0 2 1 - F115 0
1BC7 Assign Trip Relays 0 7 1 - F111 1
1BC8 Underfrequency Trip Level 2000 7000 1 Hz F3 5950
1BC9 Underfrequency Trip Delay 0 2550 1 s F2 10
... Reserved
LEAD POWER FACTOR
1BD0 Block Lead Power Factor From Start 0 5000 1 s F1 1
1BD1 Lead Power Factor Alarm 0 2 1 - F115 0
1BD2 Assign Lead Power Factor Alarm Relays 0 7 1 - F113 1
1BD3 Lead Power Factor Alarm Level 5 99 1 - F3 30
1BD4 Lead Power Factor Alarm Delay 1 2550 1 s F2 10
1BD5 Lead Power Factor Alarm Events 0 1 1 - F103 0
1BD6 Lead Power Factor Trip 0 2 1 - F115 0
1BD7 Lead Power Factor Trip Relays 0 7 1 - F111 1
1BD8 Lead Power Factor Trip Level 5 99 1 - F3 30
1BD9 Lead Power Factor Trip Delay 1 2550 1 s F2 10
... Reserved
LAG POWER FACTOR
1BE0 Block Lag Power Factor From Start 0 5000 1 s F1 1
1BE1 Lag Power Factor Alarm 0 2 1 - F115 0
1BE2 Assign Lag Power Factor Alarm Relays 0 7 1 - F113 1
1BE3 Lag Power Factor Alarm Level 5 99 1 - F3 85
1BE4 Lag Power Factor Alarm Delay 1 2550 1 s F2 10
1BE5 Lag Power Factor Alarm Events 0 1 1 - F103 0
1BE6 Lag Power Factor Trip 0 2 1 - F115 0
1BE7 Assign Lag Power Factor Trip Relays 0 7 1 - F111 1
1BE8 Lag Power Factor Trip Level 5 99 1 - F3 80
1BE9 Lag Power Factor Trip Delay 1 2550 1 s F2 10
... Reserved
POSITIVE REACTIVE POWER
1BF0 Block Positive kvar Element From Start 0 5000 1 s F1 1
1BF1 Positive kvar Alarm 0 2 1 - F115 0
1BF2 Assign Alarm Relays 0 7 1 - F113 1
1BF3 Positive kvar Alarm Level 1 25000 1 kvar F1 10
1BF4 Positive kvar Alarm Delay 1 2550 1 s F2 10
1BF5 Positive kvar Alarm Events 0 1 1 - F103 0
1BF6 Positive kvar Trip 0 1 1 - F103 0
1BF7 Assign Trip Relays 0 7 1 - F111 1
1BF8 Positive kvar Trip Level 1 25000 1 kvar F1 25
1BF9 Positive kvar Trip Delay 1 2550 1 s F2 10
... Reserved
NEGATIVE REACTIVE POWER
1C00 Block Negative kvar Element from Start 0 5000 1 s F1 1
1C01 Negative kvar Alarm 0 2 1 - F115 0
10 1C02 Assign Alarm Relays 0 7 1 - F113 1
1C03 Negative kvar Alarm Level 1 25000 1 kvar F1 10


1C04 Negative kvar Alarm Delay 1 2550 1 s F2 10
1C05 Negative kvar Alarm Events 0 1 1 - F103 0
1C06 Negative kvar Trip 0 1 1 - F103 0
1C07 Assign Trip Relays 0 7 1 - F111 1
1C08 Negative kvar Trip Level 1 25000 1 kvar F1 25
1C09 Negative kvar Trip Delay 1 2550 1 s F2 10
... Reserved
UNDERPOWER
1C10 Block Underpower From Start 0 15000 1 s F1 0
1C11 Underpower Alarm 0 2 1 - F115 0
1C12 Assign Alarm Relays 0 7 1 - F113 1
1C13 Underpower Alarm Level 1 25000 1 kW F1 2
1C14 Underpower Alarm Delay 5 2550 1 s F2 1
1C15 Underpower Alarm Events 0 1 1 - F103 0
1C16 Underpower Trip 0 2 1 - F115 0
1C17 Underpower Trip Relays 0 7 1 - F111 1
1C18 Underpower Trip Level 1 25000 1 kW F1 1
1C19 Underpower Trip Delay 5 2550 1 s F1 1
... Reserved
REVERSE POWER
1C20 Block Reverse Power From Start 0 50000 1 s F1 0
1C21 Reverse Power Alarm 0 2 1 - F115 0
1C23 Reverse Power Alarm Level 1 25000 1 kW F1 2
1C24 Reverse Power Alarm Delay 5 300 1 s F2 1
1C25 Reverse Power Alarm Events 0 1 1 - F103 0
1C26 Reverse Power Trip 0 2 1 - F115 0
1C27 Assign Trip Relays 0 7 1 - F111 1
1C28 Reverse Power Trip Level 1 25000 1 kW F1 1
1C29 Reverse Power Trip Delay 5 300 1 s F2 1
... Reserved
TRIP COUNTER
1C80 Trip Counter Alarm 0 2 1 - F115 0
1C82 Alarm Pickup Level 0 50000 1 - F1 25
1C83 Trip Counter Alarm Events 0 1 1 - F103 0
... Reserved
STARTER FAILURE
1C90 Starter Failure Alarm 0 2 1 - F115 0
1C91 Starter Type 0 1 1 - F125 0
1C93 Starter Failure Delay 10 1000 10 ms F1 100
1C94 Starter Failure Alarm Events 0 1 1 - F103 0
... Reserved
CURRENT DEMAND
1CD0 Current Demand Period 5 90 1 min F1 15
1CD1 Current Demand Alarm 0 2 1 - F115 0
1CD2 Assign Alarm Relays 0 7 1 - F113 1
1CD3 Current Demand Alarm Level 10 65535 1 A F1 100
1CD5 Current Demand Alarm Events 0 1 1 - F103 0
... Reserved
KW DEMAND
1CE0 kW Demand Period 5 90 1 min F1 15
1CE1 kW Demand Alarm 0 2 1 - F115 0
1CE2 Assign Alarm Relays 0 7 1 - F113 1
1CE3 kW Demand Alarm Level 1 50000 1 kW F1 100
1CE4 kW Demand Alarm Events 0 1 1 - F103 0
... Reserved 10


KVAR DEMAND
1CF0 kvar Demand Period 5 90 1 min F1 15
1CF1 kvar Demand Alarm 0 2 1 - F115 0
1CF2 Assign Alarm Relays 0 7 1 - F113 1
1CF3 kvar Demand Alarm Level -32000 32000 1 kvar F1 100
1CF4 kvar Demand Alarm Events 0 1 1 - F103 0
... Reserved
KVA DEMAND
1D00 kVA Demand Period 5 90 1 min F1 15
1D01 kVA Demand Alarm 0 2 1 - F115 0
1D02 Assign Alarm Relays 0 7 1 - F113 1
1D03 kVA Demand Alarm Level 1 50000 1 kVA F1 100
1D04 kVA Demand Alarm Events 0 1 1 - F103 0
... Reserved
SELF-TEST RELAY
1D06 Assign Service Relay 0 7 0 - F111 3
... Reserved
ANALOG OUTPUTS
1D40 Enable Analog Output 1 0 1 1 - F103 0
1D41 Assign Analog Output 1 Output Range 0 2 1 - F26 0
1D42 Assign Analog Output 1 Parameter 0 111 1 - F127 0
1D43 Analog Output 1 Minimum TBD TBD 1 - F1 0
1D44 Analog Output 1 Maximum TBD TBD 1 - F1 0
1D45 Enable Analog Output 2 0 1 1 - F103 0
1D4A Enable Analog Output 3 0 1 1 - F103 0
1D4B Assign Analog Output 3 Output Range 0 2 1 - F26 0
1D4C Assign Analog Output 3 Parameter 0 111 1 - F127 0
1D4D Analog Output 3 Minimum TBD TBD 1 - F1 0
1D4E Analog Output 3 Maximum TBD TBD 1 - F1 0
1D4F Enable Analog Output 4 0 1 1 - F103 0
... Reserved
SIMULATION MODE
1F00 Simulation Mode 0 3 1 - F138 0
1F01 Pre-Fault to Fault Time Delay 0 300 1 s F1 10
... Reserved
PRE-FAULT VALUES
1F10 Pre-Fault Current Phase A 0 2000 1 x FLA F3 0
1F11 Pre-Fault Current Phase B 0 2000 1 x FLA F3 0
1F12 Pre-Fault Current Phase C 0 2000 1 x FLA F3 0
1F13 Pre-Fault Ground Current (1A/5A) 0 110 1 x CT F3 0
1F14 Pre-Fault Ground Current (50:0.025) 0 1000 1 A F3 0
1F15 Pre - Fault Voltage Phase A 0 110 1 x VT F3 0
1F16 Pre - Fault Voltage Phase B 0 110 1 x VT F3 0
1F17 Pre - Fault Voltage Phase C 0 110 1 x VT F3 0
1F18 Pre-Fault Current Lags Voltage 0 359 1 degrees F1 0
1F19 Pre - Fault System Frequency 250 700 1 Hz F2 600
oC F4 40
1F1A Stator RTD Pre-Fault Temperature -40 200 1
1F1B Bearing RTD Pre-Fault Temperature -40 200 1 oC F4 40
1F1C Other RTD Pre-Fault Temperature -40 200 1 oC F4 40
10 1F1D Ambient RTD Pre-Fault Temperature -40 200 1 oC F4 40
... Reserved - - - - - -


FAULT SETUP
1F30 Fault Current Phase A 0 2000 1 x FLA F3 0
1F31 Fault Current Phase B 0 2000 1 x FLA F3 0
1F32 Fault Current Phase C 0 2000 1 x FLA F3 0
1F33 Fault Ground Current (1A/5A) 0 110 1 x CT F3 0
1F34 Fault Ground Current (50:0.025) 0 1000 1 A F3 0
1F35 Fault Voltage Phase A 0 110 1 x VT F3 0
1F36 Fault Voltage Phase B 0 110 1 x VT F3 0
1F37 Fault Voltage Phase C 0 110 1 x VT F3 0
1F38 Fault Current Lag Voltage 0 359 1 degrees F1 0
1F39 Fault System Frequency 250 700 1 Hz F2 600
1F3A Stator RTD Fault Temperature -40 200 1 oC F4 40
1F3B Bearing RTD Fault Temperature -40 200 1 oC F4 40
1F3C Other RTD Fault Temperature -40 200 1 oC F4 40
1F3D Ambient RTD Fault Temperature -40 200 1 oC F4 40
... Reserved
TEST OUTPUT RELAYS
1F80 Force Trip Relay 0 2 1 - F150 0
1F81 Force Trip Relay Duration 1 300 1 s F1 0
1F82 Force AUX1 Relay 0 2 1 - F150 0
1F83 Force AUX1 Relay Duration 1 300 1 s F1 0
1F84 Force AUX2 Relay 0 2 1 - F150 0
1F85 Force AUX2 Relay Duration 1 300 1 s F1 0
1F86 Force Alarm Relay 0 2 1 - F150 0
1F87 Force Alarm Relay Range 1 300 1 s F1 0
... Reserved
TEST ANALOG OUTPUTS
1F90 Force Analog Outputs 0 1 1 - F126 0
1F91 Analog Output 1 Forced Value 0 100 1 % range F1 0
... Reserved
REMOTE RTD SLAVE ADDRESSES
1FF0 RRTD1 - Slave Address 0 254 1 - F1 0
... Reserved
RRTD 1 – RTD #1
2000 RRTD 1 - RTD #1 Application 0 4 1 - F121 0
2001 RRTD 1 - RTD #1 High Alarm 0 2 1 - F115 0
2002 RRTD 1 - RTD #1 High Alarm Relays 0 7 1 - F113 2
oC
2003 RRTD 1 - RTD #1 High Alarm Level 1 200 1 F1 130
2004 RRTD 1 - RTD #1 Alarm 0 2 1 - F115 0
2005 RRTD 1 - RTD #1 Alarm Relays 0 7 1 - F113 1
o
2006 RRTD 1 - RTD #1 Alarm Level 1 200 1 C F1 130
2007 Record RRTD 1 - RTD #1 Alarms as Events 0 1 1 - F103 0
2008 RRTD 1 - RTD #1 Trip 0 2 1 - F115 0
2009 Enable RRTD 1 - RTD #1 Trip Voting 0 13 1 - F122 1
200A RRTD 1 - RTD #1 Trip Relays 0 7 1 - F111 1
200B RRTD 1 - RTD #1 Trip Level 1 200 1 oC F1 130
200C RRTD 1 - RTD #1 RTD Type 0 3 1 - F120 0
... Reserved
2010 First Character of RRTD 1 - RTD #1 Name 32 127 1 - F1 ’R’
↓ ↓
2013 8th Character of RRTD 1 - RTD #1 Name 32 127 1 - F1 ""
2014 Reserved 10


RRTD 1 – RTD #2
o
2023 RRTD 1 - RTD #2 High Alarm Level 1 200 1 C F1 130
2024 RRTD 1 - RTD #2 Alarm 0 2 1 - F115 0
2026 RRTD 1 - RTD #2 Alarm Level 1 200 1 oC F1 130
2028 RRTD 1 - RTD #2 Trip 0 2 1 - F115 0
2029 Enable A Remote RTD #2 Trip Voting 0 13 1 - F122 1
... Reserved
↓ ↓
2034 Reserved
RRTD 1 – RTD #3
o
2044 RRTD 1 - RTD #3 Alarm 0 2 1 - F115 0
2048 RRTD 1 - RTD #3 Trip 0 2 1 - F115 0
2050 First Character of RRTD 1 - RTD # Name 32 127 1 - F1 ’R’
↓ ↓
... Reserved
RRTD 1 – RTD #4
o
2064 RRTD 1 - RTD #4 Alarm 0 2 1 - F115 0
2068 RRTD 1 - RTD #4 Trip 0 2 1 - F115 0
↓ ↓
2074 Reserved
RRTD 1 – RTD #5
10 2081 RRTD 1 - RTD #5 High Alarm 0 2 1 - F115 0


2083 RRTD 1 - RTD #5 High Alarm Level 1 200 1 oC F1 130
2084 RRTD 1 - RTD #5 Alarm 0 2 1 - F115 0
o
2088 RRTD 1 - RTD #5 Trip 0 2 1 - F115 0
↓ ↓
... Reserved
RRTD 1 – RTD #6
20A0 RRTD 1 - RTD #6 Application 0 4 1 - F121 0
20A1 RRTD 1 - RTD #6 High Alarm 0 2 1 - F115 0
20A2 RRTD 1 - RTD #6 High Alarm Relays 0 7 1 - F113 1
20A3 RRTD 1 - RTD #6 High Alarm Level 1 200 1 oC F1 130
20A4 RRTD 1 - RTD #6 Alarm 0 2 1 - F115 0
20A5 RRTD 1 - RTD #6 Alarm Relays 0 7 1 - F113 1
20A6 RRTD 1 - RTD #6 Alarm Level 1 200 1 oC F1 130
20A7 Record RRTD 1 - RTD #6 Alarms as Events 0 1 1 - F103 0
20A8 RRTD 1 - RTD #6 Trip 0 2 1 - F115 0
20A9 Enable RRTD 1 - RTD #6 Trip Voting 0 13 1 - F122 1
20AA RRTD 1 - RTD #6 Trip Relays 0 7 1 - F111 1
20AB RRTD 1 - RTD #6 Trip Level 1 200 1 oC F1 130
20AC RRTD 1 - RTD #6 RTD Type 0 3 1 - F120 0
20B0 First Character of RRTD 1 - RTD #6 Name 32 127 1 - F1 ’R’
↓ ↓
20B3 8th Character of RRTD 1 - RTD #6 Name 32 127 1 - F1 ""
... Reserved
RRTD 1 – RTD #7
20C0 RRTD 1 - RTD #7 Application 0 4 1 - F121 0
20C1 RRTD 1 - RTD #7 High Alarm 0 2 1 - F115 0
20C2 RRTD 1 - RTD #7 High Alarm Relays 0 7 1 - F113 2
20C3 RRTD 1 - RTD #7 High Alarm Level 1 200 1 oC F1 130
20C4 RRTD 1 - RTD #7 Alarm 0 2 1 - F115 0
20C5 RRTD 1 - RTD #7 Alarm Relays 0 7 1 - F113 1
20C6 RRTD 1 - RTD #7 Alarm Level 1 200 1 oC F1 130
20C7 Record RRTD 1 - RTD #7 Alarms as Events 0 1 1 - F103 0
20C8 RRTD 1 - RTD #7 Trip 0 2 1 - F115 0
20C9 Enable RRTD 1 - RTD #7 Trip Voting 0 13 1 - F122 1
20CA RRTD 1 - RTD #7 Trip Relays 0 7 1 - F111 1
20CB RRTD 1 - RTD #7 Trip Level 1 200 1 oC F1 130
20CC RRTD 1 - RTD #7 RTD Type 0 3 1 - F120 0
20D0 First Character of RRTD 1 - RTD #7 Name 32 127 1 - F1 ’R’
↓ ↓
20D3 8th Character of RRTD 1 - RTD #7 Name 32 127 1 - F1 ""
... Reserved
RRTD 1 – RTD #8
20E0 RRTD 1 - RTD #8 Application 0 4 1 - F121 0
20E1 RRTD 1 - RTD #8 High Alarm 0 2 1 - F115 0
20E2 RRTD 1 - RTD #8 High Alarm Relays 0 7 1 - F113 2
20E3 RRTD 1 - RTD #8 High Alarm Level 1 200 1 oC F1 130
20E4 RRTD 1 - RTD #8 Alarm 0 2 1 - F115 0
20E5 RRTD 1 - RTD #8 Alarm Relays 0 7 1 - F113 1
20E6 RRTD 1 - RTD #8 Alarm Level 1 200 1 oC F1 130 10
20E7 Record RRTD 1 - RTD #8 Alarms as Events 0 1 1 - F103 0


20E8 RRTD 1 - RTD #8 Trip 0 2 1 - F115 0
20E9 Enable RRTD 1 - RTD #8 Trip Voting 0 13 1 - F122 1
20EA RRTD 1 - RTD #8 Trip Relays 0 7 1 - F111 1
o
20EB RRTD 1 - RTD #8 Trip Level 1 200 1 C F1 130
20EC RRTD 1 - RTD #8 RTD Type 0 3 1 - F120 0
20F0 First Character of RRTD 1 - RTD #8 Name 32 127 1 - F1 ’R’
↓ ↓
20F3 8th Character of RRTD 1 - RTD #8 Name 32 127 1 - F1 ""
... Reserved
RRTD 1 – RTD #9
2104 RRTD 1 - RTD #9 Alarm 0 2 1 - F115 0
o
2108 RRTD 1 - RTD #9 Trip 0 2 1 - F115 0
↓ ↓
... Reserved
RRTD 1 – RTD #10
2124 RRTD 1 - RTD #10 Alarm 0 2 1 - F115 0
o
2128 RRTD 1 - RTD #10 Trip 0 2 1 - F115 0
2129 Enable RRTD 1 - RTD#10 Trip Voting 0 13 1 - F122 1
↓ ↓
... Reserved
RRTD 1 – RTD #11
2144 RRTD 1 - RTD #11 Alarm 0 2 1 - F115 0
o
2148 RRTD 1 - RTD #11 Trip 0 2 1 - F115 0
10 214B RRTD 1 - RTD #11 Trip Level 1 200 1 oC F1 130


↓ ↓
... Reserved
RRTD 1 – RTD #12
2164 RRTD 1 - RTD #12 Alarm 0 2 1 - F115 0
2168 RRTD 1 - RTD #12 Trip 0 2 1 - F115 0
o
216B RRTD 1 - RTD #12 Trip Level 1 200 1 C F1 130
↓ ↓
... Reserved
RRTD 1 – OPEN RTD ALARM
2180 RRTD A - Open RTD Alarm 0 2 1 - F115 0
2181 RRTD A - Assign Alarm Relays 0 7 1 - F113 1
2182 RRTD A - Open RTD Alarm Events 0 1 1 - F103 0
RRTD 1 – SHORT/LOW TEMPERATURE RTD ALARM
2183 RRTD A - Short / Low Temp RTD Alarm 0 2 1 - F115 0
2184 RRTD A - Assign Alarm Relays 0 7 1 - F113 1
2185 RRTD A - Short / Low Temp Alarm Events 0 1 1 - F103 0
... Reserved - - - - - -
RRTD 2 – RTD #1
o
2204 RRTD 2 - RTD #1 Alarm 0 2 1 - F115 0
2208 RRTD 2 - RTD #1 Trip 0 2 1 - F115 0
↓ ↓
... Reserved
RRTD 2 – RTD #2
o
2224 RRTD 2 - RTD #2 Alarm 0 2 1 - F115 0
2227 Record RRTD 2 - RTD #2 Alarms as Events 0 1 1 - F103 0 10
2228 RRTD 2 - RTD #2 Trip 0 2 1 - F115 0


↓ ↓
... Reserved
RRTD 2 – RTD #3
2244 RRTD 2 - RTD #3 Alarm 0 2 1 - F115 0
2248 RRTD 2 - RTD #3 Trip 0 2 1 - F115 0
↓ ↓
... Reserved
RRTD 2 – RTD #4
2264 RRTD 2 - RTD #4 Alarm 0 2 1 - F115 0
2268 RRTD 2 - RTD #4 Trip 0 2 1 - F115 0
↓ ↓
... Reserved
RRTD 2 – RTD #5
2284 RRTD 2 - RTD #5 Alarm 0 2 1 - F115 0
2288 RRTD 2 - RTD #5 Trip 0 2 1 - F115 0
10 228C RRTD 2 - RTD #5 RTD Type 0 3 1 - F120 0


↓ ↓
... Reserved
RRTD 2 – RTD #6
22A4 RRTD 2 - RTD #6 Alarm 0 2 1 - F115 0
o
22A6 RRTD 2 - RTD #6 Alarm Level 1 200 1 C F1 130
22A8 RRTD 2 - RTD #6 Trip 0 2 1 - F115 0
22AB RRTD 2 - RTD #6 Trip Level 1 200 1 oC F1 130
↓ ↓
... Reserved
RRTD 2 – RTD #7
22C4 RRTD 2 - RTD #7 Alarm 0 2 1 - F115 0
o
22C6 RRTD 2 - RTD #7 Alarm Level 1 200 1 C F1 130
22C8 RRTD 2 - RTD #7 Trip 0 2 1 - F115 0
↓ ↓
22D3 8th Character of RRTD 2 - RTD #7 Name 32 127 1 - F1 ’’
... Reserved
RRTD 2 – RTD #8
22E4 RRTD 2 - RTD #8 Alarm 0 2 1 - F115 0
o
22E6 RRTD 2 - RTD #8 Alarm Level 1 200 1 C F1 130
22E8 RRTD 2 - RTD #8 Trip 0 2 1 - F115 0
22EB RRTD 2 - RTD #8 Trip Level 1 200 1 oC F1 130
↓ ↓
22F3 8th Character of RRTD 2 - RTD #8 Name 32 127 1 - F1 ’’
... Reserved
RRTD 2 – RTD #9 10


2304 RRTD 2 - RTD #9 Alarm 0 2 1 - F115 0
2308 RRTD 2 - RTD #9 Trip 0 2 1 - F115 0
o
↓ ↓
... Reserved
RRTD 2 – RTD #10
2324 RRTD 2 - RTD #10 Alarm 0 2 1 - F115 0
o
2328 RRTD 2 - RTD #10 Trip 0 2 1 - F115 0
o
↓ ↓
... Reserved
RRTD 2 – RTD #11
2344 RRTD 2 - RTD #11 Alarm 0 2 1 - F115 0
o
2348 RRTD 2 - RTD #11 Trip 0 2 1 - F115 0
o
↓ ↓
2353 8th Character of RRTD 2 - RTD #11 Name 32 127 1 - F1 ’’
... Reserved
RRTD 2 – RTD #12
10 2364 RRTD 2 - RTD #12 Alarm 0 2 1 - F115 0


2368 RRTD 2 - RTD #12 Trip 0 2 1 - F115 0
↓ ↓
... Reserved
2380 RRTD B - Open RTD Alarm 0 2 1 - F115 0
2381 RRTD B - Assign Alarm Relays 0 7 1 - F113 1
2382 RRTD B - Open RTD Alarm Events 0 1 1 - F103 0
2383 RRTD B - Short / Low Temp RTD Alarm 0 2 1 - F115 0
2384 RRTD B - Assign Alarm Relays 0 7 1 - F113 1
2385 RRTD B - Short / Low Temp Alarm Events 0 1 1 - F103 0
... Reserved - - - - - -
RRTD 3 – RTD #1
2404 RRTD 3 - RTD #1 Alarm 0 2 1 - F115 0
2408 RRTD 3 - RTD #1 Trip 0 2 1 - F115 0
↓ ↓
2414 Reserved
RRTD 3 – RTD #2
2424 RRTD 3 - RTD #2 Alarm 0 2 1 - F115 0
2428 RRTD 3 - RTD #2 Trip 0 2 1 - F115 0
↓ ↓
... Reserved
RRTD 3 – RTD #3
2440 RRTD 3 - RTD #3 Application 0 4 1 - F121 0 10


2444 RRTD 3 - RTD #3 Alarm 0 2 1 - F115 0
o
2448 RRTD 3 - RTD #3 Trip 0 2 1 - F115 0
o
↓ ↓
... Reserved
RRTD 3 – RTD #4
2464 RRTD 3 - RTD #4 Alarm 0 2 1 - F115 0
o
2468 RRTD 3 - RTD #4 Trip 0 2 1 - F115 0
↓ ↓
... Reserved
RRTD 3 – RTD #5
2484 RRTD 3 - RTD #5 Alarm 0 2 1 - F115 0
o
2488 RRTD 3 - RTD #5 Trip 0 2 1 - F115 0
↓ ↓
... Reserved
RRTD 3 – RTD #6
24A4 RRTD 3 - RTD #6 Alarm 0 2 1 - F115 0
10 24A5 RRTD 3 - RTD #6 Alarm Relays 0 7 1
o
- F113 1


24A8 RRTD 3 - RTD #6 Trip 0 2 1 - F115 0
-
24AA RRTD 3 - RTD #6 Trip Relays 0 7 1 F111 1
o
24AB RRTD 3 - RTD #6 Trip Level 1 200 1 C F1 130
↓ ↓
... Reserved
RRTD 3 – RTD #7
24C4 RRTD 3 - RTD #7 Alarm 0 2 1 - F115 0
o
24C6 RRTD 3 - RTD #7 Alarm Level 1 200 1 C F1 130
24C8 RRTD 3 - RTD #7 Trip 0 2 1 - F115 0
o
24CB RRTD 3 - RTD #7 Trip Level 1 200 1 C F1 130
↓ ↓
... Reserved
RRTD 3 – RTD #8
24E4 RRTD 3 - RTD #8 Alarm 0 2 1 - F115 0
o
24E6 RRTD 3 - RTD #8 Alarm Level 1 200 1 C F1 130
24E8 RRTD 3 - RTD #8 Trip 0 2 1 - F115 0
o
24EB RRTD 3 - RTD #8 Trip Level 1 200 1 C F1 130
↓ ↓
... Reserved
RRTD 3 – RTD #9
2504 RRTD 3 - RTD #9 Alarm 0 2 1 - F115 0
o
2508 RRTD 3 - RTD #9 Trip 0 2 1 - F115 0
250A RRTD 3 - RTD #9 Trip Relays 0 7 1
o
- F111 1 10


↓ ↓
... Reserved
RRTD 3 – RTD #10
o
2524 RRTD 3 - RTD #10 Alarm 0 2 1 - F115 0
2528 RRTD 3 - RTD #10 Trip 0 2 1 - F115 0
o
↓ ↓
... Reserved
RRTD 3 – RTD #11
2544 RRTD 3 - RTD #11 Alarm 0 2 1 - F115 0
2548 RRTD 3 - RTD #11 Trip 0 2 1 - F115 0
o
↓ ↓
... Reserved
RRTD 3 – RTD #12
2564 RRTD 3 - RTD #12 Alarm 0 2 1 - F115 0
2568 RRTD 3 - RTD #12 Trip 0 2 1 - F115 0
o
↓ ↓
10 2573 8th Character of RRTD 3 - RTD #12 Name 32 127 1 - F1 ""
... Reserved


2580 RRTD 3 - Open RTD Alarm 0 2 1 - F115 0
2581 RRTD 3 - Assign Alarm Relays 0 7 1 - F113 1
2582 RRTD 3 - Open RTD Alarm Events 0 1 1 - F103 0
2583 RRTD 3 - Short / Low Temp RTD Alarm 0 2 1 - F115 0
2585 RRTD 3 - Short / Low Temp Alarm Events 0 1 1 - F103 0
... Reserved - - - - - -
RRTD 4 – RTD #1
2604 RRTD 4 - RTD #1 Alarm 0 2 1 - F115 0
o
2608 RRTD 4 - RTD #1 Trip 0 2 1 - F115 0
↓ ↓
.... Reserved
RRTD 4 – RTD #2
2624 RRTD 4 - RTD #2 Alarm 0 2 1 - F115 0
o
2628 RRTD 4 - RTD #2 Trip 0 2 1 - F115 0
↓ ↓
... Reserved
RRTD 4 – RTD #3
2644 RRTD 4 - RTD #3 Alarm 0 2 1 - F115 0
o
2648 RRTD 4 - RTD #3 Trip 0 2 1 - F115 0
264B RRTD 4 - RTD #3 Trip Level 1 200 1 oC F1 130 10


↓ ↓
... Reserved
RRTD 4 – RTD #4
2664 RRTD 4 - RTD #4 Alarm 0 2 1 - F115 0
2668 RRTD 4 - RTD #4 Trip 0 2 1 - F115 0
o
↓ ↓
... Reserved
RRTD 4 – RTD #5
2684 RRTD 4 - RTD #5 Alarm 0 2 1 - F115 0
o
2688 RRTD 4 - RTD #5 Trip 0 2 1 - F115 0
o
↓ ↓
... Reserved
RRTD 4 – RTD #6
26A4 RRTD 4 - RTD #6 Alarm 0 2 1 - F115 0
o
26A8 RRTD 4 - RTD #6 Trip 0 2 1 - F115 0
o
26AB RRTD 4 - RTD #6 Trip Level 1 200 1 C F1 130
↓ ↓
10 ... Reserved


RRTD 4 – RTD #7
o
26C3 RRTD 4 - RTD #7 High Alarm Level 1 200 1 C F1 130
26C4 RRTD 4 - RTD #7 Alarm 0 2 1 - F115 0
26C6 RRTD 4 - RTD #7 Alarm Level 1 200 1 oC F1 130
26C8 RRTD 4 - RTD #7 Trip 0 2 1 - F115 0
↓ ↓
... Reserved
RRTD 4 – RTD #8
o
26E3 RRTD 4 - RTD #8 High Alarm Level 1 200 1 C F1 130
26E4 RRTD 4 - RTD #8 Alarm 0 2 1 - F115 0
26E6 RRTD 4 - RTD #8 Alarm Level 1 200 1 oC F1 130
26E8 RRTD 4 - RTD #8 Trip 0 2 1 - F115 0
26EB RRTD 4 - RTD #8 Trip Level 1 200 1 oC F1 130
↓ ↓
... Reserved
RRTD 4 – RTD #9
o
2704 RRTD 4 - RTD #9 Alarm 0 2 1 - F115 0
2708 RRTD 4 - RTD #9 Trip 0 2 1 - F115 0
↓ ↓
... Reserved
RRTD 4 – RTD #10
2722 RRTD 4 - RTD #10 High Alarm Relays 0 7 1
o
- F113 2 10


2724 RRTD 4 - RTD #10 Alarm 0 2 1 - F115 0
2728 RRTD 4 - RTD #10 Trip 0 2 1 - F115 0
↓ ↓
... Reserved
RRTD 4 – RTD #11
o
2744 RRTD 4 - RTD #11 Alarm 0 2 1 - F115 0
2748 RRTD 4 - RTD #11 Trip 0 2 1 - F115 0
↓ ↓
... Reserved
RRTD 4 – RTD #12
o
2764 RRTD 4 - RTD #12 Alarm 0 2 1 - F115 0
2768 RRTD 4 - RTD #12 Trip 0 2 1 - F115 0
↓ ↓
... Reserved
2780 RRTD 4- Open RTD Alarm 0 2 1 - F115 0
2782 RRTD 4 - Open RTD Alarm Events 0 1 1 - F103 0
2783 RRTD 4 - Short / Low Temp RTD Alarm 0 2 1 - F115 0
2785 RRTD 4 - Short / Low Temp Alarm Events 0 1 1 - F103 0
10 ... Reserved - - - - - -


RRTD 1 – OUTPUT RELAY SETUP
27A0 Trip Relay Reset Mode 0 2 1 - F117 0
27A1 Alarm Relay Reset Mode 0 2 1 - F117 0
27A2 Aux 1 Relay Reset Mode 0 2 1 - F117 0
27A3 Aux 2 Relay Reset Mode 0 2 1 - F117 0
27A4 Trip Relay Operation 0 1 1 - F161 0
27A5 Alarm Relay Operation 0 1 1 - F161 1
27A6 Aux1 Relay Operation 0 1 1 - F161 1
27A7 Aux2 Relay Operation 0 1 1 - F161 0
... Reserved
27B0 Trip Relay Reset Mode 0 2 1 - F117 0
27B1 Alarm Relay Reset Mode 0 2 1 - F117 0
27B2 Aux 1 Relay Reset Mode 0 2 1 - F117 0
27B3 Aux 2 Relay Reset Mode 0 2 1 - F117 0
27B4 Trip Relay Operation 0 1 1 - F161 0
27B5 Alarm Relay Operation 0 1 1 - F161 1
27B6 Aux1 Relay Operation 0 1 1 - F161 1
27B7 Aux2 Relay Operation 0 1 1 - F161 0
... Reserved
27C0 Trip Relay Reset Mode 0 2 1 - F117 0
27C1 Alarm Relay Reset Mode 0 2 1 - F117 0
27C2 Aux 1 Relay Reset Mode 0 2 1 - F117 0
27C3 Aux 2 Relay Reset Mode 0 2 1 - F117 0
27C4 Trip Relay Operation 0 1 1 - F161 0
27C5 Alarm Relay Operation 0 1 1 - F161 1
27C6 Aux1 Relay Operation 0 1 1 - F161 1
27C7 Aux2 Relay Operation 0 1 1 - F161 0
... Reserved
27D0 Trip Relay Reset Mode 0 2 1 - F117 0
27D1 Alarm Relay Reset Mode 0 2 1 - F117 0
27D2 Aux 1 Relay Reset Mode 0 2 1 - F117 0
27D3 Aux 2 Relay Reset Mode 0 2 1 - F117 0
27D4 Trip Relay Operation 0 1 1 - F161 0
27D5 Alarm Relay Operation 0 1 1 - F161 1
27D6 Aux1 Relay Operation 0 1 1 - F161 1
27D7 Aux2 Relay Operation 0 1 1 - F161 0
... Reserved
RRTD 1 – ANALOG OUTPUTS
27E0 Enable Analog Output 1 0 1 1 - F103 0
27E1 Assign Analog Output 1 Output Range 0 2 1 - F26 0
27E2 Assign Analog Output 1 Parameter 12 24 1 - F127 13
27E3 Analog Output 1 Minimum -40 200 1 - F4 -40
27E4 Analog Output 1 Maximum -40 200 1 - F4 200
27E5 Enable Analog Output 2 0 1 1 - F103 0
27E6 Assign Analog Output 2 Output Range 0 2 1 - F26 0
27E7 Assign Analog Output 2 Parameter 12 24 1 - F127 13
27E8 Analog Output 2 Minimum -40 200 1 - F4 -40
27E9 Analog Output 2 Maximum -40 200 1 - F4 200
27EA Enable Analog Output 3 0 1 1 - F103 0
27EB Assign Analog Output 3 Output Range 0 2 1 - F26 0
27EC Assign Analog Output 3 Parameter 12 24 1 - F127 13
27ED Analog Output 3 Minimum -40 200 1 - F4 -40
27EE Analog Output 3 Maximum -40 200 1 - F4 200
27EF Enable Analog Output 4 0 1 1 - F103 0
27F0 Assign Analog Output 4 Output Range 0 2 1 - F26 0 10
27F1 Assign Analog Output 4 Parameter 12 24 1 - F127 13


27F2 Analog Output 4 Minimum -40 200 1 - F4 -40
27F3 Analog Output 4 Maximum -40 200 1 - F4 200
... Reserved
2800 Enable Analog Output 1 0 1 1 - F103 0
2801 Assign Analog Output 1 Output Range 0 2 1 - F26 0
2802 Assign Analog Output 1 Parameter 12 24 1 - F127 13
2803 Analog Output 1 Minimum -40 200 1 - F4 -40
2804 Analog Output 1 Maximum -40 200 1 - F4 200
280A Enable Analog Output 3 0 1 1 - F103 0
280B Assign Analog Output 3 Output Range 0 2 1 - F26 0
280C Assign Analog Output 3 Parameter 12 24 1 - F127 13
280D Analog Output 3 Minimum -40 200 1 - F4 -40
280E Analog Output 3 Maximum -40 200 1 - F4 200
280F Enable Analog Output 4 0 1 1 - F103 0
... Reserved
... Reserved
10 2849 Analog Output 2 Maximum -40 200 1 - F4 200


2854 Reserved
RRTD 1 – DIGITAL INPUT 2
2860 1st & 2nd Character of Digital Input 2 Name 32 127 1 - F22 ’GE’
↓ ↓
2865 11th & 12th Character of Digital Input 2 Name 32 127 1 - F22 ’GE’
2870 Digital Input 2 Type 0 1 1 - F116 0
2871 Reserved
2872 Digital Input 2 Alarm 0 2 1 - F115 0
2873 Digital Input 2 Alarm Relays 0 6 1 - F113 0
2874 Digital Input 2 Alarm Delay 1 50000 1 100ms F2 50
2875 Digital Input 2 Alarm Events 0 1 1 - F103 0
2876 Digital Input 2 Trip 0 2 1 - F115 0
2877 Digital Input 2 Trip Relays 0 6 1 - F111 0
2878 Digital Input 2 Trip Delay 1 50000 1 100ms F2 50
2879 Digital Input 2 Assignable Function 0 3 1 - F163 0
--- Reserved
↓ ↓
2891 Reserved
... Reserved
28A0 1st & 2nd Character of Digital Input 4 Name 32 127 1 - F22 ’GE’
↓ ↓
28A5 11th & 12th Character of Digital Input 4 Name 32 127 1 - F22 ’GE’
28B0 Digital Input 4 Type 0 1 1 - F116 0
28B1 Reserved
28B2 Digital Input 4 Alarm 0 2 1 - F115 0
28B3 Digital Input 4 Alarm Relays 0 6 1 - F113 0
28B4 Digital Input 4 Alarm Delay 1 50000 1 100ms F2 50
28B5 Digital Input 4 Alarm Events 0 1 1 - F103 0
28B6 Digital Input 4 Trip 0 2 1 - F115 0
28B7 Digital Input 4 Trip Relays 0 6 1 - F111 0
28B8 Digital Input 4 Trip Delay 1 50000 1 100ms F2 50
28B9 Digital Input 4 Assignable Function 0 3 1 - F163 0
... Reserved
28C0 1st & 2nd Character of Digital Input 1 Name 32 127 1 - F22 ’GE’
↓ ↓ 10
28C5 11th & 12th Character of Digital Input 1 Name 32 127 1 - F22 ’GE’


28D0 Digital Input 1 Type 0 1 1 - F116 0
28D1 Reserved
28D2 Digital Input 1 Alarm 0 2 1 - F115 0
28D3 Digital Input 1 Alarm Relays 0 6 1 - F113 0
28D4 Digital Input 1 Alarm Delay 1 50000 1 100ms F2 50
28D5 Digital Input 1 Alarm Events 0 1 1 - F103 0
28D6 Digital Input 1 Trip 0 2 1 - F115 0
28D7 Digital Input 1 Trip Relays 0 6 1 - F111 0
28D8 Digital Input 1 Trip Delay 1 50000 1 100ms F2 50
28D9 Digital Input 1 Assignable Function 0 3 1 - F163 0
... Reserved
28E0 1st & 2nd Character of Digital Input 6 Name 32 127 1 - F22 ’GE’
↓ ↓
28E5 11th & 12th Character of Digital Input 6 Name 32 127 1 - F22 ’GE’
28F0 Digital Input 6 Type 0 1 1 - F116 0
28F1 Reserved
28F2 Digital Input 6 Alarm 0 2 1 - F115 0
28F3 Digital Input 6 Alarm Relays 0 6 1 - F113 0
28F4 Digital Input 6 Alarm Delay 1 50000 1 100ms F2 50
28F5 Digital Input 6 Alarm Events 0 1 1 - F103 0
28F6 Digital Input 6 Trip 0 2 1 - F115 0
28F7 Digital Input 6 Trip Relays 0 6 1 - F111 0
28F8 Digital Input 6 Trip Delay 1 50000 1 100ms F2 50
28F9 Digital Input 6 Assignable Function 0 3 1 - F163 0
... Reserved
↓ ↓
2911 Reserved
... Reserved
↓ ↓
2931 Reserved
... Reserved
10 2940 1st & 2nd Character of Digital Input 5 Name 32 127 1 - F22 ’GE’
↓ ↓


2951 Reserved
... Reserved
↓ ↓
2971 Reserved
... Reserved
↓ ↓
2991 Reserved
... Reserved
↓ ↓
29B1 Reserved
... Reserved
RRTD 2 – DIGITAL INPUT 3 10
29C0 1st & 2nd Character of Digital Input 3 Name 32 127 1 - F22 ’GE’


↓ ↓
29C5 11th & 12th Character of Digital Input 3 Name 32 127 1 - F22 ’GE’
29D0 Digital Input 3 Type 0 1 1 - F116 0
29D1 Reserved
29D2 Digital Input 3 Alarm 0 2 1 - F115 0
29D3 Digital Input 3 Alarm Relays 0 6 1 - F113 0
29D4 Digital Input 3 Alarm Delay 1 50000 1 100ms F2 50
29D5 Digital Input 3 Alarm Events 0 1 1 - F103 0
29D6 Digital Input 3 Trip 0 2 1 - F115 0
29D7 Digital Input 3 Trip Relays 0 6 1 - F111 0
29D8 Digital Input 3 Trip Delay 1 50000 1 100ms F2 50
29D9 Digital Input 3 Assignable Function 0 3 1 - F163 0
... Reserved
29E0 1st & 2nd Character of Digital Input 2 Name 32 127 1 - F22 ’GE’
↓ ↓
29E5 11th & 12th Character of Digital Input 2 Name 32 127 1 - F22 ’GE’
29F0 Digital Input 2 Type 0 1 1 - F116 0
29F1 Reserved
29F2 Digital Input 2 Alarm 0 2 1 - F115 0
29F3 Digital Input 2 Alarm Relays 0 6 1 - F113 0
29F4 Digital Input 2 Alarm Delay 1 50000 1 100ms F2 50
29F5 Digital Input 2 Alarm Events 0 1 1 - F103 0
29F6 Digital Input 2 Trip 0 2 1 - F115 0
29F7 Digital Input 2 Trip Relays 0 6 1 - F111 0
29F8 Digital Input 2 Trip Delay 1 50000 1 100ms F2 50
29F9 Digital Input 2 Assignable Function 0 3 1 - F163 0
... Reserved
↓ ↓
2A10 Digital Input 5 Type 0 1 1 - F116 0
2A11 Reserved
2A12 Digital Input 5 Alarm 0 2 1 - F115 0
2A13 Digital Input 5 Alarm Relays 0 6 1 - F113 0
2A14 Digital Input 5 Alarm Delay 1 50000 1 100ms F2 50
2A15 Digital Input 5 Alarm Events 0 1 1 - F103 0
2A16 Digital Input 5 Trip 0 2 1 - F115 0
2A17 Digital Input 5 Trip Relays 0 6 1 - F111 0
2A18 Digital Input 5 Trip Delay 1 50000 1 100ms F2 50
2A19 Digital Input 5 Assignable Function 0 3 1 - F163 0
... Reserved
↓ ↓
2A31 Reserved
10 ... Reserved


↓ ↓
2A51 Reserved
... Reserved
↓ ↓
2A71 Reserved
... Reserved
↓ ↓
2A91 Reserved
... Reserved
2AA0 1st & 2nd Character of Digital Input 2 Name 32 127 1 - F22 ’GE’
↓ ↓
2AA5 11th & 12th Character of Digital Input 2 Name 32 127 1 - F22 ’GE’
2AB0 Digital Input 2 Type 0 1 1 - F116 0
2AB1 Reserved
2AB2 Digital Input 2 Alarm 0 2 1 - F115 0
2AB3 Digital Input 2 Alarm Relays 0 6 1 - F113 0
2AB4 Digital Input 2 Alarm Delay 1 50000 1 100ms F2 50
2AB5 Digital Input 2 Alarm Events 0 1 1 - F103 0
2AB6 Digital Input 2 Trip 0 2 1 - F115 0
2AB7 Digital Input 2 Trip Relays 0 6 1 - F111 0
2AB8 Digital Input 2 Trip Delay 1 50000 1 100ms F2 50 10
2AB9 Digital Input 2 Assignable Function 0 3 1 - F163 0


... Reserved
2AC0 1st & 2nd Character of Digital Input 5 Name 32 127 1 - F22 ’GE’
↓ ↓
2AC5 11th & 12th Character of Digital Input 5 Name 32 127 1 - F22 ’GE’
2AD0 Digital Input 5 Type 0 1 1 - F116 0
2AD1 Reserved
2AD2 Digital Input 5 Alarm 0 2 1 - F115 0
2AD3 Digital Input 5 Alarm Relays 0 6 1 - F113 0
2AD4 Digital Input 5 Alarm Delay 1 50000 1 100ms F2 50
2AD5 Digital Input 5 Alarm Events 0 1 1 - F103 0
2AD6 Digital Input 5 Trip 0 2 1 - F115 0
2AD7 Digital Input 5 Trip Relays 0 6 1 - F111 0
2AD8 Digital Input 5 Trip Delay 1 50000 1 100ms F2 50
2AD9 Digital Input 5 Assignable Function 0 3 1 - F163 0
... Reserved
2AE0 1st & 2nd Character of Digital Input 4 Name 32 127 1 - F22 ’GE’
↓ ↓
2AE5 11th & 12th Character of Digital Input 4 Name 32 127 1 - F22 ’GE’
2AF0 Digital Input 4 Type 0 1 1 - F116 0
2AF1 Reserved
2AF2 Digital Input 4 Alarm 0 2 1 - F115 0
2AF3 Digital Input 4 Alarm Relays 0 6 1 - F113 0
2AF4 Digital Input 4 Alarm Delay 1 50000 1 100ms F2 50
2AF5 Digital Input 4 Alarm Events 0 1 1 - F103 0
2AF6 Digital Input 4 Trip 0 2 1 - F115 0
2AF7 Digital Input 4 Trip Relays 0 6 1 - F111 0
2AF8 Digital Input 4 Trip Delay 1 50000 1 100ms F2 50
2AF9 Digital Input 4 Assignable Function 0 3 1 - F163 0
... Reserved
2B00 1st & 2nd Character of Digital Input 1 Name 32 127 1 - F22 ’GE’
↓ ↓
2B05 11th & 12th Character of Digital Input 1 Name 32 127 1 - F22 ’GE’
2B11 Reserved
... Reserved
↓ ↓
2B31 Reserved
10 2B37 Digital Input 6 Trip Relays 0 6 1 - F111 0


... Reserved
↓ ↓
2B51 Reserved
... Reserved
RRTD 1 – TEST OUPUT RELAYS
2B60 Force Trip Relay 0 2 1 - F150 0
2B61 Force Trip Relay Duration 0 300 1 s F1 0
2B62 Force AUX1 Relay 0 2 1 - F150 0
2B63 Force AUX1 Relay Duration 0 300 1 s F1 0
2B66 Force Alarm Relay 0 2 1 - F150 0
2B67 Force Alarm Relay Range 01 300 1 s F1 0
... Reserved
... Reserved
... Reserved
... Reserved
RRTD 1 – TEST ANALOG OUTPUTS 10
2BA0 Force Analog Outputs 0 1 1 - F126 0


2BA1 Analog Output 1 Forced Value 0 100 1 % range F1 0
... Reserved
RRTD 2 – TEST ANALOG OUTPUTS
2BB0 Force Analog Outputs 0 1 1 - F126 0
2BB1 Analog Output 1 Forced Value 0 100 1 % range F1 0
... Reserved
2BC0 Force Analog Outputs 0 1 1 - F126 0
2BC1 Analog Output 1 Forced Value 0 100 1 % range F1 0
... Reserved
2BD0 Force Analog Outputs 0 1 1 - F126 0
2BD1 Analog Output 1 Forced Value 0 100 1 % range F1 0
... Reserved
RRTD 1 – DIGITAL COUNTER
2BE0 First Character of Counter Name 32 127 1 - F1 “G”
2BEC First Character of Counter Unit Name 32 127 1 - F1 ‘U’
2BF2 Counter Type 0 1 1 - F114 0
2BF3 Digital Counter Alarm 0 2 1 - F115 0
2BF4 Assign Alarm Relays 0 6 1 - F113 0
2BF5 Counter Alarm Level 0 65535 1 - F1 100
2BF7 Reserved - - - - - -
2BF8 Record Alarms as Events 0 1 1 - F103 0
... Reserved
2C00 First Character of Counter Name 32 127 1 - F1 “G”
2C0C First Character of Counter Unit Name 32 127 1 - F1 ‘U’
2C12 Counter Type 0 1 1 - F114 0
2C13 Digital Counter Alarm 0 2 1 - F115 0
2C15 Counter Alarm Level 0 65535 1 - F1 100
2C17 Reserved - - - - - -
2C18 Record Alarms as Events 0 1 1 - F103 0
... Reserved
2C20 First Character of Counter Name 32 127 1 - F1 “G”
2C37 Reserved - - - - - -
... Reserved
10 2C40 First Character of Counter Name 32 127 1 - F1 “G”


2C57 Reserved - - - - - -
... Reserved
EVENT RECORDER / TRACE MEMORY (ADDRESSES 3000 TO 3FFF)
EVENT RECORDER
3000 Event Recorder Last Reset (2 words) N/A N/A N/A N/A F18 N/A
3002 Total Number of Events Since Last Clear 0 65535 1 N/A F1 0
3003 Event Record Selector (1=oldest, 40=newest) 1 40 1 N/A F1 1
3004 Cause of Event 0 40 1 - F134 0
3005 Time of Event (2 words) N/A N/A N/A N/A F19 N/A
3007 Date of Event (2 words) N/A N/A N/A N/A F18 N/A
3009 Reserved
300A Reserved
300B Event Phase A Current 0 65535 1 A F1 0
300C Event Phase B Current 0 65535 1 A F1 0
300D Event Phase C Current 0 65535 1 A F1 0
300E Event Motor Load 0 2000 1 FLA F3 0
300F Event Current Unbalance 0 100 1 % F1 0
3010 Event Ground Current 0 50000 1 A F23 0
3011 Reserved - - - - - -
3012 Event Hottest Stator RTD 0 12 1 - F1 0
oC
3013 Event Temperature of Hottest Stator RTD -40 200 1 F4 0
... Reserved
301A Event Voltage Vab 0 20000 1 V F1 0
301B Event Voltage Vbc 0 20000 1 V F1 0
301C Event Voltage Vca 0 20000 1 V F1 0
301D Event Voltage Van 0 20000 1 V F1 0
301E Event Voltage Vbn 0 20000 1 V F1 0
301F Event Voltage Vcn 0 20000 1 V F1 0
3020 Event System Frequency 0 12000 1 Hz F3 0
3021 Event Real Power -32000 32000 1 kW F4 0
3022 Event Reactive Power -32000 32000 1 kvar F4 0
3023 Event Apparent Power 0 50000 1 kVA F1 0
3024 Event Power Factor -99 100 1 - F21 0
... Reserved
WAVEFORM CAPTURE
30F0 Trace Memory Clear Date N/A N/A N/A N/A F18 N/A
30F2 Trace Memory Clear Time N/A N/A N/A N/A F19 N/A
30F4 Trace Memory Triggers Since Last Clear 0 65535 1 - F1 0
30F5 Trace Memory Buffer Selector 0 3 1 - F1 0
30F6 Trace Memory Channel Selector 0 6 1 - F1 0
30F7 Trace Memory Trigger Date N/A N/A N/A N/A F18 N/A
30F9 Trace Memory Trigger Time N/A N/A N/A N/A F19 N/A
30FB Trace Memory Trigger Cause 0 2 1 - F85 N/A
30FC Trace Memory Trigger Index 0 100 1 % F1 NA
... Reserved
3100 First Trace Memory Sample -32767 32767 1 - F4 N/A
↓ ↓
31FF Last Trace Memory Sample -32767 32767 1 - F4 N/A
3200 Reserved
... Reserved
3FFF Reserved
10

10.4.6 FORMAT CODES
Table 10–4: MEMORY MAP DATA FORMATS (Sheet 1 of 12)

CODE TYPE DEFINITION
F1 16 bits UNSIGNED VALUE
Example: 1234 stored as 1234
F2 16 bits UNSIGNED VALUE, 1 DECIMAL PLACE
Example: 123.4 stored as 1234
F3 16 bits UNSIGNED VALUE, 2 DECIMAL PLACES
Example: 12.34 stored as 1234
F4 16 bits 2’s COMPLEMENT SIGNED VALUE
Example: -1234 stored as -1234 (i.e. 64302)
F5 16 bits 2’s COMPLEMENT SIGNED VALUE, 1 DECIMAL PLACES
Example: -123.4 stored as -1234 (i.e. 64302)
F15 16 bits HARDWARE REVISION
0000 0000 0000 0001 1=A
0000 0000 0000 0010 2=B
↓ ↓
0000 0000 0001 1010 26 = Z
F16 16 bits SOFTWARE REVISION
1111 1111 xxxx xxxx Major Revision Number, 0 to 9 in steps of 1
xxxx xxxx 1111 1111 Minor Revision Number (two BCD digits), 00 to 99 in steps of 1
Example: Revision 2.30 stored as 0230 hex
F18 32 bits DATE (MM/DD/YYYY)
Example: Feb. 20, 1995 stored as 34867142 (i.e. 1st word: 0214, 2nd word 07C6)
1st byte Month (1 to 12)
2nd byte Day (1 to 31)
3rd and 4th byte Year (1998 to 2094)
F19 32 bits TIME (HH:MM:SS:hh)
Example: 2:05pm stored as 235208704 (i.e. 1st word: 0E05, 2nd word 0000)
1st byte Hours (0 to 23)
2nd byte Minutes (0 to 59)
3rd byte Seconds (0 to 59)
4th byte Hundreds of seconds (0 to 99) - Not used by 369
F20 16 bits 2’s COMPLEMENT SIGNED LONG VALUE
Example: 1234 stored as 1234. Note: -1 means “Never”
F21 16 bits 2’s COMPLEMENT SIGNED VALUE, 2 DECIMAL PLACES (Power Factor)
Example: Power Factor of 0.87 lag is used as 87 (i.e. 0057)
<0 Leading Power Factor - Negative
>0 Lagging Power Factor - Positive
F22 16 bits TWO 8-BIT CHARACTERS PACKED INTO 16-BIT UNSIGNED
Example: String "AB" stored as 4142 hex.
MSB First Character
LSB Second Character
F23 16 Bits UNSIGNED VALUE (For 1A/5 A CT, 1Decimal Place) (For 50: 0.025 A CT, 2 Decimal Places)
Example: For 1A/5A CT, G/F current = 1000.0 A
Example: For 50: 0.025 A CT, G/F current = 25.00
F26 16 Bits ANALOG OUTPUT SELECTION
0 0 - 1mA
1 0 - 20 mA
2 4 - 20 mA
10


F27 16 Bits BACKSPIN DETECTION STATE
0 Motor Running
1 No Backspin
2 Slowdown
3 Acceleration
4 ---
5 Backspinning
6 Prediction
7 Soon to Restart
F30 16 Bits DISABLE/ENABLE SELECTION
0 Disabled
1 Enabled
F31 16 Bits COMMAND FUNCTION CODES
0 Not in use
1 Reset 369
2 Motor Start
3 Motor Stop
4 Waveform Trigger
5 Reserved
6 Clear Trip Counters
7 Clear Last Trip Date
8 Reserved
9 Reserved
10 Clear RTD Maximums
11 Reset Motor Info
12 Clear/Reset all Data
F85 Unsigned 16 bit integer WAVEFORM CAPTURE TRIGGER CAUSE
0 None
1 Manual
2 Automatic
F100 Unsigned 16 bit integer TEMPERATURE DISPLAY UNITS
0 Celsius
1 Fahrenheit
F101 Unsigned 16 bit integer RS485 BAUD RATE
0 1200 baud
1 2400 baud
2 4800 baud
3 9600 baud
4 19200 baud
F102 Unsigned 16 bit integer RS485 PARITY
0 None
1 Odd
2 Even
F103 Unsigned 16 bit integer OFF/ON OR NO/YES SELECTION
0 Off / No
1 On / Yes
F104 Unsigned 16 bit integer GROUND CT TYPE
0 None
1 1 A Secondary
2 5 A Secondary
3 Multilin CT 50/0.025
10


F105 Unsigned 16 bit integer CT TYPE
0 None
1 1 A Secondary
2 5 A Secondary
F106 Unsigned 16 bit integer VOLTAGE TRANSFORMER CONNECTION TYPE
0 None
1 Open Delta
2 Wye
F107 Unsigned 16 bit integer NOMINAL FREQUENCY
0 60 Hz
1 50 Hz
2 Variable
F108 Unsigned 16 bit integer REDUCED VOLTAGE STARTING TRANSITION ON
0 Current Only
1 Current or Timer
2 Current and Timer
F109 Unsigned 16 bit integer STARTER STATUS SWITCH
0 Starter Aux a (52a)
1 Starter Aux b (52b)
F110 Unsigned 16 bit integer EMERGENCY RESTART SWITCH INPUT FUNCTION
0 Off
1 Emergency Switch
2 General Switch
3 Digital Counter
4 Waveform Capture
5 Simulate Pre - Fault
6 Simulate Fault
7 Simulate Pre - Fault to Fault
F111 Unsigned 16 bit integer TRIP RELAYS
0 none
1 Trip
2 Aux1
3 Aux2
4 Trip & Aux1
5 Trip & Aux2
6 Aux1 & Aux2
7 Trip & Aux1 & Aux2
F112 Unsigned 16 bit integer NOT DEFINED
0
1
F113 Unsigned 16 bit integer ALARM RELAYS
0 None
1 Alarm
2 Aux1
3 Aux2
4 Alarm & Aux1
5 Alarm & Aux2
6 Aux1 & Aux2
7 Alarm & Aux1 & Aux2
F114 Unsigned 16 bit integer COUNTER TYPE
0 Increment
10 1 Decrement


F115 Unsigned 16 bit integer ALARM/TRIP TYPE SELECTION
0 Off
1 Latched
2 Unlatched
F116 Unsigned 16 bit integer SWITCH TYPE
0 Normally Open
1 Normally Closed
F117 Unsigned 16 bit integer RESET MODE
0 All Resets
1 Remote Reset Only
2 Local Reset Only
F119 Unsigned 16 bit integer BACKUP RELAYS
0 None
1 Aux 1
2 Aux1 & Aux2
3 Aux2
F120 Unsigned 16 bit integer RTD TYPE
0 100 Ohm Platinum
1 120 Ohm Nickel
2 100 Ohm Nickel
3 10 Ohm Copper
F121 Unsigned 16 bit integer RTD APPLICATION
0 None
1 Stator
2 Bearing
3 Ambient
4 Other
F122 Unsigned 16 bit integer LOCAL/REMOTE RTD VOTING SELECTION
0 Off
1 RTD #1
2 RTD #2
3 RTD #3
4 RTD #4
5 RTD #5
6 RTD #6
7 RTD #7
8 RTD #8
9 RTD #9
10 RTD #10
11 RTD #11
12 RTD #12
13 All Stator
F123 Unsigned 16 bit integer ALARM STATUS
0 Off
1 Not Active
2 Timing Out
3 Active
4 Latched
F124 Unsigned 16 bit integer PHASE ROTATION AT MOTOR TERMINALS
0 ABC
1 ACB
F125 Unsigned 16 bit integer
0
STARTER TYPE
Breaker
10
1 Contactor


F127 Unsigned 16 bit integer ANALOG OUTPUT PARAMETER SELECTION
0 Phase A Current
1 Phase B Current
2 Phase C Current
3 Average Phase Current
4 AB Line Voltage
5 BC Line Voltage
6 CA Line Voltage
7 Average Line Voltage
8 Phase AN Voltage
9 Phase BN Voltage
10 Phase CN Voltage
11 Average Phase Voltage
12 Hottest Stator RTD
13 Local RTD #1
14 Local RTD #2
15 Local RTD #3
16 Local RTD #4
17 Local RTD #5
18 Local RTD #6
19 Local RTD #7
20 Local RTD #8
21 Local RTD #9
22 Local RTD #10
23 Local RTD #11
24 Local RTD #12
25 Power Factor
26 Reactive Power (kvar)
27 Real Power (kW)
28 Apparent Power (KVA)
29 Thermal Capacity Used
30 Relay Lockout Time
31 Current Demand
32 kvar Demand
33 kW Demand
34 kVA Demand
35 Motor Load
F128 Unsigned 16 bit integer CURVE STYLE
0 Standard
1 Custom
F130 Unsigned 16 bit integer DIGITAL INPUT PICKUP TYPE
0 Over
1 Under
F131 Unsigned 16 bit integer INPUT SWITCH STATUS
0 Open
1 Closed
F133 Unsigned 16 bit integer MOTOR STATUS
0 Stopped
1 Starting
2 Running
3 Overloaded
10 4 Tripped


F134 Unsigned 16 bit integer CAUSE OF EVENT
0 No Event
1 Forced Setpoints Dump
2 Speed Switch Trip
3 Diff Switch Trip
4 Access Switch Trip
5 Spare Switch Trip
6 Emergency Switch Trip
7 Unexpected Reset
8 Eeprom Memory
9 Reset Switch Trip
10 Factory Setpoints Dump
11 Overload Trip
12 Short Circuit Trip
13 Short Circuit Backup Trip
14 Mechanical Jam Trip
15 Undercurrent Trip
16 Current Unbalance Trip
17 Single Phasing Trip
18 Ground Fault Trip
19 Ground Fault Backup Trip
20 Overload Block
21 Acceleration Timer Trip
22 Start Inhibit Block
23 Starts Hour Block
24 Time Between Starts Block
25 Restart Block
26 Backspin Block
27 Single Shot Restart
28 Undervoltage Trip
29 Overvoltage Trip
30 Voltage Phase Reversal Trip
31 Underfrequency Trip
32 Overfrequency Trip
33 Lead Power Factor Trip
34 Lag Power Factor Trip
35 Positive Kvar Trip
36 Negative Kvar Trip
37 Underpower Trip
38 Reverse Power Trip
39 RTD1 Trip
40 RTD2 Trip
41 RTD3 Trip
42 RTD4 Trip
43 RTD5 Trip
44 RTD6 Trip
45 RTD7 Trip
46 RTD8 Trip
47 RTD9 Trip
48 RTD10 Trip
49 RTD11 Trip
50
51
RTD12 Trip
Trace Trigger Manual
10
52 Trace Trigger Automatic


F134 53 Spare Switch Alarm
con’t
54 Emergency Switch Alarm
55 Diff Switch Alarm
56 Speed Switch Alarm
57 Reset Switch Alarm
58 Access Switch Alarm
59 Thermal Capacity Alarm
60 Overload Alarm
61 Mechanical Jam Alarm
62 Undercurrent Alarm
63 Current Unbalance Alarm
64 Ground Fault Alarm
65 Undervoltage Alarm
66 Overvoltage Alarm
67 Overfrequency Alarm
68 Underfrequency Alarm
69 Lead Power Factor Alarm
70 Lag Power Factor Alarm
71 Positive Kvar Alarm
72 Negative Kvar Alarm
73 Underpower Alarm
74 Reverse Power Alarm
75 RTD1 Alarm
76 RTD2 Alarm
77 RTD3 Alarm
78 RTD4 Alarm
79 RTD5 Alarm
80 RTD6 Alarm
81 RTD7 Alarm
82 RTD8 Alarm
83 RTD9 Alarm
84 RTD10 Alarm
85 RTD11 Alarm
86 RTD12 Alarm
87 RTD1 Hi Alarm
88 RTD2 Hi Alarm
89 RTD3 Hi Alarm
90 RTD4 Hi Alarm
91 RTD5 Hi Alarm
92 RTD6 Hi Alarm
93 RTD7 Hi Alarm
94 RTD8 Hi Alarm
95 RTD9 Hi Alarm
96 RTD10 Hi Alarm
97 RTD11 Hi Alarm
98 RTD12 Hi Alarm
99 Open RTD Alarm
100 Lost RTD Comm Alarm
101 Low RTD Alarm
102 Trip Counter Alarm
103 Current Demand Alarm
10 104
105
Kw Demand Alarm
Kvar Demand Alarm
106 Kva Demand Alarm


F134 107 Digital Counter Alarm
con’t
108 Service Alarm
109 Control Power Lost
110 Control Power App
111 Emergency Restart Closed
112 Emergency Restart Open
113 Start While Blocked
114 Starter Fail Alarm
115 Breaker Failure
116 Welded Contactor
117 Incomplete Sequence Trip
118 Simulation Start
119 Simulation Stop
120 Waveform Capture
121 RRTD1 Trip
122 RRTD2 Trip
123 RRTD3 Trip
124 RRTD4 Trip
125 RRTD5 Trip
126 RRTD6 Trip
127 RRTD7 Trip
128 RRTD8 Trip
129 RRTD9 Trip
130 RRTD10 Trip
131 RRTD11 Trip
132 RRTD12 Trip
133 RRTD2 RTD1 Trip
134 RRTD2 RTD2 Trip
135 RRTD2 RTD3 Trip
136 RRTD2 RTD4 Trip
137 RRTD2 RTD5 Trip
138 RRTD2 RTD6 Trip
139 RRTD2 RTD7 Trip
140 RRTD2 RTD8 Trip
141 RRTD2 RTD9 Trip
142 RRTD2 RTD10 Trip
145 RRTD3 RTD1 Trip
146 RRTD3 RTD2 Trip
147 RRTD3 RTD3 Trip
148 RRTD3 RTD4 Trip
149 RRTD3 RTD5 Trip
150 RRTD3 RTD6 Trip
151 RRTD3 RTD7 Trip
152 RRTD3 RTD8 Trip
153 RRTD3 RTD9 Trip
157 RRTD4 RTD1 Trip
158
159
RRTD4 RTD2 Trip
RRTD4 RTD3 Trip
10
160 RRTD4 RTD4 Trip


F134 161 RRTD4 RTD5 Trip
con’t
162 RRTD4 RTD6 Trip
163 RRTD4 RTD7 Trip
164 RRTD4 RTD8 Trip
165 RRTD4 RTD9 Trip
169 RRTD1 Alarm
170 RRTD2 Alarm
171 RRTD3 Alarm
172 RRTD4 Alarm
173 RRTD5 Alarm
174 RRTD6 Alarm
175 RRTD7 Alarm
176 RRTD8 Alarm
177 RRTD9 Alarm
178 RRTD10 Alarm
179 RRTD11 Alarm
180 RRTD12 Alarm
181 RRTD1 Hi Alarm
182 RRTD2 Hi Alarm
183 RRTD3 Hi Alarm
184 RRTD4 Hi Alarm
185 RRTD5 Hi Alarm
186 RRTD6 Hi Alarm
187 RRTD7 Hi Alarm
188 RRTD8 Hi Alarm
189 RRTD9 Hi Alarm
190 RRTD10 Hi Alarm
191 RRTD11 Hi Alarm
192 RRTD12 Hi Alarm
193 RRTD1 Open RTD Alarm
194 RRTD1 Low RTD Alarm
195 RRTD2 RTD1 Alarm
207 RRTD2 RTD1 Hi Alarm
10 212
213
RRTD2 RTD6 Hi Alarm
RRTD2 RTD7 Hi Alarm


F134 215 RRTD2 RTD9 Hi Alarm
con’t
266
267
RRTD4 RTD8 Hi Alarm
RRTD4 RTD9 Hi Alarm
10


F134 269 RRTD4 RTD11 Hi Alarm
con’t
273 Power Failure
274 Software Reset
275 Clock Failure
276 A/D Failure
F135 Unsigned 16 bit integer MOTOR SPEED
0 Low Speed (Speed 1)
1 High Speed (Speed 2)
F138 Unsigned 16 bit integer SIMULATION
0 Off
1 Simulate Pre-Fault
2 Simulate Fault
3 Pre-Fault to Fault
F139 Reserved Reserved
F141 Unsigned 16 bit integer OUTPUT RELAY STATUS
bit 0 Trip
bit 1 Alarm
bit 2 Auxiliary 1
bit 3 Auxiliary 2
F149 Unsigned 16 Bit Integer CHANNEL 3 APPLICATION
0 MODBUS
1 Remote RTD
F150 Unsigned 16 Bit Integer OUTPUT RELAY STATUS
0 De - Energized
1 Energized
F151 Unsigned 16 Bit Integer CHANNEL TYPE
0 RS 485
1 Fiber Optic
F152 Unsigned 16 Bit Integer NUMBER OF RECORDS
0 1 × 64 cycles
1 2 × 32 cycles
2 4 × 16 cycles
3 8 × 8 cycles
F156 Unsigned 16 Bit Integer REMOTE RTD COMMUNICATION STATUS
0 Remote RTD Module Communication Lost
1 Remote RTD Communication on Line
F157 Unsigned 16 Bit Integer DIFFERENTIAL SWITCH INPUT FUNCTION
0 OFF
1 Differential Switch
2 General Switch
3 Digital Counter
4 Waveform Capture
6 Simulate Fault
7 Simulate Pre-Fault to Fault
10


F158 Unsigned 16 Bit Integer SPEED SWITCH INPUT FUNCTION
0 OFF
1 Speed Switch
2 General Switch
3 Digital Counter
4 Waveform Capture
6 Simulate Fault
F159 Unsigned 16 Bit Integer SPARE SWITCH INPUT FUNCTION
0 OFF
1 Starter Status Switch
2 General Switch
3 Digital Counter
4 Waveform Capture
6 Simulate Fault
F160 Unsigned 16 Bit Integer RESET SWITCH INPUT FUNCTION
0 OFF
1 Reset Switch
2 General Switch
3 Digital Counter
4 Waveform Capture
6 Simulate Fault
F161 Unsigned 16 Bit Integer OUTPUT RELAY FAILSAFE CODE
0 Failsafe
1 Non Failsafe
F162 Unsigned 16 Bit Integer ACCESS LEVEL
0 Read Only
1 Read / Write
2 Factory Service
F163 Unsigned 16 Bit Integer RRTD DIGITAL INPUT FUNCTION
0 Off
1 undefined
2 General Switch
3 Digital Counter
F164 Unsigned 16 Bit Integer COMMUNICATIONS MODULE STATUS
0x0001 Ethernet Connection OK
0x0002 IP Configuration OK
0x0004 IP Address Error
0x0008 Communications Module Error
0x0010 Network Activity Present
10

10

APPENDIX A A.1 CHANGE NOTES
APPENDIX A REVISIONSA.1 CHANGE NOTES A.1.1 REVISION HISTORY
A
Table A–1: REVISION HISTORY
MANUAL P/N 369 REVISION RELEASE DATE ECO
1601-0077-B1 53CMB105.000 07 May 1999 ---
1601-0077-B2 53CMB110.000 08 June 1999 369-082
1601-0077-B3 53CMB110.000 15 June 1999 369-085
1601-0077-B4 53CMB110.000 04 August 1999 369-094
1601-0077-B5 53CMB120.000 15 October 1999 369-116
1601-0077-B6 53CMB130.000 03 January 2000 369-123
1601-0077-B7 53CMB142.000 03 April 2000 369-130
1601-0777-B8 53CMB145.000 14 June 2000 369-146
1601-0777-B9 53CMB160.000 12 October 2000 369-158
1601-0777-BA 53CMB161.000 19 October 2000 369-161
1601-0077-BB 53CMB17x.000 09 February 2001 369-170
1601-0077-BC 53CMB18x.000 15 June 2001 369-176
A.1.2 MAJOR UPDATES FOR 369-BC
CHANGES
Updated ORDERING TABLE to reflect Modbus/TCP option
Updated Figure 1–1: FRONT AND REAR VIEW to 840702BF
Updated Figure 3–4: TYPICAL WIRING
Added new Modbus/TCP setpoints and description in Section 5.2.4: COMMUNICATIONS
Updated Figures 5–3 and 5–4, REDUCED VOLTAGE STARTER AUXILIARY INPUTS
Updated Section 7.2.4: CT SELECTION to fix errors in the application example
Updated Figure 8–1: SECONDARY INJECTION TEST SETUP
Updated Table 9–1: SETPOINTS TABLE to include new Modbus/TCP setpoints
Updated MEMORY MAP and MEMORY MAP FORMATS to include new Modbus/TCP setpoints
A.1.3 MAJOR UPDATES FOR 369-BB
CHANGES
Updated Figure 1–1: FRONT AND REAR VIEW
Corrected errors in Table 3–1: TERMINAL LIST
Updated Figure 3–4: TYPICAL WIRING
Removed SINGLE VT WYE/DELTA connection diagram in Chapter 3 (feature no longer supported)
Removed ENABLE SINGLE VT OPERATION setpoint from Section 5.3.2: CT/VT SETUP (feature no longer supported)
Added new Section 5.3.7: AUTORESTART
A.1.4 MAJOR UPDATES FOR 369-BA
There were no changes to the content of the manual for this release.
GE Power Management 369 Motor Management Relay A-1

A.1 CHANGE NOTES APPENDIX A
A.1.5 MAJOR UPDATES FOR 369-B9
A
CHANGES
Updated Figure 3-4: TYPICAL WIRING
Updated Figure 3-15: REMOTE RTD MODULE
Added menu item PROFIBUS ADDRESS to the 369 Setup Communications menu
Added menu item CLEAR ENERGY DATA to the 369 Setup Clear/Preset Data menu
Added Section 10.2: PROFIBUS PROTOCOL to Communications chapter
Firmware version 53CMB145.000 contains only minor software changes that do not affect the functional-
ity of the 369 or the 1601-0777-B8 manual contents.
NOTE
CHANGES
Revision change to match firmware and PC program
Added/changed setpoints of Backspin start inhibit
Updated memory map for the changes listed above
Changed FC to F for each of the format codes
Updated Phase 2 feature release document
Removed 32 bit format codes from the memory map
Added 369PC instruction section describing the converting of 269 setpoint files to 369
Added note in uploading setpoint section that versions 1.10 and 1.12 are not compatible with newer versions
Added a separate section for Backspin Metering
Made corrections to the application notes section
Added refresh RRTD setpoints to the PC program
Added some self-testing algorithms and programmable self-test relay assignment
A-2 369 Motor Management Relay GE Power Management

APPENDIX A A.2 WARRANTY
A.2 WARRANTY A.2.1 WARRANTY INFORMATION
A
GE POWER MANAGEMENT RELAY WARRANTY
General Electric Power Management (GE Power Management) warrants
each relay it manufactures to be free from defects in material and work-
manship under normal use and service for a period of 24 months from
date of shipment from factory.
In the event of a failure covered by warranty, GE Power Management will

undertake to repair or replace the relay providing the warrantor deter-
mined that it is defective and it is returned with all transportation charges
prepaid to an authorized service centre or the factory. Repairs or replace-
ment under warranty will be made without charge.
Warranty shall not apply to any relay which has been subject to misuse,
negligence, accident, incorrect installation or use not in accordance with
instructions nor any unit that has been altered outside a GE Power Man-
agement authorized factory outlet.
GE Power Management is not liable for special, indirect or consequential

damages or for loss of profit or for expenses sustained as a result of a
relay malfunction, incorrect application or adjustment.
For complete text of Warranty (including limitations and disclaimers), refer

to GE Power Management Standard Conditions of Sale.
GE Power Management 369 Motor Management Relay A-3

A.2 WARRANTY APPENDIX A
A-4 369 Motor Management Relay GE Power Management

INDEX
INDEX
control ......................................................................5-17
Numerics Modbus/TCP .............................................................. 5-6
setpoints .................................................................... 5-6
2 PHASE CT CONFIGURATION .................................... 7-20 CONFIGURATION ......................................................... 4-4
269-369 CONVERSION TERMINAL LIST .......................... 3-3 CONTRAST .................................................................. 5-5
369 CONTROL
pc interface ................................................................ 4-3 functions ...................................................................5-17
5A power ................................................................ 3-7, 3-12
ground CT installation ................................................ 3-17 COOL TIME CONSTANTS .............................................7-14
input .......................................................................... 8-3 CORE BALANCE CONNECTION ..................................... 7-3
86 LOCKOUT SWITCH ................................................... 7-6 CRC-16 ALGORITHM ...................................................10-9
CREATING A NEW SETPOINT FILE ................................ 4-5
CT
A burden ....................................................................... 7-8
circuit ........................................................................ 7-8
A1 STATUS .................................................................. 6-3
ground CT primary .....................................................5-11
A2 METERING DATA ..................................................... 6-7
phase CT primary .......................................................5-11
A3 LEARNED DATA ..................................................... 6-13
secondary resistance ................................................... 7-8
A4 STATISTICAL DATA ............................................... 6-16
selection .................................................................... 7-7
A5 EVENT RECORD .................................................... 6-18
setpoints ...................................................................5-11
A6 RELAY INFORMATION ............................................ 6-19
size andsaturation ....................................................... 7-7
ACCELERATION TRIP ......................................... 5-38, 7-12
withstand ................................................................... 7-7
ACCESS SECURITY ...................................................... 5-4
CT AND VT
ACCESSORIES ............................................................. 1-2
polarity ...................................................................... 7-5
ACTUAL VALUES .......................................................... 6-1
CT/VT SETUP ..............................................................5-11
main menu ................................................................. 6-1
CURRENT
overview .................................................................... 6-1
metering .................................................................... 6-7
page 1 menu .............................................................. 6-3
unbalance .................................................................5-35
page 2 menu .............................................................. 6-7
CURRENT DEMAND ............................................ 5-13, 5-15
page 3 menu ............................................................ 6-13
CURRENT TRANSFORMER
page 4 menu ............................................................ 6-16
see CT
page 5 menu ............................................................ 6-18
CUSTOM OVERLOAD CURVE .......................................5-27
page 6 menu ............................................................ 6-19
ADDITIONAL FEATURES ............................................... 2-3
ADDITIONAL FUNCTIONAL TING ................................... 8-7
D
ALARM RELAY
setpoints .................................................................. 5-16 DATA
ALARM STATUS ........................................................... 6-4 frame format and data rate ..........................................10-8
AMBIENT TEMPERATURE ............................................. 2-8 packet format ............................................................10-8
ANALOG DATE ........................................................................... 5-8
inputs and outputs ....................................................... 8-5 DEFAULT MESSAGES
outputs ................................................... 3-10, 3-11, 5-59 cycle time .................................................................. 5-5
outputs (Option M) ...................................................... 2-5 setpoints ...................................................................5-10
APPROVALS / CERTIFICATION ...................................... 2-8 timeout ...................................................................... 5-5
AUTO TRANSFORMER STARTER WIRING .................... 7-24 DEMAND
AUTORESTART .................................................. 5-19, 5-20 calculation ................................................................5-13
AUX 1 RELAY metering ...................................................................6-11
see AUXILIARY RELAYS setpoints .......................................................... 5-13, 5-15
AUX 2 RELAY DIELECTRIC STRENGTH ............................................... 2-8
see AUXILIARY RELAYS DIFFERENTIAL SWITCH ...............................................5-56
AUXILIARY RELAYS DIGITAL COUNTER ......................................................5-57
setpoints .................................................................. 5-16 DIGITAL INPUT ............................................................ 7-6
status ........................................................................ 6-5
trip coil supervision ..................................................... 8-5
B DIGITAL INPUT FUNCTION
digital counter ............................................................5-57
BACK PORTS (3) .......................................................... 2-5
general switch ...........................................................5-57
BACKSPIN
simulate fault .............................................................5-58
detection .................................................................. 5-40
simulate pre-fault .......................................................5-58
voltage inputs ............................................................. 3-9
simulate pre-fault to fault ............................................5-58
BEARING RTDS .......................................................... 7-12
waveform capture .......................................................5-58
BSD INPUTS (OPTION B) .............................................. 2-5
DISPLAY ...................................................................... 4-1
preferences ................................................................ 5-5
C DO’S AND DON’TS ........................................................ 7-5
DOWNLOAD
CLEAR/PRESET DATA ................................................ 5-10 setpoint file to 369 ...................................................... 4-6
COMMUNICATIONS ..............................................2-5, 10-1 DUST/MOISTURE ......................................................... 2-8
GE Power Management 369 Motor Management Relay i

INDEX
E I
EDITING A SETPOINT FILE ........................................... 4-6 IMPULSE TEST .............................................................2-8
ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION ......................................... 3-6 INITIAL START CAPACITY ............................................ 7-19
ELECTRICAL INTERFACE ............................................10-1 INPUTS ........................................................................2-4
EMERGENCY RESTART ...............................................5-55 INSTALLATION ..............................................................3-1
EMI ............................................................................. 2-8 electrical .....................................................................3-6
ENABLE mechanical ..................................................................3-1
start inhibit ................................................................7-12 upgrade ......................................................................4-3
ENVIRONMENATAL SPECIFICATIONS ............................ 2-7 INSULATION RESISTANCE ............................................2-8
ENVIRONMENT ............................................................ 2-8 INTRODUCTION AND ORDERING ...................................1-1
ERROR IP ADDRESS .................................................................5-6
checking ...................................................................10-8
responses ............................................................... 10-10
EVENT RECORDER ................................................... 10-11 K
EVENT RECORDING ....................................................4-12
KEYPAD .......................................................................4-2
F L
FACEPLATE
LAG POWER FACTOR .................................................. 5-51
interface .................................................................... 4-1
LAST TRIP DATA ...........................................................6-4
FACTORY DATA ..........................................................5-10
LEAD POWER FACTOR ................................................ 5-51
FAQ ............................................................................ 7-2
LEARNED START CAPACITY ........................................ 7-19
FAST TRANSIENTS ...................................................... 2-8
LOCAL / REMOTE RTD OPERATION ............................. 5-43
FAULT SETUP .............................................................5-63
LOCAL RTD ..................................................................6-9
FIBER OPTIC PORT (OPTION F) .................................... 2-5
maximums ................................................................ 6-14
FIRMWARE
protection ................................................................. 5-41
history ....................................................................... 1-2
version .....................................................................6-19
FLA ............................................................................5-11 M
FLASH MESSAGES
duration ..................................................................... 5-5 MAJOR UPDATES ......................................................... A-2
FREQUENCY ...............................................................5-12 MECHANICAL INSTALLATION .........................................3-1
FREQUENTLY ASKED QUESTIONS ................................ 7-2 MECHANICAL JAM ............................................. 5-33, 7-11
FRONT PORT ............................................................... 2-5 MEMORY MAP .......................................................... 10-11
communicating ........................................................... 7-2 information .............................................................. 10-11
FULL LOAD AMPS .......................................................5-11 MESSAGE SCRATCHPAD ..............................................5-9
METERED QUANTITIES .................................................2-1
METERING ...................................................................2-5
G MODBUS
serial communications control ...................................... 5-17
GATEWAY ADDRESS .................................................... 5-7
setpoints .............................................................. 5-6, 5-7
GENERAL SWITCH ......................................................5-57
MODBUS COMMUNICATIONS ....................................... 10-1
GROUND
MODBUS/TCP COMMUNICATIONS ..................................5-6
(1A/5A) ACCURACY TEST ........................................... 8-3
MODEL INFORMATION ................................................ 6-19
accuracy test .............................................................. 8-3
MONITORING SETUP .................................................. 5-12
bus ........................................................................... 7-5
MOTOR
CT .................................................................. 5-12, 7-10
cooling ..................................................................... 5-29
current input ............................................................... 3-8
data ......................................................................... 6-13
fault ................................................................ 5-36, 7-12
FLA .......................................................................... 5-11
fault detection
FLC .......................................................................... 7-10
ungrounded systems ........................................7-21
rated voltage ............................................................. 5-11
filter .......................................................................... 7-5
statistics ................................................................... 6-17
safety ........................................................................ 7-5
status .................................................................. 6-3, 6-5
GUIDEFORM SPECIFICATIONS ..................................... 2-1
status detection ......................................................... 7-13
thermal limits ...............................................................7-9
MOTOR FLA ................................................................ 5-11
H
MPM-369
HARDWARE FUNCTIONAL TESTING .............................. 8-2 conversion terminal list .................................................3-4
HGF GROUND CT INSTALLATION MTM-369
3” and 5” window .......................................................3-18 conversion terminal list .................................................3-4
8” window .................................................................3-18
HOT/COLD CURVE RATIO ................................... 5-29, 7-10
HOT/COLD SAFE STALL RATIO ....................................5-22 N
HUMIDITY .................................................................... 2-8
NEGATIVE REACTIVE POWER ..................................... 5-53
NOMINAL FREQUENCY ............................................... 5-12
ii 369 Motor Management Relay GE Power Management

INDEX
REDUCED VOLTAGE START ............................... 5-17, 5-18

O RELAY LABEL DEFINITION ............................................ 1-4
REMOTE RESET ..........................................................5-56
OPEN RTD ALARM ..................................................... 5-44 REMOTE RTD .............................................................6-10
OPERATION ............................................................... 5-16 maximums .................................................................6-15
ORDERING .................................................................. 1-1 module electrical installation ........................................3-15
OUTPUT RELAYS .......................................... 2-5, 3-12, 8-6 module mechanical installation ....................................3-14
setpoints .................................................................. 5-16 protection ..................................................................5-42
OUTPUTS .................................................................... 2-5 RESET ........................................................................5-16
OVERFREQUENCY ..................................................... 5-49 RESIDUAL GROUND FAULT CONNECTION ..................... 7-3
OVERLOAD REVERSE POWER .......................................................5-54
alarm ....................................................................... 5-31 REVISION HISTORY ..................................................... A-1
curve ....................................................................... 7-11 RFI .............................................................................. 2-8
curve test ................................................................... 8-7 ROLLING DEMAND WINDOW ........................................5-13
pickup ..................................................................... 7-10 RS232
OVERLOAD CURVES communicating ........................................................... 7-2
custom ..................................................................... 5-27 program port .............................................................. 4-1
setpoints .......................................................... 5-23, 5-24 setpoints .................................................................... 5-6
standard ................................................. 5-24, 5-25, 5-26 RS485
OVERLOAD/STALL/THERMAL MODEL ............................ 2-5 4 wire ........................................................................ 7-2
OVERVOLTAGE .......................................................... 5-47 cable ......................................................................... 7-6
communication difficulties ............................................ 7-2
communications .........................................................3-13
P communications port ................................................... 7-5
converter ................................................................... 7-5
PARITY ........................................................................ 5-6
distances ................................................................... 7-5
PASSWORDS
full duplex .................................................................. 7-2
comm password .......................................................... 5-4
interfacing master device ............................................. 7-6
PC PROGRAM
repeater ..................................................................... 7-6
software history .......................................................... 1-2
setpoints .................................................................... 5-6
PC SOFTWARE
RTD ..................................................................... 3-10, 7-5
obtaining .................................................................... 7-2
2 wire lead compensation ............................................7-24
PHASE
accuracy test .............................................................. 8-4
CT ................................................................... 5-11, 7-10
bias ........................................................ 5-22, 5-30, 5-31
CT installation .......................................................... 3-16
bias maximum ...........................................................7-11
current (CT) inputs ...................................................... 3-7
bias mid point ............................................................7-11
current accuracy test ................................................... 8-2
bias minimum ............................................................7-11
line voltage input(VT) (Option M) ................................... 2-4
circuitry ....................................................................7-22
reversal ................................................................... 5-48
grounding ................................................................... 7-6
voltage (VT/PT) inputs ................................................. 3-9
inputs .......................................................................3-10
VT ........................................................................... 5-12
inputs (Option r) .......................................................... 2-4
PHASE SEQUENCY .................................................... 5-12
stator ........................................................................7-12
PHASORS .......................................................... 4-11, 6-11
RUNNING COOL TIME ..................................................7-10
POLARITY
CT and VT .................................................................. 7-5
POSITIVE REACTIVE POWER ...................................... 5-52
S
POWER
measurement test ....................................................... 8-7 S10 ANALOG OUTPUTS ...............................................5-59
metering .................................................................... 6-8 S11 369 TESTING ........................................................5-61
metering (option m) ..................................................... 2-5 S2 SYSTEM SETUP .....................................................5-11
POWER DEMAND ............................................... 5-13, 5-15 S3 OVERLOAD PROTECTION .......................................5-21
PRE-FAULT SETUP ..................................................... 5-62 S4 CURRENT ELEMENTS .............................................5-32
PRINTING .................................................................... 4-8 S5 MOTOR START / INHIBITS .......................................5-38
PRODUCT DESCRIPTION .............................................. 2-1 S6 RTD TEMPERATURE ...............................................5-41
PRODUCTION TESTS ................................................... 2-8 S7 VOLTAGE ELEMENTS .............................................5-46
PROFIBUS S8 POWER ELEMENTS ................................................5-50
setpoints .................................................................... 5-7 S9 DIGITAL INPUTS .....................................................5-55
PROFIBUS COMMUNICATIONS .................................... 10-2 SECONDARY INJECTION TEST SETUP .......................... 8-1
PROFIBUS PORT (OPTION P) ........................................ 2-5 SECURITY ................................................................... 5-4
PROGRAMMING EXAMPLE ............................................ 7-9 SELF-TEST MODE .......................................................5-15
PROTECTION ELEMENTS ............................................. 2-5 SELF-TEST RELAY ......................................................5-15
PROTOCOL ................................................................ 10-8 SERIAL COMMUNICATION CONTROL ...........................5-17
SETPOINTS ................................................................. 5-1
access ....................................................................... 5-4
R entry ......................................................................... 4-2
main menu ................................................................. 5-1
REAL TIME CLOCK ....................................................... 6-6
page 1 menu .............................................................. 5-4
setpoints .................................................................... 5-8
page 10 menu ............................................................5-59
REDUCED RTD LEAD NUMBER ................................... 7-23
GE Power Management 369 Motor Management Relay iii

INDEX
page 11 menu ...........................................................5-61 capacity calculation .................................................... 7-17

page 2 menu .............................................................5-11 capacity used ............................................................ 7-17
page 3 menu .............................................................5-21 limit .......................................................................... 7-14
page 4 menu .............................................................5-32 limit curves ............................................................... 7-18
page 5 menu .............................................................5-38 THERMAL CAPACITY USED ......................................... 5-22
page 6 menu .............................................................5-41 THERMAL MODEL
page 7 menu .............................................................5-46 cooling ..................................................................... 5-30
page 8 menu .............................................................5-50 description ................................................................ 5-22
page 9 menu .............................................................5-55 limit curves ............................................................... 5-21
SHORT CIRCUIT ..........................................................5-32 setpoints ................................................................... 5-22
test ........................................................................... 8-8 TIME ............................................................................5-8
trip ...........................................................................7-11 TIME BETWEEN STARTS ............................................. 7-12
SHORT/LOW TEMP RTD ALARM ...................................5-45 TIMING ....................................................................... 10-9
SIMULATE FAULT ........................................................5-58 TRENDING ....................................................................4-9
SIMULATE PRE-FAULT ................................................5-58 TRIP COUNTER .................................5-12, 5-13, 5-15, 6-16
SIMULATE PRE-FAULT TO FAULT ................................5-58 TRIP RELAY ................................................................ 3-12
SIMULATION MODE .....................................................5-61 setpoints ................................................................... 5-16
SPARE SWITCH ..........................................................5-55 TROUBLESHOOTING ................................................... 4-12
SPEED SWITCH ..........................................................5-56 TWO PHASE WIRING ................................................... 7-20
START INHIBIT .......................................... 5-39, 7-14, 7-18 TWO WIRE RTD LEAD COMPENSATION ........................ 7-24
enabled ....................................................................7-19 TYPE TEST STANDARDS ...............................................2-8
starter
status switch .............................................................5-18
STARTER FAILURE ............................................ 5-13, 5-15 U
STARTS/HOUR ............................................................7-12
UNBALANCE
STATOR RTDS ............................................................7-12
alarm and trip ............................................................ 7-12
STOPPED COOL TIME .................................................7-11
bias .......................................................................... 5-28
STOPPED COOL TIME CONSTANT ...............................7-14
bias k factor .............................................................. 7-10
SUBNET MASK ............................................................. 5-6
bias of thermal capacity .............................................. 7-10
SUPPORTED MODBUS FUNCTIONS .............................10-9
setpoints ................................................................... 5-22
SYSTEM .....................................................................5-12
test ............................................................................8-8
SYSTEM FREQUENCY .................................................5-12
UNDERCURRENT ............................................... 5-34, 7-11
UNDERFREQUENCY .................................................... 5-48
T UNDERPOWER ........................................................... 5-53
UNDERVOLTAGE ........................................................ 5-46
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS ....................................... 2-4 UPGRADING
TEMPERATURE ............................................................ 2-8 relay firmware .............................................................4-4
TEMPERATURE DISPLAY .............................................. 5-5 setpoint file to new revision ...........................................4-7
TERMINAL USER DEFINABLE MEMORY MAP AREA ...................... 10-11
identification ............................................................... 3-2
layout ........................................................................ 3-5
list ............................................................................ 3-2 V
TEST
VIBRATION ...................................................................2-8
burn in ....................................................................... 2-8
VOLTAGE
calibration and functionality .......................................... 2-8
input accuracy test .......................................................8-2
dielectric strength ....................................................... 2-8
metering .....................................................................6-8
ground accuracy ......................................................... 8-3
phase reversal test .......................................................8-8
hardware functional ..................................................... 8-2
VOLTAGE TRANSFORMER
input accuracy ............................................................ 8-2
see VT
overload curve ............................................................ 8-7
VT
phase current accuracy ................................................ 8-2
connection type ......................................................... 5-12
power measurement .................................................... 8-7
ratio ......................................................................... 5-12
production .................................................................. 2-8
VT RATIO .......................................................... 5-11, 5-12
RTD accuracy ............................................................. 8-4
VT SETTINGS ............................................................. 7-10
secondary injection ..................................................... 8-1
setup ......................................................................... 8-1
short circuit ................................................................ 8-8 W
type test standards ...................................................... 2-8
unbalance .................................................................. 8-8 WARRANTY ................................................................. A-3
voltage WAVEFORM CAPTURE ............... 2-5, 4-10, 5-8, 5-58, 10-11
metering ......................................................... 6-8 setpoints .....................................................................5-8
phase reversal ................................................. 8-8 WIRING DIAGRAM .........................................................3-6
TESTING
analog outputs ...........................................................5-65
output relays .............................................................5-65 Z
setpoints ...................................................................5-61 ZERO SEQUENCE
THERMAL ground CT placement ...................................................3-8
iv 369 Motor Management Relay GE Power Management

Instruction Manual 369man

Transféré par

Informations du document

Copyright

Formats disponibles

Partager ce document

Partager ou intégrer le document

Options de partage

Avez-vous trouvé ce document utile ?

Ce contenu est-il inapproprié ?

Droits d'auteur :

Formats disponibles

Instruction Manual 369man

Transféré par

Droits d'auteur :

Formats disponibles

g

369 Motor Management Relay

369 Revision: 53CMB18x.000

1. INTRODUCTION 1.1 ORDERING

2. PRODUCT DESCRIPTION 2.1 OVERVIEW

3. INSTALLATION 3.1 MECHANICAL INSTALLATION

GE Power Management 369 Motor Management Relay i

4. USER INTERFACES 4.1 FACEPLATE INTERFACE

5. SETPOINTS 5.1 OVERVIEW

ii 369 Motor Management Relay GE Power Management

5.5 S4 CURRENT ELEMENTS

GE Power Management 369 Motor Management Relay iii

6. ACTUAL VALUES 6.1 OVERVIEW

7. APPLICATIONS 7.1 269-369 COMPARISON

iv 369 Motor Management Relay GE Power Management

7.6.4 RTD BIAS FEATURE ....................................................................................... 7-16

8. TESTING 8.1 TEST SETUP

9. COMMISSIONING 9.1 COMMISSIONING SETPOINTS

10. COMMUNICATIONS 10.1 OVERVIEW

GE Power Management 369 Motor Management Relay v

A. REVISIONS A.1 CHANGE NOTES

vi 369 Motor Management Relay GE Power Management

1 INTRODUCTION 1.1 ORDERING 1.1.1 GENERAL OVERVIEW

GE Power Management 369 Motor Management Relay 1-1

1.1.4 FIRMWARE HISTORY

FIRMWARE REVISION BRIEF DESCRIPTION OF CHANGE RELEASE DATE

1.1.5 PC PROGRAM (SOFTWARE) HISTORY

PC PROGRAM BRIEF DESCRIPTION OF CHANGES RELEASE DATE

1-2 369 Motor Management Relay GE Power Management

1.1.6 369 FUNCTIONAL SUMMARY

STATUS INDICATORS STATUS INDICATORS

Rugged, corrosion and

4 OUTPUT RELAYS CONTROL POWER

1 ANALOG OUTPUT ( Base Unit )

FIBER OPTIC DATA LINK ( F )

GE Power Management 369 Motor Management Relay 1-3

1.1.7 RELAY LABEL DEFINITION

MODEL: 369-HI-R-B-F-P OPTIONS

1. The 369 order code at the time of leaving the factory.

1-4 369 Motor Management Relay GE Power Management

2 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION 2.1 OVERVIEW 2.1.1 GUIDEFORM SPECIFICATIONS

2.1.2 METERED QUANTITIES

METERED QUANTITY UNITS OPTION

GE Power Management 369 Motor Management Relay 2-1

2.1.3 PROTECTION FEATURES

ANSI/IEEE PROTECTION FEATURES OPTION TRIP ALARM BLOCK

2-2 369 Motor Management Relay GE Power Management

2.1.4 ADDITIONAL FEATURES

FEATURE OPTION FEATURE OPTION

AMBIENT AIR START

GE Power Management 369 Motor Management Relay 2-3

2.2 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONSSpecifications are subject to change without notice.

CONTROL POWER GROUND CT BURDEN

2-4 369 Motor Management Relay GE Power Management

ANALOG OUTPUTS (Option M) OUTPUT RELAYS

POWER METERING (OPTION M) EVENT RECORD

FRONT PORT FIBER OPTIC PORT (Option F)

2.2.5 PROTECTION ELEMENTS

51 OVERLOAD/STALL/THERMAL MODEL THERMAL CAPACITY ALARM

GE Power Management 369 Motor Management Relay 2-5

OVERLOAD ALARM OPEN RTD ALARM

2-6 369 Motor Management Relay GE Power Management

55 LAG POWER FACTOR REVERSE POWER

2.2.6 MONITORING ELEMENTS